tittftVW 



^>;?fo 



' ' ;: ' : ! maAAA^^^^^— 



i t-1 J I. •■ ,: ' ■ ■■-•- 






AhhhPit\K 



A'iAA.A^ 



^LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 
I r~ — 

| UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 



: ,-.V.': ; '" ; :' : '." ; 






'^W^ 






Mmm&m 



w&^ 









*WWvM 



^aAaA'/! 






^^ 



AAA^y 



- 



'AaaAiCi^ 



aaAAAOT 









^AaAA^A^A^ 






■ 



MflflA' 



A A _ ; 



: > ": * 3 ' 



a A A a a A A 1 



>Aw^AA/yw^rWvyvvvy^ 



* '" ft » > - A A 



AAftflj 



aaaMVU. 






'M0< 



a'aaaWM^ 



.AAAAA! 



/* ~ aAaAA 



ft A -.. a A. '^A-W'A'**^ 



I-^^a;^^:::^ 



GRAMMAR 



FRENCH LANGUAGE, 

WITH 

V * 



BY N. WANOSTROCHT, LL.D. 



IsIXTH AMERICAN FROM THE FIFTEENTH XONDON EDITION. 
TO WHICH IS ADDED, 

A VERY COMPREHENSIVE TABLE OF CONTENTS, 

AND AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE 

IRREGULAR VERBS, 

WITH REFERENCE TO THE PLACES WHERE THEY ARE CONJUGATED. 

With considerable Additions and Improvements. 

AND A 

TREATISE ON FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 

BY M>DE WAILLY, 

Member of the National Institute of France, &c. &cv 



BOSTON: 
PUBLISHED BY RICHARDSON & LORD. 



PRINTED BY J. H. A. FROST. 
1821. 






ol 



\%> K 



DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, to wit : 

District Clerk's Ojfict. 

BE IT REMEMBERED, that on the thirtieth day of May, A. D. 
1817, and in the forty-first year of the Independence of the United 
States of America, West Sc Richardson, of the said District, have 
deposited in this Office the Title of a Book, the right whereof they 
claim as Proprietors, in the words following, to wit : 

A Grammar of the French Language, with Practical Exercises. By 
N. Wanostrocht, LL. D. Fourth American from the thirteenth Lon- 
don edition, with considerable Additions and Improvements. 

In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, en- 
titled, " An Act for the Encouragement of Learning, by securing the 
Copies of Maps, Charts and Books, to the Authors and Proprietors of 
such copies, during the times therein mentioned :" and also to an 
Act entitled, " An Act supplementary to an Act, entitled, 4 An Act 
for the encouragement of Learning, by securing the copies of Maps, 
Charts and Books, to the Authors and Proprietors of such copies 
during the times therein mentioned ; and extending the benefits 
thereof to the Arts of Designing, Engraving and Etching Historical; 
and other Prints. 1 " 

JOHN W. DAVIS, 
Clerk of the District of Massachusetts. 



ADVERTISEMENT. 

THE publishers of the previous Boston editions of 
this Grammar, now offer a new and improved edition of a 
work which has become generally known and esteemed. 

When it was first determined to reprint this judicious 
system of theoretically and practically teaching the 
French language, a perfect conviction was felt that it 
would meet the approbation of the wise and learned as 
soon as it was known ; and the rapid sale of five edi- 
tions in the United States within a few years has fully 
realized that expectation and given indubitable evidence 
of the intrinsic merit of this mode of instruction. 

In London this Grammar has passed through fifteen 
editions, and it has likewise been printed several times 
at Paris. 

Previous to the printing of every new edition the 
American publishers have always been careful to pro- 
cure the latest English copy, in order to profit by an} r 
improvement which may have been made in succeeding 
editions, and this attention has always proved advan- 
tageous. Besides this, they have been so fortunate as to 
have the sajne editor for all their editions, who, being 
an experienced instructer of languages, has given this 
grammar a decided preference ever since its first ap- 
pearance, and contributed, by his own observations in 
the course of tuition, to remove every obscurity, supply 
ail defects, and render it as easy and perfect as possible. 

This work is now introduced into some of the first 
literary institutions in the country, and particularly into 
the University at Cambridge, and St. Mary's College 
in Baltimore. 

Boston, November, 132K 



PREFACE. 



THAT " a great book is a great evil' 1 is generally a great truth-, 
for the discover}' of which we modems must hold ourselves indebted 
to the sages of antiquity. In the following sheets, I have endeavour- 
ed to improve upon the ancient maxim, and bring the two ends of the 
book as near together as I possibly could. On this frugal plan, the 
preface might have been spared, but custom must be complied with : 
some part of our time must be spent on superfluities ; and what is 
rendered venerable by age must not too hastily be rejected. To en- 
ter abruptly upon the main subject is generally considered as a breach 
of politeness. What is useful must sometimes give place to what is 
convenient, and what rigorous justice cannot defend, may yet enjoy 
the security of prescription. In compliance, therefore, with universal 
custom, with the general practice of the ancients, and, what is still 
more forcible, the urgent solicitation of the booksellers, I proceed to 
lay before the Reader the general Plan of the Work. 

The idea of the Practical Grammar was first suggested to the 
Author in the course of his private teaching. He found daily the in- 
convenience of referring from book to book, and determined to sup- 
ply the defect in the best manner he could. Whatever was neces- 
sary to furnish a tolerable acquaintance with the elements of the lan- 
guage, and point out the nature of its construction, he proposed to 
admit ; and reject every thing that was not essentially connected 
with his principal design. His first object was to comprise, in as lit- 
tle room as possible, every thing that was really useful in the gram- 
mar, the exercise-book, and the book of dialogues, To this plan he , 
has strictly adhered in the composition, and has brought the whole 
together in a much smaller compass than, at first, could reasonably 
have been expected. 

The several parts of speech are arranged in the usual order, and 
each part is discussed under a separate section. 

Each rule is followed by a familiar exercise, which the master may 
use in the place of a dialogue. 

The advantages resulting from the scholars learning and then re- 
peating their own translations by heart must, in the opinion of imparr 
t«ial and disinterested minds, materially tend to their improvement ; 



PREFACE. V 

by these means, the pupils, uniting practice to theory, not only be- 
come imperceptibly acquainted with the French phraseology, which 
in many instances differs so much from the English construction, but 
immediately know what is the English word that corresponds with 
the French, and vice versa, which cannot absolutely be done, in a 
dialogue where the French is ready made for them. Therefore, in 
order the more fully to answer the Author's intention, he has, instead 
of fine sentences, extracted from the most elegant writers, and often 
above the comprehension of young people, preferred, and made use, 
throughout all the exercises, of plain and easy sentences, which, at 
the same time they are within the reach of the young learners' facul- 
ties, will soon enable them to speak the Fresch language with pro- 
priety and elegance. What more can be expected from an elemen- 
tary book ? 

At the close of every section, a recapitulatory exercise is given 
upon all the preceding rules. 

When there is any difference in the order of arrangement, the 
French construction is pointed out by the small figures placed against 
the top of the words in the English sentence. 

Some of the most remarkable French idioms are noticed, and ex- 
emplified by various instances. Many others might have been ad- 
duced, perhaps, to very little profit. The idiomatical expressions 
are daily giving way to a regular syntactical form, and growing into 
disuse with the best masters. 

A few general rules for pronunciation only have been given. From 
all the attempts that have hitherto been made, it does not appear 
that any adequate idea of it can be conveyed in writing. The ear 
cannot be properly formed without the assistance of a good speaker. 

Throughout the whole composition, the Author's chief aim has been 
to unite ease and simplicity with accuracy and precision. That he 
has sometimes said too little where more was required, and some- 
times too much where less would have been sufficient, he does not. 
take upon himself to assert. That he has sometimes failed through 
negligence, and many times through ignorance, he has also great rea- 
son to fear. His daily avocations left him but little time for study, 
and his want o£ a better acquaintance with the English language 
may have subjected him to many inaccuracies in his style, and some 
times, perhaps, to palpable improprieties. 

The author cheerfully embraces this opportunity of making his 
most grateful acknowledgments to the Public, for the favourable re- 
ception given to the former editions of this Grammar, and, in general 
I* 



VI PREFACE* 

to all his othe? wprks : while he is perfectly sensible of the obli- 
gation, he is also sensible that much indulgence was required to 
justify the favours he has already received, either as a teacher or 
as an author. That generous indulgence he again solicits for their 
acceptance in this new edition, and begs to assure them, that, in 
every situation of life, it will be his constant care, as well as his 
highest ambition, to deserve the flattering encouragement he has 
met with in this country, and never forget the obligations already 
conferred. 

In this edition the errors in the former publications are carefully 
corrected, the several expressions which did not so well please in the 
course of practice, have been altered, and every improvement added, 
that could tend to facilitate the attainment of the French language. 
It having been suggested, by some gentlemen, to whose judgment the 
Author pays the greatest deference, that the irregular verbs, being 
arranged in alphabetical order, in the body of the book, would be a 
considerable improvement to the work, and facilitate the progress of 
the scholar, this is done in the present edition. The primitives of 
the irregular verbs are conjugated at length, and at the end of each 
are given their several compounds, with large exercises, both upon 
the primitives and compounds. 

Alfred,- House Academy, Campermjt,. 



CONTENTS. 



AN Alphabetical Arrangement of Irregular Verbs 
The Sounds of the French Tongue 
An Explanation of the Abbreviations 



xn 
11 
12 



SECT. I. 

Of Grammar, 13 

Of the French Alphabet . ib. 

Of Vowels — Diphthongs — Accents — Kinds of E . . .14 

Of Diaeresis— Cedilla— Apostrophe . . . . 15 

Alphabetical list of French words having their initial h mute . ib. 

Variations in the pronunciation of Consonants . . . 17 

Kinds of words ......... 18 

General Explanation of their use * . . v 19 



SECT. II. 



Of Nouns 

Of Articles . . . 

Declension of the Article Definite ...... 

Of Genders and Numbers 

General Rules for the formation of the Plural Number 

Of Exceptions 

Of the Declension of Nouns 

Declension of the Article Definite Ze, (the) before Nouns mas- 
culine beginning with a consonant or h aspirated 

Declension of the Article Definite La, (the) before nouns fem- 
inine beginning with a consonant or h aspirated . 

Declension of the Article Definite U (the) for both Genders, 
before nouns beginning with a Vowel, or an h not aspirated 

Recapitulation of the Article Definite .... 

Rules for the proper use of the Definite Article with Exercises 

Declension of the Article Partitive 

Rules and Exercises upon this Partitive 

Declension of the Article Indefinite 

Rules and Exercises on this Indefinite 

Declension of Un, m. Une, f. a or an 

Rules and Exercises on this Article 

Of Nouns Adjective 

Of the Gender and Number of Adjectives 

Declension of Nouns Adjective 

Rules and Exercises upon Adjectives 

The Place of an Adjective in a Sentence 

Of Adjectives which precede their Substantives . 

Of Adjectives which come after their Substantives 

Rules and Exercises upon these Adjectives . 



21 

22 
23 
24 
ib. 
27 

28 

ib. 



ib. 
30 
38 
39 
41 
ib. 
48 
ib. 
50 
ib. 
53 
ib. 
56 
ib. 
57 
£8 



VUi CONTENTS. 

Of the Degrees of Comparison 60 

Rules with Exercises upon the Degrees of Comparison . . 61 

Of Numbers 6? 

Rules and Exercises upon these Cardinal Numbers » . .68 

Of the Ordinal Numbers . . . . . ., 71 

Rules and Exercises upon the Ordinal Numbers . . .72 
Recapitulatory or Promiscuous Exercises upon all the Preceding 

Rules ..., 74 



SECT. III. 

Of Pronouns 81 

Of Pronouns Personal 82 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .... 83 
Observations on the Pronouns Je and Moi, Tu and Toi, II and 

Lui, Us and Eux 85 

Exercises upon the Preceding Observations .... 86 

Of Conjunctive Pronouns and their Declensions . .< .87 
Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .... 89 

Of Particles Relative or Supplying Pronouns en, y, and It . 92 

Rules and Exercises upon these Supplying Pronouns . . ib* 
Of Pronouns Possessive, and their Declensions . . .99 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .... 100 

Of Pronouns Demonslrative ....... 104 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .... 106 

Of Pronouns Relative . . . . . . » .110 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns . . . ; 111 
Of Pronouns Interrogative . . . * . . .116 
Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns ... ib. 

Of Pronouns Indefinite . . . . . . . 118 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns . . . . 120 

Recapitulatory or Promiscuous Exercises upon all the Pronouns 135 



SECT. IV. 

Of Verbs and their different Sorts . . . . . 142 

Conjugation of Verbs and Moods 144 

Tenses 147 

Tenses of the Indicative Mood 148 

Simple Tenses of the Indicative Mood .... ib. 

Compound Tenses of the Indicative Mood .... 153 
Tenses of the Subjunctive or Conjunctive Mood, and their 

Compounds . . 157 

Numbers and Persons 159 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Avoir, to have . . 161 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Etre, to be . . . 163 

Rmes and Exercises on the two preceding Auxiliary Verbs . 166 
Promiscuous Exercises upon the Compound Tenses of these 

Auxiliary Verbs 169 



CONTENTS. IX 

Rules and Examples for using these Verbs Interrogatively, &c. 170 

Promiscuous Exercises on Rules of Interrogation, &c. . . 172 

Remark on the Verb Eire, to be 174 

First Conjugation in er, as in Parl-er 175 

Important Observation upon the repetition of Verbs, &c. 

see N. B. . . 179 

Exercises on this Conjugation ...... 181 

Exercises on the Compound Tenses ..... 183 

Second Conjugation, in ir, as in Pun-ir ..... 184 

Exercises on this Conjugation . . . . . . 187 

Third Conjugation, in evoir, as in rec-evoir . ... • 190 

Exercises on this Conjugation ...... 193 

Fourth Conjugation, in re, as in Vend-re .... 197 

Exercises on this Conjugation ...... 200 

Recapitulatory Exercises on the Regular Verbs of the Four Con- 
jugations 203 

Promiscuous Exercises on the Compound Tenses, of the pre- 
ceding Conjugations ....... 206 

Conjugations of the Passive Verbs 208 

Of Neuter Verbs generally ...... ib. 

Of Reflective Verbs 214 

Model of Conjugations for the Reflected Verbs of the Four Con- 
jugations ......... 219 

Exercises on the Reflective Verbs 222 

Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation . 227 
Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation .... 230 
Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the First and Second Conju- 
gations 235 

Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation 238 

Exercise.: on the preceding Irregular Verbs . . . 243 

Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation 245 

Exercises on the preceding Irregular Verbs and their Compounds 251 

Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation .... 254 
Observation upon May, and Might, when used as a Verb or 

Auxiliary . 259 

Observation upon the words Will, and Would, when used as a 

Verb or an Auxiliary 265 

Exercises upon Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation . 266 
Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation .... 271 
Exercises upon the preceding Irregular Verbs, and their Com- 
pounds 281 

Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation 284 

Exercises on the preceding Irregular Verbs and their Compounds 296 

Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation 302 

Exercises or< the preceding Verbs, and their Compounds . 313 

Of the Impersonal Verbs 319 

Conjugation of the Impersonal Verbs . . . . , ib. 

Exercises on the Impersonal Verbs 321 

Upon the Impersonal Verb y avoir, there to be . . . 322 

Exercises on the preceding Verb 323 

Remarks on the general Pronoun On 324 

Exercises on the preceding Pronoun, &c. ..... ib. 



X CONTENTS. 

Remarks on the Impersonal Verb Fallow, to be needful, requi- 
site, necessary ........ 332 

Exercises on the preceding Impersonal Verb .... 334 

Additional Remarks on the general Pronoun On . . 337 

Exercises on the preceding Pronoun 338 

Recapitulatory Exercises on the Impersonal Verbs . . 339 



SECT. y. 

Of Participles 342 

Rules and Exercises on the Participles .... 342, 343 



SECT. VI. 

Of Indeclinable Parts of Speech ... . . 353 

Of Adverbs , . . . . ib. 

Table of Adverbs . . 354, 357, 359, 361, 363, 365, 368, 369 

Observation on the Adverb Ou 370 

Table of Adverbs continued . . . 373, 376, 378, 379, 382 



SECT. VII. 

Of Prepositions . . . . , . . . .383 

Prepositions governing the Genitive or Ablative Cases . 383, 384 
Exercises on these Prepositions ...... 385 

Prepositions governing the Dative Case ..... 387 

Exercises on these Prepositions ...... ib. 

Prepositions requiring the Accusative Case .... 383 

Exercises upon these Prepositions 389 

Observations on some Prepositions, and Exercises upon them, 

Above, 39-2; At, 393, 394 ; By, 395, 396, 39(7 ; For, 398; 

From, 399 ; In, 400, 401 ; On or Upon, 402 ; Over, 403 ; 

. 409 



SECT. VIII. 

Of Conjunctions 411 

Conjunctions requiring the Infinitive Mood, and Exercises upon 

them ib* 

Conjunctions requiring the Verb in the Indicative Mood, and 

Exercises upon them in continuation .... 412 
Conjunctions requiring the Future Tense . . . .417 
Remark on the Conjunction Que, preceding an Infinitive or 

Subjunctive Mood ........ 418 



CONTENTS. Xl 

Conjunctions requiring the Verb in the Subjunctive Mood, and 

Exercises upon them 420, 421 

Remarks on the Conjunctions St and Que . . . . 424 

Exercises on the preceding Conjunctions .... 425 
Verbs requiring the Conjunction Que, with the following Verb 

in the Subjunctive Mood . . . . . 427 

Exercises on this and the preceding Rules .... 428 

Observation on the Verb Vouloir, to will, to wish, . . 431 

Conjunctions Qut, Que or Dont, requiring the following Verb 

in the Subjunctive Mood, and Exercises upon them . . 433 



SECT. IX. 

€>f Interjections 435 

Table of Interjections ....... ib. 

Exercises on the preceding Interjections .... 436 

Remarks on the Particles De, a, Pour, when not expressed, 

and Exercises upon them ...... 437 

Remarks on the Particle Z)e, when it is to be expressed, and 

Exercises upon it ...... 439 

Remarks on the Particle a, when it is to be expressed, and 

Exercises upon it 441, 442 

Important remarks on the Particles £)e, a, and Powr, with 

Exercises ., 444 



SECT. X. 

ldiomatical Expressions 445 

Of the Verb Avoir, to have, and Exercises upon it . . 445,446 
Of Eire, to be, and Exercises upon it .... 448 

Of Faire, to make, or to do, and Exercises upon it . 449, 45fr 

Of different Verbs, and Exercises upon them 451, 452, 453, 454 

General and Promiscuous Exercises 455 

Of the Understanding of Languages ib. 

Of Study . . . . . . . . . .456 

Indolence Characterised ....... 453 



SECT. XI. 

Scheme for parsing a French Sentence 45* 

Treatise upon French Versification 461 



AN 



ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT 



IRREGULAR VERBS* 



WITH REFERENCES TO THE PLACES IN WHICH THEY, OR SIMILAR 
VERBS, ARE CONJUGATED IN THIS GRAMMAR ; 



WITH REMARKS, 



Reconnoitre 

Accroitre . . 
Paroitre . • 

Comparoitre . j 



Conjugated like 

Page. 

. . . . 230 
. . . . 2;J8 



Tenir 



24G 



English. 

To Acquire ..... 
Avoid, 1 or Shun 

Abstain 

Attain to 

Anticipate .... 

Assault 

be Able 

Absolve 

Abate 

Acknowledge, or 

know again . . 

Accrue 

Appear 

Appear, to give 

evidence . . . 

i Eviter, to avoid, and assister, to assist, are regular verbs of the 
First Conjugation. 

2 See Pret. p. 305, and Imperfect of Subjunct. p. 386. 

3 See p. 259 and 260. 



French. 

Acquerir • 
Fuir 2 • . . 
S'Abstenir 
Parvenir a 
Prevenir . 
AssailKr . 
Pouvoir 3 . 
Absoudre 
Rabattre . 



Tressaillir 247 
.... 259 

. . . .27! 
Battre . . 272 



f- 



Connoitre 278 



AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT. 



English. 

To Ask too much 
Admit . . 
Anoint . . 
Apprehend, or un 

derstand 
Abstract . 
Assist 2 . . 
Agree . . 
be Acquainted 

with . . 
be Afraid . 
fail Asleep 
fall Asleep again 

To Boil .... 

Boil again . . 

Belie . . . 

Belong . . . 

Become of 

Become, fit, &c 

Befall . . . 

Beat . . . 

Beat again 

Beat down (abate) 

Bray . . 

Believe 

Bake, or Boil, of- 
ten Englished 
to do . . 

Bake again, do 
again . . 

Bring to, or Re 
duce to . . 

Build 3 , or Con 
struct 



French. 

Surfaire 
Admettre . 
Oindre 1 

Comprendre 

Abstraire . 
Secourir • 
Consentir . 



Connoitre 



Craindre 
S'Endormir 
Se Rendo 

B. 
Bouillir 
Rebouillir , 
Dementir , 
Appartenir 
Devenir 4 , 
Convenir , 
Survenir . 
Battre . , 
Rebattre . 
Rabattre . 
Braire 5 . . 
Croire . . 



Conjitg 

Faire . . 
Mettre . . 
Craindre 



like 

syd 

294 

234 



Prendre . 305 



Traire . 
Courir . 
Mentir . 



1-1 

rmir $ 



Dormir . 

Bouillir 3 . 
Mentir . . 



309 
232 
239 

278 

284 

234 



231 
239 



Tenir . . 246 



:1 



Battre . . 272 



274 
285 



Cuire . . 

Recuire 
Reduire . 
Construire 



VConduire 276 



1 See Remark, p. 303. a See Note 1 in preceding page, 

s See p. 232. 4 See Note * p. 249. s See p. 274 and 275. 

e Batir, to build, and Bannir, to banish, are regulars of the 
Second Conjugation. 
2 



English. 

To Banish 1 . , 
be Born . , 
be Born again 



AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF 
French. 



Proscrire • 

Naitre . . ,K T a. 

Renaitre . .\ Naitre 



Conjugated like 

Page 

Ecrire . . 289 



302 



To Conquer . . . Conquerir . 

Concur . . . Concourir . 

Contradict, or be- > n/ ,. 
». \ Dementir . 

lie .... $ 

Consent . . . Consentir . 

Cover .... Couvrir 

Cover again . . Recouvvir . 

Contain • . . Contenir . 

Come • . • . Venir 2 . . 

Come back . . Revenir . 

Clothe . . . . Vetir . . 

Come to, Befall . Survenir . 

Clear a table . . Desservir . 

Conclude . . . Conclure . 

Conduct, Lead, or 

Carry . . . 
Construct, Build 
Circumcise • . 
Chance, or Fall out echoir 

Contradict . . Contredire 5 

Curse .... Maudire . 
Constrain . . 
Compel . • 

Complain . . . Se Plaindre 

Come to life, as > , 

from an egg,&c. \ 

Counterfeit . . Contrefaire 

Compromise . . Corapromettre 

Commit . . . Commettre 

Chide .... Reprendre 



Conduire . 

Construire 
Circoncire 3 

n4 



Contraindre 



eclorre 6 



Acquerir . 230 
Courir . . 232 

Mentir 



Offrir 



>T 



enir 



Servir 



Confire 
Dechoir 

Dire . . 



239 



241 



246 



245 

275 



Conduire 276 



277 
257 

286 



Craindre . 284 



Faire . 
I Mettre . 
Prendre 



288 
280 
294 
305 



» See Note 6 in preceding; page. 2 See Remark, p. 249. 

8 See Participle Pass. p. 275. * See Participle Act. & Pass.p.257. 

s See Note, p. 287. * See p. 288. 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



English. 

Conquer 
Convince 



To Discourse. 
Die . . . 
be Dying . 
Detain . . 
Disagree . 
Discover . 
Distribute 
Dissolve . 
Drink . . 
Debate . . 
Decay . . 
Do an ill office 
Deduct . . 
Destroy 
Do over,with mor- 
tar, &x. . 
Decrease . 
Disappear . 
Describe . 
Do . . . 
Do again , 
Defeat . 
Dissemble . 
Dye . . 
Draw, Design . . 
Defer, Put off, or 
Deliver up . . 
Displease . 
Distract . 



To Entertain . 
Exclude 

i See Note, p. 311 
* See p. 290, 



French. 

Vaincre 1 . 
Convaincre 

D. 

Discourir 

Mourir . 

Se Mourir 

Detenir 

Disconven 

Decouvrir 

Departir 

Di?soudre 2 

Boire 3 . 

Debattre 

Dechoir 

Desservir 

Deduire 

Detruire 

Enduire 

Decroitre 
Disparoitre 
Deer ire 
Faire . 
Refaire . 
Defaire 
Feindre 
Teindre 
Peindre 

Remettre 

Deplaire 
Distraire 

E. 
Entretenir 
Exclure 4 



Conjugated like 

Page 

Vaincre . 311 



Courir 
Mourir 



232 
240 



Tenir . . 246 

Offrir . . 241 
Mentir . . 239 
Absoudre 271 
.... 273 
Battre . . 272 
.... 257 
Servir . . 245 



Conduire 276 

Connoitre 278 
Ecrire . . 289 

Faire . . 290 

Craindre . 284 

Mettre . . 294 

Plaire . . 304 
Traire . . 309 

Tenir . . 246 
Con dure 275 



? See p. 272. * See N. B. p. 274. 



AT* ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF 



English. 

To Exact 

Enjoin ♦ . 
Enclose 
Encompass 
Elect . . 
Extract 



To Fetch . . 
Flee, or Fly 
Feel . . 
Foresee, or have a 

foresight of 
Foresee 
Fit 4 , or fit well 
Fight . . 
Fear . . 
Force . . 
Feign . . 
Forbid . . 
Foretell . 
Fall out, or Hap 

pen . . 
Fry, . . 
Feed, or Graze 
Follow . . 
Follow from 
Fine-draw 



:! 



To Go . . , . 
Go away . . 
Gather . . . 
Gather together 
Go out . . . 



French. 

Surfaire 
Enjoindre 

Enceindrc 

Elire . 
Extraire 

F. 

Querir 1 . 
Fuir 3 . 
Sentir . 

Pressentir 

Pre voir 3 

Seoir 5 . 

Combattre 

Craindre 

Contraindre 

Feindre 

Interdire 

Predire 

echoir 7 - 

Frire 8 . 
Paitre . 
Suivre . 
S'Ensuivre 
Rentraire 

G. 



Aller . 
S'en Aller 
Cueillir 
Recueillir 
Sortir . 



Conjugated like 

Page 

Faire . . 290 
Craindre . 234 



Lire . 

Traire 



292 
309 



Acquerir . 230 
.... 238 

Mentir . 233 

Voir . . . 263 
Asseoir . 254 
Battre . . 272 

Craindre . 284 

Dire 6 . . 286 

Dechoir . 257 

. ... 292 
Connoitre 278 

Suivre . . 308 

Traire . . 309 



i See p. 231. s See p. 238, 239. 

* See the verb To Become, &c. 

* See Note, p. 287. 7 See p. 257. 



J Aller . , 

! Cueillir . 
Mentir . . 

3 See p. 264. 
s See p. 255. 
s See p. 292. 



227 

233 
239 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



English. 



French. 



To Grow .... Croitre . 

Grow less • . • Decroitre 

Grow again . . Recroitre 

Graze .... Paitre . 

Glitter .... Reluire 1 



Glimpse, or to ) ^ 
of S 



have a glimpse 
Grind . . . . 
Grind again • • 
Give other clothes 
Gird • . . . 



trevoir 



Moudre 
Remoudre 
Revetir 
Ceindre 



Conjugated like 



Connoitre 27£ 

Conduire 276 
Voir . . 263 

Moudre . 295 



. ... 250 
Craindre 284 



To Hold . . . 
Happen unex- 
pectedly 

Hear . . . 

Hatch . . . 

Hurt . . . 

Humour . . 



H. 

. Tenir . 

? Survenir 

. Ouir 2 . 
. Eclorre 3 
. Nuire 4 . 
Complaire 



Hold one's tongue Se Taire 
Hear of . - A Apprendre des 



Tenir 



246 



I 



.... 242 

.... 288 
Conduire 276 

I Plaire . . 3Q4 
Prendre . 30S 1 



To Incur . 
Impart . 
Infringe 
Intervene 
Invest . 
Intei diet 
Inscribe 
Induce . 
Instruct 
Introduce 
Include 

* See p. 293. 

* See p. 303. 



nouvelles 

I. 

Encourir 

Departir 

Contrevenir a 

Intcrvenir 

Revetir ... . . 250 



Courir 
Mentir 



232 
5539 



I Tenir . . 246 



Ititerdire 5 
Inscrire 
Induire . . 
Instruire 
In trod aire . 
Com prendre 



Dire . 
Ecrire 



286 

289 



Conduire . 276 
Prendre . 305 



a See p. 242. 3 See p. 

* See Note, p. 287, 
2* 



AW ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF 



English. 

To Jut, Jet out, a term 
in Architecture 
only . . . 
Join . . 



To Keep . . . . 
Know somebody . 
Know again . . 
Know something 



To Lie .... 
give one the Lie 
Lead . 



Lead again 
Learn . . 
Leap for 
Laugh >, . 
Live . . 



To Maintain . . 

Move 

Move, or Stir up 
Mistake, or be de- 
ceived . 
Make . . . 

Make up again . 
Mimic ... 
Milk .... 



To make a great 
Noise . , 

i See p. 248, and N. B 
8 See p. 275. 



J. 

French. 

> Saillir 1 . . 

Joindre . . 

K. 

Tenir . . 
Connoitre ; 
Reconnoitre 
Savoir 2 . . 

L. 

Mentir 
Dementir . 
Conduire . 
Reconduire . 
Apprendre 
Tressaillir • 
Rire . . 
Vivre . . 

M. 

SMaintenir . 
cSoutenir . . 

Mouvoir 

emouvoir . 

> Meconnoitrc, 



Refaire . 
Contrefaire 
Traire . 



Conjugated like 

Page 

Tressaillir 247 
Craindre 284 



. . . 246 
Connoitre 278 
. . . 2G0 



Mentir . 

Conduire 
Prendre 



Tenir 



239 

276 

305 
247 
307 
312 

24C 



Mouvoir. 258 

Connoitre 278 
orSe Meprendre Prendre . 305 
Fa ire . . 

Faire 



JSL 
J Bruire 3 

. p. 249. 



2 See Notes, p. 261, 



290 
309 

275 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



English. 

To Overtake . . . 
Offer . . . 
Open .... 
Obtain . . . 
do an ill office . 
Open as an oyster 
Outlaw 

Omit . . . 
Outlive 
Oblige . . . 



To Prevent . . , 
Proceed . . 
Prescribe . . 
Proscribe , 
Prevail . . , 
Provide . * . 
Pull down . 
Preserve . . 
Put out . . 
Pretend . . , 
Paint . . . 
Pity , . . . 
Part with . . 
Put ... 
Permit . . . 
Promise . . 
Put back a^ain . 
Put off . . . 
Prejudice . . 
Prepossess . . 
Produce 
Pursue . . . 
Please . . . 



O. 

French. 

Atteindre . 
Offrir 

Ouvrir . . 
Obtenir . 
Desservir . 
eel or re 1 
Proscrire . 
Omettre . 
Survivre . 
Astreindre 2 

P. 

Prevenir . 
Provenir 
Prescrire . 
Proscrire 
Prevaloir 3 
Pourvoir 4 . 
Abattre 
Confire . 
eteindre 
Feindre . 
Peindre 
Plaindre . 
Se Defaire 
Mettre 5 . 
Permettre . 
Promettre 6 

Remettre . 

Prevenir . 

Produire . 
Poursuivre . 
Plairt . . 



Conjugated like 
Craindre 
Offrir . 



Tenir 
Servir 



Ecrire . 
Mettre . 
Vivre . 
Craindre 



Tenir 



Page 

284 

241 

246 
245 
288 
289 
294 
312 
284 



246 



Ecrire . . 289 



Valoir 
Voir . 
Battre 



. 261 
263 

. 272 
277 



Craindre 284 



Faire 



290 



Mettre . . 294 



Tenir 



246 



Conduire 276 



Suivre 



308 
304 



i See p. 288. 
* See p. 264. 



2 Grows obsolete, p. 272. 
* See Note, p. 294. 



3 See p. 262. 

e See Note, p. 295. 



AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF 



English. 

To Require . * . 
get Rid of • • . 
Run . 

Run to . * . 
Run over 
have Recourse to 
Run away . . 
Retain . . • 
Return . . . 
Remember, or . 
Remind • . . 
Recollect . * 
Relieve • . . 
Resent . . • • 
Reply . . • 
Repent . . . 
Roar . . . 
Resolve . . . 
Retract . . . 
Recant . . . 
Read . . . « 
Read again . . 
Remove . . « 
Resign . . . 
Rise 7 as 
Revive) flowers. 
Rebuke . . . 
Reduce • . * 
Restrain . . . 
Reach . . . 
Revive 
Recover . . . 

To Succour . . . 
Sleep .... 
make Sleep . 



R. 

French. 

Requerir 
Se Defaire 
Courir . 
Accourir . 
Parcourir 
Recourir 
Fuir 1 . 
Retenir . 
Revenir 



Conjugated like 

Page 

Acquerir . 230 
Faire . . 290 



Courir . . 232 



Tenir 



238 



246 



Se Souvenir 2 

SeRessouvenir 
Subvenir . 
Ressentir . } 
Repartir . « > Mentir 
Se Repentir .3 
Bruire 3 . . ... 275 
Absoudre 271 



239 



Resoudre 4 . 
£ Se Dedire 5 . 

Lire . . 

Relire . . 

Demettre . 

Se Demettre 
^ Naitre 
c Renaitre . 

Reprendre 

ReHuire . . 

Restraiudre 

Atteindre . 

£ Revivre . . 

S. 

Secourir . . 
Dormir 
Endormir . 



Dire ... 286 
'^Lire ... 292 
'^ Mettre . 294 

* \ Naitre . . 302 

. Prendre . 305 
Conduire 276 

Craindre 284 
Vivre . . 312 



Courir , 
Dormir 



232 
234 



1 See p. 23R, 239, Pret. and Imp. 
a Sec p. 275. 4 See p. 272. 



2 See Note f. P- 249. 
s See Note *, p. 287. 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



English. 

To Shun . 

Suffer . . 
Serve . . . 
Support . . 
Suit . . 

Start, Startle . 
Stir up . 
See . . . 
See again 
Solve . . . 
Sew . . . 

Stitch . . . 
Sew again . 
Sharpen . , 
Set out . 
Set out again . 
he Sensible of 
Smell . . 
Struggle 
Sit down . 
Sit down again 
Supersede . . 
Say . . . 
Saj again . . 
Slander 
Speak ill of . 
Shut, or close . 
Shut, or 
Surround with 
walls, &c . 
Subscribe . . 
Satisfy . . . 
Shine . . 
Submit . . . 
Surprise . . 
Smile . . 



French. 

Fuir . . 
SoufTrir . 
Servir . . 
Soutenir . 
Convenir . 
Tressaillir 
emouvoir . 
Voir . . 
Revoir . . 
Soudre 1 . 

Coudre . . 

Recoudre . 
Emoudre . 
Partir . . 
Repartir . 
Ressentir . 
Sentir . . 
Se Debattre 
Asseoir 2 . 
Se Rasscoir 
Surseoir 3 . 
Dire . . 
Redire . . 

Med ire 4 . . 

Clorre . . 

Enclorre 5 . 

Souscrire . 
Satisfaire . 
Luire 6 . . 
Soumettre 
Surprendre 
Sourire . . 



Conjugated like 

Page 

. . . 238 
Oflfrir . . 241 

. . 245 



Tenir 



246 



. . . 24,7 
Mouvoir . 258 

Voir. . . 2G3 

Absoudre 271 

Coudre . 280 

Moudre . 295 

Mentir . 239 

Battre . . 272 
> Asseoir . 254 

. . . 256 

Dire . . 206 



Eclorre . 283 

Ecrire . . 289 
Faire . . 290 
Conduire 276 
Mettre . . 294 
Prendre . 305 
Rire . . 307 



> See p. 271. 

* See Note, p. 287. 



2 See p. 255. 
5 See p. 288. 



3 See p. 256. 
e See p. 293. 



10 



AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT, &C. 



English. 

To Seduce . . 
Suffice, or 
be Sufficient 
Seem . . 
Subtract . 



To Tell . . . 
Tell again . 
Transcribe 
Turn out . 
Transmit . 
Take . . 
Take again 
Translate . 
Throw down 



To Unsew .... 

Use,ormakeuseof 
Uncover . . 
Unsay «... 
Undo . . . 
Undo again 
Understand . . 
Unlearn . . . 
Undertake . 

To Vanquish . . . 

To Welcome . .' . 
be Worth . . 
Wish,orbe Willing 
Write .... 
Write again 
Whet .... 

» See p. 308. 

? See Note *, p. 31 1.. 



French. 

Seduire . . 

I Suffire 1 . . . 

Paroitre . 
Soustraire . . 

T. 
Dire . 
Redire . 
Transcrire . 
Demettre 
Transmettre 
Prendre . . , 
Reprendre . 
Traduire . , 
Abattre . 

U. 

Decoudre . . 
Se Servir 
Decouvrir . . 
Se Dedire 2 . 
Defaire 
Redefaire . 
Comprendre . 
Desapprendre 
Entreprendre 

V. 

Vaincre 3 . . 

W. 
Accueillir . . 
Valoir . . . 
Vouloir 4 . . 
ecrire . . . 
Recrire . . 
Emoudre . . 



Conjugated like 

Page 

Conduire 276 

Confire . 277 

Connoitre 278 
Traire . . 309 



Dire . 
Ecrire 
Mettre 



286 
289 

294 



Prendre . 305 

Conduire 2?6 
Battre . . 272 



Coudre 
Servir . 
Offrir . 
Dire . 

Faire . 



280 

245 
241 
286 

290 



Prendre . 305 



Cueillir 

Ecrire . 
Moudre 



311 

233 
261 
264 

289 

295 



s See Note *, p. 287, 
* See p. 265, 266, 



AN EXPLANATION OP THE ABBREVIATIONS MADE USE OP 
THE FOLLOWING WORK. 



m. 


Noun masculine. 


f. 


Noun feminine. 


pi. 


Plural. 


adj. 


Noun adjective. 


pro. 


Pronoun. 


v. 


Verb. 


p. act. 


Participle active. 


p. p. 


Participle passive. 


P« 


Preposition. 


adv. 


Adverb. 


c. 


Conjunction. 


int. 


Interjection. 


lc» 


The English word that has this mark 




underneath, is not to be expressed in 




French. 



The figures, \ s , 3 , &c. direct to the arrangement of the 
words in the French sentence. 

Two words having the same figure are expressed by 
the French word placed under one of them. 

Two or three word* between parentheses ( ), are ex- 
pressed by the French under them. 



THE SOUNDS 



FRENCH TONGUE 



A FRENCH SPELLING BOOE. 



THE ALPHABET. 



Roman 


Letters. 


Italic Letters. 


Old Pro. 


Ntw Fro. 


A 


a 


A 


a 


ah 


ah 


B 
C 


b 
c 


B 
C 


b 
c 


bay 
say 


be% 

ke and ce 


D 


d 


D 


d 


day 


de 


E 


e 


E 


e 


a 


a 


F 
G 
H 


f 

S 
h 


F 
G 
H 


/ 

g 

h 


w 

jay*, 
ash 


fi 

ghe andge 
he 


I 


i 


J 


i 


ee 


ee 


J 
K 


J 
k 


J 
K 


J 
k 


jee* 
kah 


je* 
kah 


L 


1 


L 


I 


ell 


k 


M 


m 


M 


m 


emm 


me 


N 


n 


N 


n 


enn 


ne 




















P 

Q 
R 


P 

q 

r 


P 

Q 
R 


P 
r 


pay 
ku\ 
airr 


pe 
ke 
re 


s 


s 


S 


s 


ess 


se 


T 
U 


t 
u 


T 
U 


t 
u 


tay 
tit 


te 


V 


V 


V 


V 


vay 


ve 


X 


X 


X 


X 


eeks 


ke-se 


Y 
Z 


y 

z 


Y 
Z 


u 

z 


eegraik 
zaid 


ee graik 
ze 



*The two consonants g and j are sounded in the Alphabet like * 
in pleasure or z in azu e. 

t U has no similar sound in English, and must be learned from the 
master. 

£In the new pronunciation e after each consonant is sounded as in 
the English word barber, without sounding the r. 



A PRACTICAL 

FRENCH GRAMMAR 



SECT. I. 

GRAMMAR is the art of speaking and writing in any 
language with propriety, or, it is the art of rightly ex- 
pressing our thoughts by words. 

Grammar is of two kinds, general and particular. 
Universal grammar considers language in itself, explains 
the principles which are alike common to every tongue, 
and distinguishes, with precision, between those partic- 
ulars which are essential and those which are only acci- 
dental. Particular grammar applies these common prin- 
ciples to a particular language, and furnishes certain 
rules and observations which are, either mediately or 
immediately, deducible from its common principles. 

A grammar of the French tongue must be formed 
agreeably to the established usage, and those particular 
modes of expression, to which custom has given its 
sanction. It has therefore for its object, in common 
with all other grammars, the consideration of letters, 
syllables, words, sentences, &c. 

ALPHABET; — is composed of twenty-five letters, 
of which words are formed ; five of them, a, e, i, o, w, 
are distinguished by the name of vowels, which form a 
perfect sound of themselves. The twenty other letters 

&j c i <*, /•> g* hi h ^ 'j m > n > Pi 9i r i s i *i v -> x i y-> z -> are ^li- 
ed consonants, and cannot be pronounced but when 
joined with vowels, except y, which has often the sound 
of double t, and of which some make a sixth vowel. 
2 



14 

VOWELS, three sorts ; — Simple, a, e, i, o, u, which 
are subdivided into short and long, whose sound is more 
prolonged and deeper. 

Compound, of two or three simple vowels, as ai, ei, 
©i, ui, au, eu, on, ce, ozu : ai has the sound of e mute in 
faisant, and the sound of e close in je lirai, as well as in 
all the verbs in the first person singular of the future. 

Nasal, when they are joined to m or n, and when 
they form only one sound, as an, am, en, em, in, iwi, din, 
tin, 

DIPTHONG; — Is the union of several vowels, the 
pronunciation of which causes two sounds to be heard 
by a single impulse of the voice. Dieu, yenx, niais, 
pion, ouie, mien, are dipthongs; yet Caen, eau, paon, 
craie are not so, because they are pronounced Can, 6, 
pan, ere, 

ACCENTS, three sorts ;— The acute ', the grave \ 
and the circumflex A , serve to modify the sound of the 
vowels ; the office of the latter is to render long the 
vowels which are affected by it ; thus pronounce a, e, f, 
6, u, by a greater opening of the mouth, almost as if 
it were aa^ ee, ii, oo, uu. It is thus we write age, in- 
stead of aage ; this is also the reason why it is placed over 
the vowels that were formerly followed by an s, which 
has been dropped, since it is no longer pronounced ; as 
in asne, beste, in which the suppression of the s, requires 
that we should write due, bite, in order to shew that a 
and e are long. 

KINDS of E, five;— two kinds, Mute: J.?/.—- One 
whose dull sound is almost null in brave, encore, which 
are pronounced no otherwise thaa brav, encor. 

2d. — The other, whose sound, although obscure, can 
be prolonged, nearly as the sound of cu, in je, me, te, 
revenir, r edema nder. 

3d, — Close, by the accent Acute, in bonte ; also ez is 
equivalent to 4 3 as in voyez, lisez, iouchez, &c. 



15 



4th. — Open, by the accent Grave, in acces, succes, nefit, 
which is suppressed in greffe, sans cesse, abbesse. 

5th, — Very open, by the accent Circumflex, in tire, tete, 
iempete, which were formerly pronounced and written 
estre, teste, &c. 

Middling, followed by a double consonant, and whose 
sound is between that of i close and e open, in maison- 
nette, musette, poulette. 

The DL/ERESIS, (••)-— Which is placed over the vow- 
els e, i, u, and causes them to be pronounced separately 
from the preceding vowel as in pobte, a'ieul, Saul, and 
may be ranked among the accents. 

The CEDILLA, (,)— A little dash, which is put un- 
der the c, is also a sort of accent, since it serves to mod- 
ify the hard pronunciation which it would otherwise 
have before the vowels a, o, u, and to change it into that 
of S ; it is thus we pronounce it in francois, facon, recu. 

The APOSTROPHE, (') ;— Is only a comma put over 
the place which the vowel e or a ought to occupy, which 
is suppressed when the word following begins with a 
vowel or an h not aspirate ;* thus, instead of le esprit, 



* AN ALPHABETICAL LIST 
of such French Words as have their initial h mute. 



HABILE, 


% CLEVER 


Ibarmonie, 


harmony 


habilement, 


cleverly Hhebdomadaire, 


weekly 


habilet6, 


c/erervjewjjHebraique, 


Hebraick 


habiiler, 


to clothe'- IHebreu, 


Hebrew 


habilleruent, 


dress (hecatombe, 


an hecatomb 


habit, 


a eoai\ 


hea'ire, 


hegira 


habiter, 


io inhabit 


helas ! 


alas ! 


habitable, 


inhabitable 


Helicon, 


Helicon 


habitant, 


inhabitant 


heliotrope, 


turn-sol 


habitude, 


custom 


hemisphere, 


hemisphere 


habitue], 


habitual 


ibemistiche, 


hemistich 


habit uer, 


to use 


hemorrhagic, 


bloody -flux 


haleine, 


breath 


hemorrhoides, 


piles 


hamecon, 


a fishing hook 


hepatique, 


hepatical 



16 



la ambition, and h homme, we must pronounce and 
write P esprit, Pambition, Phomme. But when the h is 

•herbage, 
jfterbe, 

herboriste, 

hereditaire, 

he>esie, 

heretique, 

heritage, 

he>iter, 

fieritier, 

heritiere, 

hermine, 

hermite, 

ihermitage, 

heroine,* 

heroique, 

he>oisme,, 

hesiter, 

hesitation, 

heur, 

he are, 

heureux, 

heureusement, 

hexagone, 

hexametre, 

hiatus, 

hier, 

hieroglyphe, 

hirondelle, 

histoire, 

historieu, 

historique, 

histrion, 

hiver, 

hiverner, 

holocauste, 

hombre, (jeu) 

homelie, 

homicide, 

hommage, 

horame, 

honnete, 

honnetement, 

honnetete, 

honneur, 

honorable, 

honoraire, 

honorer, 



herbage, pasture 

herb or grass 

herbalist 

hereditary 

heresy 

heretic 

inheritance 

to inherit 

an heir 

* an heiress 

ermine 

■an hermit 

hermitage 

an heroine 

heroicai 

heroism 

to hesitate 

hesitation 

luck 

hour 

happy 

happily 

(tn hexagon 

hexameter 

hiatus, a gap 

yesterday 

hieroglyphic 

H swallow 

history 

historian 

historical 

a buffoon 

iv inter 

to winter 

burnt sacrifice 

ombrt 

an homily 

an homicide 

homage 

man 

honest 

honestly 

honesty 

honour 

honorable 

honorary 

to honour 

* But the h is as 



hopital, 

horizon, 

horloge, 

horloger, 

hormis, 

horoscope, 

horreur, 

horrible, 

iiorriblernent, 

hospitalier, 

hospitalite, 

hostie, 

hostilite, 

bote, 

hotesse, 

hotel, 

hotelier, 

ho teller ie, 

huile, 

huilier, 

huissier, 

huitre, 

humain, 

humainement, 

humaniser, 

humaniie, 

humble, 

humblement, 

humectation, 

humecter, 

humenr, 

humide, 

humidite, 

humilitan, 

humiliation, 

humilier, 

humilite, 

hyacinthe, 

hydre, 

hydromel, 

hydropique, 

hydropisie, 

hymen, 

hymne, 

hyperbole, 

hypocondre, 

hypocrisie, 

pirated in hiro? 



hospital 

horizon 

a clock 

watch-maker 

except 

horoscope 

horror 

horrid 

horribly 

hospitable. 

hospitality 

host or victim 

hostility 

landlord 

landlady 

a great house 

inn-keeper 

an inn 

oil 

oil-cruet 

usher or tip staff 

oyster 

humane 

humanely 

to civilize 

humanity 

humble 

humbly 

moistening 

to moisten 

humour 

damp, moist 

humidity 

mortifying 

humiliation 

to humble 

humility 

hyacinth 

hydra 

mead 

hydropic 

dropsy 

hymen 

hymn 

hyperbole 

hypocondriac 

hypocrisy 



17 

aspirate, the article remains entire ; we must not say 
Vhiros, but pronounce le heros, du hiros, au heros. 

VARIATION IN THE PRONUNCIATION OF 

CONSONANTS;— C is pronounced hard like k before 
the vowels a, o, w, in cocarde, cube; like s before e, i, in 
cecite. There are even some words in which it is pro- 
nounced likeg, as in second, &c. G is pronounced hard 
before a, o, u ; like j, before e, i; when we wish to 
modify its pronunciation before a, o, u, an e is placed 
after it, as in, il gagea, nageoire ; when on the contrary 
we wish to have it pronounced hard before e, t, an u 
is placed after it, as in guerir, guide. H is of two sorts, 
aspirate as in hair, envahir ; then the consonants by 
which it is preceded are not sounded; it is called mute, 
when it is not pronounced at all, as in homme, heroine. 
The h of hiros is aspirate, that of its derivates is 
not so. Q when not the last letter of a word, as in 
einq, is never used without being followed by u, which 
gives it the pronunciation of fe, as in qui, quelconque ; yet 
in several words u has retained its ancient sound of ou, 
and then qu is pronounced like kou, as in aquatique, equa- 
tion. S is pronounced hard in salut, senat ; but between 
two vowels, it takes the pronunciation of z, as in viser, 
raison, &c. T followed by i and another vowel, is pro- 
nounced like c, as in partial, pnrtiel, portion ; but if ti is 
preceded by s or x, or-if it is at the beginning of a word, 
it is pronounced hard, as in tirer, question, mixtion. X is 
pronounced like cs in fixer, taxer ; like gz in examen, ex- 



hypocrite, hypocrite 



hypotheque, rnortgti i 

hypothequer, to mortgage 



hypothese, hypothesis 

hysope, hysop 

hjsterique, hysteric 



In a familiar discourse, the letter h is not aspirafed in the follow- 
ing words, viz. Hanovre, Hollande, and Hongrie, when either of them 
is preceded by the particle de ; for though we always say le Hanovre, 
la Hollande and la Hongrie, yet it is usual to say and Avrite VElectorat 
d^Hanovre, la Heine d?Hongrie, la toile d' Hollande, and the like. As 
to other national and proper names, the initial h is aspirated in most 
of them; as in Hainaut, Hambourgh, Havanne, Henri, &c. but in 
Hamilton, Harcourt, Hector, Helene, Hercuk, Hirode, Homere, 
Horace, and Hyppclite^ it is mute. 

2* 



18 

ampler and like s in six, dix, soixante. Ck is generally 
pronounced like sh, as in chat / yet it is pronounced often 
like Jc: Christ, orchestre, bacchante, are examples. Rh, 
th,ph, are pronounced like r, t, f, in rhume, theme, philo- 
sophe, which are pronounced rume, time, filosofe. 

A syllable, whether composed of one or more let- 
ters, requires, in the pronunciation, no more than a 
single impulse of the voice : ex. ba, me, moi, &c. 

A word may consist of one syllable, or of many 
compacted into one meaning; for, a word is the smallest 
part of speech which is in itself significant : ex. mon, 
my ; livre, book, &c. 

A sentence, or phrase, is an assemblage of words 
arranged in their proper order, forming a sense either 
more or less complete : ex. 
Je suis votre ami, I am your friend. 

J'ecrivis hier a votre tante, I yesterday wrote to your 

aunt. 

A period may consist of two or three sentences 
joined together, so that they depend on one another to 
form a complete sense. Each of the sentences forming 
part of a period is called a member of the period : ex. 

Les grands hommes sont rarest Great men are scarce ; we 

on doit les respecter, et Von ought to respect them, 

devroit toujours travailler a and constantly endeav- 

se rendre semblable a eux. our to resemble them. 

A discourse, or sfeech, is an assemblage of sentences 
(or phrases) and periods, joined together, and arranged 
according to the rules of the language. 

KINDS OF WORDS. 

There are, in the French tongue, nine different sorts 
of words, which are generally called the nine parts of 
speech, viz. 

i« L'Article, Article. 

2. Le Nom et Adjectif, Noon and Adjective. 

3. Le Pronom, Pronoun. 

4. Le Verbe, Verf» 



19 

5. Le Participe, Participle. 

6. L'Adverbe, Adverb. 

7. La Preposition, Preposition. 

8. La Conjonction, Conjunction. 

9. L'Interjection, Interjection. 

Five of them are declinable; that is to say, the radi- 
cal part of the word remaining the same, the other 
parts, but especially the termination, will admit of sev- 
eral variations. These declinable words are, the arti- 
cle, noun and adjective, pronoun, verb, and participle. 

The four last, as they never vary their terminations, 
are therefore called indeclinable. 

GENERAL EXPLANATION. 

The articles are certain minute words, which, joined 
to nouns, determine the extent of their signification, 
and which, in French, denote their gender, number, 
and case, corresponding to the English words, the^ofthe, 
from the, and to the. These in French, are 

Le, la, les, The. 

De, du, de la, des, Of or from the. 

A, au, a la, aux. To the. 

The noun, in general, is a word which is used to 
name or qualify every thing which is the object of dis- 
course : ex. 



Papier, 


Paper. 


Bon, 


Good. 


Plume, 


Pen. 


Petit, 


Little. 


Pain, 


Bread. 


Mauvais, 


Bad, &c 



The pronoun is a word commonly substituted in the 
place of the noun, to avoid its too frequent repetition : 
ex. 

J^ai vu M, voire pere, et I saw your father, and 
lui ai parle, spoke to him. 

In this instance the word lui, to him, is put to avoid 

the repetition of the word pere, father. 

The verb is a word which either expresses the state 

of the subject, or an action done hiy the subject, or the 

action received or suffered by the subject: ex. 



2G 

Monfrcrt est rnalade, My brother is ill. 

.Mtf 5cewr ecrit une leUre, My sister writes a letter. 

Votre cousine est punie, Your cousin is punished. 

The verb is varied by moods, tenses, persons, and 
numbers. 

The participle partakes both of the nature of the 
verb and the adjective noun : ex. 



Ayant, Having. 
Donnanty Giving. 



Aime, Loved. 
Puni, Punished, &c. 



The adverb is sometimes joined to the noun, but 
more frequently to the verb, whence it derives its name. 
The use of the adverb is, to determine the signification 
of the noun or verb, or express some particular modifi- 
cation or circumstance of the action or quality: ex. 
Je vous aime sincerement, 1 love you sincerely. 
Venez demain, Come to-morrow. 

In these instances the words sincerely and to-morrozv 
are adverbs. 

The preposition is a word which is put before the 
noun or pronoun, and it always governs the word before 
which it is placed : ex. 

Chez mon ami, At my friend's house. 

Devant raoi, Before me, &c. 

The conjunction serves to connect the several parts 
of a discourse: ex. e/, and ; car, for; mais, but, &c. 

The interjection is a word which expresses the dif- 
ferent affections or passions of the soul : ex. 

Helas ! mon Dieu ! Oh ! my God ! &c. 

A more particular delineation oi these nine parts of 
speech, and their use in the composition of a sentence, 
or period, will be the subject of the following sections. 



SECT. II. 

OF NOUNS. 
NOUNS are divided into substantives and adjectives. 
A noun substantive expresses a thing subsisting by itself, 



21 

and can make a complete sense independent of any 
other word : ex. Ditu, God ; roi, king ; maison, house, &c. 

A noun substantive is either common, collective, or 
proper. 

A common noun is applicable to all beings or things of 
the same kind : ex. homrne, man ; roi, king ; ville, town ; 
table, table, &c. 

A collective noun is expressive of many particulars ; 
yet, as these particulars are all united in the mind, and 
comprehended under one general idea, they may there- 
fore be conceived as one individual, and, without any 
impropriety, expressed in the singular number: ex. peu- 
ple, people ; forcl, forest ; armee, army, &c. 

A proper noun is applicable to one person or thing 
only: ex. Pierre, Peter ; Londres, London, &c. 

JV". B. A noun is always a substantive when we can- 
not, with propriety, add to it the word personne, person, 
or the word chose, thing. 

A noun adjective is used to express the quality, colour, 
form or quantity, of the substance to which it belongs ; 
and is so called because its meaning cannot be ascer- 
tained without being joined to its proper substantive, 
with which it must also agree in gender, number, and 
case : ex. bon, good ; aimable, lovely; rouge, red ; jaune, 
yellow ; rond, round ; quarre, square ; un, one ; deux, 
two ; trois, three, &c. 

JV\ B. The noun is always adjective when we can 
add to it the word pe rsonne or chose, person or thing. 
In nouns, four things must be considered, viz. 

Les Articles, The Articles. 

Les Genres, The Genders. 

Les Nombres, The Numbers. 

Les Cas, The Cases. 

ARTICLES. 
There are three sorts of Articles, viz. 

L 1 Article difini, The Article definite. 

V Article par titif, The Article partitive. 

U Article huUfini. The Article indefinite. 



22 - 

The Article must always agree with the noun in gen- 
der and number. 

The definite article is so called, because it means 
the whole of the object to which it is applied. 

Singular. 
Ze, for the masculine, before nouns beginning with a 
consonant or h aspirated : ex. It roi, the king ; le hcros, 
the hero, &c. 
La, for the feminine : ex. la reine, the queen, &c. 
L\ with an elision, for both genders, before nouns sin- 
gular beginning with a vowel or h not aspirated : ex. 
V enfant, the child -, Vhomme, the man, &c. 
Plural. 
Les, for both genders, whether the noun begin with a 
consonant or a vowel : ex. les row, the kings ; les reines, 
the queens ; les enfans, the children, &c. 
The partitive article means only a part of the ob- 
ject, the English word some being always expressed or 
implied. 

Singular. 
f These two articles are used 

Du, for the masc.) before " ouns be s!* nin £ witha 

r» V "r xL " '* \ consonant or h aspirated : ex. du 
De la. tor the iem. ) , , r 7 -, ■ j 

' B pain, some bread ; de la viande, 

^ some meat. 

De P, for both genders, beginning with a vowel or an h 

not aspirated : ex. de Pencre, some ink. 
Plural. 
Des, for both genders : ex. des amis, some friends. 

The indefinite article is de or d\ of, from, and 
a, to. 

This article is used, without distinction, before nouns 
masculine and feminine in both numbers. Proper 
names, and the greater part of the pronouns, are de- 
clined with it. 

Some grammarians admit of a fourth article, viz. un 
for the masculine, and une for the feminine, in English 
9, or an; but it may be observed, that it is always declined 



23 



Vith the indefinite article, and therefore takes the na- 
ture of a noun adjective. 

GENDERS AND NUMBERS. 

There are two genders, viz. the masculine and femi- 
nine. A noun is masculine when there is before it le 
or un, as le or un livre, the or a book. A noun is femi- 
nine when it is preceded by la or une, as la or une plume, 
the or a pen. 

There are two numbers, the singular and plural. 
The singular number speaks of one thing only, as une 
table, a table : the plural speaks of more than one, as, 
des tables, tables. There are some nouns that are never 
used but in the singular number: as, 

1. The names of metals: ex. or, gold 5 argent, silver; 
cuivre, brass ; plomb, lead, &c. 

2. The names of virtues and vices : ex. avarice, avarice ; 
charife, charity; foi, faith; haine, hatred; orgueil, 
pride ; prodigalite, prodigality, &c. 

3. The names by which the five senses are denoted : ex. 
la vue, the sight ; le gout, the taste ; Vodorat, the 
smell ; le toucher, feeling ; Vou'ie, hearing. 

4. Proper names, except when they are used meta- 
phorically. 

5. To the foregoing may be added the following, which 
are not reducible to any general rules : 



Arlillerie, 


artillery. 


Faim, 


hunger 


AlliraiU 


implements. 


Furnee, 


smoke. 


Bonheur, 


happiness. 


Fuite, 


flight. 


Colere, 


anger. 


Gloire, 


glory. 


Courroux, 


wrath. 


Honte, 


shame. 


Enfance, 


infancy. 


Jeunesse, 


j'outh. 


Lait, 


milk. 


Salut, 


safety. 


Mid, 


honey. 


Soif, 


thirst. 


Noblesse, 


nobility. 


Sommeil, 


sleep. 


Pauvrete, 


poverty. 


Vieillesse, 


old age. 


Sang, 


blood. 







There* are others which are never used but in 
plural number only ; such as, 



the 



2i 



Atours, 


apparel, 


Ciseaux, 


scissars. 


Hardes, 


clothes. 


Limites, 


limits. 


Mceurs, 


manners. 


Mouchettes, 


snuffers. 


Tenebres, 


darkness. 


Vivres, 


victuals. 



Ancztres, ancestors. 
Ayeux, forefathers. 

Funirailles, a funeral. 
Frais, expense. 

Delices, delight. 

Depens, cost. 

Entrailles, entrails. 
Epousailles, espousals. 
Fonts, . font. 

And, in general, those which, in English, admit of na 
singular. 

In general the plural number is formed by adding an 
$ to the singular : ex. 

Le pere, the father ; les perts, the fathers, 

La mere, the mother; les meres, the mothers, &c. 

All nouns, having their singular ending in 5, x, or z y 
admit of no variation in the plural : ex. 

Le jils, the son ; les fils, the sons. 

Une noix, a walnut; des noix, walnuts. 

Le nez, the nose ; les ncz, the noses. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Nouns ending in aw, eau, eu, ceu, ieu, or on, form their 
plural by x, instead of s: ex. 

des cliapeaux, hats. 
des manteaux, cloaks. 
des Ueux, places. 
des choux, cabbages. 

The following differ from this rule, and their plural 
terminates in s : 

Matou, a great cat ; matous, great cats. 

Sou, a cent ; sous^ cents. 



Un chapeau, a hat ; 
Un manteau, a cloak ; 
Un lieu, a place ; 
Un chou, a cabbage ; 



Trou, a hole 



trous, holes. 



Nouns ending in al and ail have their plural in aux : 



ex. 



Animal, a living creature; animaux, living creatures. 
Cheval, a horse ; chevaux, horses. 

Travail, work ; travaux, works. 



25 
These only are excepted : 



Gouvernail, the helm, 
Serai L a seraglio, 
Portail, gateway, 



Bal, a ball, 

Detail, account, retail, 

Ex entail, a fan, 

Which form their plural in s. 

Nouns of more than one syllable (polysyllables) end- 
ing in nt, most generally form their plural by changing 
the t into s : as, 

Enfant, a child ; enfans, children. 

Commandement, command ; commandemens, commands. 

But nouns of one syllable only (monosyllables) pre- 
serve the t, and form their plural by adding s : as, 

Dent, tooth ; dents, teeth. 

Pont, bridge ; ponts, bridges. 

Tout, adj. all, makes tous, in its plural masculine, toule 
in the feminine gender sing, and toutes in the plural. 

The following are not conformable to any established 
rule. 

Ayeul, a grandfather j ayeux, grandfathers. 

Betail, cattle ; bestiaux, cattle. 

del, heaven ; cieux, heavens. 

CEil, the eye ; yeux, eyes. 

P , V des dels de lit* testers of a bed, 
^ ^ des ceils de bozuf, ovals. 

There are in French several compound words like the 
last two, which require some attention from the learner, 
in the formation of their plural, the difficulty of which 
may soon be removed by means of reflection ; for ex- 
ample : 

A noun being composed of a substantive and an ad- 
jective, united by a hyphen, both admit of the plural 
formation : as, 

Un gentil-homme, a noble- des gentils-hommes, noble- 
man ; men. 

A noun compounded of two substantives and a pre- 
position, united by hyphens, the first only in French 
* This term is growing obsolete : it is better to say, un fond de, lit, 
3 



26 

which is generally the last in English, admits of the plu- 
ral formation : as, 

Un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; des arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. 

Un chef-d'ttuvre, a master- des chefs-d'ozuvre, master- 
piece, pieces. 
N. B, Some of these French compound words are 

sometimes rendered in English by one word, in which 

case the formation of the plural in the French is still 

the same : as, 

Un cul-de-sac, an alley (with- des culs-de-sac, alleys, 
out egress); 
Nouns composed of a verb or a preposition and a 

substantive, the substantive only admits of the plural 

formation : as, 

Un avant-toit, eaves. des avant-toits, eaves. 

Un casse-noisette, a nut- des casse-noisettes, nut-crack- 
cracker ; ers. 

Un garde-fou, a rail ; des garde-foux, rails, &c. 

Monseigneur, my lord } « C Messeigneurs, my lords. 

Monsieur, Mr. or gent, f .g-g 1 Messieurs, gentlemen. 

Madame, Mrs. or madam f -ai j Mesdames, ladies. 

Mademoiselle, miss j E f Mes demoiselles, misses. 

CASES. 

There are six cases, viz. 

1. he Nominatif Nominative. 

2. he Genitif, Genitive. 

3. he Datif, Dative. 

4. VAccusatif, Accusative. 

5. he Vocatif, Vocative. 

6. VAhlatif, Ablative. 

The nominative and accusative cases have exactly 
the same form, and are always declined with the same 
article; the only difference between them arises from 
their different positions in the sentence. 

In the natural construction, the nominative always 
precedes the verb, and the accusative follows it. The 



nominative is the subject of the sentence, and the accu- 
sative is the object to which it refers : ex. 
Le roi aime le peuple, The king loves the people. 

In order to know the nominative from the accusative, 
I ask, Who loves the people? The King (which is the 
answer) is the subject, and consequently the nomina- 
tive. Whom or what does the King love? The answer 
is The people, which is the object, and therefore the 
accusative. 

The genitive and ablative are declined with the 
same article, but the first is always preceded by another 
word on which it depends : as, 

La porte de la chambre, The chamber door, that is, 

the door of the chamber. 
La maison de mon plre, My father's house, &c. 

Or it is governed by a preposition, as, 

Pres dufeu, Near the fire, &c. 

The last is always put after nouns or verbs expressing 
division, partition, or separation ; and after some prepo- 
sitions. The genitive is known by the articles de, du, de 
Ja, des, of or of the. Sometimes the article is not ex- 
pressed in English, as may be seen in the sentences 
before mentioned. The ablative is known by the arti- 
cles de, du. de la, des, from or from the. 

The dative shows to whom the thing spoken of, is 
given, or to what it is attributed : as, 
Donnez cette pomme a mon Give that apple to my bro- 
frtre, ther. 

This case is known by the articles a, au, a la, aux, to 
or to the. 

The vocative is used only for calling or naming the 
person to whom the speech is addressed : as, 

Ami, qui etes-vous ? Friend, who are you ? 

DECLENSIONS OF NOUNS. 

All changes in nouns are formed by numbers and 
cases. To decline a noun, therefore, is to express its 



28 



several variations ; and, under these variations, to point 
out its different significations. 

Some short examples are added to the nouns, that 
learners may more easily understand what has been said 
respecting the cases. 

Declension of the Article Definite Le (the), before Nouns 
masculine beginning with a Consonant, 

Singular. 

The prince. 

The prince is generous. 

Of the prince. 

The virtues of the prince ; 

or, the prince's virtues. 
To the prince. 
To speak to the prince. 
The prince. 
To love the prince. 
O prince. 
From the prince. 
To receive letters from the 

prince. 



Nom. Le Prince, 

Le prince est genereux, 
Gen. Du prince, 

Les vertus du prince, 



Dat. Au prince, 
Parler au prince, 

Ace. Le prince, 
Aimer le prince, 

Voc. O prince, 

Abl. Du prince, 
Recevoir des lettres 
prince, 



du 



Declension of the Article Definite La (the), before Nouns 
feminine beginning with a Consonant. 

Singular. 
Nom. La princes se, The princess. 

La princes se est aimable, The princess is amiable. 
Gen. De la princes se, Of the princess. 

Les regards de laprincesse, The looks of the princess ; 



Dat. A la princess e, 
Donner a la princesse, 

Ace. Laprincesse, 
Imitez la princesse, 

Voc. O princesse, 

Abl. De la princesse, 
Etre scpare de la prin- 
cesse, 



or, the princess's looks, 
To the princess. 
To give to the princess. 
The princess. 
Imitate the princess. 
O princess. 
From the princess. 
To be separated from the 

princess. 



29 



Declension of the Article Definite L' (the), for both Genders, 
before Nouns beginning with a Vowel, or an h not aspi- 
rated. 

Singular. 



Nom. D enfant, 

JJenfant est timide, 
Gen. De Venfant, 

Le temperament de 
fant, 
Dat. A Venfant, 

Attribuer a Venfant, 
Ace. D enfant, 

Admirer Venfant, 
Voc. O enfant, 
Abl. De Venfant, 

S^eloigner de Venfant, 



The child. 
The child is fearful. 
Of the child. 
Ven- The child's temper; or, the 
temper of the child. 
To the child. 
To attribute to the child. 
The child. 
To admire the child. 
O child. 
From the child. 
To go away from the child. 



The plural of these nouns, whether they begin with 
a consonant or a vowel, is declined, in both genders, by 
the article les (the). 

The kings. 

The kings command. 

Of the kings. 

The order of the kings : or, 
the kings' order. 

To the kings. 

To send to the kings. 

The kings. 

Honour the kings. 

O kings. 

From the kings. 

To be far ;rom the kings. 



Nom. Les rois, 

Les rois commandent, 
Gen. Des rois, 

JJordre des rois, 

Dat. Aux rois, 
Envoy er aux rois, 

Ace. Les rois, 

Respectez les rois, 

Voc. O rois, 

Abl. Des rois, 
Etre loin des rois, 



RECAPITULATION OF THE ARTICLE 
DEFINITE. 



Singular. 
Mas. Fern. Mas. & Fem. 
Le, la, V ; 

Du, de la, de V ; 
AU) a la, a V ; 
3* 



Plural. 
Mas. &, Fem. 
Les, the. 

Des, of or from the. 
Aux, to the. 



30 

The definite article must be placed, in French, before 
all nouns used in a general sense, or denoting a whole 
/ species of objects, though the English admit of no 
article in this case : ex. 

IJhomme est mortel, Man is mortal. 

Le Danemarc, la Suede, et Denmark, Sweden, and 

PAngleterre, soul les trois England, are the three 

royaumes du nord, northern kingdoms. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

T hate idleness. - - Virtue is estimable* - - 

Je,pro.kais,v. paresse,L Vertu,(.est,v. estimable, adj. 
Gold is preferable to silver. - - - - Do you 2 

Or, m. preferable, adj. argent,m. «»vous,pvo. 

prefer 1 England to France ? Corn grows 

prefer ez,v, Angleterre,?. France,?. Bled,m. croit,v. 

for men, and grass for cattle. Love, 

pour, p. liomme, m. et,c. herbe,f. betail y m. Aimez,v. 

wisdom. - - - Do x not 3 neglect 2 study. - - 

sagesse,?. «»nepas,&dv. negligez,v. elude, f. 

Avoid leisure. - - - She comes from church. - - 

Evitez,v. loisir,m. Elle, pro. vient,v. eglise,L 
We speak of America, and not 

Nous, pro. parlous, v. Amerique,?. nonpas,adv. 

of Poland. - - - - Grant us peace. - - - 

Pologne,f. Accordez^v. nous, pro. paix,U 

Honour is due to kings. - - - They 

Honneur,m. du, p. p. ro?',m. lis, pro. 

come from Africa. Pride disgraces man. -- 

vienncnt,v. Afrique,f. Orgueil,m. degrade, v. 

Charity patiently 2 bears 1 injuries 3 . 

ChariieJ. patiemment,adv. souffre,v. injure,?. 

This article is also placed before nouns used in a 

specific sense, or denoting a particular object, in which 

case the article is likewise expressed in English: ex. 

Vhomme que vous rrfavez The man whom you re- 

recommande est fort ha- commended to me is 

bile, very skilful. 



. 31 

Les poires de votre jardin The pears of your garden 
sont excellenles, are excellent. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULE. 

Where is the master of the house ? - - The 

Oil, adv. maitre,m. maisonj. 

prince spoke to the king. - - To the third 
prince,m. parla,v. troisieme^dj. 

page of the book. - - The 1 lazy 2 do 3 n©t 5 

page ,f. /n?re,m. pares seuor, adj. <o-> 

love 4 work 6 Justice is the mistress and 

aiment,v. ouvrage^m. Justice,?. 7uaitresse,L 

queep of virtue. - - Send the child to school. - - 
reine, f. Envoy ez, v. enfant, m . ecole, f. 

Walk in the garden. - - Tranquillity 

Promenez~vous,v. dans,\>. jardin, m. Tranquillite,f. 
of soul is the height of felicity. - - Give the tooth 

ame,i. comble,m. feliciie,?. Donnez,v. curt" 

picks to the gentlemen. Education is to the 

dent,m. gentil-homme,m. Education,?, 

mind, what cleanliness is to the body. - - The 

esprit,m. ce que, pro. propreie, f. corps, m. 

life of man is short. - - The enemies were on 

vie,?, courte, adj. ennemi,m. 6toient,v. sur,p. 

the mountain. - - You admire the beauty of 

mor.tagne,?, Vous, pro. admirez,\. beaute,?. 
the ladies. - - To the thickness of the walls. - - We 

dame, f. epaisseur,?. muraille,?. 

go to the park. - - - It is the will of the em- 

allons,v. parc,m. Oe$t,v. volonte,?, em- 

peror. - - - The fate of nations is governed 

pereur,m, sort,m. nation, f. gouverne.p. p. 

by Providence. - - You play with the boys. 
par, p. Providence,?. jouez,v. avec,p. gargon,m. 

- - Revenge is the pleasure of a weak 2 mind 1 . - - 

l r engeance,?. plaisir,m. unfoible,adj. 

Italy is the garden of Europe. - - The most noble 
IiaUe,?. Europe,?, plus^dv. fto&/e,adj. 



32 

of virtues is charity. • - Carry the grammar to the 

Portez, v. grammaire, f. 

boys, and the dictionary to the girls. He 

dictionnaire, m. fille, f. //, pro. 

comes from the Indies. - - Give me the loaf. 

vient, v. Inch, f. moi, pro. pain, m. 

This article being declinable in French, and conse- 
quently admitting of different variations, ought to be 
repeated before all the substantives of a sentence, as 
well as before nouns adjective used as substantives, and 
agree with them in gender and number : ex. 

Le sel, la moutarde, et The salt, mustard, and oil, 

Vhuile, sont sur les tables, are on the tables. 

Le blanc, le rouge, et le noir, White, red, and black, 

sont trois diffcrentes cou- are three different col- 

leurs, ours. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Prefer virtue to riches, friendship to 

Prifirez,v, richesses, f. pi. amiti6,L 

money, and utility to pleasure. - - The father, mother, 
argent, m. utilite, f. pere, m. mere, f. 

and children are dead. - - The men, women, and chil- 
sont,\, moWs,p.p. femme, f. 

dren of the village were all at the burial. 

village,m, tous, adj. a,p. enterrement,m. 
Children generally 2 like 1 apples and pears. - - 

ordirwirement,adv, aiment,v.pomme,(. poire, f. 
I like yellow and grey. - - Peace and plenty 

aime, v. jaune, m. gris, m. abondance,f. 

make men happy. Wheat and barley 

rendent,v» heareux,adj. Froment,m. orge,f. 

are dear. - - - I hate milk, butter, and cheese. - - 
chers, adj. lait,m, .beurre,m. frornage,m. 

Bring the knives and forks.-- Patience 

Mpportez, v. couteau, m. fourcheltej. Patience, f. 

and perseverance are necessary. - - - - The desire 

persivirance^L nccessaire,adj, desir,m. 



S3 

of glory, riches, power, and pleasure, is a 

gloire, f. pouvoir, m. unt 

disease of the mind. - - - - Have you passed 
maladie, f. erne, f. Avez, v. passe, p. p. 

through Spain, Portugal, or Holland ? - - Pre- 

war, p. Espagne, f. Portugal, m. ou Hollande, f. 
fer always virtue, prudence, and good sense 

toujours, adv. prudence, f. oon, adj. sens, m. 

to beauty. - - Put the wine, beer, and cider on 

Mettez, v. vin, m. 6/'er«, f. cic?re,m. sur, p. 
the table. • - - (It is said) that America, France, and 

table, f. On dit que 

Spain have made peace with England. 
ont, v. fait, p. p. 
On the contrary, this article, though expressed in 
English, must be omitted in French, before a noun 
followed by a name denoting a degree of consanguinity 
or kindred, or the name of a particular place to which 
it belongs ; and when it precedes a noun in the nomi- 
native or accusative case, denoting dignity, office, or 
business : ex. 
Alexandre, fils de Philippe, Alexander the son of Phi- 

Mon ami demeure a Lon- My friend lives in Lon- 
dres, ville capitale oVAn- don, the capital city of 
gleterre, England. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The Jupiter of the heathens was the son of 
payen,m, etoit,v. fils,m. 

Saturn, and the father of the gods. Robert, 

Saturne, m. dieu, m. 

duke of Normandy, the brother of Henry, king 
due, m. Normandie,L frere,m. Henri, m. 

of England, was the son of William the con- 

Guillaume, m. con- 
queror. My sister lives at York, the cap- 

querant, m. Ma, pro. sozur, f. demeure,\. a, p. 
ital city of the county of the same name. 

comt£,m, meme,adj. nom, m. 



34 

Mr. C***, the rector of the parish of St. James, and 

cttre,m. paroisse,f. Jdques 

his brother, the dean of the cathedral, were 

son, pro. doyen, m. cathedrale, f. 

the sons of Mr. L*** 5 the first lord of 

premier, adj. seigneur 
the admiralty. 

In several instances, tfce definite article is neither 
expressed in English nor in French ; and this generally 
happens when nouns common are not taken in the full 
extent of their signification, especially in narrations, 
and after the conjunction ni, neither, nor : ex. 
Conscience, honneur, interet, Conscience, honour, inter- 
toui est sacrifie ; il tfa est, every thing is sacri- 
ni justice ni humanity ficed ; he has neither 

justice nor humanity. 

EXERCISE UPO£ THIS RULE. t 

The town was taken by storm: men, 

ville, f. fat, v. prise, p.p. d'assaut, m. 
women, children, old people, (every body) was 

vieillard, m. tout, adj. 
put to death. - - Palaces, temples, public 2 build- 

wm,p.p. amort,L Palais, edi- 

ings 1 , private 2 houses (every thing) w as 

Jice,m. particuliere, adj. maison,i. (tout) 
destroyed, and the enemies did 2 ^ot 3 leave 2 stone 
detruit, p.p. laisserent,v. pierre, f. 

upon stone. - - - His father will 2 spare 2 Neither 3 

sur, p. Son, pro. 6pargnera,v. ne ni 

pains nor money. - - - He is a fatherless child, 
peine, f. Cest,v* orphelin, adj. k* 

he has neither parents nor friends. 
parent, m. ami, m. 

When, in English, two or more substantives, signi- 
fying different things, come together in a sentence, 
having a dependence on each other, and having no 
stop between them, the last (in English) must be placed 



35 

at the beginning of the sentence (in French), and the 
others having the sign of the English genitive, thua 
('s) or (') only, come after it, with the genitive of this 
article before them, according to their gender and 
number: ex. 

Le fils du roi, The king's son. 

La couronne de la reine, The queenVcrown. 
That is, the son of the king,the crown of the queen* 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RVLE. 

I have seen the king's apartments and the 
ai,v. i)M, p. p. appartement,m. 

queen's picture. The chancellor's son's wife is 

portrait, m. chancelier, m. 

the prime minister's eldest 2 sister 1 . The man's 

premier, m. ainee, adj. sozur, f. 

strength is very great Lend me the 

force, f. grcmde, adj. Pretez,V. moi, pro. 

maid's cloak. My cousin's brother is 

servante, f. mantelet, m. Mon, pro. cousin, m. 

my uncle's best friend The title of 

oncle, m. meilleur, adj. ami, m. titre, m. 

Dauphin belongs to the king of France's eldest 

appartient, v. 
son. - - Modesty is a woman's greatest orna- 

Modestie, f. une femme, f. plus grand, adj. orne- 
ment. 
ment, m. 

The genitive of this article is often made in English 
by to, especially before nouns expressing alliance, con- 
sanguinity, or kindred, witness, or inheritance ; and in 
short whenever to may be rendered by the above geni- 
tive: ex. 

Monseigneur le due de ***, My lord duke of ***, bro- 
freredu roi, the.r to the king, or the 

king's brother. 



36 

EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE. 

Mr. Richard, brother to the Prince's steward, 

intendant, m. 
has married Miss Prescot, niece to the Constable 
a, v. ipousi, p. p. niece, f. count table, m. 

of the Tower. — I have spoken to the Marchioness 

Tour, f. parte, p. p. Marquise, f. 

of ***, sister to the queen's first Lady of honour. - - 

Dame, f. 
Mr. Henry, perfumer to the princess, has made 
Henri, m. parfumeur,m. fait, p. p. 

a Considerable fortune. *■ — The heir to the 

considerable, adj. fortune, f. heritier, m. 

crown of Portugal is the Prince of Brasil. - - My 

couronne, f. du Bresil, m. 

father was witness to that quarrel. — 

a ete, p. p. temoin, m. cette, pro. querelle, f. 
I am a friend to 2 di!igent Scholars, and an 

suis, v. *o* diligent, adj. ecolier, rn. *^ 

enemy to idleness. 

tnnemi, m. paresse, f. 

After the adverb bien, when placed before a substan- 
tive and signifying much, a great deal, many, the geni- 
tive of this article must always be used : ex. 

Bien du merite, Much merit. 

Bien des amis, Many friends. 

Bien de Vargent, A great deal of money. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The children make much noise. This man 

font, v. bruit, m. Cet, pro. 

has (a great deal) of money, but he has also many 

aussi, adv. 

enemies. They 2 give *you much trouble 

donnent, v. peine, f. 

now ; but they will 2 give 2 you 1 afterward 

apresent^z&v, mais, c. donneront,v. ensuite, adv. 

much pleasure. (There were) many ladies in 

// y avoily v. 



37 

company (last night). Mr. R. has read 

compagnie, f. hier au soir, adv. lu, p. p. 
many^ books, and he has acquired much know- 

livre, m. acquis, p. p. connois- 

ledge. To teach youth (we must 

sances,(, pi. Pour, p. enseigner,v^ jeunesse,L (ilfaut,\\ 
have) a great deal of patience. 
avoir, v.) 

If the second substantive in French (which is the first 
in English) serve to denote some particular commodity, 
use, quality, or liquor, then it must be put in the dative : 
ex. 

Le pot au lait, The 1 milk 3 -pot 2 . 

La femme aux pommes, The 1 apple 3 -woman 2 * 

Une cruche a Peau, A water-jug. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Tell the servant to bring 2 

Dites,v. aw or a la domestique,m.&Lf. de apporter,V, 
me 1 the tea-cannistef^ sugar - dish, cream- 

me, pro. the,m. boite,f, sucre,m. pot,m. creme,f. 

basin, and coffee-cups. -- Go to the wine-cellar, 
bassin,m. cafe,m. tasse,f, Allez,v. vin, m. cave, f. 

and bring 2 us 1 the vinegar- bottle. (There is) 

vinaigre, m. bouteille, f. Voila 
the oyster-woman. — I live in the hay - market, 

huitre, f. pi. foin, m. march e^m* 

my cousin in the fish-market, and my sister 

won, pro. poisson,m. ma, pro. 

in the poultry-market. Give me the oil- 

volatile,?. moi, pro. huile,f. 

bottle, pepper-box, and mustard-pot. The 

poivre,m. boite, f. moutarde, f. 

butter-boy, the green-girl, the hot - rolh 
beurre,m. legume, m. pi, c/icmJ,adj.pl. pain, m.pl. 

man, and the gingerbread-woman, called here. -- 

pain d*epices,m. ont passe, p. p. ici, adv. 
We had cabbage-soup, a rice-pudding, a 

eumes, v. chou, m. pi. soupe, f. Hz, m.pouding, m. 



38 

(leg of mutton) with caper - sauce, and ice- 
gigot,m. caprtytfh sauce,L glace, f. 

cream. - - We shall have pease porridge, a salt 2 

aurons, v. pois, m. soupe, f . sale, adj. i 

cod 1 with egg-sauce, and a tufbot with 

morue, f. &uf, m. pi. 

lobster-sauce. - - I bought a plum - cake, an 
homard, m. pi. ai achete, raisins sees, m. gateau, m. ~ 
apple - tart, and two gooseberry and cherry 
pomme, f. pi. tarte,L groseille,Lph cerise, f. pi. 

pies. 
tourte, f. 

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE PARTITIVE. 

Singular. 

Masculine. 

Nom. Ace. du pain, some bread. 

Gen. Abl. de pain, of or from some bread. 

Dat. a du pain, to some bread. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. de la viande, some meat. 
Gen. Abl. de viande, of or from some meat. 
Dat. a de la viande, to some meat. 

Masculine or Feminine. 
♦Nom. Ace. de Pargent, some money. 
Gen. Abl. d'argent, of or from some money. 
Dat. a de Pargent, to some money. 

The plural is the same for both genders. 

N. Ac. des livres, some books, des auteurs, some 
authors. 

G. Ab. de livres, of or from, &c. d'auteurs, of or 
from, &c. 

Dat. a des livres, to, &c. a des auteurs, to, &c. 

N. B. In asking a question, the English generally 
make use of any, which, in French, must be rendered 
by the same article : ex. 

Y a-t-il dupain id ? Is there any bread here ? 

Jlvcz-vous de la viande ? Have you any meat ? 



39 

This article must be used wherever the English word 
some, or any, is either expressed or understood, and 
ought to be repeated before every substantive in a sen- 
tence : ex. 
Du pain et de Veau lui suffi- Bread and water are suffi- 

sent, cient for him. 

Apporttz du vinaigre, de Bring some vinegar, mus- 

la moutarde, de Vhuik, ei tard, oil, and forks. 

des four che ties, 
Avez-vous de I 9 argent a Have you any money to 

nous preter ? lend us ? 

EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE. 

Bread, meat, and water, are things necessary 

sont, v. chose, f. nicessaire, adj. 

to man. - - I drink wine and water. - - She eats 

hois, v. mange, v. 

cheese. - - - Bring me some mustard. - - - Have you 

fromage.m. 

bought some paper, pens, and ink?-- Send 
acheti, p.p. papier, m. plume, f. mcre,L 

him some bread, meat, and potatoes. Do you 2 

pommt de terreS* «o> 
sell 1 fruit 3 ? - - Buy some tea and sugar. - - 

vendez,v. fruit, m. Achetez.v. th6,m. 

Will you eat some beef with turnips and 

Voulez,v. manger, v. hceufm. navel, m. 

carrots? -- Do you drink beer? -- (Is there) any 
caroile,(. buvez,\. biereA. Y a-t-il 

wine in the cellar ? (Was there) any oil in the 

Y avoit-il 
bottle? - - I 1 have 3 given 4 him 2 bread, money, 

donne, p.p. /w?,pro. 
and clothes. - - She has modesty and prudence. - - 
habit, m. modestie,f, prudence,f. 

He has bought some dishes and plates Will 

plat,m. assiette,(, 

you have some milk or cream ? - - I eat fish, eggs, 
<** eeu/Jm. 



40 

greens artichokes, and asparagus. — - Bread, meat 

artichau,m. asperge, f. 

fish and vegetables, often 2 make 1 a good 

legume, m. souvent,adv, font,v. 

dinner. 
diner, m. 

If the substantive be preceded by an adjective, instead 
of du, de la, des, we must use de or d* ; as, 

Masc. Fern. Masc. or Fem, 

N. Ac. ) De mauvais vin, De bonne eau, D"> excellent pain, 

G.Abl. ) Bad wine, Good water, Excellent bread. 

©at. a de mauvais vin, a de bonne eau, a d^excellent paint 

To bad wine. To good water. To excellent bread. 

Plural. 
N. Ac. ) De bons Uvrex, d'habihs gens, 

G. Ab. ) Good books. Learned men. 

Dat. a de bons livres, a d^habiles gens, 

To good books. To learned men. 

This last rule is not general ; for there are some sub- 
stantives, which, though preceded by an adjective, re- 
quire the other article, instead of de. However, in- 
stances of this kind are very few: they never happen 
but when the adjective and substantive present to the 
mind one idea only: as, Londres est le centre du bon 
gout, &c. London is the centre of good taste, &x. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

You always 2 read 1 good books. - - J Bad wine 2 

toujours, adv. lisez,v. 
is 4 3 not 5 worth 4 good water, - - He speaks te learned 
vaut, v. park, v. 

men. I have heard good news. 

gens,f* appris,ip,ip. 6owne,adj. nouvelle,f. 

You have fine fruit She has worthy 

avez,v. bextu, adj. digne, adj. 

jriends. - - Bring me good pens. - - Onions, celery, 

Oignons,m. celei'i,m* 

* Gens, preceded by an adjective, is of the feminine gender ; but 
when the adjective follows, it is put in the masculine. 



41 

leeks, chervil, and plenty of meat make 

poireau,xn+ cerfeuil,n\. beaucoup,adv. font,?. 

what the French call, good 

ce que, pro. Francois, m.pl. appellent, v. 

broth. - - - - I prefer good water to bad cider. - - - - 
bouillon, m. cidre, m. 

I have discoursed with learned people. - - My father 

converse, p.p. gens,$. 

has in his garden good plums, fine peaches, 

son, pro. prune, f. belle, adj. peche, f. 

and very large apricots Miss 

tres, adv. gros, adj. abricot, m. - - - Mademoiselle, f. 
Sharp has fine eyes. 
ail) m. 

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE INDEFINITE. 

Singular. — Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. Pierre, Peter. 
Gen. Abl. de Pierre, of Peter. 
Dat. a Pierre, to Peter. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. Marie, Maria. 
Gen. Abl. de Marie, of Maria. 
Dat. a Marie, to Maria. 

This article, before a noun beginning with a vowel 
or h not aspirated, is expressed as follows : 

Nom. Ace. Antoine, Antony. 
Gen. Abl. d? Antoine, of A n tony. 
Dat. a Antoine, to Antony. 

Nom. Ace. Londres, London. 
Gen. Abl. de Londres, of London. 
Dat. a Londres, to London. 

N. B. It is necessary to observe, that the particle 
To, used after a word signifying coming, going, re- 
turning, or sending to, placed before the name of a king- 
dom, republic, country, province, or county, must be ren- 
dered in French by the preposition ew, without any 
article: ex. 

4* 



¥1 

Mon frere est alii en Italie, My brother is gone to Italy* 
// doit bientot retourner en He is soon to go back to 
Amirique, America. 

On the contrary, to must be rendered by de, when 
immediately preceded by the words road, or path-way : 
ex. 

Le chemin de Londres, The road to London. 
he chemin de Paris, The way to Paris. 

It must be observed that the proper names of most of 
the islands and other countries both in the East and 
West-Indies, and some few places in Europe, do not 
follow the above rule, but take the definite article, such 
as PAbyssinie, Abyssinia; le Bresil, Brasil; le Caire, 
Cairo ; le Canada, Canada ; la Guadeloupe, Guadaloupe ; 
la Jumaique, Jamaica ; le Japon, Japan ; la Martinique, 
Martinico; le Perou, Peru; la Virginie, Virginia ; and a 
few others : ex. 

de PAbyssinie, C from Abyssinia, 

VmV <{ du Bresil, to come < from Brasil, 
du Caire, ( from Cairo. 

a la Chine, C to China, 

Aller ^ au Canada, to go < to Canada, 
au Japon, ( to Japan. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE RULES. 

(Here is) John's brother. - - Speak to Martha. - - 
Void, adv. Jean, m. Parlez,v. Marthe,f, 

It is Peter's hat. - - - - She goes to Richmond. - - - 

&est,v, chapeau,m. vu,v. 

He comes fron Paris. - - - You have Mr. 

vient,w Monsieur, m. 

Richard's sword. When 1 will 2 - you 3 go* to 

ip.6e,f, Quand,ndv. irez,v. 

France? »■* I know not, for my father says 

sais, v, ne jD«s,adv. car, c. dit, v. 

that he will 2 send 2 me 1 soon to Canada or 

gue,c* a/, pro. enverra,v, fo'en/o/,adv \ 

Jamaica. - • Give me Laura's cap. I (am going) 

Xawre,f. bonnet : m> vai^y.- 



43 

to Croydon. - - - 1 have found Andrew's waistcoat. 

trouvc, p.p. Andre, m. veste, f. 
She (shall come back) to England (next year) 

reviendra, v. Canute prochaine 

to see her brother who is arrived from 
pour voir, v. qui, pro. est, v. arrive, p.p. 

Japan and China. - - Carry that to Stephen. - - 
Portez,\, cela, pro. Etienne,m. 

(Here is) the road to Clapham. My mother 

Ma, pro. 
intends to send my sister to Portugal 

se propose de, v. envoyer, v. ma, pro. 
or Spain, and thence to Rome, and my cousin (is to) 
de la doit, v. 

go to Mexico or Cairo. 

alter, v. Mexique, m. ou, c. 

The genitive of this article de is used after nouns 
and adverbs of quantity, whether expressed in English, 
or not; after the negation pas or point, no or not ; the 
words que, what, quelque chose, something, rien, nothing ; 
before names of countries, kingdoms and provinces, 
when preceded by a noun expressing a personal title, 
&c. or by a verb signifying coming, arriving, or return- 
ing from : ex. 

Tanl de pommes, So many apples. 

Tant oVargent, So much money. 

Point de repos, No rest. 

Quelque chose* de bon, Something good. 

// arrive de France, He arrives from France* 

Rien de mauvais, Nothing bad. 

he roi d'Angleterre, The king of England. 

Elle vient d^Amiriqut, She comes from America. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE. 

I have bought six yards of cloth. - - - Bring 

achete, p.p. six, aune,L drap,tn, 

me three pounds of veal, and two pounds of 

trois, livre, f. veau, m. deux, 

* It must be observed, that the word chose, standing by itself, is of 
the feminine gender ; but, being joined to the word quelque, it is of 
the masculine. 



44 

mutton. - - - She has a great number Uf child- 

?nouton,m. un grand, adj. nornbre,m. 

ren. He has (too much) vanity. You have 

trap, adv. vanite, f. 

less merit, but more wisdom. - - What 

moins, adv. mais, c. />/ws, adv. sagesse,f. Que 

a noise you make. - - - Do l not 4 give 3 her 2 

«& bruit, m. faites, v. ^ ne /?as, adv. lui, pro. 

(too many) pears. - - 1 1 have 3 2 no 4 daughters. 5 - - 

trop, adv. ne point, adv. 

So much pride does ^ot 4 become 3 him 2 . - - 

Tant, adv. orgueil, m. ^ sied, v. /wi, pro. 

(There is) something noble in his physiognomy. - * 

11 y a, v. sa, pro. physionomie, f. 

We have (so many) grapes. They have a little 

raisin, m. un peu, adv. 

money. - - 1 know the king of Prussia. - Did you 

connois, v. Prusse, f. Avez, v. 

see the duke of Bavaria with the archbishop 
dm, p.p. due, m. Baviere,(. archeveque,m» 

of York ? - - He commanded an army of forty 

commandoit, v. une armee, f. quarante 

thousand men. She 1 says 3 2 nothing 4 true 5 . - - • 

mille, dit, v. ne rien, adv. vrai, adj. 

You speak of Alexander, king of Macedonia. - - 

parlez, v. Alexandre, m. Mactdoine, f. 

Do you 2 come 1 from Italy ? - - - No, I come 

^ venez,v. Non, adv. viens, v. 

from Africa. 
Afrique. 

De is likewise placed before nouns governed by 
another substantive, of which they express the character, 
cause, country, matter, nature, and quality ; and after the 
adjectives of number, when they are followed by a parti- 
ciple passive : ex. 

Une maison de brique, A 1 brick 3 house 2 . 

Un bonnet de nuit, A night cap. 

Une cuiller d? argent, A silver spoon. 

JDu poissvn de riviere, River fish. 

Du vm de Bourgogne, Burgundy 2 wine 1 . 

Quatre de nnvuyes, Four sent away. 



45 

EXERCISE UPON THIS ART1SLE. 

Your 1 sister 2 has 3 a 4 silk 6 gown 5 and a gold 

Votre, pro. sozur, f. a, v. une soie, f. robe, f. un or, m. 
thimble. - - We drink Champagne wine. - - - - It is a 

de, m. buvons, v. C'esJ, v. 

marble pillar. ----- They have a country 

marbre, m. pillier, m. une campagne, f. 

house built with oak wood. - - 

maison,f. construite,p.p* de,p. chene,m. bois,m. 
Edinburgh is the capital city of the kingdom 
Edinbourg,m. capitate, adj. mlle,i, royaume,m. 

of Scotland. -- Shut the fore - door. -- A lady 

Ecosse,f. Fermez,Y. devant,m>porte,L Une 
of wit is a jewel of worth. - ,- - - He is a man 

esj)rit,m. unjoyau,m. prix,m. Cest^v. 

of honour. She has bought silver buckles 

argent, m. boucle,[. 

and diamond ear - rings. Have you 

diamant,tn. pendans-d' } or •exile, m. Avez,v. 

spoken to the silk-merchant ? Give me the 

parle, p . p. marchand, m. 

upper - crust. - - Bring me my straw - hat and 
dessus,m. cronte,L mon,]iro.paiUe,f. chapeau,m. 

my night - cap. - - Miss Brown's chamber - maid and 

nuii,L bonnet, m. chambre,L fillej, 

Mrs. Rose's house-keeper are two sis- 

MadameJ, femme de charge, f. deux,, 

ters. - - The rich make use of silver plate, 

riche, m.pl. se servent,v, Taisselle,f* 

and the poor make use of iron forks 

pauvre, m. pi. font, v. usage, m. fer, m. 

and pewter spoons The enemies had a 

etain, m. cuiller, f. eurent, v.«» 

hundred men killed, seventy wounded, 

cent tui, p.jp. soixanie-dix, 6Zme, p.p. 

forty lost, and five hundred taken pri- 

quarante perdu, p.p. cinq pris^ p.p. pri- 

soners. 
■tonnhr, ro. 



46 

De is placed after the adjectives signifying dimension, 
as epais, thick ; gros, big, large ; haut, high, tall ; large, 
wide, broad ; long, long ; and profond, deep ; though 
there is no article expressed in English : ex. 
line table tongue de dixpieds A table ten feet long and 

et large de huit, eight broad. 

But there is a more elegant way, which is, to turn 
the adjective of dimension into the substantive ; then 
the words of measure and those of dimension are pre- 
ceded by de : ex. 
line table de dix pieds de Ion- A table ten feet long and 

gueur et de huit de largeur, eight broad. 

In this last example it may be seen, that the French 
and English are parallel with each other ; therefore, in 
the following exercise, the adjective and substantive are 
put down, that the learner may translate it both ways. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I saw ,'a tree eighteen feet large. 

ai, v. vu, p.p. un ar£re, m. dix-huit pied, in. gros- 

I have a box four inches thick, 

seur*,f. uneboite,L quatre pouce,m. epais-seur,f, 

ten feet long, and six broad. - - 1 know 

dix pied, m. tong-ueur,L large-ur,L connois^Y, 

a man seven feet high (It is) a ditch 

un sept haut-eur, f. C'esi, v. un fosse, m. 

nine feet six inches deep and five feet broad. 

neuf profond-eur, f. cinq 

(There is) a room fifty paces long and 

Voila une chambre, f. cinquante pas, m. 

twenty broad. The walls of our garden 

vingt muraille, f. not re, pro. 

are (have) thirty feet three inches high, and two 
sont,v, out, v. trente irois deux 

feet broad. - • I have a tree sixty feet high 

un arbre, m. soixante 
and eighteen round. 

dix-huit gros-seur,(. 

* Read gros, adjective, grosseur, substantive, and so of the others: 
See the rules to form the feminine gender, (p. 50.) 



47 

If the learner translate this last sentence by the ad- 
jective of dimension, he must use the word sont, which 
is the proper word of the English are, and follows the 
preceding rule : but if he turn the adjective of dimen- 
sion into its substantive, the word itre, to be, is to be 
rendered into French by the verb avoir, to have, and de 
before the word of measure is suppressed. In this last 
case, the word ont, have, must be inserted instead of sont. 

Example by the adjective : 
Notre chambre est longue 
de vingt pieds et large de 
douze. 

By the substantive : 
Notre chambre a vingt pieds Our room is twenty feet 
de longueur et douze de long and twelve broad^ 
largeur, 

When two substantives are joined together, both 
making a compound word in English, the first of which 
denotes the form or use of the second, the latter must 
be placed before the former in French, and followed by 
the particle a : ex. 

Un moulin a papier, A paper 2 mill 1 . 

Une boite a poudre, A powder 2 box 1 . 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Gun - powder was invented by a monk. 
Canon, m.pnudre,L fut,v. inventee, p.p. par,p. moine, m. 
The servant has lost the tinder-box, and cannot 

perdu, p.p. fusil, m. ne sauroit,v. 
light the candle. ---- If you go to London 

aliumer, v. chandelle, f. Si, c. allez, v. 

to-morrow, bring me a toupee - iron. - - Have you 

demain, ad v. touptt, m . fer, m. 

seen the w^ater-mill which my father has bought ? 
vu, p.p. que, pro. 

No, but I have seen the wind mill which your 

Non* adv. venLm. 



48 

brother has built at Greenwich. — I have 

fait bdtir, v. a 
found your sister's work - bag, in the eating- 

ouvrage, m. sac, m. manger, m. 

room. William the Conqueror forbade the 

chambre, f. defendit, v. aux 

English to have any fire - arms. 

Anglois, m. de aucune, pro. feu, m. arme, f. 

DECLENSION of UN, m. UNE, f. A OV AN. 

Singular. — Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. un livre, a book. 
Gen. Abl. d'un livre, of or from a book. 
Dat. a un livre, to a book. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. une plume, a pen. 
Gen. Abl. d^une plume, of or from a pen. 
Dat. a une plume, to a pen. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I have a hat and a sword. - - - She speaks 

chapeau, m. epee, f. park, v. 

of an officer. - - He 1 has 3 given 4 it 2 to 5 a 

officier,m. donne, p.p. le, pro. 

sailor. - - (There are) a bird and a cage. - - - 

maielot, m. Voila oiseau, m. cage, f« 

An ungrateful man is a monster in the eyes of a 

ingrat, m. <o-> monstre, m. aux, ail, m. 

sensible 2 man 1 . - - Alexander was a great warrior, 
sense, adj. Alexandre, m. etoit, v. guerrier, m. 

and a very learned philosopher. - - A line 

tres, adv. savant, adj, philosophe, m. belle,adj. 
flower in a garden is an ornament. 
fieur, f. ornement, m. 

It must be observed, that the English article a or an, 
before nouns of measure, weight, and number, must be 
rendered in French by the definite article, le, la, les ; 
and by the preposition par, used for time and space in 
the sense of each, every, or per : ex. 



Deux chelins le cent, Two shillings a hundred; 

Un ecu le boisseau, A crown a bushel. 

Cinq chelins par semaine, Five shillings a week. 

Une guinee par mois, One guinea a month. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Barley sells for three shillings a bushel. - - - 

Orge, f. se vend, v. «» 
That ale (is worth) six pence a pint. - - - 

Cette, pro. ai/e,f. vaui.v. sou,m. pinte,f. 

Beef* costs eight pence a pound. - - - - 

Bozuf,m. coute,v. huit, adj. livre,f. 

This lace cost a crown an ell. - - He 

Cettc, pro. dentelle,f. couia,\, ecu,m. crime, f. 

sells his best cloth a guinea a yard. - 

vend,v. son, pro. meilleur, adj. drap, m, verge,?. 

Burgundy wine (is sold) nine shillings a bottle. - - 

se rercd.v. neu/, adj. 
My shoemaker sold 2 me 1 two pair of 

JUan, pro. corifcnmer, m. a i?enrfw,p.p. paire,f, 

shoes (at the rate) of 2 half x a guinea a pair. - - My 
Soulier, m. ci raison dejni 

master comes twice a w r eek. - - My uncle goes 

v i en t, v . de u x fois,zdv. v a, v. 

to France thrice a year. - - She gives three 

trois fois,adv. cm, m. donne,Y. 

shillings a day and ten pence a mile. 

jour, m. 7?i?7/e, m. 

N. B. ^ or an is not to be expressed when it imme- 
diately precedes a noun in the nominative or accusative 
case, denoting title, dignity, office, business, or words 
which point out the kind or species of things ; and 
lastly, after the verb etre, to be, unless this verb be pre- 
ceded by ce in the third person singular, or the above 
nouns be followed by an adjective or any other modifica- 
tion, one of the relative pronouns, who, whom, which, &c. 
or by an adjective in the superlative degree: ex. 
3f., D, membre de id cKam- M. D. a member of the 

bre des communes, house of commons. 

5 



50 

Etes-vous Anglois ? Are you an Englishman ? 

Non, Monsieur, je suit No, sir, I am a French- 
Frangois, man. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I saw the Duke of C***, a prince of the blood, 
duc,m. sang, m. 

who (was speaking) to Mr. F., a member of 

qui, pro. parloit,\. 

parliament. - - His cousin is a surgeon, and his 

varlement,m. Son chirurgien,m. 

brother is a physician. - - My sister is a milliner, 

medecin,m f mar chande de modes, f. 

my brother is a tailor, and I am a carpenter. - - - 

tailleur,m. charpentier,m» 

I have read Castor and Pollux, a 2 French *opera. - - - 

opera, m. 
Bristol, a sea - port, passes now 

mer,(, port,m. passe,v, a present,adv. 

for the second city of the kingdom of Eng- 

pour, p. 
land. - - - The king made 2 him 1 a bishop. - - - 

fit, v. 7e,pro. 6veque,m. 

Is she a duchess, or a marchioness ? - - - No, 

E$t,v. duchesse,(. marquise,f, 

she is a countess. 
comtesse,f, 

OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 
Adjectives form their plural as the substantives. 

Rule to form their Feminine Gender. 
Many adjectives in al have no plural for their mascu- 
line ; as conjugal, conjugal ; fatal, fatal \ filial, filial ; natal, 
natal ; naval, naval ; total, total ; and some few others, 
with whicha little prictice will soon acquaint the learner. 

Adjectives ending in e mute are of both genders: ex.* 

Unjeune homme, A young man. 

Une jeune fcmme^ A young woman. 



5i 

Adjectives ending with one of the following letters, 
d, e, i, /, n, r, s, /, and u, form their feminine by adding 
an e mute : ex. 

Masc. Grand, Fern, grande* great, tall, large. 
Poll, polie, polite. 

Aime, aimee, loved. 

Civil, civile, civil. 

Demi, demie, half. 

Nu, nue, naked. 

The last two adjectives are indeclinable when they 
precede a substantive, but are declinable when they 
follow it : ex. 

Une demi-livre, A half-pound. 

Une livre et demie, A pound and a half. 

Nu fete, bare head, ) la tele nue. 
JVu pieds, bare feet, y les pieds nus. 
There are a few ending in an, as, el, il, til, ien, in, 
ts, et, is, on, os, ot, and ul, that double the final letter, 
before an c, mute, for the feminine: ex. 
Masc. Gras, Fern, grasse, fat, 

Gentil, gentille, genteel. 

Eternel, iternelle, eternal. 

Pareil, pareille, alike. 

Chretien, chreiienne, christian. 

Epais. epaisse, thick. 

Bon, bonne, good. 

* "When that adjective precedes a substantive singular of the 
feminine gender, beginning with a consonant, we often suppress, in 
French, both in the pronunciation and writing the e, which is 
supplied by an apostrophe as in the following instances. 
Jl grand'' peine, with hard labour. 

L grand'' f aim, (very hungry. 

Avoir Kgrand" 1 soif, to be < very thirsty. 

(grand' peur, ( very much frightened. 

Faire grand' chere, to live well, to fare sumptuously. 

La grand'* mere, the grand mother. 

La grand? messe, the high mass. 

La grand"* chambre, the his:^ court. 

Should however the word grande be preceded by tres, fort, very. 
%me, one, or la plus, the most, then the final e must be added ; as, 
Une fort grande salle, A very l.arge room. 



52 

Masc. Gros, Fem. grosse, big. 

Sot, sotte, foolish, simple. 

The following are very irregular, and cannot be com- 
prised under any rale, viz. 

Mage. Beau, bel* Fem. belle, handsome, fine. 

Benin, ben igne, benign. 

Favori, favorite, favourite. 

Fou, fol,* folk, foolish, crazy. 

Frais, fraiche, fresh. 

Ziong, longue, long. 

Malin, maligne, malicious. 

Mou, mol* molle, soft, 

Nouveau, nouvel,* nouvellc, new, novel. 
Vieux, vieil* vieille, old. 

Adjectives ending in c add he to ^he c for their 
feminine : ex. 

Masc. Blanc, Fem. blanche, white. 

Franc, franche, sincere. 

Sec, seche, dry, &c. 

The four following are excepted. 
Masc. Cadac, Fem. caduquc, in decay; 

Grec, Grecque, Greek. 

Public, publique, public. 

Turc, Turque, Turkish. 

Those ending in / change / into ve for the femi- 
nine : ex. 
Masc. Bref Fem. breve, short. 

Naif, na'ive^ plain, ingenuous. 

Neuf neuve, new, not old. 

Veuf, veuve, widowed. 

Vif, vive, quick. 

Adjectives ending in x, change x into se : ex. 
Masc. Douloureux, Fem. douloureuse, painful, dolorous. 
Heureux, heureuse, happy, &c. 

Jaloux, jalouse, jealous. 

* These adjectives are used before substantives beginning with a 
vowel or h not aspirated. 



&s 



Masc. 



The following are excepted : 




Doux, 


Fem. douce, 


sweet. 


Faux, 


fausse, 


false. 


Perplex, 


perplexe, 


perplexed 


Prefix, 


prefixe, 


prefixed. 


Roux, 


rousse, 


reddish. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 

French adjectives must agree with their substantives 
in gender, number, and case : ex. 

Singular. — Masculine. 
Nom. Ace Le bon livre, the good book. 
Gen. Abl. Du bon livre, of or from, &c. 
Dat. Au bon livre, to the good book. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. Les bons livres, the good books. 
Gen. Abl. des bons livres, of or from, &x. 
Dat. aux bons livres, to the good books. 

Singular. — Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. La bonne plume, the good pen. 
Gen. Abl. de la bonne plume, of or from, &c. 
Dat. a la bonne plume, to the good pen. 

Plural. 

Nom. Ace. Les bonnes plumes, the good pens. 

Gen. Abl. des bonnes plumes, of or from, &c. 

Dat. aux bonnes plumes, to the good pens. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

The tall man, the little woman, and the 

petit, adj. 

pretty children, whom I met yesterday 

joli, adj. que, pro. ai rencontre, p.p. hier, adv. 

with their grandmother (were going) to London: 

alloient,v, 
tbey were all very hungry and thirsty. - - The polite 8 



avoient, v. 



5* 



54 

inhabitants 1 of that fine city treat all the 

habitant, m f cette,pro. traitent,v. 

strangers in a civil 2 and frank 3 manner. 1 - - 

elranger,m. deune maniere,f. 

Lean 2 sheep 1 grow fat in good 

Maigre,adj. brebis, f.pl. deviennent, v. dans, p. 

pastures. - - - Constant 2 study 1 joined to a great 

pdturage, m. i etude, f. joint, p.p. 

application makes men learned. --- The new 

application, f. rend,v. savant, adj. 

coat, which you 2 gave ^e, is 

'habit, ro. * ^we,pro. at>ez donne, p.p. 

better than the old great-coat which my 

meitkuf, adj. que,c. redingote,f. 

father had bought at his tailor's. - - We went 

chez,ip. alldmes, v, 

yesterday to the high court where we found all 

trouvdmes^y. 
the judges already met. 

deja, ad. assemble, p. p. 

As two or more substantives in the singular are, 
equivalent to a plural, the verb and adjective, or par- 
ticiple past, not immediately following them, must ^e 
put in the plural, when they refer to two or more sub- 
stantives in the singular, and that adjective or participle 
is to be put in the masculine, if these substantives be of 
different genders : ex. 

Lefrere, la sozur, U neveu, The brother, sister, ne- 
et la niece, sont tons phew, and niece are all 

morts, dead. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The book, paper, pencil, and penknife, which 
papier, m. crayon,m. canif,m. 
you lent 2 me 1 , are excellent. - - - The 

avez pr£le,p.p. me, pro. excellent, adj. 

pen, ruler, inkhorn and grammar which my bro- 
regie, f. Icritoire, f. 



gone. 
sorti, 
in a 


, - - - The 
p.p. 
word, all 


en mot,m. 
the ground, 

>• terre. f. 



ther has bought, are very good. The king, 

tre.s, adv. 
queen, prince, and princesses were 

etoient, v. 
eorn, wheat, rye, pease and beans, 
seigle, m. fiv^ f» 

the grains which were on 

grain, m. qui, pro. 6loient,v. sur,\). 
were frozen. - - - My father's house, and my uncle's 
furent,\. geli, p.p. 
(country-seat) are (very much) alike. 

chateau, m. bien> adv. semblable y a6j. 

When two or more substantives of different genders 
are immediately followed by an adjective or participle, 
the French language requires that adjective or parti- 
ciple to agree in gender and number with the last sub- 
stantive, except those adjectives or participles implying 
union or collection, such as joint, uni, reuni, &c. which 
follow the foregoing rule : ex. 

// gouverne avec un pou- He governs with an abso- 
voir et une auioriU ab- lute power and autho- 

solue, rity. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

He studies with an incredible application and 

ctudie, v. incroyable, adj. 

courage. He who has for his guides 

courage, m. Celui, pro. qui, pro. ^^ guide, m. 

consummate 3 zeal 1 and prudence 3 deserves 

eonsomme, adj. zele, m. prudence, f. mirite, v* 

the general esteem and applause of his 

estime,{. applaudissement,m. ses, pro. 

fellow-citizens. She left the trunk, the 

concitoyen,m. laissa,y, coffre,m. 

closet, and the room open. - - - 1 found 

cabinet, m. chambre,f. ouvert, p.p. ai trouve, p.p. 

the doors, the windows, and the shutters, shut. - - - 
porte,L fen£tre,f. vokts^tn. ferme, p.p; 



56 

We saw the children, father, and mother, well 

vimes, v. 
united. - - - When we arrived on the fron- 

riuni, p.p. Quand, c. arrivdmes, v. fron- 

tiers, we found the soldiers, the officers, 

tiere, f. trouvdmes, v. soldat, m. officier, m. 

and the general in chief, assembled, and 

en chef, m. assemble, p.p. 
(drawn up) in (battle array.) 
range, p. p. en, p. bataille, f. 

THE PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVE IN A SEN- 
TENCE. 

Some adjectives are always placed before their sub- 
stantives, and others after them ; but there is a kind 
of adjectives, which may either precede or follow their 
substantives, as the euphony of the sentence requires. 

The following must be placed before. 



Beau, handsome, fine, 
Bon, good. 
Brave, brave. 
Cher, dear. 

Chetif, vile, poor, mean. 
Galant, well bred. 
Grand, great, tall. 
Gros, big, large. 
Honnete, honest, civil. 
Jeune, young. 



Jolt, pretty. 
Mechant, wicked. 
Mauvais, bad. 
Meilleur* better. 
Moindre, less. 
Petit, little, small. 
Saint, holy. 
Tout, all. 
Vieux, old. 
Vrai, true. 



EXERCISE ©N THE FOREGOING ADJECTIVES. 

I have seen a handsome lady, who (was 

vu, p.p. dame, f. qui, pro. 

speaking) to an old gentleman. - - - He had 

parloit, v. gentil-homme, m. //, pro. avoit, v. 

a fine hat and a pretty sword. - - Your little 

cftapeau, m. Voire , pro. 



.37 

sister deserved a better fate. - - I know a young 

mtritoit, v. destin, m. connois, v. 

man who has a good horse, but a bad stable. 

cheval, m. ecurie, f. 

He 1 has 3 lent 4 it 2 to an honest man. - - The 

prete, p.p. le. pro. 

apostle Paul was a holy man. My brother has 

apolre, m. 

bought a good watch. - - - Your father was a 

aclicte, p.p. mantre, f. etoit, v. 

brave general, and a well-bred man. - - - You have 

avez, v. 
lost all your money. - - - -Vile creature, 1 have 

perdu, p.p. creature, f. 

heard your wicked conversation. 

entendu, p.p. conversation, f. 

Some adjectives have different meanings according as 
they are placed before or after their substantive, as, 
une famine sage, a wise woman: une sage femme, a 
midwife; and une grosse //em me, . a big woman; une 
femme grosse, a pregnant woman ; un homme honnete, 
a civil man : un honnete homme, an honest man; a lit- 
tle practice will soon remove any of these apparent dif- 
ficulties. " s 

The following adjectives must be placed after their 
substantives. 

1. All participles used as adjectives; as, 

Une per sonne reconnoiss ante , A grateful person. 
Du bozuf roti, Roast beef. 

2. All adjectives expressing the shape or form ; as, 
Une table ronde^ A round table. 

Une charnbre carrie, A square room. 

3, All adjectives expressing the colour or taste ; as, 
Un chapeau noir, A black hat. 

Un habit rouge r A red coat. 

Une pomme douce, A sweet apple. 

Une liqueur amere, A bitter liquor. 



5S 

4. All adjectives expressing the matter of which a 
thing is composed ; as, 

Des parties sulfureuses, Sulphurous parts. 

Un corps aerien, An aeriel body. 

5. All adjectives expressing the quality of hearing and 
touching; as, 

Un instrument sonore, A sonorous instrument. 

Une voix htirmonieuse, An harmonious voice. 

Un bois dur, A hard wood. 

Un corps mou, A soft body. 

6. All adjectives expressing the name of nations ; as, 

V empire Romain, The Roman empire. 

Lapoesie Angloise, The English poetry. 

7. All adjectives, which, when used by themselves, 
convey the meaning ol a substantive, as rich, blind, &c« 

Un homme riche, A rich man. 

Unefemme aveugle, _ A blind woman. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

An ignorant young man is despised by (every 

meprise, p.p. de, p. tout le 
body.) — You have an English hat, and she has a 
monde, m. Anglois, adj. 

French gown. - He reads an Italian proverb. - - 

Franqois,adj. robe J. lit, v. ltalien,a(\j. prove rbe,m, 

I like (very much) the German tongue and 

aime,v. beaucoup^adv. Allemand, adj. langue,f, 
the Spanish dress. - - - - (It is) a square place. 

Espagnol,adj.habiUement,m. Oest,v. carre, adj. place, f. 
She lik^s sweet wine. - - Your sister has an har- 

aime,v. doux, adj. vin, m. 

monious voice, * I have bought a white gown 

voix, f. blanc, adj. 

and a black cloak. - - - You have a faithful 

noir, adj. mantelet, m. fidele, adj., 



3D 

servant I eat green pease, with 

domestique, m. et, f. mange,v. vert, adj. 
boiled mutton. - Bring me a pound and a half 

bouilli,D.n, mouton, m. derm, adj. 

of cherries, and half a pound of currants. - We had a 

cerise, f. groseille, f. crimes, v. 

kind reception, and we played at a di- 

favorable, adj. accueil, m. joudmes,v. a, p. di- 

verting game. - He lives in a cold country. 

vertissant, adj. jew, m. demeure, v. froid, adj. pays, m. 

- - You have left the windows and the door 

laisse, p.p. fenetre, f. parte, f. 

open. - - Will you have a bit of roast 

^i morceau, m. rota", p.p. 

chicken ? - - Do you 2 read 1 the Punic war ? - - 

poulet,ai, «>• lisez, v. Punique, adj. guerre, f» 

He has made a rash vow. - - Your sister 

fait, p.p. timer aire, adj. rcew, m. 
is an agreeable lady. - - I like a grey stuff. - - 

agreable, adj. gris, adj. itoffe,L 

(It was) really a tragical history. 

C'e'/ojV, v. ree//emen/, adv. tragique, adj. histoire, f. 

When two or more adjectives belong to one substan- 
tive, trie surest way is to place them after it, with the 
conjunction ef, and. before the last ; and if an adjec- 
tive be used in a sentence without a substantive, this 
adjective must always be rendered in French by the 
masculine gender. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

We have a just, wise, and bountiful king. - - 

juste, adj. sage, adj. bienfaisant, adj. 
Mr. Brown's daughter is with a sincere and 

Monsieur, m. sincere, adj. 

generous lady. - - I have a scholar of a solid, 
genereux, adj. ecolier, m. solide, adj. 

bright, and lively genus. - - The wicked 

brillant, adj. vif, adj. esprit, m. mtchant, adj. pi. 

shall be punished. - - Miss Preston is a 

serontyV. puni, p.p. Mademoiselle^ f. 



6G 

young, handsome, and well-shaped lady. - - She has 

bien-fait, adj. 
married a sober, virtuous, and amiably 
epouse, p.p. sobre, adj. vertueux, adj. mma6/e,'adj. 

man. — The good shall be praised. — The diligent 

/owe, p.p. diligeht^&dj, pi. 

shall be rewarded. 

recompense, p.p. 

DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

Adjectives and adverbs are the only kind of words 
that will admit of different degrees of more or less in the 
several qualities of persons or things. 

There are two degrees of comparison : 

1. he comparatif, the comparative. 

2. Le superlatif, the superlative. 

Some grammarians admit of another degree, which 
they call positive : but this is merely an adjective used in 
its simple signification, without expressing any increase 
or diminution : ex.joli, pretty ; aimable, lovely. 

The comparative refers to some other person or thing, 
and shows its equality, excess, or defect : it is therefore 
of three sorts : 

1. Le comparatif dHgaliic, The comparative by equal- 

2. Le comparatif d'exces, The comparative by ex* 

cess. 

3. Le comparatif de defaut, The comparative by defect. 
The comparative by equality is formed by placing the 

adverbs autant, as much, as many ; aussi, so, or as, before 

an adjective : and que, as, after it : ex. 

Votre oncle a autanl d 3 ar- Your uncle has as much 

gent, et autant d?amis que money, and as many 

mon pere, friends as my father. 

Ma sozur est aussi ambi- My sister is as ambitious as 

tieuse que vous, y ou « 

Mon frere est aussi savant My brother is as learned as 

que le voire, yours. 



61 

N. B. — From the preceding examples and the follow- 
ing, it will be easily seen that when the adverbs, tant, 
so much, so many; autant, as much, as many; plus, 
more, and moins, less, are immediately followed by a 
substantive, that substantive must be preceded by de. 
The learner will also observe that si and aussi, so, as ; 
generally precede adjectives, when a comparison is 
made by either ; whereas tant and autant are always fol- 
lowed by a noun or verb, the French conjunction que, 
Englished by either as, than, or that, being the term of 
the comparison ; plus or moins may precede either an 
adjective, a noun, or verb. 

Than after more or less, plus ou moins, followed by a 
noun of number, is rendered in French by de, and not 
que, 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Alexander was as ambitious as Ca?sar. - - 

etoit,v. ambitieux,a.dj. que,c. Cesar, m. 
I am as tall as you. - - My father is as rich 

suis,v, haul, adj. riche, adj. 

as yours. - - Miss D. has as much liveliness, and she is 

vivacite, f. 
as amiable as her cousin. - - If my father were 

sa, pro. cousine,f, Si,c, 6ioit,v. 

as rich as my uncle, he (would make) a better use 

oncle, m. fereit, v. usage, m. 

of his riches. - - We have as many books as 

ses, pro. autant, adv. 

your brothers, and they are as learned as we. - - - - 
vos, pro. sont, v. nous, pro. 

I am as rich as you, and as honest and civil as my 

riche, adj. 
companions. - - You 2 owe 'me more than two dollars. 
compagnon, m. devez,v. gourde* 

The comparative by excess is formed by placing the ad- 
verb plus, more, before an adjective: ex. 
Sa cousine a plus de livres Her cousin has more books 
que moi, et est plus savante than I, and is more learn- 
que vous, ed than you. 

6 



G2 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Miss A. is handsomer and more learned than 

que, C. 
her sisters. - - Lucia is taller and more proud 

Lucie, L orgueilleux, adj.^ 

than her little cousin. His sister is more 

sa, pro. Sa, pro. 

covetous than he. Nothing is pleasanter 

(U>are,adj. lui, pro. Rienne, adv. agreable,adj. 

to the mind than the light of truth. 

esprit, m. lumiere, f. viriti, f. 

Nothing is more lovely than virtue, and 

amiable, adj. 
nothing is more desirable than wisdom. 

desirable, adj. sages se, f. 

My daughter is taller than your son by two inches. - - 

de pouce, m. 

Your brother is taller than you by the 2 whole 1 head 3 . - - 

tete, f. 
In winter the roads are always worse than 

En hiver, m. chemin, m. pins mauvais, adj. 

in summer. - - He gave me more than one eagle. 
ete, m. aigle. 

The comparative by defect is formed by placing the ad- 
verb moins, less, before an adjective; or tant, so much, 
so many ; or si, so ; with the negation rie pas, or point, 
not ; or ne, ni, neither, nor, before them : ex. 
Votre cousine est moins noble Your cousin is less noble 

quevous, than you. 

II tfest pas si orgueilleux que He is not so proud as his 
sa sozur, sister. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Mrs. P*** is less polite than her daughter, 

Madame, f. poli, adj. 

but her daughter (is not) so revengeful as she. 

ripest pas, adv. vindicatif, adj. 
You are 2 l not 3 so dutiful as youi brother. 

etes, v. ne pas, adv. obeissant, adj. 
Mv father is not so rich as yours, but he has 

h votre, pro. 



63 

not so much self-love. Miss Goodwill has less 

amour-propre, m. 
wit than her mother. - - Paris (is not) so populous as 

peupli, adj. 
London. — Your companion is neither so prudent, nor 

ni 
so circumspect as you. 
circonspect, adj. 

It must be observed, that in sentences in which the 
above adverbs more or less are repeated to express a 
comparison, the definite article the, preceding either, is 
totally suppressed in French : as, 

Plus on est pauvre, moins on The poorer people are, the 
a d\mbarras, less care they have. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The more a thing is difficult, the more honour- 

chose, f. difficile, adj. hono- 

able 3 it 1 is 2 . - - The less you give to your chil- 

rable, adj. elle, pro. donnez,v. 

dren, the less they spend. - - - The 1 richer 4 they 2 

its, pro. depensent, v. 
are 3 , the more covetous they are. - - The more a 

avare, adj. 
young man studies, the more learned he grows, 

etudie,v. savant, adj. devient,v. 

and the more respected he is. - - The more a 

respect e, p.p. 
drunkard drinks, the more thirsty he is. - - - - 

ivrogne, m. boit, v. altere, adj. 

The more odious laziness is, the more we 

odieux, adj. par esse, f. 
should avoid 2 it 1 . - - The less you a Ppty? 
devrions,v. cviter, v. la, pro. vous vous appliquez, v* 

the less you learn. - - The more they know 2 you 1 , 

apprenez, v. connoitront, v. 

the less they will esteem 2 you 1 . 
estimeroni, v. 
The above comparative adverbs, si, aussi, tant, autant, 
plus, and moins, must be repeated, in French, before 



64 

each adjective, noun, verb, or adverb, in the sentence : 
ex. 

Votre frere est aassi savant Your brother is as learned 

et aussi eclaire que mon and enlightened as my 

cousin, cousin. 

M, Robert na ni tant de Mr. Robert has neither so 

lien ni tant d'esprit que much wealth nor wit as 

M. Dubois, Mr. Dubois. 

EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

My father has as many apple - trees 

autant, adv. pommier, rn. k* 

and pear - trees in his orchard as (there are) 
poirier,m, «» verger, m. Hyena, v. 

in yours. - - - - His eldest brother will be more 

ai/ie,adj. sera, v. 

attentive, industrious, and rich than he. - - - 

attentif, adj. Indus trieux, adj. /m, pro. 

Miss S*** has less wit, less liveliness, and becom- 

vivacite, f. agre- 

ingness than her sister. - - She has as much virtue 
mens, m. pi. 
and good sense as beauty and modesty* - - My 

sens, m. Jrion, proT 

cousin is as merry, lively, and amiable as his 

gai, adj. enjoue, adj. ses, pro. 

school-fellows. 
compagnon, m. 

The same rule is to be observed with respect to the 
adverbs used in forming the superlative degree. 

The three following adjectives are comparative by 
themselves, meilleur, better ; pire, worse ; and moindre, 
less ; which signify plus bon,plus mauvais, plus petit, 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The watch which my grand-father has bought 

montre, f. que, pro. grand-pere, m. achet6e,p,p. 
is better than the clock which he gave to 

pendule,f. a donnee,p.p, 

my mother. - - - - My friend's buckles are better than 
mere : f. bouck^ f» 



65 

those of his uncle, but mine are worse 

celles, pro. onc/e, m. les miennes, pro. 

than his. The life of a slave is 

les siennes, pro. vie, f. esclave, m. 

ten times worse than death itself. - - - - The 

dix /ow,adv. mort,£. raeme, adv. 

pain which I endure is less than that which 

peine, f. souffre, v. celle, pro. qui, pro. 

is inflicted on galley-slaves. 

infligie, p.p. awa? galerien, m. 

The superlative expresses the highest degree of any 
quality. There are two kinds of superlatives : 1. The 
relative which expresses the quality of a person or thing 
above all others of the same kind. In this case, one of 
the following articles, le, la, les, de, du, de la, des, #, au y 
a la, aux, precedes the adverbs plus, most, mieux, best, 
moins, least, before an adjective ; or the adjectives meil- 
leur, best, moindre, least, pire, worse : ex. 
Votre sozur est la plus belle Your sister is the hand- 
ed la meilleure femrae de somest and best woman 
la ville, in the town. 

) 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The vine is one of the most useful* and agree- 
vigne,f. utile, adj. 
able gifts of Providence. - - Virtue is Hhe 3 most 4 pre- 
don,xn. Providence, f. pre- 
cious 5 thing 2 in the world. The lion is the 

cieux,adj. chose, f. du rnonde,m. 

strongest and most courageous of all animals* - - - 

fort, adj. courageux, adj. animal, m. 

(There is) the handsomest lady in London. - - She is 

Voila, adv. de 

so touchy, that she will not bear the least 

bourru, adj. veut^ v. souffrir, v. 

joke. - - - - Miss P. is the mildest, politest, and most 
raillerie,L doux, adj. poli,a<\j. 

affable of all her sisters. - - Ingratitude is 

qffuble,adj, ses, pro. 

* See the gender of adjectives, p. 50. 
6* 



the greatest of all vices. - - - If France were as rich 

vice, m. etoit,v. 

as England, (it would be) the best country in the 

ce seroit, v. pays, m * 

world.* 

The absolute simply expresses the quality of a person 
or thing in its highest degree. This happens when one 
of the adverbs tres,fort, bien, very, infiniment, infinitely, 
precedes an adjective ; and when any of the compara- 
tives by excess or defect are preceded by one of the 
possessive pronouns mon, ton, son, noire, votre, leur, &c. 
they become superlatives : ex. 

Votre oiseau est tres-joli, Your bird is very pretty. 

Vous ties men meilleur ami, You are my best friend. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

God is a being infinitely great and perfect. - - - 
tire, m. parfait, adj. 

I am your most humble and obedient 

tres, adv. obiissant, adj. 

servant. - - - The front of your house is very 
serviteur, m. facade, f. 

beautiful. - - - You are very good, but your brother 
beau, adj. 

is very wicked. - - - My uncle has a very fine coun- 
mechant, adj. cam- 

try - house, and very spacious 2 gardens 1 . - - - 

pctgne, f. spadeux, adj. 

My best friend is dead. - - - - Our common 

Notre, pro. commun, adj. 
enemy has the most inveterate 2 hatred 1 against 

inveiere, adj. haine,f. contre,p, 
this country. - - - Their least embarrassments 
ce, pro. Leurs, pro. embarras, m. 

* It may be observed in some of these examples, that the preposi- 
tion m, following an adjective in the superlative degree, must be 
rendered in French by one of these articles rfe, rfw, de Za, des, accord- 
ing to the gender and number of the substantive to which it belongs. 
The preposition by, when it follows an adjective in the comparative 
degree, is rendered by de only. 



67 



eatest delight. - - ■ 
defaces, f. pi. 

are his least defects. 



ses, pro. defaut, m, 



make their greatest delight. - - - - Pride and 

font, v. dslices, L pi. Orgueil, m 

passion 
colere, f. 

OF NUMBERS. 
There are two kinds of numbers: 1st, The absolute, 
which simply relates the number of the things spoken 
of, viz. 



Un, (femin. une.) 

Deux, 

Trois, 

Quatre, 

Cinq, (q is sounded,) 

Six, (pron. siss,) 

Sept, (pron. set,) 

Huit, (t is sounded,) 

Neuf, (/is sounded,) 

Dioc, (pron. diss,) 

Onze, 

Douze, 

Treize, 

Quaiorze, 

Quinze, 

Seize, (set is broad,) 

Dix-sept, (pron. disss el,) 

Dix-huit, (pron. diz-uit.) 

Dix-neuf, (pron. diz-neuf,) 

Vingt, (gt are dropped,) 

Vingt et un, 

Vingt-deux, 

Vingt-trois, fyc 

Trente, 

Trente el un, 

Trente-deux, fyc, 

Quaranie, 

Cinquante, 

Soixante, (pron. soissante,) 

Soixar.te el un, 

Soixante et deux, $*c. 



g is dropt, but 
/ is sounded. 



One. 

Two. 

Three. 

Four. 

Five. 

Six. 

Seven. 

Eight. 

Nine. 

Ten. 

Eleven. 

Twelve. 

Thirteen. 

Fourteen. 

Fifteen. 

Sixteen. 

Seventeen. 

Eighteen. 

Nineteen. 

Twenty. 

Twenty-one. 

Twenty-two. 

Twenty-three, &c. 

Thirty. 

Thirty-one. 

Thirty-two, &c. 

Forty. 

Fifty. 

Sixty. 

Sixty-one. 

Sixty -two, &c. 



63 

Soixunte et dix, Seventy. 

Soixante et onze, fyc. Seventy-one, &x. 

Quatre-vingts,(gts are dropped, ^ p. , , 

and in the following too,) J ° ^' 
Quatre-vingt-un, Eighty-one. 

Quatre-vingt-deux, &c. Eighty-two, &c. 

Quatre-vingt-dix, ire. Ninety, &c. 

Cent, (t in cen< is dropped, and ) . * hundred 

in the following too,) J A or one hundred - 

Cent-un, A or one* hundred 

and one, &c. 
Deux cents, or rather cens, (x is 
dropped, and the final con- 
sonants in the following also, )> Two hundred, 
as before any other word, 
beginning with a consonant) 
Trois cens, Three hundred. 

Neufcens, (/dropped,) Nine hundred. 

Milky mil,] A or one* thousand. 

Deux milk, Two thousand. 

Trois milk, cy-c. Three thousand, &c. 

Cent milk, <$■«. A or one* hundred 

thousand, &c. 
Neuf cent milk, (f dropped,) Nine hundred thou- 
sand. 
Un million, A million. 

These absolute numbers are declined with the article 
indefinite de, a, and are always placed before the sub- 
stantive to which they are joined ; and they are invari- 
able in their form, except quatre-vingt, eighty ; cent, a 
hundred ; and million, a million ; which take an s in 
their plural, when immediately followed by a substan- 
tive : ex. 

Quaire-vingts femmes, Eighty women. 
Deux cens hommes, Two hundred men. 

* It will be seen by the following, that the English particle a or 
one is not expressed in French: ex. 
Je Vai vu et lui ai parte cent I have seen him and spoken to him a 

fois, millefois, hundred times, a thousand times. 

t Mentioning the date of the year, we must write, mil, and not 
milk : ex. Han mil huil-cent quinse, the year 1815. 



6$ 

4*- 
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I was in the company of seven gentlemen and 

compagnie, f. 
nine ladies. - - He has spoken to three officers and 

parte, p.p. 
two generals. - - If I had a hundred guineas I would 3 

avois,v, gumee,f. en 

lend 2 you 1 eighty. - - The army of our 

preterois,\, armee.f, nos, pro. 

allies was composed of a hundred thousand 

allie, m. eomposee, p.p. 

men of foot, and twenty thousand of horse. 

infanterie, f. cavalerie, f. 

They took fifteen hundred men prisoners, 

prirent, v. prisonnier, m. 

killed four thousand, wounded a thousand, 

en tuerent, v. en blesserent,v. 

and (carried away) above two millions in specie. - - 
emporterent, v. plus de especes, f. 

The battle (was fought) in one thousand eight hun- 

bataille,f. se livra,v, en 
dred and fourteen, at three o'clock in the morning. 
*o heure : f. du ' matin. 

It must be observed, that, when the number un, one, 
comes after vingt, twenty, trente, thirty, quaranie, forty, 
&c. ; the substantive, relating to those two numbers 
taken together, is put in the singular in French, though 
in the plural in English ; and, when the noun singular, 
in French, immediately following the unit, is attended 
by an adjective, that adjective must be put in the plu- 
ral : ex. 

Vingt-et-un homme, One and twenty men. 

Vingt-et-un an accomplis, Full one and twenty years 

old. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I have found a purse in which (there were) 

bourse, f. laquelle,yvQ. ilyavoit^y. 



70 

©ne and thirty guineas, one and forty crowns, and 
guinee, f. ecu, m. 

one and twenty shillings. I saw one and fifty 

chelin, m. ai vu, v. 

men assembled before St. James's palace. - - 

devant St. Jdques, m. 
When my brother died he was one and thirty 

mourut, v. avoit^ v. 

years old. - r - Mr. P*** will pay 2 me 1 one 

<& payera, v. me, pro. 

and sixty guineas well told I received 

Men, adv. complies, p.p. ai requ,v. 
yesterday by the last mail one and forty 

hier, adv. dernier e, adj. malle, f. 

letters well sealed, and very interesting. 
lettre,L cachetees, p.p. importances, adj. 

N. B. Such were the opinion and decision of the 
French Academy some years ago; but now the best au- 
thors write, vingt-et-un ans accomplis, trente el une guinees 
bien complies* 

However, custom will have us say, in the following 
instances, 

Vingt-et-un chevaux, One and twenty horses* 

Trente-et-un volumes. One and thirty volumes. 

The cardinal numbers must be used in French when 
speaking of the days of the month, though the ordinal 
be used in English ; but we must say, le premier, the 
first, speaking of the first day of every month : as, 

Le premier de Mai, The first of May. 

Le deux de Novembre, The second of November. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

My friend will come to see 2 us 1 on the fifth of 
viendra, v. voir, v. «* 

next 2 month. 1 - - Lady - day falls 

prochain,Z(\). mois,m. Notre dame, f. jour, m. tombe,v. 
on the twenty-fifth of March. - - In the leap 3 
lo^ Mars, m. bissextile^ adj. 

f 



71 



year* the month of February has one day more, 
annit, f. Fevrier, m. de plus, adv. 

which is the twenty-ninth. -- The first of November 
qui, pro. Novembre,m* 

is (all-saints - day,) and the fifth of the same month 

la toussaint,f. meme,adj. 

is the day of the 2 Gun - powder ^lot. 

des poudres,$\. conspiration, f. 
Come on the first day of July. 
Venez, v. Juillet, m. 

2. The ordinal numbers. This class of numerals, be- 
side the simple notation, signifies the order or rank of 
things, viz. 



Le premier ou unieme, 

Le second ou deuxieme, 

Le troisieme, 

Le quatrieme, 

Le cinquieme, 

Le sixieme, 

Le septicrn ., 

Le huitieme,* 

Le neuvieme, 

Le dixieme, 

Le onzieme* 

Le douzieme, 

Le ireizrhne, 

Le quatorzieme, 

Le quinzierne, 

Le seizieme, 

Le dix-septieme, 

Lp dix-huitieme, 

Le rHx-neuvieme, 

Le vingtieme, 

L( vinvt-et'Unieme, 

Le vingt-deuxieme, &c. 

Le trentieme, 

Le trente deuxieme, fyc. 

Le quararttieme, 



The first. 
The second. 
The third. 
The fourth. 
The fifth. 
The sixth. 
The seventh. 
The eighth. 
The ninth* 
The tenth. 
The eleventh. 
The twelfth. 
The thirteenth. 
The fourteenth. 
The fifteenth. 
The sixteenth. 
The seventeenth. 
The eighteenth. 
The nineteenth. 
The twentieth. 



The twenty-first. 

The twenty second, &c. 

The thirtieth. 

The thirty-second, &.C. 

The fortieth. 

* No elision is to be made in the article before onse, onsieme ; huit^ 
huitieme ; for we say, It, du^au, fa, de lct x Ala^ &c. onze, onzitme,kc. 






72 

Le cinquantieme, The fiftieth. 

Le soixantieme, The sixtieth. 

Le soixante-et-dixieme^ The seventieth. 

Le quatre-vingtieme, The eightieth. 

Le cenlieme, The hundredth. 

Le cent unieme, The hundred and first. 

Le cent deuxieme, &c. The hundred and second^ 

&c. 

Le deux centieme, The two hundredth. 

Le millieme, The thousandth. 

These ordinal numbers are declined with the article 
definite Ze, /a, &c. and are placed before their substan- 
tives : ex. 

Le premier jour du mois. The first day of the month. 

EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULE. 

On the eleventh of June I received twelve letters, 
vc» Juin, ai recu, v. 

but the eleventh 2 has afforded 3 me 1 more 

procure, p.p. me, pro. plus, adv: 
pleasure than the others. - - Mrs. B. is the fifth 

aut re, pro. Madame, f. 
lady whom I saw to day. - - - The spring 

que, pro. ai vue,v. aujourd'hui, adv. printemps,m. 
begins on the twenty-first or twenty second of 

commence, v. 

March. - - - - He cannot spend the sixth 

Mars, m. ne peut pas, v. depenser, v. 

part of his fortune. - - - - The eleventh of No- 

partie,L sa,pro. fortune, f. 
vember, which is the eleventh month of the year, 

annee, f. 
was the dullest 2 day 1 of the 2 whole 1 month 3 . 
triste, adj. ^m/,adj. 

Speaking of sovereigns, we use the absolute number in 
French, though the ordinal be used in English, except the 
first and second; but we place it after the substantive, 
as in English, without expressing the article the : ex. 



73 

George Trois, George the Third. 

Louis Seize, Lewis the Sixteenth. 

Henri Quatre, Henry the Fourth. 

Henri Premier, Henry the First. 

George Second, George the Second, 

and not, Henri Un, George Deux. 

We also say, for the following names of Emperor and 
Pope only, 

Charles Quint, Charles the Fifth. 

Sixte Quint, Sixtus the Fifth. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Edward the Sixth, the son of Henry the 

Edouard,m. jils^m. 

Eighth, and the grand - son of Henry the Seventh, 

petit, adj. 
was 2 'but 3 nine years old when he began 
avoit,v. ne que, an, m. *o> quand, c. commenca, v. 

to reign Henry the Fifth, King of England, 

a regner, v. roi, m. 

the son of Henry the Fourth, and father of Henry 

the Sixth, married Catharine, the daughter of 

epousa,v. Catherine,?. 
Charles the Sixth, king of France ; conquered the 

conquit, v. 
greatest part of that kingdom, and died 
grand, adj. partie,t\ ce, pro. royaume,m. mourut,Yt 

(in the) midst of his victories. - - - (Long live) 

au milieu ses, pro. victpire, f. Vive, v. 

George the Third, grand - son to George the 

pe/i/,adj. 

Second. Charles the Fifth, king of Spain, and 

roi, m. 
Sixtus the Fifth, pope of Rome, were two 

pape, m. itoitnt, v. 

great men. 
grand, adj. 

The definite article the is also suppressed in French 
before the ordinal number, when it is perceded by a 
noun used to quote a chapter, article, or page of a book ; 
7 



74 

but, should the ordinal number precede the noun, the 
construction is the same in French as in English, and 
the article is expressed : ex. 

Livre troisieme, Book the third. 

he troisieme livre, The third book. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

What you (look for) you (will find 2 ) it 1 

Ce que,\>ro. cherchez,v. trouverez,v. /e, pro. 

in the Second Book of Samuel, chapter the 

Samuel, m. chapitre, m. 
third, verse the ninth, page the first, and 
verset,jm, P a g e i f» 

line the tenth. We read in Telemachus, 

ligne, f. lisons, v. Telemaque, m. 

book the seventh, page the hundred and twenty- 
fifth, that Mentor pushed Telemachus into the sea, 

que poussa, v. mer, f. 

and threw 3 himself 1 (into it 2 ) afterward with 

jeta,v. se, pro. t/, adv. ensuite,adv, 

him. - - - Our master forgives the first time, 

Zm,pro. Notre, pro. pardonne,\. fois,L 

threatens the second, and always 2 punishes 1 

menace,v, toaj ours, adv. punil;v, 

the third. 

RECAPITULATORY or promiscuous EXERCISES 
upon all the preceding RULES. 

Ignorance is the mother of admiration, 

Ignorance, f. est,v, mere,(. admiration, f. 

error, and superstition. - - - - The covetous de- 
erreur, f. superstition, f. avare. adj. me- 

spise the poor. - - - - Humility is the basis of 
prisent,v, pauvre,didy Humilite,f. base J. 

Christian virtues. - Pride is generally the effect 
Chretien, adj. Orgueil,m. ejfe£,m. 

of ignorance. - - Give me some bread, meat, 

Donnez,v. moi, pro* 



75 

turnips, and water. - - Merit and favour are 
navet,m. M6rite,m. faveur,f. sont,\\ 

the two springs of envy. - - - Interest, pleasure, 

source, f. envie,f. Interet,m, 

and glory, are the three motives of the actions 

motif J m. 
and conduct of men. - - Is 2 it 3 x not 4 

conduite^L Est, v. ce,pro, nepas,adv. 

Peter's book ? Your father is gone to London, 

alle, p. p. 
where he has bought some horses and a great many 
cows, which he intends to send to Canada or 
vache, f. que, pro. se propose, v. dhnvoyer, v. 
Jamaica. - - The father's house and the son's gar- 

maison,f. jar- 

den (are adjoining.) - - He found the windows 
din, m. se joignent, v. trouva, v. 

and the doors shut. - - Truth is the bond of 

Verite, f. lien, m. 

union and the basis of human happiness : 

union, f. humain, adj. bonheur,m, 

without it (there is no) confidence in 

sans, p. elle, pro. il tfy a point conjiance, f. 

friendship, and no security in promises. - - 

amitii, f. point, adv. surete, f. promesse, L 

The love of liberty and independence is the 

amour, m. liberie, f. 

character of noble minds. - - - Iron, steel, 

earactere, m. dme, f. Fer, m. acier, m. 

and brass are more useful than gold and 

cuivre, m. utile, adj. 

silver. - - The smith has at last repaired 

serrurier, m. m/&/i,adv. rejoare,p.p. 

the two jacks, and the cook (is 

tourne-broche, m. cuisiniere, f. fait 

roasting) the meat. - - I have seen the inside of the 

rdtir, v. dedans, m. 

church. Bring me my powder-box, and 

6glise,L ma, pro. 

my toupee-iron. - - I take a lesson three times 

mon, pro. prends *<* 



76 

a week. - - The study of grammar is 3 Neither 3 so 
etude, f. ne ni,c, 

dry nor so dull as (it is thought.) 

sec, adj. triste,adj. on se P imagine, v. 

Have prudence and patience, and you (will have) 
Ayez, v. aurez, v. 

success. - - - - A good conscience is to the soul 
succes, m. conscience, f. dme,f. 

what health is to the body. - - Merit and 

ce que, pro. sante,L corps, m» 

virtue are the only source of true 

unique,^]. viritable^dy 

nobility. - - - Religion, commerce, and arms 
noblesse,L Religion,L commerce, m. arme,L 

are proper instructions for a young prince. - - 

propre, adj. instruction,^* a 
Her father has been made a knight 

Son, pro. ete, p.p. fait,p.p, chevalier,m> 

of the order of the Bath, and her grandfather 

ordre,m» Bain,m» 

was a knight of the order of the Garter. 

itoit,v, Jarretiere, f. 

He has not so much profit, but more honour. - - 

tant, adv. profit, m. 
Fortune's favours are seldom the prize of 

fav eur, f, raremen t, a d v. prix, m . 

virtue. - - Gaming is the son of avarice, and the father 

Jeu, m. 
of despair. -- This cloth is equal to silk. - 

disespoir, m. Ce, pro. drap,m. comparabh,a.dj. $oie,f, 
I see the coast of England. - - - - A forest twenty 
vois,v, cote,(. forct,^ 

miles long and eleven wide. The example of a 

mille,m. exemple,m. 

good life is a lesson for the rest of man- 

pour, p. reste,m. genre 

kind. - The French fleet was destroyed 

humain,m. Francois, adj. flotte,L fut,v. detruite,p, p. 
by the brave Admiral Nelson, on the first of August, 
Amiral,m. & Aout,m» 

<$ne thousand seven hundred and ninety eight. ••-*-- 



77 

The eldest son of the king of England 

aini, adj. 
bears the title of Prince of Wales as 

porte,v. titre,m. Galles,^\. comme, adv. 

presumptive heir to the crown. - - Lewis 

presomptif , adj. heritier,m, couronne,f. Louis 

the sixteenth was the grand-son of Lewis the fif- 
petit, adj. 

teenth. William, surnamed the Con- 

Guillaume,m» swrnomme, p.p. Con- 

queror, King of England and Duke ofJNor- 

querant, m. Due, m. Nor- 

mandy, was one of the greatest generals of the 

mandie,(. 
eleventh century. - - - He (was born) at Falaise, and 

siecle,m. ndquit,v. a 

was the natural son of Robert, Duke of Nor- 

nalurel, adj. 
mandy, and of Arlotte, a furrier's daughter. - - He 

fourrtur, m. file, f. 
died at Hermentrude in France, on the ninth of 

mourut, v. a 

September, one thousand eighty-seven. - - Mrs. Nel- 
son's servant knows the price of all the provisions.' 

servante,(, sqjii,y. prix,m. denrit,L 

- - She bought yesterday some chickens at one shilling 

poulet,m. a 
and three pence a piece. - - She came from America 

vint, v. 
in three weeks. - - Thomas was formerly a mu- 
en, p. autrefois, adv. mu- 

sician, now he is a dancing - master, 

sicien, m. a present, adv. danse,L ?naitre,m. 

to-morrow he will be a painter. - - This 
demain,adv. sera,v. peintre,m. Cette, pro. 

water is very agreeable to the smell. We 

odor at, m. 
(are going) to Coxheath, to see the camp. - - I 

allons,v. u» voir,v. camp,m. 

have in my ward-robe five coats, sixteen waistcoats, 
7* 



*?8 

twenty-two pair of stockings, and forty-six hand- 

mou- 
kerchiefs. - - - The road to Croydon is very bad 

choir i m. chemin, m . 

in winter. - - Bring us good wine, good beer, 

en, p. hiver, m. 
and the oil-bottle. - - The front of the king's pa- 

facade, f. 
lace (is not) so beautiful as I thought. - - - Gene- 
ricness croyois,v. Gene- 
rosity excites admiration. - - Charles the second, 
rosite, f. excite, v. admiration, f. 
the son of Philip the fourth, the grandson of Philip 

Philippe 
the third, and the great grand-child of Philip the 

arriere, petit - jils,m. 
second, left his kingdom to Philip the fifth. - - 

* laissa,v. son, pro. 
On the eighteenth of February one thousand four 
«* Fevreir, 

hundred and seventy-eight, the Duke of Clarence, 
brother to King Edward the fourth, was drowned in 
frere, m. fut, v. noye,p.p. 

a butt of malmsey-wine. - The inhabitants of the 

tonneau,m» malvoisie,L habitant, m. 

city of Dublin have presented a petition to 

ville,f. ont,v. presente,p,ip. adresse,f. 

the king. It was signed by one-and- 

Elle, pro. etoit,v. signe,p.p. par, p. 
twenty knights and above two hundred citizens. 

plus de, adv. citoyen,m. 

- - Good cider is preferable to bad wine. - - That 

cidre, m. 
man always wears a green hat, a white shirt, red 

a, v. chemise, f. 

shoes, and black stockings. He has many children 

bas,m. bien,adv, 

and plenty of money. - - - The longer the 

beaucoup,adv* argent, m. /emg, adj. 

day is, the shorter is the night. - - You have a fine 



73 

hat. - - Shame is a mixture of the grief and 

Honte,i. melange, m. chagrin, m. 

fear which infamy causes. Religion, 

crainte,?. que,\)TO. infarnie,f. cause,v. 
morality, government, fine arts, in a word, 

morale, f. gouvernement, m. en, p. 

(everything) is overturned. -- Homer was the 

tout renverse, p.p. fat, v. 

first poet who personified the divine at- 
poete,m. personnifia,\, dn;m,adj. at- 

tributes, human passions, and physical 
iribut,m. humain, adj. physique, adj. 

causes. Pride and vanity are often the source 

vanil6,L souvent,adj. 

of the misfortunes of mankind* - We sell 

malheur,m, vendons,v, 

good bread, excellent meat, and very large 

gros, adj. 
fishes ; but 1 we 3 have 4 3 neither 5 gold nor 

poisson,m. mais,c. avons,v. 

silver. - - (Is there) any beer in the cellar ? - - 

Y a-t-il dans, p. cave, f. 

Mrs. B. is a good, virtuous, prudent, and 

vertueux, adj. 
generous lady : she has a daughter as beautiful as an 

filled 
angel, but she has neither so much docility nor af- 
ange, m. 
fability as her cousin. - - Pindar (was born) at 

Pindare,m, ndquit,Y. 
Thebes, a city of Greece. - - Malta is a small 

Grtce,L Malthe,f. 

island, but it produces eorn, cotton, honey, 

He, f. elie,pro, produit,Y. colon,m. miel,m. 

figs, and the finest oranges in the world. - - The 
figuef. beau, adj. orange,L 

inhabitants of that fine country are all catholics, 
and go every Sunday to hear high mass. - - The 

vont,v, Dimanche,m. «* 

pleasure of the mind is greater than the pleasure 



80 

of the body, and the diseases of the mind are 

corps, m . maladie, f. 

more pernicious than the diseases of the body. - - 

pernicieux, adj. 
Health, honors, and fortuno, united together, 

Sante, f. uni, p.p. ensemble, adv. 

cannot satisfy the heart of man. - - - 

nepeuvent,v, satisfaire,v, cozur, m. 

(It is) in the sixth page of the second book, chapter 
Cist, v. 

the third. - - Miss W's. father, a banker in the 

Strand, is one of the richest men in town, but 

Strand, m. 
she is prouder and more haughty than 

orgueilleux, adj. hautain, adj. 

if she were the handsomest woman in Europe. 

itoit, v. * 

Their son arrived yesterday at Portsmouth from 

Leur, pro. 

Peru and Martinico, in the St. George, a ninety- 
Perou Martinique, 

gun ship. - - - Hypocrisy is a homage which 

canon,m. vaisseau,m. hommage, m. ^tte,~pro. 

vice P a J s to virtue. - - A judicious answer 

*tice,m, rend, v. judicieux,2iAy reponse,f. 

does more honour than a brilliant repartee. - - 
fait,\\ inV/cmf, adj. repartie,L 

Give me a knife and fork. - - My father has bought 
one-and-thirty fine grey horses. - - (He is) an 

gris, adj. Ccst, v. 

intrepid man, and a man of honor and pro- 

intripide, adj. pro- 

bity. - - - Mr. C***, the queen's jeweller, has a 
bite, f. jouailler, m. 

very prudent wife, and the most faithful, indus- 

fidlle, adj. indus- 

trious, and honest servant in London. - - 

trieux, adj. honnete, adj. * 

* See the remarks on the prepositions in and fry, in the note, in 
the degrees of comparison, page 66. 



81 

He found beauty, youth, riches, wisdom, 

trouva,v. jeunesse,f. 

and even virtue, united in her per- 

9neme,adv. mmi, p.p. 5a, pro. 

son. - Thomas has discretion, but he has no 

discretion^, ne point, adv. 

wit. - - They have a quantity of apples and pears. - - 

quantite, f. 
Vienna, the capital of the empire of Germany, 
Vienne, f. Allemagne, f. 

is a tine city. - - The more pleasing plays 

agriable, adj. spectacle, m. 
are, the more dangerous they are. - - The rich, 

dang ereux, adj. 
the poor, the young, the old, the learned, and 

savant, ^y 
the ignorant, are all subject to death. - - - True 

su/e*,adj. mort,f. Fnn,adj. 

friends are as rare as good kings. - - - The 

rare, adj. 
famous mine of Potosi, in Peru, is above 

fameux,adj» mine,L plus, adv. 

two hundred and fifty fathoms deep. - - Henry the first, 

toise, f. Henri 

king of England, and brother to William Rufus, 

h Roux, 
died the richest prince in Europe. - - Paul is taller 
mourut, v. 
than you by an inch, but Mrs. Nichol's brother is 

* pouce, m. 
the tallest of all. 



SECT. III. 

OF PRONOUNS. 

There are seven sorts of Pronouns ; 

1. Les Pronoms personnels, Pronouns personal. 

2. Les Pronoms conjonctifs, Pronouns conjunctive. 

* See the Note, page 66. 



$2 

3. Les Pronoms possessifs, Pronouns possessive. 

4. Les Pronoms demons tratifs, Pronouns demonstrative. 

5. Les Pronoms relatifs, Pronouns relative. 

6. Les Pronoms inter rogatifs, Pronouns interrogative. 

7. Les Pronoms indefinis, Pronouns indefinite. 

OF PRONOUNS PERSONAL. 

Pronouns personal are those which directly denote the 
persons, and supply the place of them. 

There are three persons: 

The first is the person who speaks : ex. 
Je park, I speak. 

Nous parlons, We speak. 

The second is the person spoken to : ex. 
Tu paries, Thou speakest. 

Vous parkz, You speak. 

The third is the person spoken of: ex. 
II or elle park, He or she speaks. 

lis or elks parlent, They speak. 

Both Genders. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je or moi, I. Nous, we. 

Tu or toi, thou. Vous, you or ye. 

Masculine. 
II or lux, he, it. Us, or eux, they. 

Feminine. 
Elle, she, it. '-. Elks, they. 

The above pronouns are never to be used but as nomi- 
natives to the verbs. The rest are declined with the 
article indefinite: ex. 

First Person for both Genders. 
Singular. Plural. 

G. A. de mot, of or from me, de nous, of or from us. 
Dat. a rtwi) to me, a nous, to us. 

Ace. moi. me, nous, us. 



83 
Second Person, for both Genders. 

Singular. Plural. 

G. A. de toi, of or from thee, de vous, of or from you. 

Dat. a toi. to thee, a vous, to you. 

Ace. toi. thee. vous, you. 

Third Person. 

Singular. 

G. A. de lui, of or from him, d'elle, of or from her** 
Dat. a lui, to him, a elle, to her.* 

Ace. lui, him. e//e, her.* 

Plural. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

G. A. d'eux, of or from them, dalles, of or from them. 
Dat. a eux, to them, d e//es, to them. 

Ace. eux, them, e//es, them. 

There are two other pronouns of the third person, 
viz. 

Singular and Plural. Both Genders. 

1 i. r^ * j '• r c S one's self, himself, herself, 
1st. G. A. de soi, ot or from < ,. ".....' ' 

( themselves. 

Dat. a soi, to one's self, himself, &c. 

Ace. soi, one's self, himself, &c. 

N. B. Though it have been said, that the personal 
pronouns are used for the names of persons, it must not 
thence be concluded, that they are never employed for 
the names of animals or inanimate objects : this seldom 
happens in the first and second persons; but the per- 
sonal pronouns, il, die, Us, elks, may denote every object 
in nature, either animate or inanimate : ex. 

Ce chien est fort btau, metis That dog is very handsome, 
il est trop gras, but it is too fat. 

* Her, when standing; by itself, is to be rendered by die, la, or lui ,*- 
but, if joined to a noun, by the pronoun possessive, son, sa, szs. 



84 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 



This picture is very old, but it is 

Ce,pro. portrait,m. ancien, adj. 

well painted. - - The house which I bought 

$en, adv. peint, p.p. awe,pro. ai ac/ie*e,p.p. 

is well situated, but I assure 2 you 1 that it 
) sitae, adj. assure, v. owe, adv. 

eost a me 1 much. The books which 

coute.v* wie, pro. beaucoup, adv. 

you saw in my library are good 

vites, v. ma, pro. bibliotheque, f. 

books, but they are badly bound. Your 

ma/, adv. re/ie, p.p. Vos, pro. 

buckles would be much more in the fashion, if 
boucle, f. seroient, v. a mode, f. 

they were smaller. My hat is quite 

etoient, v. Mori, pro. tout, adv. 

new, but it is too big. Their 

new/, adj. Wop, adv. grand, adj. Lewr,pro. 

coach is old, but it is as good as if 

carosse, m. vieux, adj. si, c. 

it were new. 
itoit, v. 

2d. The general and indefinite pronoun, on, one, is 
always considered as a nominative of the masculine gen- 
der, and can never be used (in French) but in the singu- 
lar, though the meaning be plural ; ex. When we say, 

On chante, on mange, They sing, one eats, or people eat ; 
L e. some men or women sing, eat. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

People imagine that when they are 

On, pro. s"* imagine, v. que quand, adv. on est,v, 
rich, they are happy ; but they (are mistaken) 

on heureux, adj. on se trompe, v. 

very often ; for, the more one has, the 

ires, adv. souvent, adv. car,c. 

more one wishes to have. When we are 

veut, v. -o» avoir, v. 



So 

(raised up) to honors, er we are invested 

ilevi, p. p. ouque,c, rer$tu,p. p. 

with some dignity, we are to expect 

de quel que, ■did], dignite,f. doit, v. s'attendre,v. 

to be criticised. - - - - (Some persons) reported 
a etre critique, p. p. On, pro. rapporta,v. 

last week, that in France they 

derniere, adj. semaine, f. 
talk of peace. 
parle, v. 

The word mime, self, is very often joined to the per 
sonal pronouns, to denote, in a more special manner, 
the person spoken of: as, 

Moi-meme, myself. Soi-meme, one's self. 

Toi-meme, thyself. Nous-memes, ourselves. 

Lui-meme, himself. Vous-memes, yourselves. 

Elle-meme, herself. Eux-memes, or elks-mimes, 

themselves. 
Observations on the Pronouns Je and Moi, Tu and 
Toi, 11 and Lui, lis and Eux. 

Je and moi are used in two different senses, though 
both in the nominative case ; Je is always followed or 
preceded immediately by a verb to which it is the nomi- 
native case, and has no need to be joined to another 
pronoun : but moi always requires to be followed by one 
pronoun or more, either expressed or understood : ex 

Qui apris mon livre? Who took my book ? 

C^est moi, It is I. That is, 

Oest moi qui Pai prw, It is I who took it. 

Moi must be used instead of Je before an infinitive 
mood, or at the end of a sentence, when it is intended 
to express something sudden, as grief, &c. ; when /, in 
English, is followed by the pronoun relative who or 
whom, or is preceded by the verb etre, to be, used im- 
personally, as c*est, it is 5 and lastly, whenever any diffe- 
rence or distinction is intended between persons; in 
which case it must be immediately followed by Je : ex* 

Moi lui parler I I speak to him or her ! 

Moi qui vous aime 1 I who love you. 

3 



86 

Jl etoit a pied el moi fitois He was on foot, and I was 
a cheval, on horseback. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. t 

Who (was calling 2 ) me 1 ? - - It was not 

appeloit,\. me, pro. Ce, pro. nepas^zdv. 
I. - - The boy wants to speak 2 to you 1 . I 

d£sire,\» *» parler, v. <^> 
who am older than he, I, go and speak 2 

age, adj. /w?,pro. aller,v. «» 

to him 1 ! No, I will not go, (let him come) 

Zm, pro. Non, adv. veux, v. qu'il vienne,\, 

himself. - - - It is I who am to be rewarded 

dois,v. <& recompense, p.p. 

instead of him. My father commanded the 

au lieu Zwi, pro. command oit, v. 

horse, and I commanded the foot. He 

cavaleriejk infanterie, f. 

could not do 2 it 1 in one day, and I 

put, v. faire, v. le, pro. en, p. 

did it in the space of three hours. - - - 

aifait,v. dans, p. espace,m. heure,(.~ 

When the enemy appeared, my companions 

parui^v. mes,pvo. 
(ran away) and I remained alone. 
prirent lafuile,v. restai,v. seul, adj. 

The same rule is to be attended to with respect to 
tt>h lui, eux, &lc. : as, 

Toi qui me paries, Thou who speakest to me. 

Lui que je meprise, He whom I despise. 

Eux queje respecte, They whom I respect. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

How darest thou answer thy 

Comment, ad v. oses,v. repondre a,v. ton, pro, 

master in so 3 insolent* a 1 manner 2 ? thou 

de, «i,adv* insolent, adj. maniere, f. 

whom he loves, thou for whom he takes 

que, pro. ai?ne,v, pour,p. qui, pro. prend,v. 

so much pains. He and they, not (being able) 

peine, f.sing. pouvant, v. 



8 ? 

to agree, were obliged to part. - - 

s^accorder, v. furent, v. oblige, p. p. de se separer, v. 
It is I who wrote the letter but it is he 

ai ecrit,v* lettre,L 

who carried it. It is 3 Neither 3 I, nor 

a portee, p. p. la, pro. nt ni, c. ni, c. 

thou, nor he, who have broken the windows, 

avons, v. cass e, p.p. fenetre,L 

but it is they who have 2 done 3 it 1 . 

on/, v. y*at7, p. p. /e,pro. 

After these remarks, it is also necessary to observe 
here, that je, I, never admits of an adjective or participle 
immediately after it, except in acts, or deeds, notes, or 
bills, receipts, and the like : ex. 
Je, soussigne, demeurant a I, the undersigned, living 

Londres, declare, &c. in London, declare, &c. 

Je, soussigne, reconnois avoir I, the undersigned, acknow- 

requ de Moris, D**, la ledge to have received 

somme de — from Mr. D**, the sura 

of— 

OF CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 

These pronouns are called conjunctive, because they 
are always joined to some verb by which they are gov- 
erned, and are generally used for the dative or accusa- 
tive case of the personal pronouns. There are three 
persons in the conjunctive as in the personal, which are, 
For the first Person, both Genders. 

Singular. Plural. 

Dat. or Ac. Me, Moi* me or to me, Nous, us, or to us, 
for a moi, or moi, for a nous, or nous. 

For the second, both Genders. 
Dat. or Ac. Te, Toi* thee or to thee, Vous, you, or to you, 
for a toi, or toi, for d vous, or vous, 

* Moi and toi must be used instead of me or te, after the second 
person singular or plural of the imperative mood, conjugated without 

icoutez-moi, hear me. 

suivez-moi, follow me. 






88 

For the third. 
Singular. — Masculine, 



Pat. Lui, ( to him, to it, ) for a lui. 
Ace. Le, ( him, it, J ^ m * 



Dat. Lui, ( to her, to it, ) for a 
Ace. La, ( her, it, ) e 



Feminine. 

for a die. 
lie. 



Plural. — Both Genders. 

Dat. Leur, (to them, ) for a eux, m. a dles,L 

Ace. Les, (them, $ eux,m. elles,t\ 

r^ . A ( one's self, himself, ) r 
Dat. or Ace. 6e, \ u ir ..' \ } tor asoi.or soi. 
' ( herself, themselves, $ 

Five of these pronouns are used for the dative or ac- 
cusative case, and are of both Genders, viz. 

Me or mei, le or toi, nous, vous, se : ex. 

Vous me parlez, You speak to me. 

// vous croit, He believes you. 

Vous me priez de, <f'c. You desire me to, &c. 

In the first example, me is the dative case, because it 
may be turned by a moi, to me ; in the second, vous is 
the accusative. &c» 

Lui and four are used in the dative only, and are of 
both genders : 

Je lui parle, T speak to him or to her. 

Vous leur ccrivcz, You write to them. 

The three others are used for the accusative, and 
may be applied to things animate or inanimate, viz. 

Le, masc. him, it; la, fern, her, it ; and les, masc. 
and fern, them : ex. 

Je le vois tous les jours, I see him every day. 

Je le sais, I know it. 

Nous la connoissons, We know her. 

77 les enverra ce soir, He will send them to-night. 



89 

The pronoun personal may be placed before or after 
the verb, agreeably to the English construction ; but the 
conjunctive pronouns are to be placed (in French) be- 
fore the verbs by which they are governed, though they 
come after them in English : ex. 

Je park, I speak. 

Avons-nous parle, Have we spoken? 

II me parte, He speaks to me. 

Nous les connoissons, We know them. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Your brother bought yesterday a very good book, 
acheia, v. 
and after having 2 read 3 it 1 , he gave 2 it 1 

apres, p. avoir, v. lu, p. p. le, pro. donna, v. 

to my sister. You speak of my cousin, 

ma, pro. won, pro. 

do you know him ? - - - I see her and speak 

«» connoissez, v. vois, v. parle, v. 

to her (every day). Do you 2 know 1 your 

tous Us jours, «* savez,v. vos, pro. 

lessons ? - - - We know them all. - - I will carry 
hqon,f. savons,v. touf,adj. mineral, v. 

them to my brothers, but I (will write) 

chez,y. mes, pro. ecrirai,v. 

to them before. I find him more reason- 

auparavant,zdv, trouxe,v. raison- 

able than his sister. - - Your dog (is 

nable, adj. sa, pro. chien,m. a 

thirsty), shall 2 I 3 give 2 him 1 water? - - They are 

soif, donnerai,v. 

tired, and I give them some rest. 

fatigue, p. p. donne, v. repos^m. 

In the second person singular and the first and second 
persons plural of a verb in the imperative mood conju- 
gated affirmatively, the conjunctive pronouns come after 
the verb: but if the verb be conjugated negatively, the 
pronouns follow the above rule : ex. 
8* 



90 

Donnez-lui de P argent, Give him money. 

Ne lui donnez pas de pain, Do not give him any bread. 

EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Send them some apples, but do not send 

Envoy ez,\, k* 

them any plums. - - I give you these books, 

prune, f. donne, v. ces, pro. 

but do not lend them to your brother. - - - - 

pretez, v. votre, pro. 

You may tell it to my father, but do not 

pouvez, v. dire, v. mon, pro. «* 

tell it to my mother. - - Believe me, go 
dites, v. ma, pro. Croyez, v. allez, v. 

and speak to them, but do not insult them. - - 



vo* pC 


\rler, v. 


tC* 


insultez, v. 


Have 


you returned 


(to her) 


the handkerchief 




rendu, p.p. 




mouchoir, m. 


which she has lent * 


you ? - - 


Send it to-morrow, 




prete, p.p 


• 


<?emom,adv. 


do not 


, forget it. - 


- Bring 


me some cho- 




oubliez, v. 


Apportez 


, v. cho- 



colate, but bring 3 me 2 l no sugar. 
colat, m. 

When two imperatives are joined by either of the 
conjunctions, el, and ; ou, or ; the conjunctive pronoun 
or pronouns must precede the last imperative by which 
it is governed : ex. 
Allez le trouver, et lui dites Go to him, and tell him to 

de venir ici, come hither. 

After the verbs se Jier a, to trust to, penser, songer a, 
to think of, viser a, to aim at, ceurir, accourir a, to run 
to, -venir a, to come to, and some of the reflective verbs 
followed by a preposition governing a dative case, the 
pronouns must be placed after the verb, especially if 
used in opposition or contradiction to each other ; or 
denote the order in which a thing ought to be done : 
and if there be more than one dative pronoun, the first 
only may be placed before the verb, and the others 
after: ex. 



91 

Fiez-vous a moi, Trust to me. 

Nous pens on s a vous, We think of you. 

Cela s'adresse a toi, That is addressed to thee. 

Je cours a /wi, I ruoJo him. 

// me parle anssi bien qu'a He speaks to me as well as 
vous ei a eux. to you and them. 

EXERCISE ON THESE AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Bring me my hat, or send 3 it 2 to me 1 by 

the carrier. Trust to him. but do not 

voiturier, in. Fiez-vous, v. 
trust to them, and do not believe them. - - Think 

croyez, v. Pensez, v. 

of us, and write to us as soon as you can. - - - 

ecrivez, v. «?-> tot, adv. pourrez, v. 

Go and see her, and carry her these 

Allez, v. «» voir, v. poriez, v. ces, pro. 

flowers. Send me my clock, or bring 3 it 2 

Jleurs, f. pendule, f. 

to me 1 yourself. - - - Do not give it to 

me, pro. vous-meme, pro. donnez,v. 

my sister, give it to me. Why do you prefer her to 

^ preferez, v. 

me, and give her all your affection ? 

When two or more of the conjunctive pronouns come 
together in the same sentence, they must be arranged 
in the following order. 

Singular. Plural. 

Me, m. & f. me or to me, Nous, m. & f. us or to us. 

Te, m. & f. thee or to thee, Vous,m, & f. you or to you* 

Se, m. & f. one's self, him- Se, m. & f. themselves, 

self, herself, 

are to be placed before all others ; — next, 

Le,m. him, it, Le$,m. &f. them. 
La, f. her, it, 

Then, 

Lm, m. & f. to him, to her, Leur,m. &l f. to them. 

// me le promit, He promised it to me. 

J* vous ks donnerai, 1 will give them to yoa. 



92 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 



My brother (will send) them to you, or he 

enverra, v. 
(will bring) them to you himself. - - - He likes 
apportera, v. aime, V. 

your 2 house 3 (very much 1 ,) for we s Wowed 

votre, pro. fort, adv. car, c. fimes voir,v, 

it to him. - - - Carry it to them. - - - He will 2 ^lot 3 

Portez, v. veut, v. nepas 

sell 6 it 4 to them, but he will give it to 

vendre, v. veut donner, v. 

you. - - - If they ask a favour, will you 

Si, c. demandent, v. grace, f. <^> 

refuse it to them ? - - - Why do you 

refuserez, v. Pourquoi, adv. 

give it to him ? Had you not promised 

donnez, v. Aviez, v. promts, p.p. 

it to her ? - - - He speaks to me, and not to you. - - 

park, v. 
If they behave themselves well, 1 will 

comportent, v. 
reward them. - - He had promised it to 

ricompenserai, v. avoit, v. 

him, but he gave it to me. 

a donne, v. 

N. B. There are three other conjunctive pronouns, 
commonly called particles relative, or supplying pro- 
nouns ; they are en, y, and le. 

En always denotes a genitive or ablative, and relates 
to some object mentioned before: it is rendered in 
English by of or from him, her, it, them ; about him, her, 
it, &c. ; with or without him, her, it, &c. ; at it, &c. ; for 
it, &c. ; upon it, &c. ; any, one, ones, none, some, some of, 
&c. ; thence, thereof, and sometimes it is elegantly un- 
derstood in English, especially when immediately fol- 
lowed by a numeral adjective or a noun of quantity, 
though it must be absolutely expressed in French : ex. 



03 



Nous en parlous, 



Ten suis fdche, 

Donnez-lui en, 

Lui en avez-vous portt ? 

Ne lui en envoy ez pas. 

Nous en venons, 

Combien avez-vous de do* 

mesiiques ? Nous en avons 

six, 
Avez-vous un jardin a la 

campagne? Oui, nous en 

avons un tres-joli. 



We speak of him, of her^ 
of it, of them ; about 
him, about her, about \% 
about them. 

I am sorry for it. 

Give him some. 

Did you carry him or her 
any ? 

Send him or her none. 

We come from it or thence* 

How many servants have 
you ? W 7 e have six. 

Have you a garden in the 
country ? Yes, we have 
a very pretty one. 



In the third, fourth, and fifth sentences it should be 
observed, that the pronouns of it, or of them, are ele- 
gantly understood in English, according to the object 
or objects mentioned before. 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE, 



I have heard that your uncle is arrived, 

oui dire,\, arrive, p.p. 

and I 1 am 3 very 4 glad 5 of it 2 . - - She spoke 3 to 

awe, adj. parla,v. 

him 1 of it 2 . - - - Talk 3 no 1 more 4 of it 2 , for I 1 

Parlez,v. ne plus, car,c, 

will 3 not 2 hear 6 of it 5 (any more 4 ). - - 

veux, v. ne entendre parler, v. plus, adv. 

I 1 thank 4 you 2 for it 3 . - - Do you 4 ^ot 5 see 3 

remercie,v, <& voyez,v* 

the 6 beauty 7 of it 2 ? - - They are sorry for 

sont, v. fdche, adj. 
it. - - Since you have no pears in your garden, 

Puisque,c. poire, f. 

I (will send) you some. - - They 1 have 4 stolen 5 
enverrai,\. ont,y. vole, p.p. 



94 

from us 2 the* greatest 7 part 8 of them 8 . - - My 

«o> partie, f. Mon, pro. 

brother has written a letter to your sister, and 

icrit, p.p. 
shown 3 me 1 the 4 two 5 first 6 lines 7 of it*. - - - 

a moniri, v. ligne, f. 

Will you lend me some books ? With all 

Voulez, v. preter, v. De, p. 

my heart, I will lend you some very pretty 

cozur, m. preterm, v. 
ones. - - Do you 2 think 1 that 3 she 4 has 7 spoken 
k» K* croyez,v. ait, v. parlt, p.p. 

to him 5 of it 6 ? - - If I had money, 1 would give 
avois, v. donnerois, v. 

you some, but you know, as well as I do, 

mats, c. savez, v. ** 

how scarce 2 it is 1 now. - - - Send 4 

combien, adv. rare, adj. a present, adv. Envoy ez, v. 

me 2 ^one 3 5 . - - - Have 2 you 3 any 1 ? - - - Do 'you* 

ne en pas Avez, v. 

remember 3 it 2 ? 
souvenez, v. en. 

F is used for the dative only : it is Englished by to it, 
to them, of it, in it, upon it, thither, there, fyc, and very often 
not expressed in English, though it must be in French. 
It seldom supplies the place of animate objects, except 
when connected with the verbs fier, to trust ; penser, to 
think ; and the like in a reply : ex. 

J'y consens, 1 agree to it. 

Nous y penserons, We shall think of it. 

Ne vous y Jiez plus, Trust them no more. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

I 1 2 never 5 will 4 consent to 3 it, and 1 
ne jamais, adv. consentirai, v. 

I 1 2 neither 4 will 3 speak 6 nor 7 write 9 to 

ne ni veux,v. parler,v. nij-c. ecrire, v. 

5 bim 3 . - - Believe me, go and see them, do 

Croyez,v, allez : v. «*> k» 



D5 

»not* "confide 3 in 3 it. - - We 1 have 4 forced 5 

fez vous, v. avons, v. force, p.p. 

them 2 to it 3 . I (will carry 2 ) my 3 brother 4 thither L 

menerai, v. 
myself 5 . - He 1 (will carry*) them 3 to you 3 thither 4 him- 

portera, v. y 

self. - - Did you think of what you had 

Avez, v. ptnsi, p.p. a ce que, pro. aviez, v. 
promised me? - - - No, but 1 I 3 will think 4 

promis* p.p. Non, adv. penserai, v. 

(of it 3 .) - (It is) a good book, we 1 read 3 excellent 4 

y C'est, v. on, pro. lit, v. 

things 5 in it 2 . - - Our orchards are very fruit- 

chose, f. JVos, pro. verger, m. fer- 

ful, we see all sorts of fruits in 

tile, adj. on, pro. voit,v. sorle,f. fruit, m. 

them. - - Since those people have deceived 

Puisque,c. ces, pro. gens, pi. trompi, p.p. 

you, do not trust them (any more). --- When a 

<^> fez, v. plus, adv. 

friend is dead we 3 often 1 think 5 of 

mort, adj. on, pro. souvent,zdv. pense,r. 
him 4 3 no longer 6 . 
plus, adv. 

he which in English is either not expressed, or most 
commonly rendered by so, likewise prevents the repe- 
tition of one or more words, and supplies the place of 
the same. It is indeclinable when it relates to, and 
holds the place of, one adjective or more, a verb, or a 
whole member of a sentence: ex. 

Vous rn'avez cru belle, mais You have thought me hand- 
le ne le suis pas, some, but I am not. 

Nous elions embarrasses, ti We were embarrassed, and 

nous le sommes encore, are so yet. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE, 

My brothers were ill yesterday 

Mes 9 pro. malade r adj. hier, adv. 



96 

and arc so still to - day. - — I ana 

encare, adv. aujourd^h ui, adv. 

satisfied with my fate, but my sister is not. 
content, adj. de sort,tn» ma, pro. 

I had heard that your sister was married, 

avois,v» oui dire,v. que etoit,v, marie, p.p. 

but my cousin tells me that she is not. - - - 

mon, pro. dit, v. 

Our master rewards us when we deserve 

Notre,\)ro. recompense, v. m£rxlons,\» 

it. - - - Children ought to apply to their 

doivent, v. s^appliquer,\, leurs, pro. 
studies as much as they can. -«.---] thought 

nwtan£,adv. peuvent,v. croyois,v. 

your brother was diligent, but 1 mistook, 

itoity v. me suis trompe, p.p. 

for he is not, and Clever 4 will be 3 so 2 . 

jamais, adv. sera, v. 

On the contrary, le is declinable when it relates to 8 
and holds the place of, one substantive or more ; then 
le is used for the masculine, la for the feminine, and 
Us for the plural : ex. 

Etes-vous le Jils de mon Are you my friend Mr. D's 

ami M, D**? Oui, je son? Yes, I am. 

le suis, 

Etes-vous la mere de ce Are you the mother of 

bel enfant? Qui, je la that fine child? Yes, 

suis, I am. 

Etes-vous les tantes de Are you Mr. Brown's 

M. Brown? Oui, nous aunts? Yes, we are. 

les sommes, 

Est-ce la voire livre ? Oui, Is this your book ? Yes, 

ce V&sL it is. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

(It is said) that you are the son of my neighbour 
On dit, v. voisin, m. 

Mr. Peter, are you so? Yes, Sir, I 

Pierre, m. Monsieur, m. 



97 

am. - - Are you the sister of Mrs. Adams ? Yes, 

Madame, f. 
1 am. - She is very amiable, 1 aud so 3 are 4 you 2 also 5 . - - 

aimable, adj. aussi, 

Are you the ladies whom my mother expects? 

dame, f. que attend, v. 

Yes, we are. - - 4 Are 'these 3 young 3 people the 

(Sont-ils)ce.s, pro. je.une, adj. gens, ph 
scholars whom you have taught ? Yes, madam, 

ecolier, m. enseigne, p.p. 

they are. - - (Is that) the horse which you bought 

Est-ce la cheval, m. que 
from my brother ? Yes, it is. - - - - (Are these) the 

a Sont-ce la 

houses which you built ? Yes, they are, 

avezfait bdtir,v, sont* 

N. B. It must be observed, that the following pro* 
nouns, me, te, se, le, la, and les, can never be used after 
a preposition ; as we cannot say, fetois avec le, avec la, 
I was with him, with her ; but we must use the per- 
sonal pronouns, moi, toi, soi, lui, elle, and eux, or elles, 
and say, fetois avec lui, avec elles, &c. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The nosegay which I gathered in our 

bouquet, m. que, ^ ai caeilli, p.p. 

garden is for her, and not for him. - - He 

pour, p. non pas, adv. 

was with me when we received a letter from 

etoit, v. recumes, v. 

them. - - If he do not come soon we (will set 

<& vient, v. bientot, adv. parti- 

out) without him. - - - Your sisters have dis- 

rons, v. sans, p. Vos, pro. micon- 

pleased me, 1 am very angry with them* 

tente, p.p. fdcke, adj. contre,$. 

- - Your brothers have broken these windows, I 
casse,p.p. ces, pro. 
9 



93 

am sure of it, for I was behind them, and 

sur, adj. car, c. derriere, p. 

John was with me. 
Jean, m. 

Y and en always go last in a sentence, except the 
pronoun of the first person moi, which, in the impera- 
tive mood of a verb conjugated affirmatively, is placed 
after y and en : ex. 

II vous y en enverra, He will send some to you 

thither. 

Apportez-y en moi, Bring me some hither. 

N. B. The above pronouns, when governed by two 
or more verbs, must be repeated, in French, before 
every governing verb; though most generally expressed 
but once in English, and after the last verb : ex. 

Votre fils vous aime et vous Your son loves and fears 

craint, you. 

Jt It plains et Pencourage, I pity and encourage him. 

EXERCfSE UPON THIS RULE. 

You have very fine roses in your garden : when 
avez, v. 
I am in the country, pray send me some hither. 

,serai, v. a de grace, envoy ez, v. 

- - May God bless and reward her ! said 

Que Dieu, benisse^v, recompense, v. dit,v, 

the prince. - - I l neither 3 will 2 sell 8 nor 7 give 10 

ne ni, veux, v. venire, donntr,\. 
5 them 9 to 4 you 8 „ - - Our master rewards and punishes 

punit, v. 
us when we deserve it. - - - Often beauty seduces 

seduif, v. 
and deceives us. - - - A well-bred child, who 

trompe, v. ne, p.p. 

knows the extent of his duties towards his 
connoit,v. 6tendue,L devoir,m. envers,])* 

parents, far from offending and vexing 

farent,m. et f. loin de, offenser,v. molestcr,v. 



99 

them, cherishes, loves, honors, respects, and 

chirit, v. honore, v. respecte, v. 

venerates them. 
venere. v. 



OP PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. 

These pronouns are called possessive, because they 
always denote property or possession. 

There are two sorts of possessive pronouns, viz. ab- 
solute and relative. 

The absolute are so called, because they must always 
precede the substantive to which they are joined, and 
agree with it (and not with the possessor as in English) 
in gender, number, and case : — They are, 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fern. Both Genders. 

Mon,* Ma, Mes, my. 

Ton* Ta, Tes, thy. 

Son,* Sa, Ses, his, her, or its. 

Both Genders. 
Notre, Nos, our. 

Voire, Vos, your. 

Leur, Leurs, their. 

They are declined with the article indefinite de, (i : ex. 
Singular. 
Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. mon pere, my father. 
Gen. Abl. de mon pere, of my father, or from, &c. 
Dat. a mon pere, to my father. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. ma mere, my mother. 
Gen. Abl. de ma mere, of or from my mother. 
Dat. a ma mere, to my mother. 

* Mon, ton, son, must be used before a noun feminine beginning 
with a vowel, to prevent the hiatus : ex. 

Mon time. My soul. 

Ton indifference, Thy indifference. 

Son opinion^ Hip, or her opinion. 



100 

Plural. 
Masculine. 
Norn. Ace. mes freres, my brother?. 
Gen. Abl. de mes freres, of or from my brothers. 
Dat. a mes freres, to my brothers. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. mes sceurs, my sisters. 
Gen. Abl. de mes sceurs, of or from my sisters. 
Dat. a mes scaurs, to my sisters. 

The others are declined as the preceding. 
These pronouns ought to be repeated before every 
substantive in a sentence, though but once expressed 
in English ; they must also be used in French, when 
speaking to any of our relations or friends, though they 
be suppressed in English : ex. 

J'ai perdu mon chapeau I lost my hat and gloves. 

et mes gants, 
Bon jour, men per e, Good day, father. 

Eies-vous la, ma sctur ? Are you there, sister ? 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Give me my dictionary and grammar. - - She 

dictionnaire, m. grammaire, f. 

laad lost her gloves and fan. - - - - Have 

avoit,v. per du, p.p. eventail,m. Axez,v. 

you found your pea? His daughter is 

irouve, p.p. plume, f. fille,L 

older , than my son, but her son (is not) 

-pzewtf.adj. fils,m. nhstpas,?. 

so tall as my nephew. - - - Her brother says 

grand, adj. neveu,rn. dit,v. 

that he will not refuse you what you ask 

refusera,\, ce que demandez,v. 

of him. - - Dear father, pray, forgive me. - - My 

k» de grace, 

ambition is the only cause of my impru- 

ambition,?. seul, adj. cause, f. impru* 

dence. - - - I have seen your father, mother, bro- 
dence, f. m,v. vu, p.p. 



101 

thers, and sisters. - - • Her affection for me is 

affection, f. pour, p. 
false. - - - Good night, cousin, I hope that you 
faux, adj. soir,m. espere,v. 

will come soon to see my country- 

viendrez,v* bientot.adv. «*doiV,v. 
house and gardens. - - - Your horses and carriage 

cheval, m. carrosse,m. 
are very beautiful, but the queen's horses and carriages 

beau, adj. 
are much more so. 

beaucoup, adv . 

When these pronouns are used in a sentence, speak- 
ing of any part of the body, they are not to be express- 
ed in French, but the preposition in and the pronoun 
are rendered by the article definite ; the personal pro- 
noun being sufficient to determine the possession : ex. 

]Pai mal auxyeux, I have a pain in my eyes, 

and not dans mes yexix, 

II se cassa le bras, He broke his arm. 

and not son bras, 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

My mother has (a pain) in her head. - - - 1 have 
a,v, mal,m. a. p. fete, f. 
a pain in my ear, and she has a pain in her 

oreille, f. 
teeth. - - - When I eat meat, I have always 

dentif. mange,v. toujour s,adv. 

a pain in my stomach. - - The man who fell from 

estomac, m. tomba, v. 

the roof of our house, disjointed his wrist, 

toit,m. se demit, v. poignet, m. 

broke his right leg, sprained 

droit, adj. jambe,f. se donna une entorse au 
his left foot, dislocated his shoulders, 

gauche, adj. pied,m* se disloqua,v, 6paule,f. 
and hurt his head. - - - When I run fast, 

se llessa,\\ cours,v. rfo,adv. 

9* 



102 

I (am afraid) of falling and breaking my 

crains, v. de tomber, v. de me casser,v. 

arm or neck. 

Its, their, having a reference to inanimate or irra- 
tional objects, and placed in another member of the 
sentence from that wherein the object referred to is it- 
self expressed, are not made into French by son, set, ses, 
&c. but by en and the articles le, la, Us : ex. 
Paris est une grande ville, Paris is a large city, but 

mais les rues en sont trop its streets are too nar- 

etroites, row. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Windsor is a fine town, I admire its 

ville, f. admire, v. 

situation, walks, and streets. - - This 

situation, f. promenade,?, rue,?. Cette,pro. 

house is well situate, but its architecture 

situe, adj. architecture,?. 

does not please me much. - - - His coach is 

«^ plait,v. beaucoup,zdv. carrosse,m. 

beautiful, (every body) admires its painting 

tout lemonde,m. admire,v. peinture,?. 
and ornaments. - - - The shops of London are 

(very fine,) foreigners especially see their 
superbe, adj. 6tranger,m. sur-tout,&&v. 

riches and cleanliness with pleasure and astonish^ 
snent. - - - The walks of your (country-seat) are well 

allee,L chdteau,m. 

kept, I like their regularity. 
term, p.p. regularite, f. 

The relatives are never joined to any substantive; for 
the substantive to which they refer is always implied in 
the pronoun. They are, 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur, 

Le mien, les miens, la mienne, les miennes, mine. 
Le tien, les tiens, la tienne, les tiennes, thine. 
Lt sien, les siens, la sienne, les siennes, his or hers. 



103 

Masculine. Femininei 

Sing. Plural. Sing. Plural. 

Le noire, les notres, la noire, les nolres, ours. 
Le votre, les votres, la voire, les votres, yours. 
Le leur, les leur s, la leur, _ les fours, theirs. 
They are declined with the article definite ; ex. 
Singular. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

Nom. Ace. Le mien, la mienne, mine. 
Gen. Abl. Du mien, de la mienne, of or from mine. 
Dat. Au mien, a la mienne, to mine. 

Plural. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

Nom. Ace. Les miens, les miennes, mine. 
Gen. Abl. Des miens, des miennes, of or from mine. 
Dat. Aux miens, aux miennes, to mine. 

The rest are declined as the preceding. 

When any one of these relative pronouns is used after 
the verb Sire, to be, signifying to belong to, it must be 
expressed in French by one of the pronouns personal in 
the dative; and when joined to a noun substantive, it 
ought to be rendered by a pronoun possessive absolute, 
and the substantive must be put in the genitive plural : 
ex. 

Ce livre est a moi, This book is mine. 

C'est un de mes amis, He is a friend of mine. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Your daughter is handsomer than mine, but 
beau, adj. 
mine has more wit than yours. — Her house is 

esprit, m. 
more convenient than ours, but yours is not so 

commode, adj. 
well situate as theirs. - - - This hat is mine and 

Ce,pro. 



104 

not yours, but this sword is yours and 

nonpas cette, pro. 

not his. - - - I lost a book of mine, and a friend 

ai perdu, v. 
of yours found it. - - - He sold me a knife, 

a trouv6,v, couteau,m. 

but this knife was not his, it was a friend of his 

it oil, v. 
who had lent it to him. 

priti, v. 



OF PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVE. 

These pronouns are called demonstrative, because 
they distinguish, in a precise manner, the persons or 
things to which they are applied. They are, 
Singular. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

Ce, cet,* cette, this, that. 

Celui, he, that, celle, she, that. 

Celui-ci, celle-ci, this. 

Celui-la, celle-la, that. 

Plural. 

Feminine. 



Masculine. 
Ces, 
Ceux, 
Ceux-ci, 
Ceux-la, 
• Ce qui, ce que, what. 

Ceci, this ; cela, that.j 
The last two are always of the masculine gender, 
and of the singular number. 



ces, these, those. 
celles, they, these, those. 
celles-ci, these. 
celles-la, those. 



* Cet is used before a noun masculine beginning with a vowel, or 
H mute : ex. cet oiseau, this bird ; cet honneur, this honour. 

t The word that, whether expressed or understood, coming-be tween 
two verbs, and followed by a noun or pronoun, is then a conjunction, 
and must be rendered into French by que, which must be placed im- 
mediately after the first verb: ex. 
Je mis que voire frere est marie, I know that your brother is married. 



105 

These pronouns are declined with the article indefi- 
»ite, de, a : ex. 

Singular. 
Masculine. 
Norn. Ace. ce livre, this or that book. 
Gen. Abl. de ce livre, of or from this book. 
Dat. a ce livre, to this book. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. ces livres, these books. 
Gen. Abl. de ces livres, of or from these books. 
Dat. a ces livres. to these books. 

Singular. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. celte plume, this or that pen. 
Gen. Abl. de cette plume, of or from this pen. 
Dat. a cette plume, to this pen. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. ces plumes, these pens. 
Gen. Abl. de ces plumes, of or from these pens, 
Dat. a ces plumes, to these pens. 

Singular. 





Masculine. 


Nom. Ace. 


celui, he, him, that. 


Gen. Abl. 


de celui, of or from hina. 


Dat. 


a celui, to him. 




Feminine. 


Nom. Ace. 


,'celle, she, her, that. 


Gen. Abl. 


de celle, of or from her. 


Dat. 


a celle, to her. 




Plural. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


N. Ace. ceuoc, 


ctlles, they, them, those, such as. 


G. Abl. de ceux, 


de celles. of or from those. 


Dat. a ceux, 


a celles, to those. 



The others are declined as the preceding, 



106 

N. B. He, she, they, him, her, them, being immediately 
followed in a sentence by who, whom, or that, used in 
an indeterminate sense, not relating to any individual 
mentioned before, and only implying any person, one or 
any body, must not be rendered in French by the per- 
sonal pronouns, il, elle, &,c. but by the above pronouns, 
celui, celle, &c. 

The same rule must be observed with respect to such 
as, such that, used in English in the same sense as he 
who, they who : ex. 
Celui ou celle qui pratique la He or she who practices 

vertu vit heureux, virtue lives happy- 

Ceux qui miprisent la sci- Such as despise learning 

ence n'en connoissent pas do not know its value, 

le prix, 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

He who supports idleness makes himself 

encourage, v. se rend, v. 

despicable. She whom yon saw at my 

mepri sable, adj. que, pro, vites, v. chez,p. 

brother's is not yet married You 

encore, adv. mane, adj. 

punish him who is not guilty. Men com- 

punissez, v. caupable, adj. ordi- 

monly 2 hate 1 him whom they fear. 

nairement, adv. haissent,v. que, pro. craignent,v. 
She whom you hate is my best friend. — You 

ha'issez, v. amie, f. 

have punished him who did not deserve it, 

puni, p. p. ^ meritoit, v. 

and rewarded her who was guilty. - • We 

recompense p. p. 
ought to pray for them who persecute 

devons, v. qui, pro. persicutent, v. 

us. Of all virtues, that which most 2 dis- 

qui, pro. le plus, adv. dis- 
tinguishes 1 a Christian is charity. - - This book and 
tingue, v. 



107 

that which I lent you are the two hest. 

que, pro. ai prete, v. 
Such as seem to be happy, are not 

qui, pro. paroissent, v. etre, v. 
always so. 

toujour s, adv. 

_ Ce, cette, ces, this, that, these, those, most always 
precede the substantive to which they are joined, and 
agree with it in gender, number, and case. On the 
contrary, celui, celle, celui-ci, celle-ci, celui-la, celle-la, this, 
that, &c. either in the singular or plural, are never 
joined to any noun ; for the noun to which they refer 
is always implied in the pronoun : ex. 

JVi vu le portrait du pere I have seen the father's 
et celui du jils, picture, and that of the 

son. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

She who dines with us, is my brother's wife. - - 

c?ms,v. arec, p. femme,f. 

She brought her picture, and that of her 

a apporti, v. portrait, m. 

husband. - - - I have seen the king's palace, and 

mari, m. palais, m. 

that of the queen. - - - That gold watch, which 

montre,f. que, pro. 
you showed me, is not yours, it is that of 

avez montre, v. tfest, v. 

your brother. - - 1 have lost my buckles and 

perdu, p. p. 

those of your cousin. Your books and those of 

cousin, m. 
your little sister are torn. - - - I know this 

petit, adj. dechire, p. p. connois,v, 

cap, it is that of your mother. 

bonnet, m. c'est, v. 

N. B. The pronoun that, either in the singular or 
plural, is often suppressed in English, and supplied by 



108 

an apostrophe and an s, thus ('*), at the end of the noun 
substantive as above, but it must be expressed in French 
by the above pronouns cetui, celle, and according to the 
gender and number of the object to which it refers : ex. 

11 a pris mon chapeau et He has taken my hat and 
celui de mon pere, my father's, that is, and 

that of my father. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

You have torn my gown, and my sister's. - - 

dechire, p. p. robe, f. 
I have found my hat and my brother's in the 

trouve, p. p. 

room. The thieves came by night 

chambre,f. voleur,m. entrerent,\. de nuit,adv. 

into my father's house, they broke open my room 

forcerent, v. ^ 
and my mother's, and stole my watch and 

volerent, v. 
my sister's. - - You may, if you please, take 

pouvez, v. voulez,v. prendre,v. 

your grammar and your brother's, but leave 







laissez, v, 


mine and my friend's. 


- Our oranges 


and Mr, 


Savage's are the best 


orange, f. 
that you 


can 


Sauvage, 


on, pro. 


puisse, v, 



find. 
trouver, v. 

Sometimes the particles ci, la, here, there, are also 
joined to the substantive following the pronouns, ce, 
cette, ce$\ to distinguish with more precision the objects 
to which they are applied : ex. 

Ce chapeau-ci, this hat ; cette ville-ld, that town, &c. 

N. B. The two following expressions, the former, 
celui'la, m. celle-la, f. ceux-la, m. cdles-la, f. ; the latter, 
celui-ci.m. celie-ci,(. ceux-ci,m. celles-cif. referring to 
substantives mentioned in a preceding sentence, are 



109 

elegantly used in French, and agree with the nouns, 
instead of le premier. It second, the repetition of which 
they avoid : ex. 

Un Francois et un Ecos- A Frenchman and a Scotch- 
sois se battirent hier ci man fought yesterday with 
Vipie, celui-la, fat blesse swords, the former was 
a Vepaule, et celui-ei au wounded in the shoulder 
bras, and the latter in the arm. 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Learn this lesson, it is not so difficult 

App renez, v. difficile, ad j . 

as that. - - - I prefer this way to that road. - - - 

chemin,m. route,f. 

This room is much larger than that parlour. - - 

grand, adj. salon, m. 

These candles are better than those. - - - 

chandelle,(. 
(There was) a great battle between George 

II y eut,v» combat,m, entre,p. 

and Stephen ; the former had a broken nose, 

Etienne,m, eut,v,le casse.p.y. 7iez,m, 

and the latter lost a tooth. - - In the engagements 

perdit, v. balaille, f. 

which took place between the Austrians 
qui, pro. eurent, v. lieu, m. Auti'ichien.m* 

and the French, the former lost two 

Francois,m. pe.rdirent,v. 

thousand men, and the latter fifteen hundred. - - - 

hornrne, m. 
Among the peaches which you sent me at two 
Parmi, p. piche, f. que, pro. a 

different times, I observed that the former 

different, adj. fois,f. ai remarque,^. 
were better than the latter. 

6toient,v. 

Ce qui, I r^ ih e nominative case, ce que, in thexaccu- 
sative, what. This pronoun is never joined to any noun; 
it always may be turned into that which, or the thing 
10 



110 

which; and ceci, cela, this, that, are only used when 
speaking of things, the word thing being always under- 
stood : ex. 

Je sais ce qui est arrivi, I know what has hap- 

pened. 

Savez-vous ce que je pense ? Do you know what I think ? 

Ceci me plait, This pleases me ; i. c. 

this thing, &c. 

Cela me fait peur, That frightens me; i. e, 

that thing, &c. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 



May 1 know what causes your grief 
Puis, v. savoir, v. cause, v. chagrin,m* 

and sadness ? - - - Your father has (a good deal) 



beaucoup/ddv, 
*never 4 
ne jamais, adv. 

of him. 

<-©-> lui 

tell me what 
dites-moi 
my father what 



tristesse, f. 
of friendship for you ; for, he 

car,c. 
refuses 3 you 2 what you ask 
refuse, v. demandez,v. 

You seem much dejected, 

paroissez,v. feien,adv. abaitu,a.dj 
vexes you. - - - Go and tell 
fdche, v. Allez, v. ^ dire a,v. 

has passed here and do not forget what you 

s 'est passe, v. icz,adv. «^> oubliez,v. 

have seen, and what you have heard Give 

entcndu, p.p. 
me this, and take that.- - - I prefer this to 

prenez, v. prefer e, v. 

that. 

OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 

These pronouns are called relative, because they have 
always a reference to some other noun or pronoun in 
the discourse, either expressed or implied. They are 
declined as follows : 



Ill 

Singular and Plural. 
Both Genders. 
Nom. qui, who, which, that. 

Gen. de qui, or dont, of whom, whose,* of which. 

Dat. a qui, to whom, to which. 

Ace. que, qui,] whom, which, that. 

Abl. de qui, dont, from whom, from which. 

Ace. quoi, que, what. 

Gen. Abl. de quoi, or dont, of or from what. 
Dat. a quoi, to what. 

Singular. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

Nom. Ace. lequel, laquelle, which. 

Gen. Abl. duauel, or dont, de laquelle, of or from, &c. 
Dat. auquel, a laquelle, to which. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. lesquels, lesquelles, which. 

Gen. Abl. desquels* or dont, desquelles, of or from, &c. 
Dat. auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 

The noun, or pronoun, to which the pronoun relative 
has a reference, is called the antecedent, with which it 
must agree in gender and number : ex. 

Je connois un homme qui doit 1 know a man who is to go 
aller voir le camp, and see the camp. 

In this sentence qui has a reference to homme, man, 

because I can say, lequel homme, which man, &c. 

J^ai lu la leltre que vous I have read the letter(that) 
nfavez envoyce, you sent me. 

In this last sentence que has a reference to lettre, letter, 
because it may be said, laquelle lettre, which letter, &c. 

*^ Whose^ being used interrogatively, must be rendered in French 
by a qui: ex. 

A qui est ce livre ? Whose book is this ? 

f Qui, whom, is never used in the accusative but when it is gov- 
erned by some of the prepositions : ex. 

Jlvec qui, With whom. Pour qui, For whom. 

er when it signifies what verson : ex. 

Jimenez qui vous voudres, Bring whom you please, 

that is, what person- you please. 



112 

The rehtive que, whom, which, or that, is sometimes 
understood in English, but it must always be expressed 
in French : ex. 
La dame que vous connoissez The lady you know is ar- 

est arrivee, rived. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The man who sold me these pens is very 

a vendu, v. 
cunning. - - - The lady of whom you speak 
ruse, adj. dame,f. parkz,v. 

is not handsome. - - Miss D***, whom you love 

aimez, v. 
so much, is very ill. - - - The person to 

ianl, adv. malade, adj. personnel. 

whom I wrote last year has answered 

ai ecrit,\\ passe, p.p. ann£e,L repcmrfu, p.p. 

me this morning. - - He who was with you, related 

matin, m. etoit, v. araconle,v<> 

to me (every thing) that had passed. 

tout ce qui s 1 etoit, v. passe,p,\). 

She will not hear of the lady whom 

veut, v. entendre parler, v. 

he (is going) to marry. - - - Shun vice, and 

va, v. epouser,v, Evilez,v. vice,m» 

love what is good. - - - Who was with 

aimez, v. bon, adj. etoit,v* avec, p. 

you ? - - - It was a gentleman, whose 1 name 6 I 2 

Ce monsieur, m. nom, m. 

know 4 3 not 5 . - - Men generally 2 love 1 him 

sais,v. generalement,adv. 

who flatters them. - - The man I sent you was 

jiatte, v. ai envoye, v. 

honest. - - Whose 1 sword 4 is 2 this 3 ? - - You speak 

parlez, v. 

of the lady whose husband has been so ill. 

mart, m. ete, p.p. 

These pronouns, like the personal and conjunctive, 

when governed by two or more verbs, must be repeated 

(in French) before each governing verb, though most 



113 

commonly expressed but once in English, and before 
the first verb : ex. 

he Dieu que nous aimons The God whom we love 
et que nous adorons, and worship, 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The man who caresses and flatters you is the 
caresse, v. 

most dangerous being I know. A man 

plus, adv. itre,m. connoisse,\. 

whose manners are innocent, and behaviour 

mozurs, f.pl. innocent, adj. conduite,f. 

is blameless, is the man whom we ought to che- 

irreprochable, adj. devons, v. <o> che- 

rish and honour. - - - - The letters which you have 
n'r,v. respecter, v. 

written, and showed me, were tole- 

6crites,\).\), montrees, p.p. etoient,\, passa- 

rably well. The woman to whom I have 

blement, adv. femme, f. 

lent so much money, and spoken so often, 

pre/e,p.p. parle, p.p. 

is dead. - - - Servants are men or wo- 

77ior/,adj. Domestiques, m.etf. ou,c. 

men whom we keep and reward 

nourrissons, v. recompensons, v. 

for the services which they do us. 

pour, p. rendent,v. 

When the words to which, to what, at which, at what, 
in which, in what, have a reference to inanimate things, 
and when they can be expressed by where, whereto, 
whereat, or wherein, they are to be rendered in French 
by the adverb of place, ou: ex. 
Je vous montrerai la mai- I will show you the house 

son ou il demeure, in which he lives ; that 

is, where he lives. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The state of misery to which he was reduced 

rcduit, p.p. 
10* 



114 

has touched me to the quick. - - The town to 

touche, p.p. au vif,m. ville,L 

which he is gone is precisely the same 

«//e,p.p. precisement.ci&v. weme, adj. 
place through which we went in (coming up) 

place, f. par, p. oil passames,v. en,y>.venant, p.act. 

to London. - - (This is) the door through which 

Void, adv. 
the thieves went into the house. - - Thepri- 

voleur, m. entrerent, v. 
son in which they used to shut up 

Von, pro. avoit coutume,v. dc renfermer, v. 
the prisoners, has been demolished. 
prisonnier, m. d£lruile,p.j). 

Quoi^ what, and sometimes that or which, is never 
used in the nominative case : in the other cases it is 
generally used in an indeterminate signification, and 
is never expressed ^except in speaking of inanimate 
things, and especially when it has for its antecedent, 
ce or rien : ex. 

Cest a quoi je vous con- It is what I advise you to 

seille de penser, think of. 

II tfy a rien a quoi il ne There is nothing for which 

soit dispose, „he is not disposed. 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Of 3 what 4 does your 1 sister 2 complain 5 ? - - - What ! 
-c* se plaint-elle, v. 

you dare answer me thus ! - - For what do 

osez,v, repondre,v. ainsi, adv. Pour, p. k*> 

you call me? - - Why did you 

appellez,v. Pour quoi, adv. avez,v. 

bring that man before me ? what is he 

«mene,p.p. devant,p, 

guilty of? - -What is your brother sorry 

coupable, adj. fdche, adj. 

for ? - - At wfcat were 1 you 3 playing 1 , when 1 came 
de a jouiez,s. suis 



115 

in ? - To what shall 2 we 1 apply 2 ourselves ? - - 

entrC, v. appliquerons, v. nous, pro. 

( l There 3 is 4 ) Nothing 5 for which he is 2 not 1 

77 y a, v. ne Hen, adv. a soit, v. ne 

fit. - - - In what do you intend to spend 

propre,adj. A <•©•> proposez-vous,v, depasser : v. 

your holidays ? 
vacance,(.p]. 

When we speak of irrational beings or inanimate 
things in the genitive, dative, or ablative cases, we 
make use of lequel, laquelle, which, &c. instead of qm ; 
also after a preposition, and when who, whom, or which, 
refer to one or more objects on which the choice is to 
be formed : ex. 

he cheval auquel vous don- The horse to which you 
nez a boire, give some drink. 

Lafenetre sur laquelh vous The window upon which 
vous appuyez, you lean. 

Apportez lequel vous vou- Bring whom you please. 
drez, 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

The trade to which you apply, 

commerce,m. vous vous appliquez,v 9 

and the profession to which you are devoted, 

profession, f, devoue,p.p, 

are very honourable. - - (Is that) the horse for 

Est-ce la, v. 
which you gave a hundred guineas ? - - Lying 

Mensonge m. 
is a vice for which young people ought to 

gens, pi. doivent, v. <& 
have the greatest horror. - - - The table, upon 
horreur,f. table, f. sur, p. 

which you write, is broken. The reasons 

ecrivez, v. casse, p.p. 

upon which you ground your system ate 

appuyez, v. systeme, m. 



116 

satisfactory. - - - (There are) four drawings, which 

s alis fais ant, adj. Voild,didv. dessein,m. 

do you choose ? - - (Here are) two pears, which 

«c» choisissez, v. Void, adv. poire, f. 

will you have? - - They are two sisters, which 

voulez,v. to, sont,v. 

do you like the hest ? 

«oi aimez, v. le mieux,a.dv. 

OF PRONOUNS INTERROGATIVE. 

They are calied interrogative, because they are used 
only in asking questions, and have no antecedent: they 
are declined with the article indefinite. 

Singular and Plural. 
Both Genders. 
Nom. Ace. qui, who, whom. 
Gen. Abl. de qui, of or from whom. 
Dat. a qui, to whom, whose, 

Nom. Ace. quoi, or que, what ;* 

Or, qu'est-ce qui, qiCest-ce que. 
Gen. Abl. de quoi, of or from what. 
Dat. a quoi, to what. 

Singular. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

N.A. quel, or lequel, quelle or laquelle, what, which. 
G.A. de quel, &c. de quelle, 8lc. of or from, &c. 

Dat. a quel, &c. a quelle, &c. to what, which. 

Plural. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

'N.A. quels, orhsquels, quelles, or lesquelles, what, which. 
G.A. de quels, &lc. de quelles, &lc. of or from, &c. 

Dat. a quels, &c. a quelles, &c. to what, which. 

* When what, in English, signifies How much, it must be express- 
ed in French by combien. 



117 



Qui, who, whom, as an interrogative pronoun, al- 
ways refers to persons, and never to things ; and it may 
be expressed by quelle personne ? what person ? Quoi 
and que, what, have always a reference to things and 
never to persons, and may be expressed by quelle chose ? 
what thing ? According to the French idiom, quoi can 
never be put before a verb as its accusative, it is always 
que : ex. 

Qui est-la ? Who is there ? 

De quoi parlez-vous ? What are you speaking of ? 

Que voulez-vous ? or, qiCesl- What do you want? 
ce que vous voulez ? 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Who was the first king of France ? - - Who can 

fut,v. peut,v. 

give credit to a young man who does not speak 

ajouter, v. foi, f. dit, v. 

the truth ? - - - Of whom were 1 you 2 speaking 1 , when 

verite, f. parliez, v. 

I came ? - - - To whom did you lend my 

•cms, v. avez, v. preti, p. p. 

slate ? — Whom do you seek ? Who told 

ardoise,L «» cherchez,v. a dit,\ a 

it to you ? - - From whom do you know it ? - - - What 1 

, «o» savez, v. 

are 2 you 3 doing 2 ? ---What do you say? ---What 

faites,v, dites,\. 

do you ask of me ? - - Who is the man 

demandez, v. <^> 

who can boast of being without defect? - 

peut,v. se vanter,v. de etre,v. sans, p. defaui,m. 
What is the name of your father ? - - - What is his 

nom, m. 
occupation ? - - What are his amusements ? - - What 
occupation, f. sont,v. plaisir,m. 

is his business? - - Jn what city does he 2 live 1 ? 

sont, v. affaires, f.pl. ville, f. k^ demeure, v. 



IIS 

What is the country in which he was born ? 

pays,m. a pris naissance. 

In the last instances it may easily be seen, that quel, 
or quelle, what, is always joined to some substantive with 
which it must agree in gender and number. 

In order to avoid repetition, lequel, laquelle, which are 
elegantly used as substantives for quel, or quelle, and the 
substantive to which it is joined ; and then lequel must 
always be followed by a genitive, either expressed or 
understood : ex. 

Une de mes sozurs est One of my sisters is mar- 

mariee, ried. 

LaqueHe est-ce ? that is, Which is it ? that is, 

laquelk de vos sceurs which of your sisters 

est-ce ? is it ? 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

One of your cousins is arrived from the 
cousin, m. arrive, p. p. 

continent; which is it ? -- An aunt of yours was 
continent, m. x etoit,v. 

ill last week ; which was 

malade, adj. derniere,adj. semaine,f, 
it ? - - I have heard that two horses of yours 

out dire,v. 
were lost : tell me which. - My brother 

etoient,v. perdu, p.p. dites,v. 

wrote to me, that two of your sisters (are going) 
ecrivit, v. vont, v. 

to learn French; which are they ? - - 

apprcndre,v. Frangois,m. sont,\. 

They (were speaking) of a relation of his, and 

parloient, v. parent, m. 

of one of my friends ; which were they ? 
amie, f. 



119 



OF PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 



These pronouns are called indefinite or indeterminate, 
because they generally are substituted for the name of 
a vague and indeterminate object. Among them some 
are used as nouns adjective, being always joined to a 
noun substantive ; others are sometimes used as pro- 
nouns without a substantive, and sometimes as adjec- 
tives with a substantive. 



Aucun, aucune, 
Autre, 
Autrui, 
Chacun, chacune, 



Chaque, 
L?un Vautre, 

Les uns- 



-les autres. 



LPun et I' ) autre, 
JJun ou P autre, 
Ni Vun ni Vautre, 
Nul, nulle, 



Pas 



un, pas une, 



Per sonne, 

La plupart de, des, 

Plusieurs, 

Quelconque, 

Quelque, 

Quelque chose, 

Quelqve — que, 

Quel — que, 

Quelle — que, 

Quelque chose qui or que, 

Quoi que,' 

Quoi que ce soil que, 

Tout ce qui. or que, 

Quelqu'un, quelquhine, 



None, any, any one. 
Other, any other. 
Others, other people. 
Each, every one, every 

body. 
Every, each. 
One another, each other. 

Some otiiers. 

Some some. 

Both. 

Either. 

Neither., 

No one. 

Not one. 

Nobody, nonp, no one, any 

one, any body. 
Most. 

Many, several. 
Whatever. 
Some, any. 
Something, any thing. 
Whosoever, whatsoever, 

whatever, however, 

howsoever, though, &c. 

Whatever, whatsoever. 

Some, some one, some- 
body, any body. 



12D 



Quiconque, 

Qui que ce soit, or fut^ 



Quoi que ce soli, or fut, 



Rien, 

Tel, telle, tels, telles, 

Tel qui, tels qui, 

Telle qui, telles qui, 

Tout, 

Tout le monde, 

Tout que, 



Whoever, any body. 

Whoever, nobody in the 
world, nobody at all, 
any body whatever, no 
man living, let him be 
who he will, or be who 
he may, &c. 

Whatever, nothing in the 
world, nothing what- 
ever. 

Nothing, any thing. 

Such a one, such. 

Such as he, she, they, who, 
that, &c. 

Every, every thing. 

Every body, any body. 

As — as, for all, although, 
however, &c. 



Observations on some of the above Pronouns. 

Aucun, aucune, is never used but in the singular, and 
always negatively ; it relates to a person or thing men- 
tioned before ; but in some sentences, and when it ex- 
presses a doubt, it is used without a negation : ex. 



Aucun ne s^est encore avis 6 

de vous contredire, 
Y a-t-il aucun (ou aucune) 

de vous qui le souffrit ? 



None has yet thought of 

contradicting you. 
Is there any of you who 

would suffer it ? 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

None of the books which you 



saw me 

avez vu, v. 



buying, pleases me. - - - Of all the apples 

acheter^v,. plait, v. pomme,L 

winch you gave me, none is yet 

avez donne, p.p. enco/r,adv. 

fit to eat. - - - - Is there any of you who 

bon, adj. d, manger, v, Y a-t-il, 



121 

applies to study as much as he can ? - - Among 

$1 applique, v. 6tude,(, peut,v, 

all the ladies you know, is there any one who 

dame, f. connoissez, v. 

would have married him?- - Philip is cer- 

eut voulu,v» epouser,v. Philippe,m. cer- 

tainly a very wicked man, for none 

tainement, adv. mediant, adj. car, c. 

of his friends speak well of him. Do you 

parle, v. ^ 

know any news? No, sir, I know 

savez,v. nouvelle, f. sing. monsieur, sais,v, 

none. - - I was in trouble, and none of 

etois, v. dans, p. embarras, m. 
my friends have relieved me. 
a secouru, p.p. 

Nul, pas un, are always accompanied by a negation, 
and can only be used as a nominative to the verb : Per- 
sonne is likewise attended with a negation, except in 
sentences of doubt, admiration, or interrogation : ex. 

Nul ne peut se flatter d'etre No one can flatter himself 
agreable a dieu, to be agreeable to God. 

Pas an ne le croit, Not one believes it. 

Personne shst-il jamais ex- Did ever any body express 
prime avec plus de grace himself with more grace 
que Sheridan ? than Sheridan ? 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

No one in this world is free from 

en, p. monde,m. exempt, adj. 

fault. - - • No one can pretend to be per- 

defaut, m. pretendre, v. etre, v. par- 

fectly happy in this land of mi- 

faitement, adv. dans, p. terre, f. 

sery. - - All the sailors perished at sea, 

malelot,m. ontp6ri,v* sttr,p. mer, 
11 



122 

not one escaped The soldiers are all re- 

a echappe, v. soldat, m. re- 

turned, not one has remained behind. - - - 
venn, p.p. est, v. resti, p.p. derriere, adv. 

Nobody can boast of being without im- 

se vanter,y. etre,v. sans, p. 

perfections. - - As nobody speaks to you, 

Comme, adv. park, v. 

you ought not to speak to any body. - - - Did 

devez, v. t«» parler y v. A-t-il 

ever any body know in what happiness 

jamais connu, p.p. en, p. bonheur,m, 

consists ? 
consist e, v. 

Autre refers to persons and things, but autrui refers to 
persons only ; the latter has neither gender nor number, 
and can only be used in the genitive or dative case : ex. 

Cette plume n'est pas bonne, This pen is not good, give 
donnez-lui en une autre, him another. 

JVe prenez pas le bien d'au- E)o not take other people's 
trui, goods. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Your brother has lost his books, shall I 

perdu, p.p. 
give him others ? - - - As you broke my 

donnerai,) V. avez casse, v. 

penknife, you will give me another. - - Other peo- 
canif, m. donnerez, v. 

pie's opinions are not the rule of mine. - - - - 

sentiment, m. regie, f. 

Do not speak ill of other people, if you 

parlez, v. mal, adv. 
will have nobody speak ill of you. - - - 

voulez, v. que parle, v. 

Always 2 remember 1 that principle of na- 

-souvenez-vous de ce principe, m. na- 



123 

tural Jaw, do not to others what you 

turd, adj. hi, f. faites, v. 

would not wish that (they should do) to you. - - 

co- voudriez.v. on fit, v. 

What are other people's troubles, if (they be com- 

peine, f. si,c, on les com- 
pared) with ours. 
pare, v. aux 

Chaque and chacun are used indifferently ; chaque 
always requires a substantive after it, and chacun is used 
substantively in a general or limited sense, both men- 
tioning persons or things. 

Chaque langue a ses idiomes Each language has its pe- 

particuliers, culiar idioms. 

Chacun a s*on tour, Every one in his turn. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Every thieg in its time. - - Every virtue has 

chose, f. dans, p. terns, m. 
its reward, and each vice has its punishment. - - 

recompense,?, chdtiment, m. 

Let every soldier keep his post to 

Que setienne,v, a poslc,m. pour,\}* 

avoid any surprise from the enemy. - - 

eviter,Y. tout, adj. surprise, f. de la part de Pemiemi^m. 
Every one thinks and acts for himself. - - Do not 

pense, v. agit,c. soi, «» 

speak all at once, but each in your turn. - - - 

a lafois,adv, a 

England expects every man will do his duty 

attend, v. fera,v. devoir, m. 

in case of danger. - - Trees bear their fruits 

en Arbre,m. portent, v. 

each in their season. - - Let us give to every 

dans, p. co, rendons, v. 

one what belongs to him. - - Let every one 

appartient,v. Que 

meddle with his own business. 

se mele,v, de propre,adj. affaires, pi. 



. 



L -. : 



~. 11 r 



:= i 



f » Ferine, TWy fca* 



L-n:'-!i :- . - _.: ? i_ 



7 - - 



- • ;-:-. 



:.' 



7: :'ri \-y\- 

. :" 1 1 -*. - - - 



\ - ■ • - 



" ."• 



- -1 - - 



;"--. v. ":. 

: -- 



re tfee *erk. 2W ia tfee 






125 

Vun et Pautre out raison, Both are in the rigbt. 

Ni Pun ni Pautre ne repond, Neither of them answer. 

or Us ne repondent ni Pun 

ni Pautre) 

N. B. The preposition must be placed between 
them, and both is not expressed in French when it pre- 
cedes two nouns or pronouns united by the conjunction 
and: ex. 
Son frere et sa sozur sont Both his brother and sis- 

morts, ter are dead. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Both serve to the same purpose. - - - I 

servent, v. meme, adj. usage, m. 

called on your cousins, and I heard 
ai passe, v. chez cousine, f. ai appris, \, 

that both had been married a week be- 

que avoient, v. marie, p.p. semaine, f. au- 

lore. - - - Honour your father and mother 

para-cant, adv. Respectez, v. 
and endeavour to please both. - Do you speak 

iachez,v. de plaire,v. a <& parlez,v, 

of my brother or sister? I speak of both. - Apples 

parte-, v. Pomme,f. 

and pears are good fruits, but peaches are pre- 
poire, f. peche, f. pre- 

ferable to both. - I wrote to both, but neither of 
ferable, adj. ai icrit,v. ^cm 

them answered my letters. - Yesterday I expected 

^ a r6pondu,\\ a attendois,Y. 

my two best friends, but neither of them came. - - I 

vint, v. 
will give it to neither of them. - - Do you prefer 
donnerai, v. <^ 

currants to cherries ? - - I like neither (of them.) 
groseille,L ceme,f. aime, v. pi. «* 

Both religion and virtue are the bonds of civil 

lien, m. 
society. 

If* 



126 

Quelque — que. Quelque immediately joined to a noun 
followed by que, expresses an indeterminate quality or 
quantity ; it is declinable before a substantive and inde- 
clinable before an adjective, and requires the verb to 
be put in the subjunctive mood : ex. 
Quelques fautes que vous Whatever faults you may 

ayez faites, on vous par- have committed, they 

donnera, will forgive you. 

Quelque grandes que soient However great your faults 

vos fautes, on vous par- be, they will forgive 

dormer a, you. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Whatever efforts people make to hide 

effort, m. on, pro. fasse, v. pour,p. voiler,v. 
truth, it (is discovered) sooner or later. - What- 

se decouvre, v. tot, adv. tard, adv. - 
ever services you may have done to your 

service, m. a y ez -> v » rendus, p.p. 

country, it will reward you for them. - - What- 

patrie, f. ricompensera, v. 

ever capacity a man may have, he ought not to 
puisse, v. doit, v. se 

boast. - - However equitable your 2 offers 3 be 1 , 
vanter, v. offre,f. soient, v. 

1 do not believe they will be accepted. - ^Though? 

ic crois,\. soient,v.acceplee,p.p. 

kings 5 be 4 ever so powerful 2 they die 

soient, v. «» puissant, adj. meurent, v. 

as well as the meanest of their subjects. - - However 

vil, adj. sujet, m. 

learned those ladies may be, they sometimes 2 
savant, adj. quelquefois, adv. 

mistake 1 . 
se trompent, v. 

Quel que, quelle que must be thus divided, when it is 
immediately followed by a verb or a personal pronoun, 
and agree in gender and number with the noun to which 
it relates ; it likewise requires the verb to be put in the 
subjunctive mood : ex. 



127 

Quelle que soil voire faute, Whatever your fault may 
on vous pardonnera, be, they will forgive you. 

Whatever the enemy be, whose malice 3 you 1 
ennemi, m. malice, f. 

dread, 2 you ought to rely on your 

apprehendez,v, devez,v. vous reposer,v. sur, p. 

innocence. - - Laws condemn all criminals, 

condamnent, v. criminel, m. 

whoever they may be. - Whatever your inten- 

puissent, v. inten~ 

tions may be, I think that you (are in the wrong). 
tion,f. avez tort. 

Whatever the reasons be which you may allege, 

raison, f. alleguiez,v. 

they are not sufficient. - - Whatever these books 

suffisant, adj. livre, m. 

be, send them to me. - Whatever her fortune be, 

fortune, f. 
he says he never will marry her. 
dit, v. ipousera, v. 

Quelque chose qui or que, quoi que, quoi que ce soil 
que, tout ce qui or que, always relate to things, and 
never to persons ; with this difference, that, in 
French, we generally begin the sentence with either 
quelque chose que or qui, quoi que, or quoi que ce soil 
que, with the following verb in the subjunctive mood : 
ex. 

Quelque chose qifon vous Whatever may be said to 

dise, ne le croyez pas, you, do not believe it. 

Quoi que ce soit qu'on vous Whatever they may say to 

dise, ne le croyez pas, you, do not believe it. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Whatever may happen to you in this world, 

puisse, v. arriver,v, monde,rn* 

never murmur against divine providence, for 

murmurez, v. contre, p. car, c. 



128 

whatever we may suffer, we deserve it. - - What- 

souffrions, v. meritons, v. 

ever I may do, you always blame me. - - Who is 

fassc, v. bldmez, v. 

the man who has stolen his money ? I know not ; 

vole., p.p. sais, v. 

but whoever he may be, and whatever he may say, 

dise,v. 
if my father catch him, he shall be punished. - - 

attrappe, v. 
In whatever your master employs you, do it 

a emploie, v. faites, v. 

heartily. - - - - Whatever you may say, your 
de bon cozur, adv. disiez, v. 

brothers shall be punished, if they deserve it. 
seront, v. meritent, v. 

On the contrary, we always make use of tout ce 
qui or que, when zvhatever can be turned into all that 
which, or every thing which ; and may be placed either 
at the beginning or in the middle of a sentence, accord- 
ing to its situation in English, with the following verb 
in the indicative mood : ex. 

II fera toujours tout ce qtfil He will always do what- 
vous plaira, ever, or every thing, you 

please. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

In whatever you do, be guided by ho- 

faites,x. guide, p.p. hon- 

nesty and probity ; and in whatever you say, 

neteie, f. dites,V. 

never deviate from the path of truth. - - 

vous ecartez, v. sentier, m. 

Whatever is pleasing is not always useful. - - - 

agreable, adj. utile, adj. 

Tell me whatever you think of me, and I will 

Dites,v. pensez,v, di- 

tell you whatever I think of you* - Never speak 
rau v. 



129 

of whatever has passed between us both. - - She is 

s'est passe,v. entre,p. deux, 
so curious, that she will know whatever I 

curieux, adj. veut,v. savoir,v, tout ce que 

do. - - Whatever glitters is not gold. - - I will pay 
fais, v. mi*, v. paierai, v. 

you to-morrow whatever I owe you. 

dois, v. 

Quelque always expresses an indeterminate significa- 
tion, and is generally joined to a substantive with which 
it agrees in number ; and quelqu'un, quelquhme, make 
quelques-uns, quelques-unes, in the plural. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

When he comes to see us, he has 

Quand, adv. vient,v, <&> voir,\. 

always some tale to tell us. -- He promised 

conte, ui. a fsirs^ y* c* prvmis, v. 

to bring me some filberts and chesnuts. - - - Have 
de aveline,f. chdtaigne,{, 

you heard any news? -- Somebody knocks 

G£pns,p.p. nouvelle,L frappe,v* 

at the door, go and open it. - - Is there 

allez,v. "^ ouvrir,v. Y a-t-il,\\ 

any of these ladies who has found my colour-box ? 

dame,L az7, v. cuuhur,f. 

• Have you any (raspberry trees) in your garden ? I have 

framboisier, m. 
some. - - Has he any vines ? Yes, he has some. 
A-t-il, vigne, f. Qui, adv. 

Qui que ce soit, speaking of persons only, may be 
Englished different ways; but when by whoever, what 
person soever, it must always be followed by the pronouns 
«, elle or qui, and sometimes by both, unless it be gov- 
erned by a verb or preposition : ex. 

Qui que ce soit qui me trompe. Whoever deceives me* 
il sera puni r shall be punished. 



130 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 



Whoever despises the poor, is himself des- 

meprise, v. lui-meme mi' 

picable. - - Whoever speaks to you, do not answer. - - 

prisable,adj. to, ripondez^v. 

Whoever (may presume to) ask you any question 

osera,v* question,?. 

concerning that affair, pretend not to know any 
touchant, p. feignez de, v. savoir, v. 

thing about it. - - Of whomsoever you speak, 

parliez, v. 

always speak the truth. To whomsoever you 

dites, v. vous 

apply every body will tell you the 

vous adressiez, v. tout le monde, m. dira, v. 

same thing. With whomsoever you be 

chose,f, Avec, p. soxjez^v. 

always behave well. 

comportez-vous, v. 

When the above pronoun is Englished by nobody in 
the world, no man living, &c. ; it must be attended with 
the negation ne before the verb ; and when speaking 
in the past tense, qui que ce fut must be used : ex. 

Je rten ai parle a qui que ce I mentioned it to no man 
soit, living, to no one. 

Cesar ne vouloit se fier a qui Caesar would trust to no- 
que cefut, body whatever. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

I spoke to nobody whatever; for I saw 

ai parle, v. ai vu, v. 

neither father, mother, nor children. •■ Charity bids 

ordonne,v. 
us to (speak ill) of nobody whatever, and to do 

de medire, v. de /aire, v* 

harm to no man living. - - Never speak to any 
dumal,m. parlez.v. 



131 

body whatever of what I told you. - - He acquainted 

fit part «,v. 
nobody in the world with his projects. - - My brother 

de projet, m. 

was so honest, that he mistrusted nobody at 
itoit, v. se difioit de,v. 

all. - - Cromwell would trust his life to nobody 

voulut, v. confier, v. vie, f. 
whatever. \ 

The abovV observation is to be made with respect to 
quoi que ce $\t, quoi que ce fut, only used in speaking 
of inanimate objects. Quiconque is indeclinable, and 
always used in the singular. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

My brother enjoys so 3 good 3 a 1 health 4 , that 

jouit de,v. si 
(for these) three years he never complained 

depuis, p. s'esi plaint, v. 

of any thing whatever. ---- He is so lazy, that 

he applies to nothing whatever. - - - - You 

s\ipplique,Y. 
may go and take a walk in the garden, 

pouvez,v, alter, w ^ vous promener, v. 
but do not touch any thing whatever. -- Who- 

touchez a, v. 
ever believes every thing which (he is told,) is 

croit.v, on lui dit^v. 

often deceived. - - - He (is ordered) to stop 

trompi, p. p. a ordre, v. de arreter,Y. 

every one that shall go that way. 

passer a, v. par-la. 

It must be observed, that the numeral adjective one, 
used as a pronoun indefinite, and admitting of a plural 
termination, is not to be expressed in French, when it 
immediately follows an adjective of colour, or any other 
expressing the shape or size of the object which it im- 
plies j but the adjective must be put in the same number 



and gender as the substantive which is understood in 
English : ex. 

Quel habit acheterez-vous ? What coat shall you buy ? 

un bleu ou un vert ? a blue one or a green 

one? 

J 9 ai trouve deux nids d'oi- I have found two birds' 

seaux ; dans Vun il y nests; there were eggs 

avoitdes ceufs,etdespetits in one, and young ones 

dans P autre, in the other. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

What kind of a hat will you have ? a black 

espece,f. *» ^ noir, adj. 

one, or a white one? a round one, or a 

blanc, adj. rond, adj. 

cocked one ? — My father has sold 

retrousse, adj. vendu, p. p. 

one of his horses; which is it? the black one or 

ce 
the grey one?-- Were there many flowers in 

gm,adj. Y avoit-il 

his garden ? Yes, there were very fine ones, 

trts, adv. 
which my father had sent him from Hol- 

envoyi, p. p. 
land. - - (Here are) several pair of shoes, which 

Void, adv. Soulier, m. 

will you have? the red ones, or the white 

^ rouge, adj. 

ones ? 1 prefer the black ones. 
pre/ere, v. 

Tout — que. Tout, preceding a noun immediately 
followed by que, is indeclinable in the masculine and 
declinable in the feminine, before nouns beginning with 
a consonant, and must be repeated before every noun in 
the sentence : ex. 

Tout savant quHl est, il As learned as he is, he 
se trompe quelquefois, sometimes mistakes. 



133 

Toute savante qu'elle est, For all she is learned, she 
eiU se trompe quelquefois, sometimes mistakes. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

For all my sister is ugly, she gets friends 

laid, adj . se fait, v. 

every-where. - - As amiable as she is, she 

par-toutiZdv. aimable, adj. 

does not please me at all. - - - For all they are 
^cn plait, v. du lout,j\dv. 

rich, they give nothing to the poor. - - - 

donnent, v. pauvre, adj. 

Your mother, although she is young, appears 

parol t,v. 
old. - - - As generous as he is, he has not given 
age, adj. a, v. Jonne^p.p. 

me one farthing. - - His aunt, for all she is angry 

liard,m, tanie,f» /acAe, adj. 

with him, will forgive him his faults, as great 

contre, p. pardonnera, v. faute, f. quelque 

as they are. - - - As young, amiable, handsome, 

soient, suhj. pr. beau, adj. 

and rich, as my friend's sisters are, they were 

etoient, v. 
not yet married the last time I saw 

encore, adv. fois,f, vis,v, 

them. 

N. B. This will be seen again among the conjunc- 
tions. 

To the above pronouns may be added the three fol- 
lowing expressions, which are generally used in an in- 
definite or indeterminate manner : 

Je ne sais qui, I know not who, whom. 

Je ne sais quoi, I know not what. 

Je ne sais quel, quelle, &c. I know not which or what. 

Je ne sais qui is only said of persons, and signifies a 
person we do not know. Je ?ie sais quoi is only said of 
12 



134 

things, and signifies an object which cannot precisely 
be named or defined : Je ne sais quel is said speaking 
of both persons and things ; lastly, we sometimes put 
un before Je ne sais qui, and indifferently un or le be- 
fore Je ne sais quoi ; ex. 

Je nesais qui me park, I know not who speaks to 

me. 
II parle deje ne sais quoi, He speaks of I know not 

what. 
Je vis je ne sais quel homme, I saw I know not what man. 
II parle tfunje ne sais qui, He speaks of I know not 

whom. 
J'ai lu une comedie intitu- I have read a play which 
lie, le je ne sais quoi, has for its title, 1 know 

not what. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

When I paid a visit to my friend, I addressed 

remiis,V. ^> m'adressai^v, 

myself to I know not whom. - - He (keeps company 

k» - frequente, v. 

with) I know not whom, and that displeases her. - - 

deplait, v. 
Whilst she (was speaking) to him, she was 

Pendant que, c. parhit, v. Jul 

accosted by I know not whom. - - There is 

aborde, p.p. par, p. II y a, v. 

I know not what mean in that behaviour. - - - 

de has, adj. conduitc, f. 

He complains of 1 know not what. - - When I 

se plaint, v. 
went in, I saw I know not what man, what wo- 
entrai,v, 
man, what pictures, what figures. - - She speaks 

portrait, m. figure, f. 

to I know not whom. - - There is in that I 

la-dedans, adv. 
know not what that pleases me. 
plait, v. 



135 



RECAPITULATORY, or promiscuous EXERCISES 
upon all the PRONOUNS. 

I speak French. - - You speak English. - * 
parle,v, parlez,v. 

We do not understand what they say to us. - - 

^» comprenons,v. disent,v. 

She speaks to you, and robs you (at the same) 

park, v. vole, v. en mime 

time. - - We have not seen them. - - Your 

(ems, m. avons, v. vus, p.p. 

mother came to see me yesterday, and I 

vinl". ^ voir, v. hier, adv. 

will go to see her to-morrow. - - Is there any body 

irai, v. demain, adv. Esi-il, v. 

that esteems her more than I do? - - Attention, 

estime, v. <&> 

cares, credit, money, I have put 2 (every 1 thing) 
soin, m. mis, p.p. tout 

in use. - - They are happy, but we are 

en, p. usage, m . heureux, adj . 

not so. - - Every body thinks I am the mother of 

croit,v. 
that child ; I assure you 1 am not. - - - Ladies, 

Mes dames, pi, 
are you the companions of Miss le Noir? Yes, 

etts,v, compagne,(, 

we are. - - That dictionary costs me three guineas, 

coute,\. 
but I owe much to it. - - Whatever may be 

dois,v. beaucoup,&dv. soient,v, 

your troubles, you ought to write to me more 

peine, f. devriez,v» ecrire, v. 

frequently. - - I will lend you the book which she 
souvent,adv. preterai,v. 

has sent me. - - Believe me, he is very 

envoye, p.p. Croyez, v. 

ill. - - • I shall be very glad to go 

malade, adj, serai % v* aise, adj. de alle^v. 



136 

there with you ; for I have something to tell 

avec, p. car, c. a dire, v. 

him. - - I love your sister, and 1 owe her re- 

aime, v. res- 

spect. - - Give me my hat and cloak. - - - 

pect,m. ehapeaium. mantelet, in. 

I have dined with your father and mother. - - 

dine, p.p. 
They 1 often 4 procure 3 me 2 that plea- 

souvent, adv. procurent,v. 

sure. - - If it be not an indiscretion on my part, 

ce est, v. de 

pray tell me what passed between you 

de grace, s\st passi, v. entre, p. 

and them. - - They have sent you good apples: 

pomme, f. 
Yes, there were some good ones and some bad 

// y avoit, v. mauvais, adj. 

ones. - - Write to me, do not write to her. - - 

Ecrivez, v. x* 

Carry some to your sister. - - I will do whatever 
Portez,v. ferai, v. 

you please. - - - The Thames is a very fine 

plaira, v. Tamise, f. 

river; it divides London into two parts. - 

riviere, f. divise,v, en, p. partie,L 

London is the capital of England, as Paris is that 

capitate, f. 
of France ; it is a fine city, but some of its streets 

rue, f. 
are very inconvenient and narrow. - - Brest 

incommode, adj. itroit, adj. 

is a fine sea - port, in France, but its entrance 
mer,(.port,m. entree, f. 

is difficult and dangerous. - - Brother, these 

difficile, adj. 
books are mine, and not , yours. - - Your 

non pas, adv. 
exercise is better than mine, but it is not so 
theme, m. 



137 

good as your sister's. - - Do you think of 
bien, adv. «&> pensez,v. a 

me? Yes, 1 do. - - You do not know what vexes 

pense,v. *» fdche,v. 

me. - - I will not accept of any of the 

veux, v. accepter,v. «» 

terms which they offer me. - - Whom ought 
condition, L offrent,v. devonsff. 

we to worship ? God, who is the father of 

adorer ,v. Dieu,m. 

them that love him, and the protector of those 

aiment,\, 
that fear him. - - Of all those who contend 

craignent, v. disputent, v. 

against religion, some do it because it per- 

contre, p. font) v. parceque, c. em- 

plexes them ; others, because they wish to 

barrasse,v* veulent,v. 

have the glory of perplexing its defenders. - - 

embarrasser, v. defenseur, m. 

Those trees are well exposed to the sun, 

arbre,m. expose, p.p. soleil, m. 

nevertheless their fruits are not good. - - I believe 
cependant, adv. crois,v. 

your uncle is arrived. - - His ability is not so 

oncle, m. arrive, p.p. habiletc,(. 

great as yours. - - Two rivals are generally 

grand, adj. rival, m. 

enemies of one another. - - Sister, who gave you 

a donne, v. 
that letter ? Our uncle's servant. - - - What does 
letlre,f. domes tique,m. *» 

he write to you ? That his library is at our 

ecrit, v. bibliotheqne, f. 

service ; and I assure you that he has a very good 

tres, adv. 
one. - - His letters please me so much, that I 

plaisent, v. 
wish to increase their number. - - Both my 

•z?cuo7,v. augmenter^y, 

12* 



138 

father and aunt are now at Rome ; the former 

a present 
writes once a week, the latter scarcely writes 

icrit, v. une fois, f. a peine 

to me twice a year. - - - He that wants 

deux fois manque de,\, 

virtue, wants (all things). - - - That lady pleases 

tout, m. dame,L plait,v. 

you, for you 1 are 3 al r ays 4 speaking 3 of her 2 . - - - 

car, c. parlez, v. 

The beauty of the mind creates admira- 

beaute, f. esprit, m. donne, v. 

tion ; that of the soul gains esteem, and that 

dme, f. donne, v. estime, f. 
of the body loye. - - - •- Most friends are more 

corps , m. amour, m. 
attached to our fortune, Hhan 3 2 they are 

attache, p.p. que ne, c. 

to our person. - - - Whoever is without virtue, 

sans, p. 
seldom 2 values 1 ' men ; and whoever is 

raremtnt, adv. estime, v. 

too good, values them (too much). - - - It 

irop, adv. trop, adv. Ce 

is she who told me that this house is not 

a dit, v. maison, f. 

yours. - - You believe that Mrs. D. is in j^our interests, 
croyez, v. interet,m» 

and I believe nothing of it. - - - Ambition 

crois, v. fie rien, adv. 
(tramples upon) wisdom, honour, probity, and on 
foule aux pieds sur, p. 

their ruins, it lays the foundation of its great- 
ruine, f. eleve,v. fondement, m. gran- 

ness. - - Whatever her intention may be, I 1 do 

dear, f. soit, v. ^ 

2 not 6 love 5 her 3 the less 7 for it 4 . - - I .assure you that 
aime, v. *» 

I have answered both her letter and her brother's. 

Nobody in the world has complained of your con- 
K s\st,v, plaint, p.p. 



139 

duct. - - When you read the history of the Jtoman 

Quand,c. lirez,v. histoire,t. Remain, adj. 

emperors, you will find, one (of them) whose name 
empereur,m, trouverez,v. 

was Nero. - - - The study of geography is absolute- 
Neron. geographic, f. absolu- 

ly necessary to him who has a taste for his- 

ment, adv. du gout, m. 

tory. - - He that sold us this clock did not 

a vendu, v. pendule, f. a 

cheat us.-- What do you think of it? - - - 

trompe. p.p. «o" pensez, v. 

Whoever cheats me shall .repent (of it). 

trompe, v. se rppen4jra ; v. en 

Every body thinks we shall have "peace. - - When I 

croit,x. aurons,v. paix,f. 

went in, the members of the assembly were 
entrai, v. itoient, v. 

seated every one in his place. - - - I, who, did not 
assis, p.p. a "«■©■> 

know that they were reconciled, was much 
savois, v. que, c. reconcilies. p.p. fus, v. fort, adv. 

surprised to see them together. - - - England owes 

de voir, v. ensemble, adv. doit,v» 

her riches to her naval strength" and the encourage- 

forces, f. pi. 
ment she gives to her commerce. -- We speak. 

donne, v. parlons % v. 

of what has happened to him. - - Well ! if he 

est, v. arrive, p.p. Eh bien, int. 

spend other people's money, he does not spend 

depense, v. 

yours. My house is like others, it has its 

maison, f. a, v. 

beauties as well as its inconveniences. - - She who 
beaule, f. incommodite, f. 

(was speaking) to you is not yet mar- 

parloit, v. encore, adv. 

ried. - - Her father, mother, brothers, sisters, uncles, 

oncle, m. 



140 

and aunts, in short, all her relations, are dead. 

tante.L enfin,c. parent,m.&,f, 

and have left her a considerable fortune. - - 

ont, v. laissi, p. p. 
Those gentlemen have fine horses, but mine are 

cheval,m, 
finer than theirs. - - Do you know any of 

connoissez,v. 

those ladies? Yes, I know some of them 

connois, v. 
For all they are young and handsome, they have a 

ont, v. 
great deal of modesty and virtue. - - Yes, niece, but 

niece, f. 

they are both rich and proud. Desire 

orgneilleux, adj. Priez, v. 

him to bring them here. - - - Is that the gown 
de amercer, v. Est-ce robe,L 

for which you gave five guineas ? - - If I 

joowr,'p. avez donne, v. 

had been in your place, I (would have) 

eusse, v. e/e, p.p. a aurois, v. 

preferred the white one to the black one. - - - - 

jore/ere,p.p. 
How many books are there in that library ? There 

y a~t-il bibliotheque, f. 

are three thousand seven hundred and twenty-seven 
in the library, fifty-two upon the table, and nineteen 
in my room. - - Whose house is this 1 It belongs 

appartienti v. 
to I know not whom. - - There is I know not what 

77 y «, v. 
in the colour, which pleases much. - - To what 
dans, p. plait, v. 

(does he apply himself) ? - - This apple, and that he 

s'applique-t-il, v. 
gave you, are very good. - - Give me either 
donna, v. Donnez, v . 

of them. - -/I will send you some thither. - - - 
*& enverrai,\. 






141 

1 cannot sell it to you for so 2 small 3 a 1 

ne peux pas, v. vendre, v. pour, p. 

sum 4 . - - 1 prefer the beauty of the mind to that 
somme,L pr6fere,w 

of the body. - - - Some love one thing, some another. 
aiment, v. 

- - She says she hates that man ; many think she 

dit, v. halt, v. 

loves him. --He whom nobody pleases, is more 
aime,v. a plait, v. 

unhappy than he who pleases nobody. -- I 

melheureux, adj. a 

was near your sister when that happened 

etois, v. aupres de, p. quand, c. arriva^ v. 

to her. - - Both his father and mother died 

moururent,x. 

on the same day. As covetous as he is, he 

avare, adj. 
gave me a guinea. - - - There are many people 

a donne, v. II y a 

whom we esteem, because we do not know them. - - 

parceque, c. 
Whatever has happened to you, I am very sorry 

soii,v. /ac/ie,adj. 

for it. - - He would do it in spite of any 

voulut,y. faire,v. en, p. depit,m. 
body whatever. - - Learning is preferable to riches 

Science, f. 
and virtue lo both. - - - Some philosophers have 

philosophe,m, ont, v. 
thought that the fixed stars were so many 
cru, p.p. ^e,adj. ttoile,(, et(Aent,\\ 

suns. - - See with what care, attention, and per- 

Voyez,v. 
severance, every animal (rears up) its (young ones.) 

eleve,v. petit, adj. 

- - Here are two grammars, which do you pre- 

Voici, adv. «» 

fer? 1 prefer this to that. - - - - Both are very 

good- - * - He believes nothing of what you 

croit^w ne Wen, adv. 



142 

told him. - - - You blame him who does 

avez dit, v. blamez,\. 

not deserve it. - - - Friend, to whom did you 

mirite, v. avez, v. 

speak? I spoke to nobody 5 for I saw 

parle, p.p. ai par 16, v. car,c. ai vu,v. 

neither of them. - - Each country has its peculiar 

particulier,3.dj< 
customs ; in France, they eat with the fork, in England, 
coutume, f. on, pro. 

we eat with the knife ; in France, they eat the meat 
on, pro. 
well done ; in England, we eat it half raw. 

cm"/,p.p. a raoitii cm. adj. 



SECT. IV. 

OF VERBS AND THEIR DIFFERENT SORTS. 

Verbs are usually divided into seven sorts, viz. 

1. Les verbes auxiliaires,. auxiliary. 

2. Les verbes actifs, active. 

3. Les verbes passifs, passive. 

4. Les verbes neutre.s, neuter. 

5. Les verbes rifiichis, reflective. 

6. Les verbes personnels, personal. 

7. Les verbes impersonnels, impersonal. 

Some of them are regular, that is to say, they follow 
the general rule of the conjugation to which they be- 
long ; others do not, and are called irregular. 

The auxiliary verbs are, avoir, to have, and Ure, to be. 
These two auxiliaries are used to conjugate all the com- 
pound tenses of the other verbs. 

The active verbs. — hi this class, the action is transitive, 
that is, it passes from the subject to the object : ex. 

Le maitre punit les ecoliers The master punishes the 
pci'-esseux, lazy scholars. 

The active verb sometimes governs two cases 1 one 



14S 

to which the action directly refers, or which is the di- 
rect object of the action, and is therefore called the 
direct or absolute case ; the other, to which the action 
refers but indirectly, and it is called the indirect or re- 
lative case : ex. 

Voire sceur a ecrit une Your sister wrote a long 
longue lettre a mon frere, letter to my brother. 

A long letter is the direct or absolute case, and to my 
brother, the indirect or relative case, of the verb wrote. 
The direct case can be no other but the accusative of a 
noun or pronoun, but the indirect is either the genitive, 
dative, or ablative. 

In the passive verbs, the action is received or suffered 
by the subject : ex. 
Les icolitrs paresseux seront Lazy scholars shall be 

pun is, punished. 

In the neuter verbs, the action is intransitive, that is, 
it remains in the agent : ex. 



Je dors, I sleep. 

Nous itudions, We study. 



Vous voyagez, You travel. 
Elle soupire, She sighs. 



In the reflected verbs, the action returns upon the 
agent that produces it: ex. 

// se repent, He repents himself. 

Elle se loue, She praises herself. 

These verbs have always se before their infinitive, 
and are conjugated with a double pronoun. 

The personal verbs are those which are conjugated 
with three persons, in the singular and plural, through- 
out all their tenses. 

The impersonal verbs have but the third person of the 
singular uumber. 

N. B. There is a kind of verbs which may be distin- 
guished by the name of reduplicative, always expressing 
a repetition of the action : ex. 

Recommencer, To begin again. 

Kefaire, To do a^ain, &c. 

In these verbs, the English word again is to be 



144 



rendered in French by the syllable re prefixed to the 

radix of the verb, and not by encore. 

All the above verbs may be simple or compound, 

A verb is simple which cannot be divided without 

losing its meaning : as, 



Appekr, To call ; 
Bdtir, Tobu i Id ; 

Mentir, To lie; 



Voir, To see ; 

Prendre, To take ; 

Vivre, To live; 

which would mean nothing, if they were divided, 

A verb is compound when it is preceded by one or 
more syllables : as, 



Rappeler, To recall. 
Rebdtir, To rebuild. 
Dementir, To 6elie. 



Prevoir, To foresee, 

Entreprendre, To undertake, 
Survivre, Toow/live,&c. 

These last verbs are generally formed by prefixing to 
them part or the whole of a preposition. 



CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 

To conjugate verbs is to give them different inflec- 
tions or terminations, according to their moods, tenses, 
persons, and numbers. 

MOODS. 

Mood or mode, in the sense it is taken bere, is a gram- 
matical term, which means the manner of affirming, or 
denoting, in the verbs, by different inflections. 

There are, in the French language, four moods, abso- 
lutely distinct from each other, by the several inflections, 
or by some other difference. They are : 
LHrifinitif, The infinitive. 

LPindicatif, The indicative. 

LHmperatif The imperative. 

he subjonctif, ou The subjunctive, or con- 

conjonclif junctive. 

Of ihe Infinitive Mood. 

This mood is so called, because it only expresses 

the action or signification of the verb in an indefinite 

and indeterminate manner^ that is, without affirmation, 






145 

and without any relation as to time, number, or person : 
ex. 

Parley To speak. 

Chanter, To sing. 

Danser, To dance. 

Of the Indicative Mood. 

This mood is thus called, because it not only indi- 
cates the affirmation in the different tenses of the verbs, 
but likewise the time, number, and person ; without 
being preceded or governed by either conjunction or 
verb : 

Uteris une lettre, I write a letter. 

77 chante une chanson, He sings a song. 

Ecris and chante are two verbs in the indicative 
mood, because they do not require to be preceded by a 
conjunction* or another verb to make a complete sense. 
The definition of thi<? mood will be better understood, 
by comparing the little that has been said with what is 
going to be said with respect to the subjunctive mood. 

Of the Imperative Mood. 

The name which has been given to this mood, is de- 
rived from a Latin word which signifies to command ; 
and the imperative is in fact but a manner of denoting 
in the verbs the action of commanding, entreating, pray' 
ing, exhorting, and sometimes forbidding : ex. 

Ne meprisez pas les avis Do not despise the advice 

que je vous donne, which I give you. 

It is easy to perceive that this maimer of speaking is 
but an exhortation, as if I had said, 
Je vous exhorte,je vous prie, I exhort, I entreat you, not 

de ne pas mepriser mes to despise my advice. 

avis, 

This mood has no first person in the singular, because 

* Among the conjunctions, some govern the indicative, others the 
subjunctive : this will be explained hereafter. 
13 



146 

it is impossible for a man to command himself; and if 
it have the first person plural, it is because we speak as 
much to others as to ourselves ; as when we say, 

Evitons tout ce qui pourroit Let us avoid every thing 
offenser les autres, that might offend others. 

The second person singular and the first and second 
plural admit of no pronouns before them ; as to the 
third, in both numbers, it is always preceded by the 
pronoun il or e//e, &c. and the conjunction que. 

Of the Subjunctive, or Conjunctive. 

The name of subjunctive, or conjunctive, sufficiently 
conveys what its use is in a sentence. It may be de- 
fined thus ; a manner of expressing the different tenses 
of the verbs without any affirmation. In fact, the sub- 
junctive never affirms ; it is always preceded by, or 
subject to some conjunction; and if it should be met 
with in a sentence containing an affirmation, that af- 
firmation can only be expressed by the verb that pre- 
cedes the subjunctive, which is used but to modify that 
affirmation. In the subsequent sentence, 

Je travaille ajin que vous I work that you may rest 
vous reposiez, yourself. 

the affirmation is only expressed by je travaille, I work, 
and what follows only expresses the end which I propose 
by working, viz. to procure you some rest. Again, 

Je desire que vous fassiez I wish that you may dd 
votre devoir, your duty; 

I affirm that I wish j but it is clear there is no affirma- 
tion in these words, that you may do your duty, since I 
do not say that you do, that you have done, that you 
will do your duty ; but only that 1 wish you may do it. 
My wish is not doubtful ; but it is very doubtful whether 
you will or may do your duty. 



147 



TENSES. 

There are, strictly speaking, but three natural and 
proper tenses in the verbs : viz. 

Le passe, The past. 

he present, The present. 

Le fntur, The future. 

In the French language, the tenses are divided in the 
following manner, viz. five in the infinitive mood ; three 
of them are simple, the two others compound. 

In the simple tenses, the verb is expressed in one 
word : ex. 

Parler, To speak. 

Chantant, Singing. 

Danse, Danced. 

The compound tenses are conjugated with some one 
of the auxiliary verbs, avoir, to have, or tire, to be, 
joined to a participle passive : ex. 

Avoir parli, To have spoken. 

Ayant chante, Having sung. 

Etre aime, To be loved. 

Etant aime, Being loved. 

Simple Tenses. 

Le present, The present. 

Le participc actif, The participle active. 

Le participe passif, The participle passive. 

Compound. 
Le preterit, The preterite. 

Le participe passe ou The participle past or com- 
compose, pound. 

There are ten tenses in the indicative mood, viz. five 
simple and five compound : they are, 

Simple. 
Le present, The present. 

Vimparfait, The imperfect. 

Le preterit^ The preterite. 



148 



Le futur, 

Le conditionnel, 



The future. 
The conditional. 



Compound. 



The present. 
The imperfect. 
The preterite. 
The future. 
The conditional, 



Le present, 
JJimparfait, 
Le preterit, 
Le futur, 
Le conditionnel, 

JV*. B. The imperative admits of no tense but the 
present. 

The subjunctive mood has four tenses ; two simple 
and two compound. 



Simple. 



Le prisent, 
Le preterit, 



Le prismt, 
Le preterit, 



The present. 
The preterite. 



Compound. 



The present. 
The preterite. 



Before we proceed any further on the conjugations, 
it has been thought proper to explain the different uses 
©f the above tenses, as one of the most important arti- 
cles in a language, the precision of which partly de- 
pends on the difference which custom sets between one 
tense and another with regard to the sense of the sen- 
tence. We shall endeavour to be short and concise, 
and say nothing but what is useful, in hopes that the 
following explanation will be sufficient to remove a 
difficulty which constantly puzzles the learner. 

TENSES of the INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Simple. 
Present. 
This tense is used when the state, action, or im- 



M9 

pression, mentioned by the verb, is existing, doing, or 
happening, at the very time we are speaking: ex. 

Je me porte bien, I am well. 

Votre sozur est malade, Your sister is ill. 

JV*om5 nous promenons, We are walking, 

Vous ecrivez, You are writing, 

lis jouent, They are playing, Slc, 

The present is also used, 

1. When speaking of actions or things which we 
habitually do, are accustomed to do, or can do : ex. 

Nous dinons toujour s a deux We always dine at two 

heures, o'clock. 

Elle etudie Vhistoire, She studies history. 

Vous parlpz Frangois, You speak French. 

Lit-?7 VAnglois? Does he read English ? 

2. When speaking of actions which are to be done 
in a very short time, we generally use this tense instead 
of the future : ex. 

Je pars ce soir pour la 1 set out this evening for 

campagne, the country. 

Que faites-uous demain ? What do you do to-morrow? 

Instead of 

Je partirai ce soir pour la I shall set out this evening 

campagne, for the country. 

Que ferez-vous demain What will you do to-mor- 
row ? 

3. This tense is also constantly used in French in- 
stead of the preterite and compound of the preterite, 
especially in orations or set discourses, and in poetry, in 
order to represent a past action or event as present to 
the mind of the hearers or readers. 

Imperfect. 

This tense has two uses; in the first, which probably 
is the origin of its name, it expresses an action present 
or doing at the time of an action that is past : as when 
I say, " 

13* 



15Q 



Mon frere apprenoit sa 
legon quand vous arri- 
vdtes, 



My brother was learning 
his lesson when you ar- 
rived. 



In the above sentence, the act of learning, though 
past with respect to my narration, was present at the 
moment your arrival took place ; therefore this tense is 
but imperfectly preterite and imperfectly present. 

In the second, the imperfect is employed every time 
we speak of actions of habit, or actions reiterated at a time 
which is not defined: ex. 



Quand j'etois a Londres, 
j'allois souvent voir mes 
amis. 



When I was in London, I 
often went to see my 
friends ; 

that is, I often used to go, or I frequently went, &c. 

The imperfect is likewise used when we speak of the 
character, or some inherent and distinctive quality, of per- 
sons or things no longer existing; and after the English 
conjunction if, though the verb be preceded by should^ 
could, would : ex. 



Philippe, pere d' Alexan- 
dre le Grand, etoit le 
plus fin politique de son 
temps, 

Cesar avoit je ne sais quoi 
de grand dans la phy- 
sionomie, 

Carthage fesoit un pro- 
digieux commerce par le 
moyen de ses vaisseaux, 
qui alloient jusqu'aux 
Indes, 

Palmire et Persepolis etoient 
de grandes et belles villes, 

S'il venoit, je le pau- 
wis* 



Philip, the father of Alex- 
ander the Great was the 
deepest politician of his 
time. 
Caesar had I know not what 
of great in his physiog- 
nomy. 
Carthage carried on a pro- 
digious trade by themeans 
of her ships, which went 
as far as the Indies. 

Palmyra and Persepolis 
were large and fine cities. 

If he would come, or came, 
I would pay him. 



151 



George If. etoit cPune 
taille plutot petite que 
moyenne ; il avoit les 
yeux tres-saillans, le nez 
grand, et une belle corn- 
plexion ; il etoit doux, 
modere ethumain: sobreet 
regit Her dans sa maniire 
de vivre : il se plaisoit 
dans la pompe et dans 
Pappareil militaire,et etoit 
naturellement brave ; il 
aimoit la guerre comme 
soldat, /'etudioit comme 
une science, el avoit, sur ce 
sujef, une correspondance 
ilablit avec quelques-uns 
des plus grands giniraux 
que VAllemagne ait pro- 
duit. 



George IF. was, in his per- 
son, rather lower than 
the middle size ; he had 
remarkable prominent 
eyes, a high nose, ami a 
fair complexion ; he was 
mild, moderate and hu- 
mane ; in his way of liv- 
ing, sober and regular: 
he delighted in military 
pomp and parade, and 
was naturally brave : 
he loved war as a sol- 
dier, studied it hs a 
science, and kadi on this 
account, a settled cor- 
respondence With some 
of the greatest generals 
that Germany has pro- 
duced. 



From the above instances it mia;ht confidently be 
believed, that every difficulty attending: the use of this 
tense will be entirely removed; I shall however add, as 
a farther illustration, that whenever the verb, which in 
English is in the preterite, can be rendered by the past 
tense of the verb to be, and that preterite changed into 
the participle active, or when that preterite can be 
turned into the verb in the infinitive mood preceded by- 
used, that past tense must be made in French by the 
imperfect : ex. 

Je lisais, I used to read ; or I was reading. 

Preterite. 

This tense is so called because it always expresses an 
action done at a time determined or specified by -di\ adverb, 
or some circumstance in the speech, and so entirely 
elapsed, that nothing more remains of the time when 
that action was doing: ex. 
Je fus malade hier pendant I was ill yesterday for two 

deux heures, hours. 



152 

La derniere fois que nous al- The last time we went to 

lames le voir, nous eurnes see him, we had a kind 

un accueil favorable, reception. 

Vous ecrivites a voire frlre You wrote to your bro- 
il y a huit jours, ther eight days ago. 

lis essuyerent de grandes They underwent great 

pertes l'annee passee, losses last year. 

Future. 

This tense simply expresses that an action will be 
done at a time that is not jet come : ex. 

Je vous verrai demain a I will see you to-morrow in 

Londres, London. 

Mon frere vous ecrira la My brother will write to you 

semaine prochaine, next week. 

In French, as well as in English, we sometimes ex- 
press an action that is to be done instantly, by the verb 
aller, or s^en oiler, to go, immediately followed by an 
infinitive : ex. 

Je vais, or je ra'en vais I am going to write to my 

ecrire a ma tante, aunt. 

Je vais, or je m'en vais I am going to set out. 

partir, 

Which signify, 

Je lui ecrirai tout presen- I will write to her immedi- 

tement, ately. 

Je partirai dans Pinslant, I will set out instantly. 

To express an uncertainty in a future tense, that is, 
to express that it is not decided that such a thing will 
be done, we make use of the verb devoir immediately 
followed by a verb in the infinitive mood, and that is 
the only instance wherein devoir does not imply obliga- 
tion, necessity, &c. : ex. 

Le rai doit partir pour The king is to set out for 

Cheltenham vers le mU Cheltenham about the 

lieu da mois de Juillet, middle of July, and is 

et ne doit revenir qu'a not to return till the lat- 

la fin du mois d?Aout, ter end of August. 



153 

That is, 

On suppose que le roi par- It is supposed that the king 

tira, &c. et quil ne re- will set out, &c. and will 

viendia, &c. not return till, fyc. 

Conditional. 

The name of this tense is a true definition of it : in 
fact, it is always used to express some condition or sup- 
position, and has always a reference to the present, be- 
cause, by supposing the condition effected, the action, 
mentioned by the conditional, becomes present : ex. 

Je lirois, si favois des I would read, if I had books.. 

livres, 

Vous auriez la fievre, si You would have a fever, if 

vous mangiez de ce you ate of that fruit. 

fruit, 

JeseYo\smortifie,sHl per- I should be mortified, if he 

doit son proces, should lose his law-suit. 

It is sometimes used, instead of the future, after the 
conjunction que : ex. 

// a promis qu'i7 vien- He has promised to come, 
droit, or that he will come. 

This tense is often called the uncertain tense, because 
it expresses an action made uncertain by the conditional 
that follows it ; and some grammarians place it among 
the tenses of the subjunctive mood, though it is very 
certain that it never is governed by any of the conjunc- 
tions which require a subjunctive mood after them. 

COMPOUND TENSES. 
Compound of the Present. 

The compound of the present is employed in tw@ 
different manners, 

1. It expresses an action past in an indeterminate 



154 

time but not very far distant from the time we speak : 
thus we must say, 

J'ai vu mademoiselle votre I have seen your sister, and 

saziir et lui ai parle, spoken to her. 

Le roi de Prusse a conquis The king of Prussia has 

la Silesie, conquered Silesia, 

Cela s'est passe avania- That has passed advanta- 

geusement pour votre geously for your cousin. 

cousin, 

In the above sentence, the action is certainly past, 
but the time when it passed is neither determined nor 
specified. 

2. It expresses a time definite and determinate, but 
of which there yet remains some part to elapse : ex. 

Les fruits ont tres-bien Fruits have very well sue* 

reussi cetie annie, ceeded this year. 

Nous n'avons pas eu beau- We have not had much 

coup de neige cet hiver, snow this winter. 

II a plu toute ceite semaine, It has rained all this week, 

tout ce mois, all this month. 

Nous avons vu oVelranges We have seen strange 

choses dans ce siecle, things in this century. 

In the above sentences, this year, this week, this 
winter, &c. are times which still last, and are not yet 
elapsed. 

To express an action recently past, we sometimes 
make use of the verb venir immediately followed by de, 
and the verb in the infinitive mood : ex. 

Je viens de le voir passer, I have just seen him go by, 
Le roi vient d'arriver, The king is but just arrived, 

Elle vient d'expirer, She is but just dead. 

The same tense may be expressed by the verb /aire, 
preceded by the negation ne and followed by the con- 
junction que, with an infinitive preceded by de : ex. 

// ne fait que tfarriver, He is but just arrived. 

Je ne fais que de sortir, I have but just gone out, 



155 

N. B. This particle de is here indispensable, because, 
without it, the expression would have quite another 
sense, and would express a continuation or a frequent 
reiteration in the action : ex. 

Vous ne faites que sortir, You do nothing but go out. 
Elle ne fait que jouer et She does nothing but plaj 
danser, and dance. 

Compound or the Imperfect. 

This tense expresses an action past before another 
which is past also, but with this difference, that the 
action expressed by this tense is the principal object of 
the person who speaks, and the following sentence is 
subordinate to that expressed by the compound of the 
imperfect. So that, though the time of that subordinate 
sentence be defined, that of the principal sentence is not 
the less indeterminate, because the former has no influ- 
ence on the latter. As when we say, 

Nous avions dine lorsquHl We had dined when he 
arriva, arrived, 

our principal object is to express the action of dining 
as past, without determining at what time, but only be- 
fore an action which is past also, without, however, 
the latter being a consequence of the former ; for, we 
do not mean to say, that he stayed, or waited, till we 
had dined, to arrive. 

Compound of the Preterite. 

This tense also expresses an action past or done 
before another which is likewise past; and it is deter- 
mined by the following sentence, which is the principal 
object of the attention. Thus when we say, 

Quand Us eurent acheve When they had done play- 
de jouer, Us se mirent a ing, they began singing 
chanter, 



156 

We mean at first to convey that tbey began singing, 
and that it was not till they had done playing: in which 
case, the action of having done playing is subordinate to 
this, they began singing, and consequently the latter de- 
termines the time of the other. 

The following observation is very plain, and will in 
some manner fix the use of the above tense, viz. that 
it is hardly ever used except after the conjunctions. 

Aussitot que, } CApres que, After; 

D'ab'*rd que, > As soon as ; < Lor s que, ) w . 
Des que, ) ( Quand, ) ' 

which never precede a compound of the imperfect, un- 
less the verb express a custom or habit. 

Lastly, we must use the compound of the preterite 
when the adverb bientot soon, precedes or follows the 
verb was or had, to express an action or thing as done 
and accomplished : ex. 

L? affaire fut bientot faite, The business was soon over. 
J^eus bientot Jini de man- I had soon done eating. 
g er > 

Compound of the Future. 

The name of this tense seems at first to convey a con- 
tradiction : what is meant by it is, not that an action 
can be future and past at the same time, but only that 
the action, which is to come, will be past when another 
action happens, or even before it happens : ex. 

Je serai parti quand vous I shall be gone when you 

reviendrtz, come bark. 

Quand vous aurez fini vos When you have done your 

affaires, vous viendrez me business, you shali come 

trouver, to me. 

In the first sentence, / shall be gone which is a 
future time with respect to the present we speak 






151 

in, will be a past time by the time you will or purpose 
to arrive, &c. 

Compound of the Conditional. 
This tense generally supposes a condition, as the con- 
ditional present, with this difference, that the condition 
taking place, the action expressed by the verb in the 
conditional is accomplished and consequently in a past 
time : ex. 

Je vous aurois ecrit il y a I would have written to you 
un mois, si feusse su a month ago, if I had 
votre adresse, known your direction. 

The indicative mood has another tense, formed by 
the compound of the present of the verb avoir, joined 
to a participle passive, which has not been inserted 
in the preceding tenses, on account of its being seldom 
used : ex. 
Quand j'ai eu dine, je suis When I had dined, I set 

parti, out. 

But it is more elegant and natural to say, 
Aprcs avoir dine, je suis After I had dined, I set 
parti, out. 

TENSES of the SUBJUNCTIVE or CONJUNCTIVE 
MOOD. 
The subjunctive or conjunctive has no future dis- 
tinguished from the present, because the present of the 
subjunctive likewise expresses a future tense : ex. 
Je ne crois pas quHl vienne, I do not think he will come. 
Add the following observations to the latter: 
1. When the verb which precedes the conjunction 
is in the present or future of the indicative, and when 
we do not mean to express an action passed in the 
second verb, we must put this last verb in the present 
of the subjunctive mood : ex. 

Je soahaite que vous reus- I wish you may succeed in 

sissiez dans votre entreprise, your undertaking. 

J'attendrai quHl vienne, 1 will wait till he come* 
14 



3 58 



2. When the verb which is before the conjunction is 
in some of the past tenses, or conditional, and we wish 
not to designate by the second verb a past time more 
distant than that of the first verb, we must put this sec- 
ond verb in the preterite of the subjunctive : 



Alexandre ordonna que tous 

ses sujets Z'adorassent 

comme un dieu, 
Je voulois que vous ecrivis- 

siez a votre sceur, 
II souhaiteroit que vous 

prissiez des mesures plus 

convenables, 



Alexanderordered,that all 
his subjects should wor- 
ship him like a god. 

I wished you to write to 
your sister. 

He would wish you to take 
more becoming meas- 
ures. 



3. The compound of the present of the subjunctive 
mood is used when we speak of an action past and ac- 
complished, with regard to the tense of the verb which 
precedes the conjunction ; and this tense is generally 
the present, compound of the present, or future of the 
indicative : ex. 



Je doute qu'aucun philo- 
sophe ait jamais bien 
connu V union de Pdme 
avec le corps, 

II a fallu que j'aie consul- 
te tous Us medecins, 

Je rCavrai garde d^y alter, 
que je n'aie recu quel' 
que. assurance (Petre bien 
accueilli, 



I doubt whether any philo- 
sopUer have ever well un- 
derstood the union of the 
soul with the body. 

I was obliged to consult all 
the physicians. 

I shall by no means go thi- 
ther, till I have recehcd 
some assurance of being 
welcome. 



4. After the imperfect, preterite, compound of the 
imperfect, of the indicative., or one of the two condi- 
tionals, we use the compound of the preterite of the 
subjunctive mood ; likewise after the conjunction ?/, 
When preceding a compound tense : ex. 

JHgnorois que vous eussiez I did not know you J ad 
embrasse cetle profes- embraced that proics- 
sion-la y siun. 



• 159 

Vous rCavez pas era que je You did not believe I 
fusse arrivee avant vous, should have arrived be- 
fore you. 

Nous aurions eti fetches que We should have been sorry 
vous vous fussiez adresse if you had applied to any 
a d'autres qu'a nous, others but us. 

NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 

A tense is composed of numbers; that is, the singu- 
lar and the plural. 

That there are three persons, has already been ob- 
served under the personal pronouns ; we have only to 
remark, that some of these three persons are always 
joined to the verb as its nominative case, therefore the 
verb must agree with that nominative in number and 
person : ex. 



Je fais, 1 do. 

Tu fais. Thou dost, 

77 fait, He does. 



Nous fesons, We do. 
Fous faiie.s, You or ye do, 
lis font, They do. 



The pronoun vous, you, denotes the second person 
singular and plural, with this difference, that when we 
speak to a person only, the attribute, or qualifying 
noun, must be put in the singular: ex. 

Vous etes marie, and not You are married. 

marie s, 

Vous etiez general de Par- You were generai of the 

mee and not generaux, army. 

But we must say maries and generaux, if we speak to 
many. 

When the verb has two or three nouns or pronouns 
as its nominatives, it must be put in the plural, though 
all these nominatives be in the singular; because two 
or more nouns in the singular are equivalent to a plu- 
ral, with regard to verbs as well as to adjectives : ex. 

Monfrere et ma sceur sont My brother and sister are 

partis, gone. 

This has already been mentioned in the adjectives. 



1G0 

If, among these nominatives, one is of the first per- 
son and the other of the second, or one is of the second 
and the other of the third, the verb must agree with the 
first in preference to the second, and with the second 
in preference to the third ; observing that, in French, 
the person spoken to, must be named first ; and the per- 
son spealrfftg is to be mentioned the last : we must 
therefore say, 

Cest vous et moi qui avons It is you and I who have 

decouvert tout ce complot, discovered all that plot. 

Ce rCest ni vous ni ma It is neither you nor my 

sceur qui avez ouvert la sister who have opened 

forte, the door, &c. 

Vous, mon pere, et moi, You, my father, and I, will 

partirons demain, set out to-morrow. 

The pronoun relative qui, in these and the like sen- 
tences, always takes place of the first or second person, 
and only agrees with the others in number ; it is for this 
reason we must say, 

Cest moi qui suis cause de It is I who am the cause 

ce malheur, of that misfortune. 

Chst vous qui avez revile It is you who have reveal- 

ce secret, ed that secret. 

£e rfest ni lui ni moi qui It is neither he nor I who 

P&vonsfait, have done it. 

There are four conjugations in the French language. 
Each is distinguished by the termination of the verb in 
the infinitive mood. 

The first makes er, as donner, to give. 

The second ir, as pumY, to punish. 

The third evoir, as recevoir, to receive. 

The fourth re, as rendre, to render. 

N. B. It is necessary that the learner should be 
well acquainted with the manner of conjugating the 
two following verbs, because of the frequency of their 
occurrence in sentences, and in forming the compound 
tenses of all other verbs. 



161 



CONJUGATION of the AUXILIARY VERB 

AVOIR, TO HAVE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Compound of the present. 

Avoir, to have. Avoir eu, to have had. 

Participle active. Compound of the past. 

Ayant, having. Ayant eu, having had. 

Participle passive. 
Eu, had. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. Singular. Plural. 

Tai, I have. Nous avons, we have. 

Tu as, thou hast. Vous avez, you or ye haves 

// a, he has. lis out, ) f . , 

Elle a, she has. Elks out, J iney ftave * 

Imperfect. Sing. Plural. 

Pavois, I had. Nous avians, we had. 

Tm avois, thou hadst. Foi/s <me2, you had. 

11 avoit, he had. lis avoient, they had* 

Preterite. Sing. Plural. 

J'ews, I had. Nous eumes, we had. 

Tu eus, thou hadst. Fows eutes, you had. 

// ewf, he had. lis eurent, they had. 

Future. Singular. 
J'aurai, I shall or will have. 
7w auras, thou wilt, $-c. have 
// aura, he will, &c. have. 

Plural. 
Nous aurons, we shall, <y-c. have. 
Foms awrez, you will, &c. have. 
J/s auront, they will, #*c. have. 

Conditional. Singular. 
J'aurois, I should, could, would, or might have. 
Tu aurois, thou wouldst, #-c. have. 
II auroit, he would, fye. have. 

14* 



162 



Plural. 

Nous aurions, we should, &c. have. 
Vous auriez, you would, &c. have. 
Ik auroient, they would, #c. have. 

Compound Tenses. 

They are formed by adding the participle passive, ew, 
had, to the preceding : ex. 

Compound of the Present. 
J'ai cw, &c. I have had, <^c. 

Compound of the Imperfect. 
Tavois ew, &x. I had had, <^c. 

Compound of the Preterite. 
J'ews ew, &c. I had had, &c. 

Compound of the Future. 

J'aurai ew, &c. I will or shall have had, fyc. 

Compound of the Conditional. 

Paurois ew, &c. I would, should, could, or might have 

had, #-c. 

Imperative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 
Ait, have thou. 
QuHl ait, let him have. 
Quelle ait, let her have* 

Plural. 
Ayons, let us have. 
Ayez, have ye or you. 
Qw'zYs or e/Zes aient, let them have* 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. Singular. 
Que fate, that I have, or may have. 
tu aies, thou mayest have. 
il ait, he may have. 



163 

Plural. 
Que nous ayons, that we may have. 
vous ayez, you may have. 

ils aient, they may have. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Quefeusse, that I might have or had. 
tu eusses, thou mightest have, 

il tut) he might have. 

Plural. 
Que nous eussions, that we might have. 
vous eussiez, you might have. 

ils eussent, they might have. 

Compound Tenses. 

They are formed by adding the participle passive eu t 
had, to the two preceding: ex. 

Compound of the Present. 
Que faie ew, &c. that I may have had. 

Compound of the Preterite. 
Quefeusse ew, &c. that I might have had. 
The learner ought to conjugate the preceding verb 
with a negation : ex. 

Je n'cw pas, I have not ; 

Nous rfavons pas, We have not ; 

always placing ?ie before the verb, and pas after it. 

CONJUGATION of the AUXILIARY VERB 
ETRE, to be. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Compound of the Present. 

Etre, to be. Avoir 6te, to have been. 

Participle active. Compound of the past. 

Eianf, being. Ay ant 6t6, having been. 

Participle passive. 
Eti, been. 



164 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. Singular. Plural. 

Je suis, I am. Nous sommes, we are. 

Tu es, thou art. Vous ties, you are. 

// est, he is. lis sont, they are. 
Imperfect. Sing. Plural. 

J'etois, I was. Nous eiions, we were., 

Tu efois, thou wast. Vous etiez, you were. 

// etoit, he was, lis itoient, they were. 

Pret. Sing. Plural. 

Jefus, I was. Nous fumes, we were. 

Tufus, thou wast. Vous Jutes, you were. 

Ilfut, he was. lis furent, they were. 

Future. Singular. 
Je serai, I shall or will be. 
Tu seras, thou wilt, fyc. be. 
77 sera, he will, &c, be. 

Plural. 
JVom5 serous, we shall, cf^c. be. 
Vous serez, you will, <^c. be. 
lis seront, they will, fyc. be. 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je serois, I would, could, should, or might be. 
TV* serois, thou wouldst, #-c. be. 
JZ seroit, he would, #*c. be. 

Plural. 
Nous serions, we should, cy-c. be. 
Fous seriez, you would, #-c, be. 
I7s seroient, they would, #c. be. 

Compound Tenses. 

They are formed by adding the participle passive of 
this verb, e/c, been, to the simple tenses of the indica- 
tive mood of the verb avoir : ex. 

Compound of the Present. 
J'cw' ete\ &c. 1 have been, #*c. 

Compound of the Imperfect. 
Tavois efe, &c. I had been, fyc. 



165 

Compound of the Preterite. 
J'eus ete, &c. I had been, fyc. 

Compound of the Future. 
J'aurai ete, &c. I shall or will have been, fyc. 

Compound of the Conditional. 
.Paurois ete, &c. I should, could, would, or might 
have been, <£-c. 
Imperative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 
Sois, be thou. 
QaHl soil, let him be. 

Plural. 
Soyons, let us be. 
Soyez, be ye. 
QiCils soient, let them be. 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Que je sois, that I be, or may be. 
tu sois, thou mayest be. 
il soit, he may be. 

Plural. 
Que nous soyons, that we may be. 
vous soyez, you may be. 

Us soient, they may be. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que jefusse, that I might be, or were. 
tu fusses, thou mightest be. 
ilfut, he might be. 

Plural 
Que nous fussions, that we might be. 
vous fussiez, you might be. 

ilsfussent, they might be. 

Comp@und Tenses. 
They are formed by adding the participle past of this 
verb, ete, been, to the two simple tenses of the sub- 
junctive mood of the verb avoir: ex. 

Compound of the Present. 
Quefaie ite, that I may have been, fyc. 



166 

Compound of the Preterite. 
Quefeusse e/e, &x. that I might have been, #*c. 
This verb, as well as the preceding, is to be conju- 
gated with the negation : ex. 

Je ne suis pas, I am not. 

Nous ne sommes pas, We are not. 
N. B. Here it is peculiarly necessary to observe, that 
the two above verbs, avoir, to have, and etre, to be, 
are only auxiliaries when they are joined with some par- 
ticiple passive of another verb ; otherwise, elre may 
properly be called a substantive verb; that is, a verb 
which only expresses the affirmation, without any in- 
herent quality ; and the verb avoir is an active one, 
which signifies to possess. 

EXERCISES on the two AUXILIARY VERBS. 

GENERAL OBSERVATION. 

Every verb must agree with its nominative case in 
person and number; but after collective nouns, such as 
amas, foule, infinite, nornbre, la plupart, &lc. followed by a 
genitive, the verb must agree vnth that genitive in 
number: ex. 

La plupart de ses amis Pont Most of his friends have 
abandonne, forsaken him* 

In order to ease the learner, the different simple 
tenses are marked in the following exercises as far as the 
irregular verbs, when it is hoped every difficulty will 
be removed by practice and attention. The second 
person singular, being seldom or never used in conver- 
sation, has been omitted throughout the exercises on the 
verbs. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I have a book. - - I am happy. He has 

heureux, adj. 

a hat which is too big. We have no 

trop,adv. grand,a.dj. 

money. We are not ambitious. You have 

argent, m. ambitieux, adj. 



167 

a sword, - - You are very proud. Those girls 

orgueilleux : 2idj. 
have modesty ; they are virtuous. 

modeslie,L vertueux,ady 

Imp. I had a friend. - - I was grateful - My 

reconnoissant, adj. 
sister had no work, she was lazy. - - - We had 

ouvrage, m. paresseux, adj. 

a holiday, we were very glad of it. - - You had 
^» conge^m. mse,adj. 

company, but you were not ready. - Your brothers 
compagnie,(. mais,c. p?*e/,adj. 

had learning', they were loved by every body. 
savuir, m. aime, p.p. de 

Pret. (As soon as) I had a fine horse, I was 
Dts que, c. 

merry. My cousin had a little garden, he 

de bonne humeur. cousin,m. 

was ingenious. - - As soon as we had bread we 

etirit adroit, adj. pain,m. 

were satisfied. - - You had fine weather, you were 

rcmaste, p.p. terns, m. 

pleased. ----- Your friends had beautiful flowers ; 
content, adj. 

they were very careful of them. 

sdigneiea?,adj. 
Fut. I shall have discretion ; I shall be prudent. 
discretion ,f. 
- - Mis? White shall have a bird that will be very 

oisean.m. 
tame. - - - We shall have no books, we shall not 
apprivoise,dL(\j. 

be learned. - - You shall have pens and paper; you 
safari/, adj. 

will be busy. The English will have a good 

occupe, adj. 
admiral ; they will be victorious. 
amiral, m. victorieux. adj. 

Cond. I could have a pretty dog. - - I would 

jo/i,adj. ctiien, m. 



168 

not be troublesome. - - - - Mr. Thomas would have 

importun, adj. 
good wine : it would be a delicious thing. - - We 

ce delicieux, adj. chose, f. 

Would have a dictionary : we would not be negligent. 
- - - You would have good officers ; you would be 
invincible. - - - - These ladies would have a better 
invincible, adj. 

reception ; they would be thankful. 
accueil, or. reconnoissant, adj. 

Imperative Mood. 
Have patience and be indulgent. - * Let her have a 
gown; let her be happy. - - Let us have at least 

an moins, adv. 

some gratitude ; let us be diligent. Let them 

reconnoissance, f. 
have partridges ; let them be merry. 

perdrix, f. joyeux, adj . 

4 Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. That I may have riches. - - That I may 
be charitable. - - - - That he may have scholars. - - - - 

That he may be attentive. That we may have a 

attend/, adj. 

good house. That we may be well lodged. 

Men, adv. Zoge,p.p. 
That you may have your money; that you may 

argent, m. 
be paid. -. - - - That they may have apples: that 

/w/e,p.p. 
they may be ripe. 

mur, adj. 

Pret. That I might have generosity. That I 

generosite^ f. 

might not be poor, That he might have no 

pauvre,2idj, 
pleasure. - - - That he might be uneasy. - - - That 
plaisir,m. inquiet,did). 

we might have our share. -* -- That we might not 
part,(. 



169 

be deceived. - - - That you might have a couple 

trompe, p.p. couple, f. 

of fowls. - - - That you might be pleased. - - - That 

content, adj. 
they might have no pensiou. - - - That they might 
not be rewarded. 

recompense, p.p. 

Promiscuous EXERCISES upon the COMPOUND 
TENSES. 

I have had (a great deal) of trouble ; I have not 

peine, f. 
been rewarded. - - - Your brother would have had 
leave, if he had been diligent. - - - If you had 

permission, f. 

married him, you would have had a tyrant 
epouse.p.p. tyran,m, 

instead of a husband ; you never could have been 
au lieu,p. m:tn,m. ne jamais 

happy. - - - - If we had fought, we could no 

combattu, p.p. 
have been conquered. - - - Thomas has had two 

vaincu, p.p. 
holidays, because he has been very active. - - - 
conge, m. parceque,c. CLClif, adj. 

Your friend could have had a better watch, he 

monfre, f. 
would not have been cheated. - - - Your uncle and 

t romp 6, p.p. 
my brother have been wet. - - - You could have 

mowlle, p.p. 
killed a hare, if you had had a gun. 
Jue,p.p. lievre, m. fusil, m. 

After these exercises, the learner ought to conjugate 
the two foregoing verbs, throughout the several tenses 
of the indicative mood only, first with an interrogation 
affirmative, and then with an interrogation negative ' 
ex, 

15 



170 

Singular. 
Affirmatively. 

Ai-js ? have I ? I Suis-je ? ami? 

Jl-hilf has he ? | Est~il ? is he ? 

Moh frere a-t-il ? has my brother? 

Safille est-elle? is her daughter? 

Negatively. 



K^ai-je pas ? have I not ? 
W a-t-il pas ? has he not ? 
jl/rt sceur rCa-t-elle pas ? 



JVe suis-je pas ? am I not? 
N'est-ilpas? is he not? 
has not my sister? 



Votre cousin tfest-il pas ? is not your cousin ? 

Plural. 

Affirmatively. 

Sommes-nous ? are we ? 
Elcs-vous ? are you ? 



Avons-nous? have we? 
Avez-vous? have you? 
Oat-ils ?* have they ? 



Sont-ils ? are they ? 



Vosfreres ont-ils ? have your brothers ? <£/*c. 

£es ^//es sont-dles ? are nis daughters ? #-c. 

Negatively. 

N' avons-nous pas ? have we not ? 

N'avez-vous pas? have you not? 

N' 'ont-ils pas ? have they not ? 

Ses enfans tf ont-ils pas ? have not his children ? 

Ne sommes-nous pas ? are we not?. 

JPetes-vous pas ? are you not ? 

Ne sont-ils pas ? are they not ? 

JJ/es sceurs ne sont-elles pas ? are not my sisters ? <^c. 

N. B. Tn the interrogations, it must be observed, 
that when there is a noun standing as a nominative to 
the verb, the pronouns it, elle, nous, vous, ils, dies, 
though not expressed in English, must be expressed in 
French immediately after the vorb, according to the 
person and number; and when the verb terminates 
with a vowel, a -t- is to be added in the third person 



171 



singular between the verb and the pronoun, the noun 
beginning the phrase: ex. 

Votre oncle cc-t-il des en- Has your uncle any chil- 

fans ? dren ? 

that is, Your uncle, has he any children ? 

Mon cousin aura t-il congi? Will my cousin have a 

holiday? 
that is, My cousin, will he have a holiday? 

The same rule must be observed in the conjugation 
of the other verbs : ex. 

Votre frere joue-i-\\ d\i Does your brother play on 
violon ? the violin ? 

Sa sozur dinera-t-t\\e ici Will her sister dine here 
aujourd^hui ? to-day ? 

But if the sentence begin with que interrogative, or 
an adverb followed by a noun, the pronoun is not to be 
expressed, and that noun is to be put after the verb : ex. 

Que fait votre sozur ? What is your sister doing ? 

Comment se porie voire How does your brother ? 
frere ? 

When, in French, we make a general interrogation 
concerning a sudden pain, misfortune, accident, &c, we 
say, 
Qrfest-ce que c?esl? What is the matter ? 

But if speaking to or of a person, we must use the 
verb avoir, and follow the above rule : tx. 

What is the matter with 



Qtfavez-vous ? 
QiCa-t-il ? 
Qu'aviez-vous ? 



Qu?avoit votre 
matin ? 



you ? 
What is the matter with 

him? 
What was the matter with 

you" 



sozur 



ce 



What was the matter with 
your sister this morning? 

The learner will have no trouble in going through 
the other simple tenses of the indicative mood ; and as 



172 

for the compounds, it needs only to be remarked, that 
eti, had, or ete, been, is to be added to the simple tenses 
•f the verb avoir, to have: ex. 

Ai-je eu ? have I had? 

N^ai-je pas eu ? have I not had? &c. 

Jli-je ete ? have I been ? 

N' * ai-je pas ete? have I not been ? &c. 



Promiscuous EXERCISES on the preceding RULES. 

Have I my books ? - - Am I net unhappy to 

malheureux, adj. de 
liave lost his friendship ? - - Has he no money ? 

perdu, p.p. amilie, f. 

Is my sister arrived? - - Has not your father a great 

arrive, p.p. 
deal of friendship for you ? - - - What is the matter 
with you ? - - Have not your parents sent you 

envoy e, p.p. 
all the money which you wanted? - - - - Have we 

dont avicz, v. besoin 

not a garden? - - - Are we not very happy? - - - 
Have you a good gun? - - - Are you dexterous? 

adroit, adj. 
Have not my brother and sister a beautiful coach ? - - 
Are not Paul and Thomas two pretty children ? - - 

joli, adj. 
Are your brothers arrived ? - - - Are you not glad 
to see them ? - - What is the matter with him ? 

de voir, v. 
Have they not spoken to him ? - - Had you not a 

parle, p.p. 
little dog ? - - Was not your paper very good ? - - Are not 
the English ladies generally handsomer than 

generalement, adv. 
the French? - - Shall you have occasion for your die- 

besoin, m. de 
tipnary? - - - Shall I not have the pleasure to see 

de 



173 

you to-morrow ? - - - Were you not in the room ? - - - 
demain, adv. chambre, f. 

Shall we not have leave? Will they not be 

angry ? - - - Could you not have had a better watch? 

fdche, adj. 

- - - - If France were as rich as England, would 

Si, c. eloit 

it not be the best* country in the world ? - - - 

ce, pro. 
Will you not be ashamed ? ----- Has not your 

honteux, adj. 
friend had bad weather ? - - - What was the 

mauvais, adj. terns, m. 
matter with him this morning ? - - - - Had not our 
admiral better seamen than yours ? - - Has he been 

matelol, m. 
victorious ? • ■ - Would not your hat be too big ? - - - - 
victorieux, adj. grand, adj. 

Is not your sister older than mine ? - - Are yon 

age, adj. 
not happier than if you were married ? - - - - Shall 

marie, p.p. 
not John have a holiday, if he be diligent ? - - Has not 

Jean est 

your cousin more money than you ? - - - Was not your 
wine very dear ? 

The learner will soon be convinced how necessary it 
is to know these two verbs perfectly well ; because, in- 
dependently of being constantly used, the compound 
tenses of all the others are formed with them. When 
he is well acquainted with their usage, he will only have 
to add the participle passive to any of their tenses : 
ex. 

J'ai aime, I have loved, or did love. 

Je n'ai pas chante, I have not sung, or did not sing. 

Ai-je parli ? have I spoken? or did I speak? 

* See the Degrees of Comparison, page 60. 
1.5* 



m 

JsPai-je pas etudie? have I not studied? or did I not 

study. 
Avez-vous danse? have you danced? or did you dance ? 
Navez-vous pas ecrit ? have you not written ? or did you> 

not write ? 
Je suis puni, I am punished. 
Je ne suis pas atlendu, I am not expected. 
§uis-je aime? am I loved ? 
Ne suis-je pas perdu ? am I not undone ? 
Etes-vous marie ? are you married ? 
■N'etes-vous pas convaincu? are you not convinced ? 

REMARK on the Verb ETRE, to be. 

In English, when this verb immediately precedes 
any noun, signifying old, hungry, thirsty, cold, hot, or 
afraid, it should be rendered in French by avoir, to 
have, and the adjective must be changed into its sub- 
stantive : ex. 

Quel age avez-vous ? How old are you ? 

J'ai sept ans, I am seven years old. 

Avez-vous faim ? Are you hungry ? 

Non, mais fa\ soif, No, but I am thirsty, fyc, 

EXERCISES. 

How 7 old is your daughter ? 3he is seven 

Quel, pro. filled. 
years old. - - - My son will be eleven years old 
<m,m. *» fils,m. 
(in the) month of April. I was very 

au mois, m. Avril, m. grand, adj. 

hungry when I arrived. Were you not 

quand,c» suis arrive, v. 
very thirsty ? - - He is not afraid. - - You will 

grand, adj. peur, f. 

soon be warm. - - - Are you not cold ? - - - - 

bientot, adv. chaud, m. froid, m. 

How old are these two young children? The 

enfant, m. 



175 

one is three years old, and the other is not yet 

encore, adv. 
four. - -' --' Was not my sister more than ten years old 
when she died ? 

quand, adv. rnourut, v. 

FIRST CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Parl-er, to speak. 

Participle active. *ant, speaking. 

Participle passive. e, m. ee, f. spoken. 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. Avoir parlz, to have spoken. 
Past. Ayant parte, having spoken. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Je parl-e, f speak, or I do speak, or, I am speaking.t 
Tu es, thou speakest. 
// e, he speaks. 

Plural. 
Nous *ons, we speak. 
Vous ez, you speak. 
lis ent, they speak. 

* Verbs in this conjugation, the root of which terminates in g or e, 
immediately succeeded by a or o, require, for the softening of their 
sound, that an e be added to the g, and a cedilla to the 5. Stars 
are placed where these alterations are required. 

f When in English, a participle active is joined to any of the tenses 
of the auxiliary verb to be, to express the continuation of the action, 
the auxiliary must be left out in French, and the participle put in 
the same tense, &c. wilh the auxiliary that is suppressed : 



Je parle, I am speaking ; 
Vous paries, you are speaking ; 
Nous danserons, we shall be dan- 
cing; 



Je priois, I was desiring ; 
Nous chanlions, we were singing ; 
lis tcriroient, they would be 
writing ; 



and not Je suis parlant, vous etes parlant, j'etois priani. Sec. nows 
serons dansant, its seroient ecrivant, kc. 



176 

Imperfect. Singular. 
Jeparl-*ois, I was speaking, spoke, or did speak. 
Tu *o?>, thou wast speaking, &c. 
11 *ot7, he was speaking, &c. 

Plural. 
Nous ions, we were speaking, fyc. 
Vous iez, you were speaking, &C. 

lis *oient, they were speaking, #c. 

Preterite. Singular. * 
Je parl-*m, I spoke, or did speak. 
Tu *as, thou spokest. 
7*/ *a, he spoke. 

Plural. 
Nous *ames, we spoke. 
Vous *ates, you spoke. 
lis erent, they spoke. 

Future. Singular. 
Je parl-crat, I shall or will speak. 
Tu eras, thou shalt or wilt speak, 
11 era, he shall or will speak. 

Plural. 
Nous erons, we shall or will speak. 
Vous erez, you shall or will speak. 
lis eront, they shall or will speak. 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je parl-erow, I should, would, or might speak* 
Tu erois, thou shouldst, &c. speak. 
II eroit, he should, <^c. speak. 

Plural. 
Nous erions, we should, <frc. speak. 
Ferns enez, you should, <^c. speak. 
//* eroient, they should, <&-c. speak. 

Compound Tenses. 
Present. J^aiparU, I have spoken. 

Imperfect. J'avois parle, I had spoken. 

Preterite. Jhus parli, 1 had spoken. 






177 



Future. J'aurai parlt, I shall or will have spoken. 

Conditional. J-auroisparle^l should, would, could, have 

spoken. 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Parl-e, speak thou. 
QuHl €, let him speak. 
Plural. 
*ons* let us speak. 
ez, speak ye. 
QuHfe mt, let them speak. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Queje parl-e, that I may speak, or I speak, 
hi es. thou mayest speak. 

il c, he may speak. 

Plural. 
nous ions, that we may speak. 
vous icz, you may speak. 

ils eni, they may speak. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je parl-*asse, that I might speak, or I spoke. 
lu *asses, thou mightest speak. 
il *dt, he might speak. 

Plural. 
nous *assions, that we might speak. 
vous *assiez, you might speak. 

ils, *assent, they might speak. 

Compound Tenses. 
Present. Que faie parity that I may have spoken. 
Preterite. Que feusse parte, that I might have spoken. 

After the same manner are conjugated about 2700 
regular verbs. The following are excepted : viz. 

Aller, being very irregular, will be seen among the 
irregular verbs. 



178 

Envoyer is only irregular in the future and condition- 
al present; as, instead of saying, fenvoyerai, I will send, 
fyc. fenvoyerois,l would send, &c. according to this con- 
jugation, we say, 

Future. 
Singular. Plural. 

tPenverrai, i will send. Nous enverrons. 

Tu enverras, Vous enverrez. 

II enverra 1 lis enverront. 

Conditional. 
Singular. Plural. 

Tenverrois, I would send. Nous enverrions. 
Tu enverrois, Vous enverricz. 

II enverroit, lis enverroicnt. 

Puer (sentir mauvais). This verb is oniy used in 
the infinitive mood, present tense, imperfect, future of 
the indicative, and conditional. Formerly this verb 
was irregular in the three persons of the present tense 
of the indicative mood ; as je pus, tu pus, il put ; cus- 
tom has, however, reformed the abuse, and will have it, 
Je pue, tu pues, il pue. 

Verbs ending in ayer and oyer, as essayer, to try, 
envoyer, to send, change the y into i wherever the letter 
y is immediately followed by an e mute : ex. fessaie, 
tu essaies, il essaie,fenvoie, tu envoies, il envoie, &lc. 

The learner, having conjugated a verb affirmatively 
and negatively, ought tc conjugate two others, v\ith an 
interrogation affirmative and wgalive, in the indicative 
mood only, and so on tjhrough the other conjugations, 
before he attempts the exercises : ex. 
Affirmatively. 
Manges-til? dost thou eat? 
Mange-t-il ? does he eat ? 
Parlons-nous ? do we speak, cy-c. 
Negatively. 
Ne parle-je pas ? do I not speak ? 

Ma sazur ne chante-t-elle pas ? does not my sister sing. 

N, B, In many verbs, common usage does not admit 
an interrogation in the first person singular, present, of 



179 

the indicative mood. — Instead of saying, Mange-je ? Do 
I eat? Punisje? Do I punish? &c. we say, 

Est-ce queje mange? Est-ce que je punis ? &c. 
Some verbs, ending in e mute, in the first person 
singular, present of the indicative mood, change the 
e mute into e with an acute accent, and je after it ; as 
parle-je. 

It has before been observed, that the compound tenses 
are easily formed, by adding the participle passive of 
the verb to any of the tenses of the auxiliaries avoir, to 
have, or itre, to be, as they have been conjugated, either 
affirmatively, negatively, or interrogatively : ex. 
Affirmatively. 
J'ai danse, I have danced, or 1 did dance. 

Negatively. 
Je n'ai pas parte, 1 have not spoken, or I did not speak. 

Inter rogatively-affirmatively. 
Avcz-vous chant 6 ? Have you sung, or did you sing ? 

Interrogatively -negatively. 
JVa-t-ilpas mange ? Has he not eaten, or did he not eat? 
Observe, that we make use of 

Mener, To take, to carry, 

Amener, To brirjg, 

Emmener, To carry, or take away, 

and all the compound verbs of mener, whenever we 
speak of rational or irrational beings to which nature 
has given the faculty of walking, if they be not depriv- 
ed of it through illness or accident : in all other cases 
we make use of 

Porfir, To carry, to take, 

Apporter, To bring, 

Emporter, To carry, or take away, 

and all the compounds of porter. 

N. B. It must be necessarily observed here, previ- 
ously to the learner's translating the following exercises, 
that the English auxiliary verbs, have, am, do, did, zr?7/, 
shall, can, let, may, uould, could, should, might, and often 
ough^ are most commonly used, in that language, to 



180 



avoid that repetition of a preceding verb, or in answer 
to a question or foregoing sentence ; to avoid the repe- 
tition of that verb, and often of one or more pronouns ; 
but in French, the verb, expressed in the first member, 
or part of the sentence, must always be repeated, as 
well as the pronouns which it may govern : ex. 



Je vous prie de porter de- 
main cette lettre a Mori- 
sieur D. 

Je la lui porterai avec 
plaisir, 

Vous ne pourriez pas ap- 
prendre cette lecon en dix 
jours, 

II me semble que je pour rois 
Vapprendre, 

Attendez-vous vos sozurs au- 

jourdPhui ? 
Oui, nous les attentions^ 

Votre frere icrit-il a M. 

voire pere ? 
Oui, il lui ecrit a present, 

Apprenez-vous le Frangois ? 
Oui,je Vapprends, 

Avez-vous achete les livres 
dont vous m'avez parlt ? 

Non, je ne les ai pas encore 

achetes, 
»Afe devroient-ils pas /aire 

savuir a leur pere que 

leur frere est dans la di- 

fresse ? 
Ccrtcinemenf, ils dcvroient 

k lui fair e savoir, 



I beg of you to carry that 

letter to-morrow to Mr. 

D. 
I will, with pleasure, (carry 

it to him,) understood. 
You could not learn that 

lesson in ten dajs. 

It seems to me as if 1 
could, (learn it,) under- 
stood. 

Do you expect your sisters 
to-day ? 

Yes, we do, (expect them,) 
understood. 

Is your brother writing to 
your father ? 

Yes, he is now, (writing to 
him,) understood. 

Are you learning French ? 

Yes, I am, (learning it.) un- 
derstood. 

Have you bought the 
books which you men- 
tioned to me ? 

No, 1 have not yet, (bought 
them.) understood. 

Ought they not to let their 
father know that their 
brother is in distress ? 

Certainly, they ought, (to let 
him know it,) understood. 



181 

EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 
Pres. I play sometimes, but I ne- 

jou-er,y. quelquefois,a.(\y. mais,c. neja- 

ver win. - - - How much does your brother 

metis, adv. gagn-er, v. Combien, adv. «» 
give for his board ? - - We do not command ; 

donn-er, v. pension^. *** command~er,v. 

we entreat. - - You always borrow ; you 

pri-er, v. tonjours, adv. emprunt-er, v. 

never lend. - - - You are always speaking when 

preUer,y. quand^dv* 

I write. - - - Why do you not grant 

ecris,v. Pourquoi^adv, k» accord-er,y, 

him that favour? - - - What do they ask 

grace, f. demander, v. 

you? 

Imp. I was desiring them to sing a song. - * 

pri-er^ v. de chant-er, v. chanson, f. 

She was not speaking to you. - - Were we not jok- 

badin- 
ing? - - Were you not scolding them when I camef 
er,v. grond-er,y» vins,v* 

Yes, I was. - - - They were eating fish. 

mang-er, v. poisson, m. 
Pret. I spoke to them (a long while). - - - Did 

long-terns, adv. 
not the king forgive them ? - - No, he did not. 

roi, m. pardonn-er, v. 
We wept for joy when we found her. - - - 

pleur-er, v. de joie,f. trouv-er, v. 

Why did you not play on Friday last ? - - They 

cc» Vendredi, m. dernier, adj. 
fastened the man to a tree, and then 

li-er, v. arbre, m. ensuile 9 adv. 

robbed him of his watch, gold ring, and all the 
vol-er, v. ^ montre, f. bague, f. 

money he had in his pocket. - - - - The soldiers first 
poche, f. 
16 



182 

pillaged the town, and then slaughtered without 
pill~er,v. 6gorg-er,v, 

pity the old men, women, and children. 
pitie, f. vieillard, m. 

Fut. I will buy a watch the first time I 

achet-er,v. fois,f. 

go to London. - - Will not your father send 

irai, v. envoy-er, v. 

you to school this winter? - - - What shall we give 

ecole, f. hiver, m. 

him ? - - - Will you not carry the children to the 

men-er,v, enfant, m. 
play? - - - They will empty the bottle if you 
comedie, f. vid-er, v. bouteille, f. 

do not take it away. 

«<* emport-er, v. «^ 

Cond. I would lend them money if 

pr£t-er,v. leur 

they were not so idle. - - - - - Would not your 

paresseux, adj. 
mother despise such a conduct? - - Why should 

mepris-er, v. tel, adj. conduite, f. 
we send them thither? - - - I am sure you would 

sur, adj. 

marry her, if she were rich. Would they 

epous-er, v. etoit riche, adj. 

not pay us, if they had money 1 

pay-er, v. 

Imperative Mood. 

Bridle my horse, and bring him to 

Brid-er,v, cheval,m. amen-er,v, 

me. - - - Give a chair to that lady. - - Let her not 

chaise, f. dame, f. 

(come up,) for I am engaged. - - - Let us carry those 

mont-er,v. engage, p.p. 

peaches to Mrs. D***. - - - Do not neglect your 

pechej. neglig-er,v. 



183 

affairs.- - 1 promise that I wili not. - Let them hunt. 
affaire, f. promets, v. ckasser,v. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. That I may help you. - - Though* he 
aid-er,v. Quoique,c. 

do not approve of my plan Provided* 

approuv-er,v. ^ plan, m. Pvurvu que,c, 

we avoid their company. - - - That you may 

6vit-er, v. compagnie, f. 

try that gun. - - - That they may not com- 

cprowj-er, v. 
mand. 

Pret. That I might change my opinion. - - - 

chang-er, d* opinion, f. 

That he might eat an apple. - - - That we might not 

pomme, f. 
fall into their hands. - - - That you might 

tomb-er, v. dans, p. main,f. 

encourage the industrious. - - - That they might 
encourag-er, v. industrieux, adj. 

exercise their talents. 
exerc-er, v. talent, m. 

Promiscuous EXERCISES on the COMPOUND 
TENSES. 

I have forgotten to bring your penknife. - - - 
oubli-er, v. de canif, m. 

He has not yet spoken to us. - - Has she brought 

encore, adv. ^ 

her work with her ? Yes, she has. - - Have we notgain- 

gagn- 
ed our cause? - - Why have you not yet begun 
er,v. commenc-er,v, 

your exercise? - - - You liad taken the mustard 

theme, m. emporti moutarde, f, 

♦Conjunctions which require the subjunctive mood, as will be 
seen hereafter, 



184 

away. - - - You would have judged more favours 

t °^ J u S er, > v * favor- 

ably of him. - - Stay here till* 

Mement, adv. Rester, v. id, adv. jusqv? a ce que,c. 

we have dined. - - - Could we not have assisted 

din-er, v. subj. aid-er, v. 

that familv ? - - They have broken all the panes 

famille, f. cass-er, v. carreau, m. 

of glass in their windows, because they had 

vitre, f. de, p. fenetre, f. parceque^ c. 

not illuminated as it had been ordered. - - - 

illumin-er, v. comme, adv. ordonn-er, v. 

I shall have 2 dined ^oon. - - - - We would have 

bientot, adv. 
sent them to prison, if they had resisted. - - - 

envoy-er, v. en prison, f. risist-er, v. 

That we may have denied the fact. - - - Had you 

ni-er, v. fait, m. 
not imitated their manners ? - - - They had not exe- 
imit-er, v. maniere, f. exe- 

cuted his commands. - - - - Had I not light- 

cui-er, v. commandement, m. allu- 

cd the fire ? - - - They would have carried him to 
mer, v. feu, m.^ 
the concert if I had not hindered them 

empech-er, v. 
(from it). - - - We might have accepted of his 

en accept- er, v. ^ 

offers. - - Why did you not ? 
offre,f. 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Pun-ir, to punish. 

Participle active. issant, punishing. 

Participle passive, i,m. it, f. punished. 

Compound Tenses. 
Present. Avoir puni, to have punished. 
Past. Jlyant puni, having punished. 



135 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 

Je pun-is, I punish, I do punish, or I am punishing. 
Tu is, 
II it, 

Plural. 
Nous issons, we punish, &c. 
Vous issez, 
lis is sent, 

Imperfect. Singular. 

Je pun-mow, I did punish, or I was punishing, &c. 
Tu issois, 
II issoit, 

Plural. 

Nous issions, we did punish, &c. 
Vous issiez, 
lis issoient, 

Preterite. Singular. 
Je pun-w, I punished, or I did punish. 

Tu is, 
II it, 

Plural. 
Nous imes, we punished, &c. 

Vous ites, 
Us irent, 

Future. Singular. 
Je pun -irai, I shall or will punish. 
Tu iras, 
II ira, 

Plural. 
Nous irons, we shall or will punish. 

Vous irez, 
lis iront, 

16* 



188 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je pun-iVois, I should, would, could, or might punish. 
Tu irois, 
II iroit. 

Plural. 

Nous irions, we should, #-c. punish. 
Vous iriez, 
lis iroient, 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. J'aipuni, I have punished. 

Imperfect. J'avois puni^ I had punished. 

Preterite. J^eus puni, I had punished. 

Future. J">aurai puni, I shall, &c. have punished. 

Conditional. J'aurois puni, I should, &c. have punished. 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 

Pun-is, punish thou. 
Qxfil isse, let him punish. 

Plural. 

issojis, let us punish. 
issez, punish ye. 
, QuHls issent., let them punish. 









Subjunctive Mood. 








Present. Singular. 


Qm 


2 je pun 
il 


-isse, that I may punish, or I punish. 

isses, 
isse, 








Plural. 




nous 
vous 
its 


issions 
issiez, 
is sent, 


, that /we may punish. 



187 



Preterite. Singular. 
Que je pun-tsse, that 1 might punish, or I punished. 
tu isses, 
il it, 

Plural. 

nous issions, that we might punish. 

vous issiez, 
Us issent, 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. Que faie puni, that I may have punished. 
Preterite. Que feus sepuni, that I might have punished. 



After the same manner 
hundred regular verbs ; the 
being irregular : 

Acquirir, to acquire. 
Assaillir, to assault. 
Bouillir, to boil. 
Courir, to run. 
Cueillir, to gather. 
Dormir, to sleep. 
Faillir, to fail. 
Fuir, to flee, to avoid. 
Mentir, to lie. 
Mourir, to die. 
Offrir, to offer. 



are conjugated about two 
following are excepted, as 

Ouvrir, to open. 
Partir, to set out. 
Se repentir, to repent. 
Sentir, to smell. 
Servir, to serve. 
Sortir, to go out. 
Souffrir, to suffer, 
Tenir, to hold. 
Venir, to come. 
Vetir, to clothe. 
And their compounds. 



EXERCISES UPON THIS CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. 1 always finish my work 

toujour s, adv. fin-ir, v. ouvrage, m. 

before the others. - - Your friend does not succeed 

ami, m. reuss-ir,r, 

- Do we not furnish arms 

fourn-ir,v. arme,f. 
Why do you hate him ? - - 
«&> ha-ir,v. 



avant,p. 

in his undertaking. 
dans, p. entreprise, f. 
against ourselves ? 
contre, p. 



188 

They cure the diseases of the body, and 

guer-ir, v. maladie,f. corps, m* 

not those of the mind. 

Imp. I was building my house when 

bdt-ir, v. maison, f. quand, adv. 

you demolished yours. - - Was he not enjoying 

d£mol-ir,w jou-ir de,r, 

a good estate? -- We hated him, because he did 

bien, m. parceque, c. 

not act kindly towards us. - - On 

ag-ir, v. honnetement, adv. envers, p. Sur, p. 

what were you reflecting?-- The mountains were 

refltch-ir, v. monlagne, f. 

resounding with their cries. 
retent-ir, v. de cri, m. 

Pret. I warranted them very good. • - Did not 
garant-ir, v. 
your master accomplish his promise ? - - We (leap- 
accompl-ir, v. promesse, f. /retri- 

ed over) the ditch, and seized the guilty. - - - 
chir,y* fosse, m. sais-ir,v. coupable, adj. 

Why did you not applaud that pretty act- 

applaud-ir,v. a joli, adj. act- 

ress ? I did, with all my might. - - - Did not the sol- 
nce, f. de, p. forces, f. pi. sol- 

diers obey the commands of their gene- 

dat, m. obi-ir, v. aux commandement, m. 
ral? 

Fut. When shall I banish all these 

bann-ir,v. *<M*,adj. 
thoughts from my mind ? - - This plant will soon 
pen see, f. plante, f. 

blossom, if you water it often. We shall 

fleur-ir, v. arroser, v. souvent, adv. 

warn your relations of it. Shall you not 

avert-ir, v. parent, m. 

enjoy, as we do, the pure plea- 

jouir comme, adv. ** des pur, adj. 



, 



189 

sures of the country 1 - - Her children will bless 

&en-t'r,v. 
her for it. 

Cond. I would choose this cloth, if I 
chois-ir, v. drap, m. 

were in your place. Would he not blush, if he 

roug-ir, v. 

acted so ? We would not punish them, if they 

ainsi, adv. 
were diligent. - - Would you not act with less 

avec, p. morns, adv. 

severity ? They could furnish us with arms and 

severite, f. «o> 

troops, if we wanted any. 

troupe, f. avoir besoin, v. 

Imperative Mood. 

Do not fill the glasses. — Let him enjoy 

rempl-ir, v. verre, m. 

the fruit of his labours. - - Well ! let him, I do not 
du travail, m. Eh bien, int. 

hinder him from it Let us reflect on what we 

empech-er, v. a 

have to do. - - Let them define the question. 

a faire, v. dejin-ir, v. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. That I may not perish. - - - I wish 

per-ir,v» souhait-er,v, 

he may succeed. - - - That we may not (bear hard- 

riuss-ir, v. pdt-ir~, v. 

ships). - That you may not hate us. - - Provided they 

do not (grow tall.) 

grand-ir,v, 

Pret. That I might refresh my memory. 

rafra ich-ir, v. memoir e, f. 



190 

That she might not roast the meat. - - That we might 

rot-ir, v. 
(become younger). - - That 3?ou might punish the 

J rajeun-ir,v. 
idle. - - That they might not (grow old). 

vieill-ir,v. 

Compound Tenses. 

I have filled my cellar with good wine. 

rempl-ir,v. cai?e,f. de 
Has he not leaped over the ditch ? - - We had finished 

our work They would have seized him - 

ouvrage, m. 
We should have perished without any assistance. - - - 

sans, p. aucvn secours, m. 

W T hen shall I have built my house ? I have 

bdl-ir, v. 
(very much) weakened his courage. - - Though 

beaucoup, adv. affoibl-ir,v. Quoique^c, 

they have adorned their gardens to dazzle 

embell-ir, v. jar din, m. pour 6blou-ir, v. 

the vulgar, they have not succeeded, because 

vulgaire, m. parceque, c. 

they have disobeyed their father and mother. 
d6sobe~ir, v. a. 

THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Rec-euoir, to receive. 

Part, active. evanl, receiving. 

Part. pass. *w, m. we, f. received. 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. Avoir requ, to have received. 

Past. Ayant requ, having received. 

* Verbs of this conjugation, the root of which terminates in c, re- 
quire for the softening of their ^ound, that a cedilla be added to the 
c (§), whenever it is followed by o or u. 



191 
Indicative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 
Je rec-ow, I receive, I do receive, or I am receiving. 

Tu OlS, 

// oit, 

Plural. 

Nous evons, we receive, <^g. 
Vous evez, 
lis oivent, 

Imperfect. Singular. 

Je rec-evois, I did receive, or I was receiving. 
Tu evois, 
II evoit. 

Plural. 

Nous evions, we did receive, fyc. 
Vous eviez, 
11$ evoienij 

Preterite. Singular. 
Je rec,-ws, I received, or I did receive. 

Tu US, 

II ut 9 

Plural. 

Nous times, we received, <^c. 
Vous utes, 
lis urent, 

Future. Singular. 

Je rcc-evrai, I shall or will receive. 
Tu evras, 
II evra, 

Plural. 

Nous evronS) we shall or will receive. 
Vous evrez, 
lis evronty 



192 

Conditional. Singular. 

Je rec-evrois, I should, would, could, or might receive. 
Tu evrois, 
II evroit, 

Plural. 

Nous evrions, we should, fyc. receive. 
Vous evriez, 
lis evroient. 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. J'ai regit, I have received. 

Imperfect. Jhtvois regu, I had received. 

Preterite. J^eus regu, I had received. 

Future. J^aurai regu, I shall, fyc. have received. 

Conditional. J'aurois regu, 1 should, fyc. have received. 

Imperative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 

Rec-ow, receive thou. 
QuHl oive, let him receive. 

Plural. 

evons, let us receive. 
ercz, receive ye. 
QuHls oivent, let them receive. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. Singular. 
Que je rec-owe, that I may receive or I receive. 



tu 


oives, 


il 


oive y 




Plural. 


nous 


evions, that we may receive. 


vous 


eviez, 


Us 


oivent, 



193 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je req-usse, that I might receive, or I received. 
tu usses, 
il ut, 

Plural. 
nous assions, that we might receive. 
vans ussiez, 
Us us sent. 

Compound Tenses. 
Present, Quefaie regu, that I may have received. 
Preterite. Quefeusse recu, that I might have received, 
Recevoir des nouvelles de To hear from somebody, 
quelqu'un, 

After the same manner are conjugated seven verbs 
only : the following are excepted, being irregulars: 



Asseoir, to sit down, 
Dechoir, to decay. 
Falloir, (verb impersonal,) 

to be needful. 
Mouvoir, to move. 
Pleuvoir, (v. imp.) to rain. 



Pouvoir, to be able. 
Savoir, to know. 
Valoir, to be worth. 
Voir, to see. 
Vouloir, to be willing. 
And their compounds. 



EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I entertain great hopes from hit 

conc-evoir, v. espirance, f. 

conduct. - - - I am to write to your brother to* 

conduite, f. * ecrire, v. 

morrow, to let him know that your father is 

pour faire^ v. savoir, v. 
arrived. - •• A commander ought to be intrepid 
commandant, m. d-tvoir, v. 

* When the verb to be is used in the present or imperfect tenses of 
the indicative mood, and precedes another verb in the infinitive 
mood, denoting a futurity in the action, it is to be rendered in French 
by the same tenses of the verb devoir, and not by ttre : ex. 
Je do'is aller art pare, I am to go to the park. 

JVous devious lui ecrire, We were to write to him. 

17 



191 

in the midst of dangers. - - - - He is to go 

au milieu, m. aller,v. 

and breakfast at my uncle's, next Sunday, 

«s>- dejeuner, v. chez, p. 

and he is to come and sup with us> - - - We 

venir, v. k» souper, v. 
1 sometimes 2 entertain a hatred for persons who 
quelqucfois, adv. de la haine, f. 

deserve our friendship. - - - Do you not per- 

meriler, v. amitie, f. re- 

ceive a mountain beyond that tree? - - Yes, 

perc-evoir, v. derriere, p. 

I do. - - We are to remit him the value in 

remettre, v. zaleur, f. en, p. 

goods or in money. - - Are you not to dine 

marchandise, 
with my father and mother to-morrow ? - • Men corn- 

demain, adv. 
monly owe their virtues or their vices to edu- 

d-zvoir, v. 
cation (as much as) to nature. - - - Are these young 

aulant que,c. 
ladies to go to the ball ? - - - No, they are not. - - 

aller, v. bal, m. 

A young man ought to love the society of those who 

socieie, f. 
are the most learned and modest. 

Imf. I owed four guineas to your aunt when she 
guinee, f. 
elied. - - - Was not your brother to receive that mo- 
mourut, v. 
ney last Thursday ? - - We received his tiresome 

Jeudi, m. enmiyant, adj. 

visits, because we were obliged to it. - - - Were you 

obliger, v. 
not to let them know it sooner? - - They were 

/aire, v. savoir, v. 

not. to stay above six weeks. 

xesfer. v. phis de, adv. 



195 

Pres. I received yesterday, wilh (a great deal) 

lien, adv. 
of pleasure, the books you sent me. - - As soon 

envoyer, v. 
as we perceived the danger, we warned him of it. 

averlir, v. 
- - - They heard yesterday from your brother. 

Fut. I shall entertain a bad opinion of 

mauvais, adj. 
you if you do not avoid Mr. R****'s company. - - 

eviler, v. 
We shall owe him 2 nothing ^ore, after this 

apres, p. 
month. - - - I hope you will receive all my letters dur- 

pen- 
ing my absence, and they will hear from their 
dant, p. 

father (in a short time.) 
dans peu, adv. 

Cond. I should answer your brother's 

rcpondre, v. a 
letter, but I have not time. - - - - Ought not 

It terns, m. 
your sister to give your mother an account 

rendre* v. o=>-> compie, m. 

of all her actions ? - - - Ghe would soon per- 

bieniot, adv. 

* When the word should expresses a duty or necessity, or can with 
propriety be turned into ought, it is rendered in French by the con- 
ditional present of the verb devoir : ex. 

Je devrois uller le voir, I should, or ought to go and see him. 

Vous devriez le secourir dans sa You should, or ought to help him 

raisere, &c. in his misery, Sec. 

The word should, or ought, when joined to the verb to have, imme- 
diately followed b}' a participle passive, must be rendered by the 
conditional past of the above verb, with the participle passive turned 
into the present of the infinitive mood : ex. 
/'aurois du Vobliger arester id, I should, or ought to have obliged 

him to stay here. 
„You$ aurions du revenir plutot, We should, or ought to have come 

back sooner. 



196 

ceive the danger, if she knew the consequences 

savoit, v. 
of it. - - - Children should every day learn 

apprendre, v. 
"Something hy heart. - - - You sh6uld not despise 

cozur, m. mepriser, v. 

the advice that he gives you. - - - Should they, 

avis, m. 
after what they have done, expect to 

dprts, p. fait, p.p. s'allendre, v. a 

receive favours? - - - Grammar, geography, history, 
music, are sciences and arts which ladies should never 
neglect. 

Imperative Mood. 

Keceive this small present as a token of my 

marque, f. 
friendship. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres*. and Pret. Though 1 perceive ships 

Quoique, c. vaisseau, m. 

(afar off,) I cannot distinguish them. - - - He 

de loin, adv. ne saurois,v. 
wrote to us by the first post, that we might 

icrivit, v. ordinaire, m. 

receive his orders (in proper time.) 
a terns, adv. 

Mind these Compound Tenses well ! 

I have not yet received his answer. 

encore, adv. reponse, f. 

You should have (been making) your theme this 

* faire, v. 

morning instead of playing. * - He has entertained 
matin, m. an lieu, p. 
the hope of living here all his life. - - She ought 

vivre, v. ici, adv. vie, f. 

to have thanked him for the good advice he 
remercier, v. de, p t 



197 

gave her. - - .When did you hear from your sister? 
We have not heard from her since her de- 

depuis, p. de- 

parture. - - Your uncle should not have obliged 
part, m. onc/e.m. 

him to pay half the expenses. - - We should 

a moitie, f. frais, m. pi. 

have owed him one hundred livres. - - I beg 

livre,f. demander.v. 

your pardon, I ought not to have made you 

/aire, v. 
wait so long. - - - Ought not we to have 

attendre, v. long-tems, adv. 

employed our time better than (we did) 
employer, v. nous riavons fait, 

the last three months we were in France 1 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Vend-re, to sell. 

Part, active. ant, selling. 

Part, passive. u, m. we, f. sold. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 

Je vend-s, I sell, I do sell, or am selling. 
Tu vend-5, 
77 vend, 

Plural. 

Nous ons, we sell, &c. 

Vous ez, 
lis ent, 

Imperfect. Singular. 

Je vend-025, 1 did sell, or was selling. 
Tu (ris, 
II oit, 

17* 



19$ 

Plural, 
Nous vend-ions, we did sell. #c. 



Vous 
lis 


iez, 
oient, 








Preterite. Singular. 




Je vend-is, I sold, or did sell. 
Tu is, 
11 it, 








Plural. 




Nous 
Vous 
lis 


imes, 

ites, 

(rent, 


we sold, <£*c. 




Je xertd-rai, 
Tu ras, 
II ra, 


Future. Singular, 
I shall, or will sell. 








Plufol. 




'Nous 
Vous 
lis 


rons, 

rez, 

ront, 


we shall, or will sell. 
Conditional. Singular. 




* Je retid-rois, 


I ghould, could, would, or might sell. 



Tu rois, 
II roil, 

Plural. 
Nous rions, we should, #c. 
Vous riez, 
, lis roient, 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. J'ai vendu, I have solcj. 

Imperfect. J'avois vendu, I had sold. 

Preterite. J'eus vendu, I had sold. 

Future. J'aurai vendu, I shall, &c. have sold. 

Conditional* J'aurois vendu, I should, #c. have sold. 



v 



X 



199 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 

Vend-*, sell thou/ 
QuHl e, let him sell* 

Plural. 
ong, let us sell. 
67, sell ye. 

Quits ent, let them sell. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. Singular. 

Quejc vend-e, that I may sell, or I sell. 
In es, 

it e, 

Plural. 
nous ions, that we may sell. 
vous iez, 
Us ent, 

Preterite. Singular, 

Queje vend-fsse, that I might sell, or I sold. 
tu isses, 

u ft, 

Plural. 
nous issions, that we might sell. 
vous issiez, 
its issent, 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. Que fate vendu, that 1 may have sold. 
Preterite. Quefeusse vendu, that I might have sold. 

After the same manner are conjugated about forty 
verbs. The following are excepted as being irregular, 

Absoudre, to absolve. | Boire, to drink. 

Battre, to beat, J Circoncire, to circumcise. 



200 



Lire, to read. 

Meltre, to put. 

Moudre, to grind. 

Naitre, to be born. 

Paitre, to graze, to feed. 

Plaire, to please. 

Prendre, to take. 

Hire, to laugh. 

Sitffire, to suffice, to be 

sufficient. 
Suivre, to follow. 
Se iaire, to hold one's 

tongue. 
Traire, to milk. 
Vainer e, to conquer. 
Fit> re, to live. 

And their compounds. 



Conclure, to conclude. 

Conduire, to conduct. 
And all the verbs ending 
in uire. 

Confire, to preserve. 

Connoitre, to know. 
And all those ending in 
oitre* 

Coudre, to sew. 

Craindre, to fear. 
And ail those ending in 
indre, 

Croire, to believe. 

Dire, to tell. 

Ecrire, to write. 

Faire, to make, to do. 

Frire, to fry. 

N. B. Verbs of this conjugation, the root of which 
terminates in p, as romp-re, corromp-re, &c. take a t in 
the third person singular of the present tense indicative 
mood : ex. je romps, tu romps, il rompt : the rest are 
conjugated as vendre. 

EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I do not mean to wrong 

pretend-re, v. ^ faire iort,v, 
him. - - - Is your mother coming down ? - - - We 
lui, pro. descend-re, v. 

expect our friend, Mr. A***. - - - Do not you 

attend-re, v. 

forbid her to go there? - - - They sell 

dif end-re, v. de alter, v. 

bad fruit. 

mauvaiS) 'adj. 

Imp. Did I not interrupt him, while 

interromp-re 7 v. pendant que, c. 



201 

lie was answering them ? * * - She was melting into 
repond-re, v. leur fond*re,x. en,*p. 

tears, when you arrived. - - Were we not losing 
larme, f. arriver, v. perdre, v. 

our time? - - you were not spreading your nets. - - 

terns, m. 6tend-re,x, filel,m. 

Did they corrupt our manners? 

corromp-re,x. mceur«, f.pL 

Pret. (As soon as) I had received my money, I 
Des que,c» 
returned them what they had lent me. * - - Did 

rend-re,x. preier,x. 

he not hear you ? • - - We (waited for) them a 

entend-re,x. attend-re,x. 

month. - - (For how much) did you sell it to them ? - * 
mois, m. Combien, adv. 

They spilled all the wine. 

repand-re, v. 

Fut; I shall shear my flock (in the) 

tond-re,x. troupeau,m. au 

month of May. - - - If you do not take care, 

Mai, m, prenez,x. garde, f. 

the dog will bite you. - - Shall we not lose, if 

mord-re, v* 
we play ? - - You will melt it, if you put 

fond-re, v. mettcz, v. 

it into the fire. No, I will not. - - They 1 shall 3 not 2 

dans, p. 
hear 3 of 6 me 7 (any 4 more). 

entend-re parhr,x. jo/ws,adv. 

Cond. Should I not do him the jus- 

rend- re, v. 
tice he deserves ? - - Would he not interrupt you ? - - 

meriter, v. 
We would defend them if we could. * - Why 

def end-re, x, pouvions, v. 

would you not answer, if I were speaking to 

repond-re y x. 



202 

you ? - - - Your hens would (lay eggs) every day, if 
poule, f. pond-re, v. 

they were not so fat. 

grew, adj. 

Imperative Mood. 

Give 1 God 3 thanks 2 . - - - Let her not come 

Rend-re,v. Dieu,m, grace, f. a 
down. - - Let us (give in) our accounts faith- 

rend-re,v. compte,m» fidth- 

fuliy. - - - Do not lose my book. - - - Let thern hear 
ment, adv. 
the voice of the Lord. 

voix, f. Seigneur, m. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. and Tret. Speak loud, that I may hear 

haul, adv. 
what you say. - - She plays (upon the) harpsichord, 

, dites, v. du clavecin,m, 

though you forbid her to do it. - - - - 

quoique,c, lui de faire,V. 

He wrote to us, that we might not expect him. 
6crivii 9 v, 

Compound Tenses. 

I have lost my book ; have you found 

perd-re, v. trouver, v. 

it ? - - - She has broken her fan. - - - Have you 

romp-re , v . ev e n ta i7, m . 

not interrupted me several times ? - - - I had not 
then answered his letter. - - - If they (had 

a/ore, adv. a itoient 

gone) there, would they not have lost their time ? 
alles, v. 
Yes, they would. - - He says he would have sold us 

dit, v. 
yery good wine. - - - Had you not forbidden her to 

de 
speak ? - f That they might have (waited for) us. 



203 

Recapitulatory EXERCISES on the regular verbs of the 
four CONJUGATIONS. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I love attentive scholars, but I punish 
a(tentif,adj. ecolier,m. mais,c, 
severely laziness and inattention. - - Your 

sevcrement, adv. paresstj. 

brother does not receive this news with plea- 

no uvelle, f. 
sure. - - Do we not expect your mother to-day ? - - - 

7nere,f. 
We hope (that) you will succeed in your un- 

espirer, v. 
dertaking. - - - Why do you not fulfil 

Pourquoi, adv. accomplir v. 

your promise ? - - Are you to expect the least 

promts se, f. 
favour from your parents and friends ? - - They per- 
grdce, f. ap* 

ceive the danger, and they do not endeavour 

per avoir, v. lacker^ v. 

to shun it. 

de eviter,V. 

Imp. I was speaking of your aunt when you 

tante, f. 
(came in), and was doing her the justice she 

entrer,v. rendre.v. lui 

deserves. - - Mr. N. did not act towards your 

merilcr, v. agir, v. 

son with much tenderness. - - Mr. .P. and I were 

fils. m. tendresse, f. 

answering your letters when you arrived. - - You 

arrivcr, v. 
1 undoubtedly entertained great hopes from his 

sans doule, adv. 

last voyage. - - They wore spending their 

dernier, adj. depwser, v. 



204 

money ia trifles, instead of buying 

en, p. bagatelle^ au lieu de, adv. acheter,v. 
books. 

Pret. I built this house ia one thousand seven 
maison, f. 
hundred and seventy-nine. - - Your father yesterday 
^ hier, adv. 

received agreeable news. - - She burst into tears 

fondre, v. 
after your cousin was gone. - - We sent him 

apres que, c. parli, p. p. 

a great deal of money unknown to your rao- 

d Vinsgu, p. de 

ther. - - Why did you not finish your work soon- 

ouvrage, m. 
er ? - - (As soon as) they perceived us, they (r^n 

Des que, c. prirent la 

away.) 
fuile. 

Fut. I wiil (give in) my accounts (at the) be- 
au 
ginning of next week. - - - My friend, 

prochain, adj. semaine,f. 
Mrs. R. will dine with me next Wednesday. - - We 

Mercredi, m. 
shall seize the first opertunity to thank him 

saisir, v. occasion, f. pour rernercier, v. 

for his kindness. - - You will soon entertain 

de bonte,i, fo'en/o/,adv. 

a better opinion of him. - - Will not your sister 

sozur, f. 
(come down stairs) to day ? 
descendre, v. 

Cond. I would lay two guineas, your 

gager,v. 
uncle is not yet arrived. - - If my father were rich, he 
arriver,v. 6t<nl 



205 

would rebuild his country-house. - - Should we not 

rebalir,v. Devoir,v, 

express our gratitude toward those who 

exprimer, v. reconnoissance, f. 

do us good? - - If you would, you could ren- 

font,v, bien,vc\. vouliez,v. ren- 

tier great services to your country. - - - I am cer- 
dre, v. pays, m. 

tain (that) they would reward you, if you 

recompenser, v. 
deserved it. 
■meriler, v. 

Imperative Mood. 

Discharge with equity the duties of thy 
Remplir, v . eq u iti, f. devoir, m . 

office. - - - Let him receive the punishment due 
charge, f. punition,(, du, p.p. 

to his crime. - - Let us give 2 God thanks 1 for the 

rendre, v. grace, f.ci de 

good news we received yesterday. - - Imitate the great 

hier, adv. 
actions of your ancestors. - - Let them enjoy the 

ancetres, m. jouir, v. de 

fruit of their labours. 

travail, m. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. Write to me by the first post, 

Ecrivez, v. ordinaire, m. 

that I may receive your letter before my de- 

afin que, c. axant, p. de- 

parture from London. - - Though he hear 
part, m. Quoique, c. entendre, v. sub j. 

what you say, yet he does not understand you. - - 

dites, v. comprendre, v* 

She is never pleased, though we obey her in 

content, adj. lui en, p. 

(every thing) I will tell it to you, pro- 

out dirai, v. pour~ 

18 



20S 

Vided you do not speak of it to your sister. - * - 

vu que, c. 

He will pay them, provided they wait a little 

attendre, v. 
longer. 
plus long-terns, adv. 

Pret. I wrote to your father (some time ago), 
ccrivis, v. il y a quelque terns 

that he might engage Mr. W. to come and 

afin que, c. «?> 

spend the holidays with us. - - - That she might 
passer, v. vacance, f. 

reflect on her own conduct, and not on that of 

prop re, adj. 
others. - - He would not come to see us, lest 

voulut, v. «^ depeurque,c. 

we should perceive his bad designs. - - Your uncle 

ne oncle,m. 

desired that you might sell his two horses to 

ordonner, v. 
Mr. B. - I should be very sorry if they fell 

que. c. tomber,v.s\ihj> 
into bad hands. 
en 

Promiscuous EXERCISES on the COMPOUND 
TENSES. 

I have spoken to my father of it, but he has not 
yet given me any answer. - - Have I not faith- 

encore, adv. de 

fully executed your orders? - - Has your sister suc- 
ceeded in her undertaking? - - Yes, she has, and I 
have congratulated her upon it.- - We have not yet re- 

feliciter, v. en 

ceived any remittance from America. - - Mrs. N. told 

remise, f. 
me you had already sold the half of your 

deja, adv. moitie, f. 



207 

goods. - - - - Why did you not pay those poor 

marchandise, f. 

people ? - - - He would have been punished, if 

gens, m. et, f. pi. 

I had not defended his right. - - - They have sold 

droit, m. 
him four dozen of handkerchiefs at an exorbitant 

mnu choir, m. a 
price, but they have warranted them fine and 
prix, m. garantir, v. Jin 

well worked. - - - We thought you w r ould have 

Iravniller, v.p.p. croyions, v. 

brought your brother with you. - - - Have we not 
been obliged to (wait for) Jliss A. ? - - - If you had 

de attentive, v. 
trusted them with your goods, they would have 
corifier, v. hur *>» marchandise 

stolen the greatest part of them. - - It is for 

par tie, f. Ce, pro. 

that reason my father has not (thought n't) 

juger,v. d-propos 
to send them to you. - - - Mr. D. had represented to 
him all the danger of it. - - Mrs. F. has gained her 

gagiier^ v. 
cause, but she has lost all her wealth. - - Had I 

perdre,v. hien,m. 

not finished my work when she came in? - - 

ouvrage, m. entrer, v. 

You would have received your money (a month a^o), 

il y a nn mois 
if the mail had not been robbed. - - Mrs. P. told me 

malle, f. voter, v. 

she would have paid you some time ago, if she had 
sold her goods. 



208 



CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. 

Verbs passive are very easily conjugated; it requires 
oniy that the participle passive of the verb, which is to 
be conjugated, be joined to the auxiliary verb etre, to be, 
through all its moods, tenses, numbers, and persons. 
It is to be observed, that in French the participle pas- 
sive varies according to the gender and number of the 
noun or pronoun, which stands as the nominative to the 
verb : ex. 

Infinitive Mood. 



etre 


aim-e', 




ie, to be loved. 


etre 


pun-i, 




?>, to be punished* 


6 1 ant 


aim-e, 




ie, being loved. 


itani 


pun-f, 




ie, being punished. 


avow iii 


a i m-e, 




eg, to have been loved. 


avoir iti 


pun-?', 




ie, to have been punished. 


ay ant iti 


aim-e. 




ie, having been loved. 


ay ant iii 


pun-f, 




ie, having been punished. 




Indicativ 


e Mood. 


Singular. 


M. F. 






Jc suis 


aim-e, ie, 


&c. 


] am loved. 


Je suis 


pun-i, ie, 


&c. 


I am punished. 



Plural. 
Nous samples aim-e's, ies, &x. we are loved. 
Nous sommes pun-is, ies, &c. we are punished. 

Compound Tenses. 

M. F. 

J'ai iti pardonn-e, ie, I have been forgiven. 

iPai iii pun-?", ie, I have been punished 
Nous avons iti aim-eV, 



ies, We have been loved, &c. 



OF NEUTER VERBS. 

The conjugations of the above verbs are, like all 
others, distinguished by their termination*, and conju- 
gated in the same manner. 



209 

Learners may easily know a neuter verb from an 
active one; because the latter generally has, or can 
always have, a direct case after it; whereas the neuter 
verb never has, nor can have, but an indirect case : for 
instance, 

Dormir, to sleep, 
Venir, to come, 
Voyager, to travel, 
are neuter verbs ; because we cannot say, 
Dormir une maison, to sleep a house. 
Venir un livre, to come a book. 

Voyager la chambre, to travel the room, &c. 

In the same manner, 

Jouir, to enjoy, 

Profiter, to profit by, to take advantage of, 

Parvenir, to attain, to reach, 
are neuter verbs, because they can only govern an indi- 
rect case : ex. 

Jouir d'tme grande repu- To enjoy a great reputa- 

tation, tion. 

Profiter du terns. To take advantage of the 

weather. 
Parvenir a son but. To attain one's end. 

As it is impossible for the neuter verbs to govern an 
absolute case, it follows that every verb of this kind, 
which governs an absolute case, can no longer be looked 
upon as a neuter: ex. 

Pleurer, to weep, to bewail, 

Sortir, to go out, 

Monter, to go up, or come up, 

Plaider, &lc. to plead, 

are neuter verbs, but become active when they govern 
any object in the absolute case, or accusative: ex. 

Elle plenre ses peches, She bewails her sins. 

Sorlez ce cheval. Bring out that horse. . 

Jlplaidasa cause lui-mime y He himself pleaded his 

cause. 
13* 



210 

But there are some neuter verbs which can sever 
have an active signification, and which we are obliged 
to conjugate with the verb faire, when we wish to ex- 
press an action passing from the subject who acts : ex. 

Ferai-je bouillir ou rotir Shall I boil or roast that 

celie viande ? meat ? 

Faihs-la bouiiiir, Boil it. 

Some of the neuter verbs conjugate their compound 
tenses by the auxiliary verb avoir, to have; others by 
the verb eire, to he. 

The general rule to know what neuter verbs conju- 
gate their compound tenses with the auxiliary avoit\ 
and which are the others that are conjugated with the 
veri| etre, is to pay attention to the participle passive of 
the neuter verb which is conjugated. 

]f this participle be declinable, that is, if it can be 
applied to a man or a woman, or any other animated 
object, the compounds of its verbs are conjugated with 
the verb etre : ex. 



Tomber, to fall, 
Venir, to come, <y*c. 



Arriver, to arrive, 
Mourir, to die, 
jS p aitre* to be born, 

take the auxiliary verb etre ; because we can say, 

Un homms arrive, a man arrived. 

Une femme morte, a woman dead. 

Un enfant ne, a child born. 

Un cheval tombi, &c. a horse fallen. 

If, on the contrary, the participle be indeclinable, that 
is, if it cannot be said of any animate object, the com- 
pound tenses of that verb must be conjugated with the 
verb avoir ; ex. 



ZWmir, to sleep, 

Languir, to languish, to linger, 



Regner, to reign, 
Vivre, to live, 8/c, 



take the auxiliary verb avoir ; because we cannot say, 



211 

Un homme dormi. a man slept, (part, pass.) 

Unefemme languie, a woman languished, or lingered. 

Un enfant regne, a child reigned. 

Uu cheval vecu, &c. a horse lived. 

The verb courir is in the last clas?, when it signifies 
the rapid motion of the body, moving in a certain di- 
rection with all the swiftness of its legs ; as we cannot, 
in this sense, say, 

Un homme couru, a man run, (part, pass.) 

Unefemme courue, a woman run, 

nor je suis couru. fetois count, &c. hut. fat couru, favois 
couru. &c. 

When we say in French, un homme couru, une femme 
courue, we mean a man or woman much sought after, 
a person or thing we are very eager to see or hear: ex. 

Ce predicateur est fort couru ; 
Cette danseuse est fort courue ; 

that is, people are very eager to hear that preacher, to 
see that dancer. 

In the above general rule are not included some 
neuter verbs, which sometimes take the auxiliary avoir, 
and sometimes the auxiliary etre ; these arc, 



Monter. to go or come up. 
Descendre, to go or come 

down. 
Sortir, to go out. 
Rester, to stay, to remain. 



Demeurcr, to live, to re- 
main. 
Perir, to perish. 
Passer, to pass, to go by. 
Echapper, to escape. 



Monter and descendre often govern an absolute regi- 
men ; in which case they are considered as active verbs, 
and conjugated with the auxiliary avoir : ex. 

J'ai monte les degres, I have ascended the stairs, 

or gone up the stairs. 
Nous avons descendu la We have come down the 
montagne, mountain. 



212 

When the above verbs are employed without regimen, 
their compounds are conjugated with etre: ex. 

Je suis descendu, ] am down. 

Elk est deja montee, - She is up already. 

Sortir, is conjugated with the verb etre, when it signi- 
fies to quit, to leave jthe place wherein one was dwelling, 
or living; but it is conjugated with the verb avoir, when 
we wish to convey that we have been from home, and 
that we are come back again : ex. 

It est sorti de prison, He is out of prison. 

J'ai sorti ce matin a dix I went out this morning at 

heures, ten o'clock. 

Avez-vous sorti ce matin ? Did you go out this morn- 
ing ? 

Nous w'avons pas sorti de We have not been out all 

tout lejour, day. 

he roi n'a pas sorti de sa The king has not been out 

chambre, of his room. 

Demeurer and rester take the auxiliary avoir, when 
we mean that we were, but are no longer, in a place ; 
ex. 

J'ai demeure deux ans a la I lived two years in the 

campagne, country. 

II a resti vingt ans a Borne, He resided twenty years 

at Rome. 

On the contrary, they take the auxiliary etre, while 
the person or persons ^tre still in a place : ex. 

// est demeure a Londres He has remained in Lon- 

pour y solliciter un eve- don to solicit a bishop- 

che, ric. 

Nous sommes restes a York We have tarried at York 

pour y finir nos affaires, to conclude our affairs. 

Perir indifferently takes either the auxiliary avoir or 
e/re : ex. 



213 

U est peri deux vaisstaux Two ships have been lost 

sur mer, at sea. 

Trots homrnes ont peri par Three men have perished 

cetle. tempete, by this storm. 

La pluparl dcs equipages Most of the crew perished 
50/if peris dans les ondes, in the waves, the rest 
h resit est ptri de mi- perished through mis- 
sere, erjfa, 

It seems, however, that the auxiliary avoir is more 
generally used. 

Passer sometimes governs an indirect case, or is im- 
mediately followed by the preposition par, or some 
other, attended by a noun or pronoun ; in which case 
its compounds are conjugated with the auxiliary verb 
avoir, whether it be used in its proper signification or 
in a figurative sense: ex. 

Le roi a passe par Ken- The king went through 

singion pour alter a Kensington to go to 

Windsor, Windsor. 

Nous avons passe devant We went by the church. 

Veglisc, 

Bile a passe pres du pare She went by St. James' 

de St. Jaques, Park. 

La coaronne de Naples a The crown of Naples 

passe dans la maison de passed to the house of 

Bourbon, Bourbon. 

In all other cases, passer takes the auxiliary etre : 
ex. 

Le roi est passe, vous ne The king is gone by, you 

sauriez le voir, cannot see him. 

Le beau iems est passe, The fine weather is over. 

Vos chagrins sont passes, Your sorrows are over. 

We sometimes say, ce mot est passe, when we mean 
that it is no longer in use ; but when we say, ce mot a 
passe, we understand in the language, which signifies 
that it has been received or adopted. 



214 

Passer is often a reflected passive verb, when its 
compound tenses follow the rule of the reflective 
verbs. 

Passer, in several cases, becomes an active verb, and 
governs an absolute case : ex. 

Passez cela sur le feu, Pass that over the fire. 

Les ennemis out passe la The enemies have crossed 

riviere, the river. 

Passer Z'epee au Wavers du To run one through the 

corps, body. 

Echapper has two significations : sometimes it is used 
in the sense of eviter, to avoid, when it is conjugated 
with the auxiliary avoir, and governs the dative case ; 
sometimes it signifies to come or go out by force or strat- 
agem from a place in which one was confined or shut up ; 
in this case it takes the verb tire for auxiliary : ex. 

Vous avez echappe-la a un You have escaped a great 

grand danger, danger. 

77 a ichappi a la mort, He has escaped death. 

lis sont eckappes de leur They have escaped from 

prison, or, their prison, or, made 

lis se sont ichappis de leur their escape. 

prison, 

On la tenoit depuis quel- They had her for some 

ques jours, mais elle est days, but she has es- 

echappee, or, elle s'est caped, or, made her 

echappee, escape. 

N. B. Exercises on the neuter verbs will be found 
among the irregular, whenever they occur. 

REFLECTED VERBS. 

We call reflected, or reflective, a verb whose subject 
and object are the same person or thing; so that the 
subject that acts, acts upon itself and is at the same time 
the agent and the object of the action ; ex. 



tl5 

ft me connois, f know myself, 

Tu te hues, Thou praisest thyself, 

// se blesse, He wounds himself, 

Nous nous chauffons, We warm ourselves, 

are reflected verbs, because it is I who know, and who 
am known ; thou who praisest and who art praised ; he 
who wounds and who is wounded, &x. 

In order to express the relation of the nominative to 
the verb with its regimen or object, we always make use 
of the conjunctive pronouns, me, te, se, myself, thyself, 
himself, herself, itself, for the singular ; nous, vous, se, 
ourselves, yourselves, themselves, for the plural. But 
it frequently happens, that in English, the second pro- 
noun is implied, though it must be expressed in French : 
ex. 

Je me souviens, I remember. 

Elle ne veut pas se marier, She will not marry. 

Nous nous plaignons, &c. We complain, &x. 

The reflected verbs may be divided in the following 
manner, viz. 

Verbes rejlechis pur la sig- Verbs reflective by sig- 
nification, niflcation. 

Verbes rejlechis par Vex- Verbs reflective by ex- 
pression, press ion. 

Verbes rejlechis directs, Verbs reflective direct. 

Verbes refechis indirecls, Verbs reflective indirect. 

Verbes rejlechis passifs, Verbs reflective passive. 

A verb reflected by signification is properly a verb 
wherein the person or thing that acts is at the same 
time the object of the action : ex. 

Je me chavffe, I warm myself, 

Elle se blesse, She wounds herself, &c. 

A verb is reflective by expression when we add to it 
the double pronoun, without the person or thing that 
acts being the object of the action : such as, 



216 

Je me repens, I repent, 

II s'ew va, He is going away, 

Elle se meurt, She is dying, 

Nous nous appercevons de We perceive our error, 
noire erreur, 

which merely signify Je suis repentant, il va, elle meurt, 
nous appercevons noire erreur. 

When the conjunctive pronoun is the objective case 
of the verb reflective by expression, we say it is a verb 
reflective direct ; when the same conjunctive pronoun is 
the indirect regimen, (that is, governed in the dative 
case), we call it reflective indirect : thus, 

Je meflatte, I flatter myself, . 

Tu te vantes, Thou boastest, 

// sefilicile, He congratulates himself, 

&c. 

are verbs reflective direct. — On the contrary, 

II se donne des louanges, He gives himself praise, 

Nous nous promettons un We promise ourselves good 

bon succes, success, 

Vous vous arrachez une You draw one of your 

dent, teeth, 

are verbs reflective indirect, because it is as if we 
said, // donne des louanges a soi, nous promettons un 
bon succes a nous, vous arrachez une dent a vous, 
&c. 

Verb reflective passive. This verb is so calied, be- 
cause it not only expresses a passive sense but that 
sense can only be rendered by a passive verb : ex. 

Cela se voit tous les jours, That is seen every day. 

Cela ne se dit point, That is not said. 

Ce livre se vend bien, That book sells v>e.}\. 

Ce bruit se repand, That rumour is spread. 

Ces fruits se mangent en These fruits are eaten in 
hiver, winter. 



211 

Ctt homme s^est trouv6 in- That man has been found 
nocent du crime dunt on innocent of the crime 
Vaccusoit, \vith> which he was ac- 

cused. 

ft is as it there were cela est vu tous les jours, tela rCesl 
point dit, &c. which exactly correspond with the idiom 
of the English language. 

This last verb is of great use in the French lan- 
guage, because, as it has been observed before, there 
are properly no passive verbs in that language, and we 
are often obliged to supply the want of them by the 
above verb, or by the pronoun general on, to avoid am- 
biguity or false sense : if, for instance, instead of saying, 
ces fruits se mangent en hiver, ou, on mange ces fruits 
en hiver, I said, ces fruits sont manges en hiver, one 
might understand that those fruits are already eaten ; 
whereas, I only wish to express the proper season for 
eating those fruits. 

Some authors call reciproque, reciprocal, all those 
reflected verbs ; but this denomination to me has ap- 
peared insufficient to determine accurately the nature 
and use of these verbs. Others limit the reciprocal 
verb to signify what two persons or two things recipro- 
cally do to each other: thus, 

Pierre et Jean se battent, Peter and John are fight- 

ing, or beating each 
other, 

Paul et Robert Raiment, Paul and Robert love each 

other, 

Le feu et Veau se detrm- Fire and water destroy 
sent, each other, 

are reciprocal verbs, because it is as if we said, Pierre et 
Jean se battent reciproquement Pun V autre, Paul et Robert 
s'aiment reciproquement, &c. 

This distinction of the reciprocal verbs may be 
adopted, observing at the same 4ime, that we often 
19 



218 

prefix the preposition entre to the verb, the better to 
express the reciprocity : ex. 

Pierre et Jean s'entr'm- Peter and John love each 

ment, other. 

lis s'entrelouent, They praise each other. 

Elles s'entrehaissent. They hate each other. 

he feu et Veau s'entrec?e- Fire and water destroy 

truisent, &c each other. 

All the reflected and reciprocal verbs, without ex- 
ception, are conjugated with the auxiliary verb etre ; 
hence it may be supposed how much French people 
are shocked to hear any one, who has learned that 
language, say, 

Je m'ai achetS un chevdl, I bought myself a horse ; 

Je ra'avois blesse, I had hurt myself; 

II s'a fait mal, He has hurt himself; 

Elle s'avoit moque de moi, She had laughed at me ; 
&c. 

expressions too commonly made use of by many English 
people, who speak without knowledge of the principles 
of the language ; whereas we must say, 

Je me suis achete un cheval, 

Je m'etois blesse, 

II s"* est fait mal, 

Elle s'etoit moquee de moi, 

Nous nous sommes informes, We have inquired. 

Ms se sont promenes, They have walked. 

II s'est passe d'etranges Strange things have hap- 

choses depuis voire de- pened since your depar- 

part, ture. 

II s'est passe bien des annees Many years have elapsed 

depuis que fax ou'i parler since I heard of that af- 

dt celle affaire, fair. 

It must be owned, that in the compounds of most 
part of these verbs, the verb etre is but the substitute 
of the verb avoir ; but it is impossible to use avoir as 
auxiliary to a verb which has for its objective case a 
conjunctive pronoun that relates to the principle of the 



219 

action'of that verb, and which precedes the auxiliary ; 
for, though we say, 

77 a voulu se tuer, He would kill himself; 

yet, if we change the place of the pronoun, we must 
say, II s'est voulu tuer, which is the idiom of the lan- 
guage. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERBS. 

The conjugation of the following verb may serve as 
a model for all the reflected or reciprocal verbs, of the 
four conjugations. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Se promerier, to walk. 
Part. act. Se promenant, walking. 

M. Sing. F. 
Part. pass, promen-6, ee, walked. 

M. Plural. F. 
Part. pass. pr omen-is ^ ees, walked. 

Compound Tenses. 
Pres. S'et re promene, to have walked. 
Past. S'etant promene, having walked. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Je me promine, I walk, or do walk, or am walking, 
Ta te promenes, 
II se promene, 

Plural. 
Nous nous promenons, we walk, &,c. 
Vous vous promenez, 
lis se prominent. 

Imperfect. Singular. 
Je me promenois, I did walk, or walked, or was walking. 
Tu te promenois, 
II se promenoiiy 



220 

Plural. 
Nous nous promenioii'S, we did walk, &c. 
Vous vous promeniez, 
lis se promenoient, 

Preterite. Singular. 
Je me promenai, I did walk, or walked. 
Tu te promenas, 
II se promena. 

Plural. 
*Vows nous promendmes, we did walk, $*e 
Fcws vous promendtes, 
lis se promenerent, 

Future. Singular. 
Je me promenerai, 1 shall, or will walk. 
Tu te promeneras, 
11 se promenera, 

Plural. 
JV*ow5 nous promenerons, we shall, or will walk, 
Fows vous promenerez, 
Us se promeneront, 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je me promenerois, I would, should, or could walk. 
Tu te promenerois, 
II se promeneroit, 

Plural. 
Nous nous promenerions, we would, 4 r c walk. 
Fom5 vous promeneriez, 
lis se promeneroient, 

Compound Tenses. 
Present. Je me suis promen-e, ee, I have walked. 
Imperfect. Je m'etois promene, ee, I had walked. 
Preterite. Je me fits promen-e, ee, I had walked. 
Future. Je me serai promeu'C^ee; I shall or will have 

walked. 
Conditional. Je me seroisprQmen-6,6e, I should, <^c. have 

walked. 



221 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Promene-toi*, walk thou. 
QuHl se promene, let him walk. 
Plural. 
Proraenons-nous*, let us walk. 
Prowenez-vous*, walk ye. 
Quails se prominent, let them walk. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Queje me promene, that I may walk. 
tu te promines, 
il se promene, 

Plural, 
nows nous promenions, that we may walk. 
vous.yous promeniez, 
Us se prominent, 

Preterite. Singular. 
Queje me promenasse, that I might walk. 
tu te promenasses, 
il se promenaty 

Plural, 
nous nous promenassions, that we might walk, 
rows vous promenassiez, 
Us se promenassent, 

Compound Tenses. 

M. F. 
Present. Que je me sois promen-6 ee, that 1 

may have walked. 
Preterite. Queje rnefusse promen-6 ee, that I 

might have walked. 
The learner may here be again reminded, that it is 

* When the verb is conjugated with a negation, these three pro- 
nouns are put "before the verb ; ex. ne vous promenes pas, do aot 
walk *, and toi is changed into te ; ne te promene pas. 
19* 



222 

necessary to conjugate this verb with a negation and in- 
terrogation : ex. 

Je ne me promene pas, I do not walk. 
Vous promenez-vous, Do you walk ? 
Ne se promtne-t-il pas ? Does he not walk ? 

Compound Tenses. 

Me sais-je promene ? Have I walked? or did I 

walk? 
Me vous ites-vous pas Have you not warmed 
chauffi? yourself? or did you 

not warm yourself? 
Mon cousin s'est-il in/or- Has my cousin inquired ? 
me ? or did my cousin in- 

quire ? 
Voire frere ne s'esi-il pas Has not your brother re- 
repenii ? pented ? or did not your 

brother repent ? 
We say in French, 
Se promener a cheval, en To take a ride, an air- 
carrosse, ing on horseback, in a 

coach. 
Se promener sur Peau, sur To go upon the water, on 
2a riviere, the river. 

EXERCISES UPON THE REFLECTED VERBS. 

N. B, Verbs marked thus * are irregular : see the 
irregular verbs alphabetically arranged under each con- 
jugation. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I rise (early) every 

Se lever, v. de bonne heure, adv. 
morning. - - Does not your brother remember 
matin,m, se ressouvenir,v.* 

to have seen me ? - - My sister is not well, she 
de vu, p. p. sozur, f. t se porter, 

t When we mean to express the state of a person's health, instead 
of the verb the, we must use the reflected one se porter : 

Ma s(bw ne se porte pas bien., My sister it not well. 



223 

applies herself (too much) to study. - - - - We 

s'appliquer, v. trop, adv. 

rejoice at the good news he has brought 

se rejouir,v. de nouvelleS. apporte,p.p t 

us. -- When do you intend to go and see 

se proposer ,v. de aller, v. *» voir, v. 
Mrs. H. ? - - Do you not repent what you 

S€ repenlir,v.* de 
have done to her ? - - I beJieve your brothers 

y*ai/, p.p. croire,v.* 

are not well ; for I have not seen them this 

t <¥II\C. TTM, p. p. 

week. 
scmaiKf. f. 



Imp. I was riding on horseback in the park, 

pare, v. 
when I met him. - - W r as he not warm- 

quand.c. recontrer,v, sechauf- 

ing himself when you (came in) ? - - We did not 
fer,v. entrer,v. 

imagine he would succeed so well. - - You were 
sHmagim r, v . reussir, v. 

boasting too much of what you have done- . for 
se -canter, v. fait, p. p. 

him. - - They crid not expect that they should 

s-attendre, v. 
meet us. 



Pret. I inquired after you yesterday. - - - 

sHnformer^v* de hier, adv. 

Did not my son behave well in the last 

se comporler, v. dernier, adj. 

war? - - Corn was sold yesterday for twelve shil- 
guerre, f. se vendre, v. co- 

lings a bushel. - - We saw ourselves surrounded by 

se voir, v.* entoure, p.p. 

more than twenty persons in an instant. - - Did you 

en, p. 



224 

not -find yourselves obliged to go 

setrouver,v. o&%e,p.p. de alter, V. 

there ? - - They did not stop one minute. 

s'arreter, v. 

Fut. I will not complain of you, if you 

se plaindre, v.* 
promise me to behave better. - - Will your 

promettre,y.* de mieux, adv. 

bird (grow tame)? - - Shall we submit our- 

oiseau, m. s^apprivoiser, v. se soumettre, v.* 

selves to his judgment. - - You will ruin your- 

jugement, m. se miner, v. 

selves if you continue (gaming). - - Will they not 

coniinuer, v. de jouer, v. 
perceive it (as soon as) they come into the 

s^appercevoir^y, en des que,c. en/rcr, v. fur. 

room ? 

Cond. If I were in your place, I would 
etois a 
not vex myself. - - - - Would she not (make her 

se chagriner^y. s'echap- 

escape) ? - - We would embark (this day) 

per,v, s'embarquer^y. auj our dViui, adv. 

if the weather (would permit). - - Would you so 

tems, m. le permettoit, v. 
soon ? - - Why would you expose yourselves to their 
*6/,adv. s^exposer^y, 

fury ? - - They would agree very well, 

fureur,f. s^accorder,y» fo'm,adv. 

if they were not so proud. 

orgueilleux, adj. 

Imperative Mood. 

I give you leave to go out, but 

donner,v. permission^, de sortir,v. mais, c. 

do not overheat yourself. - - Let him amuse him- 
sHchauffer,y. &>amuser, v. 



225 

self a little in my garden. - - Let us remem- 

un pen, adv. jardin,m. se res sou- 

ber what we are to do. - - - Endeavour to 

venir de, v.* t faire, v. S'efforcer, v. de 

please your master, and do not so often mis- 

plaire,v.a maiire,m. se irom- 

take in the tenses, numbers, and persons of the 
per, v. 

verb. - - Let them (fall asleep). 
s^endormir, v. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. I must a pply myself to the 

II faut que s'appliquer, v. 
French language. - - I will hide it, lest 

langue, f. cacher, v. de peur que,c. 

she should perceive it. - - - Provided 

ne s' 'upper cevoir, v. en, pro. Pourxu que, c. 

we remember to ask him how his 

de demander, v. comment, adv. 

mother does. - - - (In order that) you may not 

se porter, v. AJin que, c. 
boast (so much). - - I have told them who you 

se vanter, v. tant, adv. dit, p.p. 

are, that they may behave better another time. 

afin que, c. fois,f* 

Pret. That I might not ruin myself. - - - 

se ruiner, v. 
That he might not meddle with my affairs. - - - 

se meter, v. de 
That w r e might excuse ourselves. - - - That you 

s'esccuser, v. 
might not go away. - - - - That they might not 

s'en alter, v.* 
repent too late, 

se repentir, v.* trop tard, adv. 

t See the reference * in the exercises upon the third conjugation, 
page 193. 



226 
Compound Tenses. 

I have inquired after you and your sister. - - - 
sHnformer,v. de 
He says you have not been well while you 

dit,v» pendant que, c. 

were in the country. - - - - Has not your cousin 

a campagne, f. cousin, m. 

laughed at me? - - Did we not get up at six 

se moquer,v, de se lever, v. a 

(o'clock) ? - - They have perceived the trick, but 

heure, f. du detour, m. 

it was too late. - - Did you remember me ? 

se ressouvenir,v, de 
1 had not applied myself enough. - - - Had 

s\tppliquer, v. assez, adv. 

not your sister imagined, that they would have 

sHmaginer, v. 
found themselves obliged to go to France ! - - 
se trouver, v. oblige, p.p. de t 

Many things (have been said) of them which 

se dire, v. 
are not true. - - - - We had thought ourselves 

se croire, v.* 
able to resist them, but we have 

capable, adj. de resister, v. leur mais, c. 
(been deceived)* - - - Did you not hide your- 

se tromper, v. se cacher, v. 

selves in order to surprise them ? - - When 

afin de surprendre, v. Quand, adv. 

I (shall) have walked five or six minutes in the gar- 

jar- 
den, I will rest myself. - - - - W T hy did you 
din, m. se reposer, v. 

exhaust yourself as you have done? - - - • Our 
s'epuiser, v. fait, p.p. 

sailors would have behaved with more reso- 

matelol, m. 

t See the indefinite article, p. 41. 



227 

lutioD. - - - Would you not have excused yourself. - 

s*excuser, v» 
When they have repented their faults, 

se repentir,v. de 
will forgive them. - - If I had been in your place, 

a 
would not have meddled with their affairs. - - 

se meler, v. de 
Your friend would not have complained of you 

se plaindre, v.* 
and you never would have (fallen out) for so smal 

se brouiller, v. 
a matter. 
chose, f. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

These are called irregulars because their conjugation 
deviates from the general rule, either by their termina- 
tions, or the want of some of their moods, tenses, per* 
sons, or numbers. 

VERB OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
ALLER, to go. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Alter, to go. 

Part. act. Allant, going. 

Part. pass. Alii, ee, gone. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Vais, vas, va, I go, do go, or am going. 
Plur. Allons, allez, vonl, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Allots, allots, alloit, I did go, or was goifig. 
Plur. AUions, alliez, alloienl, 
Preterite. 
3ing. Allai, alias, alia, I went,, or did go f 
Plur. Allames, alldtes, allerent ; or, 



228 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Fus, 
Fumes, 

Irai, 
Irons, 

Irois, 
Irions, 



fits, 
futes, 

iras^ 



fat, I went, or did go. 

furent, 

Future. 

ira, I shall, or will go. 



irez 



iront. 



Conditional. 
irois, iroit, I should, could, would, or 



might go, 



Sing. 



Plur. 



king. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Que, 
Aille, . 
Allions. 



que, 

aille, that I may go. 

ailhnt, 



iriez, iroient, 
Imperative Mood. 
Va, go thou ; 
qu?il aille^ let him go. 
Allons, allez, qv/ils aillent* 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
que, 
allies, 
alliez, 
Preterite. 
Allasse, alias ses, alldt, that I might go. 
Allassions, allassiez, allassent, 

Among the compound tenses of this verb, it is to be 
remarked, that those which are formed by the participle 
alii, signify that we are or were vet in the place men- 
tioned at the time we are or were speaking. Whence 
it follows, that the first person of the compound of the 
present, 

Je suis alii, I have gone, &c. 

Tu es alii, &c. 
can seldom be used in discourse ; for we cannot natur- 
ally say that we are still in a place which can only be 
mentioned in a past time, after we have left if ; there- 
fore we make use of the compound tenses of the verb 
eire,&sfai iti, tu. as iti,'feus ili, favois ite,faurois ili, 
&c. for when we say, 

11 est alii a Londres, He is gone to London. 

we give to understand, that he is still in London, or is 
on his way, going to London : on the contrary. 



229 

II a iti a Londrcs, He has been at London, 

means, that he has gone to London, but is returned. 

The above verb is also conjugated as a reflected one, 
with the particle en ; ex. 

S'en alter, to go away. 

Je m'en vais, I go or am going away. 

Tu fen xas, thou goest or art going away. 

77 s'en va, he goes or is going away. 

Nous nous en aliens, we go or are going away. 

Vous vous en alhz, you go or are going away. 

lis s'en vont, they go or are going away. 

Negatively. 
Je ne m'en vais pas, I am not going away. 
II ne s'en va pas, he is not going away. 
Nous ne nous en allons pas, we are not going away. 
Vous nevous en alkzpas, &c. you are not going away,&c. 

Interrogatively. 
S'en va-t-il? Is he going away ? 
Vous en allez-vous ? &c. are you going away 1 &c. 
Ne s'en vont-ils pas ? &e. are they not going away ? &c. 

The imperative mood is thus conjugated: 
Singular. 
Va-l'en, go thou away. 
Qu'il s'en aille, let him go away. 

Plural. 
Allons-nous en, let us go away. 
Allez-vous en, go away. 
Qu r ils s'en aillent, let them go away. 

Its compound tenses are, 
Je m'en suis alii, I have gone away. 
Je m'en 6tois alii, I ,iad gone away. 
Je m'en /z<s a^/e. I had gone a way. 
Je m'en scrar alii, I shall have gone away, &lc, 
Je m'en serois alii, I shoul \ have gone away. 
20 



230 

VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION 

ACQUERIR, TO ACQUIRE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Acquirir, to acquire. 

Part. act. Acquerant, acquiring. 

Part. pass. Acquis, acquired. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Acquiers, acquiers, acquiert, I acquire, or am ac- 

Plur. Acqut*rons, acquerez, acquierent, quiring. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Acquerois, acquerois, acqueroit, I did acquire, or was 
Plur. Acquerions, acqueriez, acqueroient, acquiring. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Acquis, acquis, acquit, I acquired, or did ac- 
Plur. Acquimes, acquiles, acquirent, quire. 

Future. 
Sing. Acquerrai, acquerras, acquerra, I shall, or will ac- 
Plur. Acquerrons, acquerrez, acquerront, quire. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Acquerrois, acquerrois, acquerroil, I should, would, 

or could acquire. 
Plur. Acquerrions, acquerriez, acquerroient, 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Acquiers, acquiere, acquire thou. 

Plur. Acquerons, acquerez, acquierent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Acquiere, acquieres, acquiere, that I may acquire. 
Plur. Acquerions, acqueriez, acquierent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Acquisse, acquisses, acquit, that I might ac- 
Plur. Acquissions, acquissiez, acquissenl, quire. 



231 

QUERIR, TO FETCH. 

The primitive of the above verb is never used but in 
the present of the infinitive mood : ex. 

Envoyez-moi querir, Send for me. 

CONQUERIR, to conquer ; REQUER1R, to require; 
are conjugated like ACQUERIR. 



BOUILLIR, to boil. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Bouillir, to boil. 

Part. act. Bouillant, boiling. 

Part. pass. Bouilli, it, boiled. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Bous, bous, bout, I boil, or am boiling, 
Plur* Bouillons, bouillez, bouillent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Bouillois, bouillois, bouilloit, I did boil, or was 
Plur. Bouillions, bouilliez, bouilloienf, boiling. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Bouillis, bouillis, bouillit, I boiled, or did 
Plur. Bouillimes, bouillites, bouillirent, boil. 

Future. 
Sing. Bouillirai, bouilliras, bouillira, I shall or will boil. 
Plur. Bouillirons,bouillirez, bouillironl, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Bouillirois, bouillirois, bouilliroit, I should, would, 
Plur. Bouillirions^bouilliriez,bouilliroient, or could boil. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Bous, bouille, boil thou. 

Plur. Bouillons, bouillez, bouillmU 



232 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Bouille, bouilles^ bouille, that I may boil. 
Piur. Bouillions,bouilliez, bouillent, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Bouillisse, bouillisses, bouillil, that I might boil. 
Plur. Bouillhsions, bouiliissiez, bouillissent, 

This verb, as well as its compound rebouillir, to boil 
again, is but seldom used, except in the third person 
singular or plural, and its infinitive mood, which is 
commonly joined to the verb Faire : ex. 

Faites bouillir cette viande, Boil that meat. 



COURIR, TO RUN. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Courir, to run. 
Part. act. Courant, running. 
Bart. pass. Couru^ ue, run. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Cours, cours, court, I run, or am running. 
Plur. Courons, courez, courent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Courois, couroit, couroit, I did run, or was 
Plur. Courions, couriez, couroient, running. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Courus, counts, courut, I ran, or did run. 
Plur. Courumes, couruUs, coururcnt, 

Future. 
Sing. Courrai, courras^ courra, I shall or will run, 
Plur. Courrons, courrez, courront 2 



233 

Conditional. 
Sing. Courrois, courrois, courroil, I should, would, or 
Plur. CourrionS) courriez 1 courroient, could run. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing.. Cours, coure, run thou. 

Plur. Courons, courez, courent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Qut que que 

Sing. Coure, coures, coure, that I may run* 
Plur. Courions, couriez, courent^ 

Preterite. 
Sing. Courusse, courusses, courut, that I might run* 
Plur. Courussions, courussiez, courussent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Accourir,- to run to. 
Contourir, to concur. 
Discourir, to discourse. 
Encourir, to incur. 



Parcourir, to run over. 
Recourir, to have recourse 

to. 
Secourir, to succour, to 

assist. 



COUVRIR, TO COVER. 
See OUVRIR, to open. 



CUEILLIR, to gather. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Cueillir, to gather. 

Part. act. Cutillant, gathering. 

Part. pass. Cueilli, ic, gathered. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. CueMle, cueilles, cueille, I gather, or am garb- 

Plur. Cueillons, cueillez, cueillent, ering. 

20* 



§34 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Cueittois, cueillois, cueilloit, I did gather, or was 
Plur. Cueillions, cueilliez^ citeilloient, gathering. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Cueillis, cueillis, cneillit, I gathered, or did 
Plur. Cueillimes, cueillites, cueillirent, gather. 

Future. 
Sing. Cueillerai, cueilleras, cueillera, I shall or will 
Plur, Cueillerons, cueillerez, cueilleront, gather. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Cueillerois, cueillerois, cueilleroit, I should, would, 

or could gather., 
Plur. Cueiller'ions, cueilleriez, cueilleroient y 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Cueille, cueille, gather thou. 

Plur. Cueillons, cueillez, cueillent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Cueille, cueilles, cueille, that I may gather. - 
Plur. Cucillions, cueilliez, cueillent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. CueiUisse cueillisses, cueillit, that I might 
Piur. Cueillissions, cueillissiez, cueillissent, gather. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Accueillir^ to make wel- I RecueilHr, to gather to- 
come. I gether. 



DORMIR, TO SLEEP. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Dorrnir, to sleep. 
Part. act. Dormant, sleeping. 
Part. pass. Dormi, slept. 



235 



Sing. Dors, 
Plur. Dormons, 



Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
dors, dort, I sleep, or am sleeping. 



dormez, dorment, 
Imperfect. 
Sing. Dormois, dormois, dormoit, I did sleep, or was 
Plur. Dormions, dormiez, dormoient, sleeping. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Dormis, dormis, dormit, I slept, or did sleep. 
Plur. Dormimes, dormitcs, dormirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Dormirai, dormiras, dormira, I shall or will 
Plur. Dormirons, dormirez, dormiront, sleep. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Dormirois, dormirois, dormiroit,] would, could or 
Piur. Dormirions, dormiriez, dormiroient, should sleep. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Dors, dorme, sleep thou. 

Plur. Dormons, dormez, dorment, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Dorme, dormes, dorme, that I may sleep. 
Plur. Dormions, dormiez, dorment, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Dormisse, dormisses, dormit, that I might sleep. 
Plur. Dormissions, dormissiez, dormissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Endormir, to make sleep. 
S'endormir, to fall asleepi 



Se rendormir, to fall asleep 



again. 



EXERCISES on the foregoing VERBS 
and their COMPOUNDS. 
Where are you going? - • - I am going to the 
Ou,adv. 



23fr 

play. - - I would go with you, if I had time. - - Why 

com6die,f. U 

are they going away so soon ? - - Will not your father 

tot, adv. 
l>e angry, if you go there without him ? - - We were 
fdche, adj. 

going to Miss D 's, when we met you. 

chez, p. avons rencontre,v, 

- - These men went yesterday from house to house. - - 

en, p. 
Believe me, sir, do not go to see them. - - Your fa- 
Croire,v. voir, v. 

ther told me, you will go to France and Italy as soon 

dire, v. 
as the war (is over). - - My sister and I went last 

sera Jinie. dernier, adj. 

Wednesday to Vauxhall. - - If you had gone thither 
an hour sooner you would have heard fine music. 
plutfit, adv. entendre,v. 

- - Your uncle has accquired a great name in America. 

nom, m. 

- - My father went to pay your uncle a visit 

<o*> rendre,v. 
last week, and he did not welcome him (as a) friend. 

en, p. 

- - - Did he not ? I am sorry for it. - - - Mr. Dubois, 
the king's silversmith, has brought the watch : it 

argentier, m. 
now goes very well. - - Go and fetch me 

maintenant, adv. «^» 

the letter I left in my room. - - Boil this chicken, 

laisser, v. poulet, m. 

and roast that goose. - - At last we have conquered, 
rotir,v. oie,L Enjin, adv. 

- - This water will soon boil. - - Boil that meat 

foen/d/, adv. 
again, it is not done enough. - - Do not run so 

cuit,p.p, 
fast, you will be tired. - - - They always run 

vt(€,adv. fatigue, p.p. 



237 

when they go to see their aunt. - - Your brother 

(ante, f. 
runs faster that I. - - When he heard that his 

apprendre,v. 
friend was in danger, he ran instantly to him. - - 

aussit6L,aav. 
Let us not discourse any more on that subject. - - - - I 

«c» sujet, m. 

would assist him with all my heart, if I could. - - This 

pouvoir, 
gentleman is a great traveller: he has run over all 

voyageur,m. 
Europe. - - Let him go away, for I do not wish to 

car, c. & veux,v. «o» 
speak to him. - - If you do it, you will incur your 

f aire, v. 
father's displeasure. - - That would concur to the pub^ 

deplaisir, m. 
lie good. - - When children are guilty, they generally 

bien, m. coupable, adj. 

have recourse to some falsehood. - - For whom are you 

mensonge, m. 
gathering those charming flowers? - - 1 gather them for 

fleur, f. 
my mother. - - W T hy do they not gather some roses? -- 

rose, f. 
Mrs. P. would have gathered some, but the gardener 

jardihier,m. 
told her he would gather them himself. - - Of all na- 
tions none has welcomed the poor French clergy bet- 

chrge.m. 
ter than the English. --Do not make an}' noise, for my 

fairr, v. car, c. 

sister (is asleep.) - - 1 hope she will sleep better to-night. - 
dormir. ce soir, m. 

She would sleep much better, if she were in her bed. -- 

lit.m. 
If I do not walk a little, I shall fall asleep. - - My 

sepromener, v. 
mother, sister, brother, and I, went yesterday to 



288 

Croydon, to see Miss Keen. - - Did you go thither 

k» Mademoiselle, f. 

on foot? - - No, my mother and sister, went in a 

a en, p. «<& 

coach, and my brother and I on horseback. 

a cheval, m. 



fuir, to run away, to shun, to avoid, to flee, 

Infinitivb Mood. 

Present. Fuir, to flee. 
Part. act. Fuyant, fleeing. 
Part. pass. Fui, ie, fled. 

Indicative Mood, 
Present. 
Sing. Fuis, fuis, fuit, I flee. 
Plur. Fuyons, fuyez, fuient, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Fuyois, fuyois, fuyoit, I fled, or did flee. 
Plur. Fuyions, fuyiez, fuyoient, 
Preterite. 
This tense is conjugated with the verb Prendre and 
the substantive fuite : ex. 

Je pris la fuite, I fled, or ran away* 
Future. 
Sing. Fuirai, fuiras, fuira, I shall or will flee. 
Plur. Fuirons, fuircz, fuiront, 

* Conditional. 
Sing. Fuirois, fuirois, fuiroit, I should, would, or could 
Plur. Fuirions,fuiriez, fniroient, flee. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Fuis, fuie, flee thou. 

Plur. Fuyons, fuyez, fuient, 



239 
Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Fuie, fuies, fuie, that I may flee, 

Plur. Fuyions, fuyiez, fuient, 
Preterite. 
Je prisse la fuite, &c. that I might flee. 



MENTIR, to lie. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Mentir, to lie. 
Part. act. Mentant, lying. 
Part. pass. Menti, lied. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Mens, mens, ment, I lie. 
Plur. Me: '■ is, mentez, men tent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Mentc mentois, mentoit, I did lie, or was lying 4 , 
Plur. Mentions, mentiez, mentoieni, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mentis, mentis, meniit, I lied, or did lie'. 
Plur. Mentimts, menfites, mentirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Mentirai, mentiras, mentira, I shall or will lie-. 
Plur. Mentirons, mmtirez, mentiront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. J\Ientirois, mentirois, mentiroit, I would, could, or 
Plur. Mentirions, mentiriez, mentiroient, should lie* 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Mens, mente, lie thou. 

Plur. Mentons^,. mentez, mentent 3 



ii6 







Subjunctive Mood. 






Present. 


Sing. 


Que 
Mente, 


que que 

mentes mente, that I may lie. 


Plur. 


Mentions 


meniiez, mentent, 
Preterite. 


Sing. 


Mentissc, 


mentisses, mentit, that I might lie 



Plur. Mentissions, mentissiez, mentissent, 

The compound of this verb is 
Dimentir, to give one the lie, to belie, to contradict. 



MOURIR.to die. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Mourir, to die. 
Part. act. Mouranl, dying. 
Part. past. Mort, te, died, or dead. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
SHng. Meurs, meurs, meurt, I die, or am dying. 
Plur. Mourons, mourez, mturent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Mourois, mourois, mouroit^ I was dying. 
Plur. Msurions, mouriez, mouroient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mourns, mourns, mourut, I died. 
Plur. Mourumes, mourutes, moururent, 

Future. 
Sing. Mourrai, mourras, mourra, I shall, or will die. 
Plur. Mourrons, mourrez, mourront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Mourrots, mourrots, mourroil, 1 should, could, or 
Plur. Mourrions, mourriez, mourroient, would die 



241 



Imperative Mood. 

Meurs, meure, die thou. 

mourez, meurent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

que 

meures, 

mouriez, 

Preterite. 
mourusses, mourut, that I might die. 
Plur. Mourussions, mourussiez, mourussent, 
Se mourir, to be dying. 



Plur. Mourons. 



Que 
Sing. Meure, 
Plur. Mourions, 

Sing. Mourusse, 



que 

meure, that I may die, 

mcurent* 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sins:. 

PiuK 



OFFRIR, TO OFFER. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Offrir, to offer. 
Offrant, offering. 
Offerl, erte, offered. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
off res, off re, I offer, or am offering. 
offrez, offrent, 

Imperfect. 
offrois, offroit, I did offer, or was of- 
offriez, offroient y fering. 

Preterite. 
offris, qffrit, I offered, or did offer. 
Offrimes, offrites, offrirent, 

Future. 
Offrirai, offriras, offrira, I shall, or will offer. 
Offrir ons, offrir ez, offrir ont, 

Conditional. 
Offrirois, offrirois, offriroit, I would, could, or 
Offririons, offririez, offriroient, should offer. 

21 



Present. 
Part. act. 
Part. pass. 



Offre, 
Offrons, 

Offrois, 
Offrions, 



Offris, 



242 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Offre, offre, offer thou. 

Plur. Offrons, offrez, offrent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Offre, offres, offre, that I may offer. 

Plur. Offrions, offriez, offrent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Offrisse, offrisse?, offrit, that I might offer. 
Plur. Offrissions, offrissiez, offrissent, 



OUIR, TO HEAR. 

This verb is never used but in its participle passive, 
joined to some of the tenses of the verb avoir, to have, 
preceding the verb dire, to say : ex. 

J'ai oui dire que, I have heard, that, fyc. 
In general we make use of apprendre. 



OUVRIR, TO OPEN. 
This verb, as well as its compounds, 
Couvrir, to cover, Recouvrir, to cover again. 

Qtcouvrir, J [° U ncove£ I is con J u S ated like OFFRIR. 



PARTIR, TO SET OUT, TO GO A WAT ; 

And its compounds, 

Dipartir, to depart, to I Reparlir, to set out ut I'm. 
impart, | to reply ; 



243 
SeREPENTIR, to repent; 

SEXTIR, TO FEEL, TO SMELL, 

And its compounds ; 



Consentir, to consent, to 

agree, 
Pressenlir, to have a foresight of, 

are conjugated like Mentir 



Ressentir, to be sensible of, 
to resent, 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND 

their COMPOUNDS. 

As soon as they saw us coming they ran away 
voir, v. venir, v. 

- - - Avoid bad company. - - He does not love your 

compagnie, f. 
sister, because she lies. - - If you forgive me this time, 
parce que, c. fois,f. 

I never will lie any more. - - I cannot believe him ; 

' *» pouvoir, v. 

for he contradicts himself at every instant. - - Tell 
car, c. Dire,v. 

me what she has done to you ; but above all do not lie. 

sur, p. 

- - If you do not behave better, your mother will 

se comporter, v. 
die with grief. - - Mrs. S. died at Paris on the seventh 

de chagrin, m. a <o* 

of August, one thousand seven hundred and eighty. 

Aout, m. 

- - Misfortune often seeks those who avoid it, and 

Malheur, m. chercher, v. 

sometimes avoids those who seem to seek it. - - 
quelquefois, adv. sembhr,v, k» 

Were I in your place, I would not offer her any money. 
Si'fitois a 

- - Why do you not open the door for your sister? 

Pourquoi, adv. a 



244 

-- Your brother was no sooner arrived in London, than 

plutot, adv. a 
I offered him my services. - - Your actions never belie 
your words. - - Open the window. - - I had heard you 
were going to Holland at the beginning of next 

an commencement, m. 
ftionth. - - I hope you will never discover what I have 

esperer, v. 
told you. - - Cover my hat, and put it upon that 
dire, v. me t Ire, v. 

chair. - - J will set out to-morrow morning at seven 
(o'clock). - - Do not set out without me. - - Let us go and 
heure, f. k* 

see Mrs. D**, I have heard she is dying. - - Your sister 
repents much of having sold her books. - - Gather that 

d? avoir 
pink, it smells charmingly. - - Her mother says she 
ceillet,m. bien bon,an\v. 

jnever will consent to it. - - If you do not take 

prendre, v. 
care, you \y,ill repent of your imprudence soon or 
garde, f. tot, adv. 

late. - - Let us die for our country, and our death will 
tard, adv. patrie, f. 

•be glorious. - - Every citizen ought to be disposed to 

glorieux, adj. doit 

sacrifice himself for the public good ; it is at this 

bien ce, pro. a, p. 
price only tha.t (a man) acquires a lawful right 

on legitime, adj. droit,m. 

to the advantages of civil society. * - - 1 should die 
satisfied, if J knew you were happy, - - - - 
content, adj. savoir, v. (by the subj.) 

You soon felt the effect of it. - - My cousin set out 

effet, m. 
from here yesterday morning at nine o'clock. - - 1 

id, adv. 
offer you my house, it is at your service. - - - You 
may rely upon her, she will never discover 

pouvoir, v. compter, v. 



2'45 
your secrets. - - I will never offer you my 2 horse 3 any 

more 1 . - - He will feel it in his turn, when he 

a tour, m. 

is old. 

(by the fut.) 



servir, to serve, to help to. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Servir, to serve. 
Part. act. Servant, serving. 
Part. pass. Servi, ie, served. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Sers, sere, serf, I serve, or am serving. 
Plur. Servons, servez, servent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Servois, servois, servoit, I did serve, or was 
Plur. Servions, serviez, servoient, serving. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Servis, servis, servit, I did serve, or served. 
Plur. Servimes servites, servirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Servirai, serviras, servira, I shall, or will serve. 
Plur. Servirons, servirez, serviront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Servirois, servirois, serviroit, I would, should, or 
Plur. Servirions, serviriez, serviroient, could serve. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Sers, serve, serve thou. 

Plur. Servons, servez, servent, 
21* 



246 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Serve, serves, serve, that I may serve. 

Plur. Servions serviez, servent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Servisse, servisses, servit, that I might serve, 
Plur. Servissions, servissiez, servissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Desservir, to do an ill office, to clear a table? 
Se servir, to make use, to use. 



SORTIR, TO GO OUT, 
is conjugated like MENTIR. 



SOUFFRIR, TO SUFFER, 
is conjugated like OFFRIR, 



tenir, to hold, to keep* 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Tenir, to hold. 
Part. act. Tenant, holding. 
Part. pass. Tenu, ue, held. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Tiens, tiens, tient, I hold, or am holding. 
Plur. Tenons, tenez, tiennent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Tenois, tenois, tenoii, I did hold, or was holding. 
Plur. Tenions, teniez, tenoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Tins, tins, tint, I held, or did hold. 
Plur. Tinmes, tintes^ tinrent, 



247 



Future. 

Sing. Tiendrai, tiendras., tiendra, 1 shall, or will hold. 
Plur. Tiendrons, tiendrez, tiendronl^ 

Conditional. 

Sing. Tiendrois, tiendrois^ tiendroit, I should, could, or 
Plur. Tiendrions tiendriez, tiendroient, would hold. 



Sing. 

Plur. Tenons , 



Imperative Mood. 

Tiens, iienne, hold thou. 
tenez. tiennent. 



Que 
Sing. Tienne, 
Plur. Tenions, 



Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 



que 

tiennes, 

teniez. 

Preterite 



que 

tienne, that I may hold. 

tiennent* 



Sing. Tinsse, iinsses, tint, that I might hold. 
Plur. Tinssions, tinssiez, tinssent^ 

The compounds of this verb are, 



S'abstenir, to abstain. 
Appartenir, to belong. 
Contenir, to contain. 
Detenir, to detain. 
Entretenir, to keep, to en- 
tertain. 



Maintenir, to maintain. 
Qbtenir, to obtain. 
ilctenir, to retain, to keep. 
Soutenir, to maintain, to 
hold, to support. 



TRESSAILLIR, to start, to leap for. 
Infinitive Mood. 



Present. 
Part. act. 
Part, pass. 



Tressaillir, to start. 
Tressaillant, starting. 
Tressailli) ie, started, 



248 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Tressaille, tressailles, tressaille, I start. 
Plur. Tressaillons, tressaillez, tressaillent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Tressaillois, tressaillois, tressailloit, I did start. 
Plur. TressaillioriS) tressailliez, tress ailloient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Tressaillis, tressaillis, tressaillit, I started. 
Plur. Tressaillimes, tressailliles, tressaillirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Tressaillirai) tressailliras, tressaillira, I shall, or 

will start. 
Plur. Tress ailliront, tressaillirez, tressailliront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Tressaillirois, tressaillirois^ tressailliroit, I should, 

would, &c. start. 
Plur. Tress aillirions, tressailliriez^ tressailliroient, 

Imperative Mood is wanting. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Tressaille, tressailles, tressaille, that I may 
Plur. Tressaillions, tressailliez, tressaillent, start. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Tressaillisse, tr es sail lis ses, iressaillit, that I might 
Plur. Tress amissions^ tressaillissiez, tressaillissent, start. 



ASSAILLIR, to assault, is conjugated as above. 

SAIFjLIR, to jut, or jet out (term in architecture), 
is conjugated like TRESSAILLIR, but is only used 
in the third person of some tenses and its infinitive 
mood. 



243 



N. B. SAILLIR, to gush out, (speaking of anj 
liquid), is regular, and conjugated like PUJSTIR, 



VEN1R, TO COME, 
And its compounds, 



Convenir <le, a, to agree, to 

become, to fit, to suit, 
Contrevenir «, to infringe, 
Devenir, to become,* 
Disconvenir de, to disagree, 
Intervener a, to intervene, 
Parvenir a, to attain to, 
Prevenir, to prevent, to 
prejudice, to anticipate, 
to prepossess, 
Provcnir, to proceed, 

are conjugatec 



Revenir, to come back, to 
return, 

Se souvenir de, to remem- 
ber, to remind,! 

Se ressovvenir de y to recol- 
lect, 

Subvenir «, to relieve, to 
assist, 

Survenir, to befall, to 
happen unexpectedly, 
to come to, 

like TENIR. 



VETIR, TO CLOTHE. 

This verb is seldom used but in the present of the 
infinitive mood, and participle passive, vein, clothed ; 
therefore the conjugation of its compound REVETIR, 

TO INVEST WITH, TO GIVE OTHER CLOTHES, Will be given 

in lieu of it. 

* This verb in English is most generally accompanied by the pre- 
position of governing the noun or pronoun: but it must be observed, 
that, in French, the preposition must be suppressed, and the noun or 
pronoun become the nominative to the verb devenir : ex. 
Ne vous informez point de ce que Do not inquire about what will 

je deviendrai, become of me. 

Que deviendra votre cousin si son What will become of your cousin, 

pere labandonne ? if his father forsake him ? 

Si cela arrivoit, je ne sais ce que Should that happen, I know not 

nous deviendrions, what would become of us. 

j- When this verb, in English, governs a noun or pronoun in the 
accusative case, it must be put in the infinitive mood, and preceded 
by the verb faire in the same tense, number, and person, as the verb 
to remind : ex. 
Faites-moz souvenir de passer ekes Remind me to call upon your 

votre tante, aunt. 

Qui,je rout en ferai souvenir, Yes, I will remind you of it. 



250 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Revttir, to invest, to give other clothes. 
Part. act. Revetant, investing. 
Part. pass. Revitu, ue, invested. 

Indicative Mood* 

Present. 
Sing. Revets, revets, revet, I invest* 
Plur. Revetons, revetez, revetent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Revetois, revitois, revetoit, I did invest. 
Plur. Revetions, revetiez, reveioient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Revitis, r eve lis, revetit, I invested, or di<J in- 
Plur. Revelimes, revetites, revetirent, vest. 

Future. 
Sing. Revetiraii revetiras, revitira, I shall, or will in- 
Plur. Revetirons, revelirez, revetiront, vest. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Revetirois, revetirois, revetiroit, I should, would, 
Plur. Revetirions, revetiriez, reveiiroient, fyc, invest. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Revets, revete, invest thou. 

Plur. Revetons, revetez, revetent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Revete, revites, revete, that I may invest. 
Plur. Revetions, revetiez, revetent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Revetisse, revetisses, revetit, that I might invest. 
Plur. Reversions, revitissiez, revetissent, 



c i51 

EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS 
AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Your friend Mr. H***, does not serve me well. - - 
ami, m. *y> 

Shall I help you to a little bit of lamb, 

«» morceau, m. agneau, m. 

or a wing of that chicken ? - - - - We would 

aile, f. poultt, m. 

serve him with all our heart, if we could. - - - I 

de pouvoir, v. 

shall go out in half an hour. - - If we go to-day 

aujouroVhui, adv. 
to Richmond, we will (make use of) your coach. - My 

se servir de carrosse, m. 

sister went out this morning at nine o'clock, and is not 

matin, m. 
yet returned. - - Nobody knows what we suffered in our 

savoir, v. 
last voyage. - - If 1 were as ill as you, I would 

voyage, m. malade, adj. 

not go out of my room. - - Why do not you 

ckambre,(. Pourquoi^adv* 
serve your friends, since you may doit? - - - 

puisque, c. pouvoir, v. 
Should they forsake you, what would become of 

abandonner, v. 
you ? - - I would make use of your horse, if you were 

cheval, m. avoir 
so kind as to lend it to me. - - - The more we are 
la bonte de 

above others, the more it becomes us to be 

au dessus de, p. 
modest and humble. - - My aunt and I came yester- 

tante, f. 
day to see you, but you were not at home. - - I 
hope you will keep your word, and come 

parole, f. 
to-morrow. - - - I assure you Mr. R**'s father hold* 
demain, adv. assurer, v. 



252 

the first rank in the town, but the son will never 

rang, m. 
attain his father's reputation. - - Men acquire, by 

Homme, m. 
long labours, knowledge which often becomes 

travail, m. lumiere, f. 
fatal to them. - - - I maintain, and will always 

funeste, adj. 

maintain, that you will not be happy without 

heureux, adj. sans, p. 
virtue. - - We were coming to see you, but you have 
anticipated all my designs. - - She leaped for joy when 

de 
she saw her. - - At last she has agreed to pay her 

Enfin, adv. * de 

an annual pension of twenty pounds. - - Her mother 
started up at these words, and became furious. - - - 

<^> a, p. parole, f. furieux, adj. 

Come on Friday morning at nine o'clock. - - - 

«oi Vendredi, m. 
This house will belong to me after her death. 

apres, p. mort, f. 

You will obtain leave to go out another time, 

permission, f. de fois, f. 

if you come back soon. - - - This box contains all 

bientot, adv. 
my jewels. - - - I agree Miss N. is the prettiest of the 

bijoux, m. pi. 
family ; but she is so proud, that I know not what will 
become of her. - .- Who knows whether they will re- 

savoir, v. si, c. 
member it or not? - - They assaulted the town (in the) 

au 
middle of the night, and all their officers, even 
milieu, m. we/r7P,adv. 

the general, agree that they have acquired much 

actjuirir, p.p. 
glory. - * Remember that, if you infringe the law, you 

V 

* See the neuter verbs for the formation of the compound (en&et 
page 212.- 



253 

will incur the punishments decreed by the law. 

peine, f. porti, p.p. 

Your illness proceeds from a great heat. - - - - The 

chaleur, f. 
first time you come to see me, I will keep you 

(by the fut.) 
two or three days. - - Mr. B. desired me to tell you, 

prier, v. de 
that he will not come back to-day. - - - When the 
surgeon had opened his vein, the blood gushed 

chirurgien, m. sang, m. 

out with an extraordinary impetuosity. - - That poor 
man will bless you, if you give him other clothes. - - 

benir, v. 
He is so prepossessed against me, that he will not 

contre, p. vouloir, v. 

agree he (is in the wrong). - - We should certainly 

avoir tort certainement,adv, 

have come back yesterday, had we had time. - - You will 

hier, adv. 
become a great man, if you continue to study with 

continuer, v. de 
the same assiduity. - - He would have come to see us 

assiduite, f. * 

last week, if it had not rained. - - The first time 

semaine, f. plu, p.p. fois,f, 

I go out, remind me to call on your bro- 

( by the fut.) de passer, v. chez, p. 

ther. - - - That hat would suit you very well, if you 
were a little taller. - - - Do not go out to-day, you 
will suffer much if you do. - - - I should not suffer 

beaucoup, adv. 
(so much,) if it were fine weather. - - Why do not 

tant, adv. faisoit, v. 
you abstain from drinking ? - - The king has invested 

boire, v. 
that nobleman with all his authority. - - You may 
seigneur, m. de Pouvoir,v. 

set out this morning, but remember to come back 

de 
22 



254 

at night. - - - Were I in your place, I would detain 

ce soir, m. place, f. 

him here a little longer ; for he always keeps 

long-terns, adv. car, c. 
himself shut up in his house. - - I do not think that 

enfermi, p.p. croire, v. 

colour suits your sister. - - When will she return 

(by the subj.) Quand, adv. 

from" the country ? - - She wrote she would come next 
Saturday, if the weather were fine. 



VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 

ASSEOIR, TO SIT DOWN. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Asseoir, to sit down. 

Part. act. Asseyant, sitting down. 

Part. pass. Assis, ise, sat down (or seated). 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Assieds, assieds, assied, I sit down. 
Plur. Asseyons, asseyez, asseient, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Asseyois, asseyois, asseyoit, I did sit, or was sit- 
Plur. Asseyions, asseyiez, asseyoient, ting down. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Assis, assis, assit, I sat down., 

Plur. Assimes, assites, assirent. 

Future. 

Sing. Assi6rai, assieras, assiera, I shall, or will sit 
JPlur. Assierons, assierez, assieront, down. 



255 

Conditional. 
Sing. Assierois, assierois, assieroit, I should, would, or 
Plur. Assierions, assiiriez, assieroient, could sit down. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Assieds, asseie, sit down. 

Piur. Asseyons, asseyez, asseient, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Asseie* asseies, asseie, that I may sit down. 
Plur. Asseyions, asseyiez, asseient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Assisse, -assisses, assit, that I might sit down. 
Plur. Assissions, assissiez, assissent, 

Asseoir is most generally conjugated as a reflected 
verb, which may easily be done, by the learner adding 
a double pronoun to the different tenses, and forming 
the compound ones by the verb eire, a$ in se -promt- 
ner : ex. 

Je m^assieds, tu Vassieds, il s'assied ; 

Nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, Us s'asseient. 

Compound Tenses. 

Je me suis assis, tu Ves assis, il s'est assis ; 

Nous nous sommes assis, vous vous etes assis, &c. 

The compound of this verb is, 

Se rasseoir, to sit down again. 

SEOIR, to fit well, to become, to fit, the 
primitive of asseoir, is never used in the present of its 
infinitive mood ; and in its other tenses is conjugated as 
follows : 

Part. act. Scant, fitting well, fitting, or becoming. 
Part. pass. Sis, (never, used but in the sense of situate, 
or lying.) 



256 



Indicative Mood. 

Present. II sied, Us stient, it becomes, they be- 
come, fyc. 
Imperfect. 77 seyoil, Us seyoient, it was becoming, #-c. 
Preterite wanting. 

Future. II siera, Us sieront, it or they will become. 

Conditional. // sieroil, tls $i6roient, it or they would be- 
come. 

The other tenses are never used. 
SURSEOIR, to supersede, to put off a compound 
of seoir, is only used in law, and is thus conjugated : 

Part. act. SursoyanL 
Part. pass. Sursis, ise. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Je sursois, &c. nous sursoyons, &c. 

Imperfect. 
Je sursoyois, &c. nous sursoyions, &c. 

Preterite. 
Je sursis, &c. nous sursimes, ire. 

Future. 
Je surseoirai, &c. nous surseoirons, &c. 

Conditional. 
Je surseoirois, &c. nous surseoirions, &c» 

Imperative Mood. 
Sursois, &c. sursoyons, &c,. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que je surseoie, &c. que nous sursoyjons, &e. 

Preterite. 
Que je sur$isse r &c. que nous sursissions^ &c, 



257 
dechoir, to decay, to decline. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Dechoir, to decay. 

Part. act. wanting. 

Part. pass. Dechu, ue, decayed. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Dechois, dechois, dechoit, I decay. 

Plur. Dechoyons, dichoyez, dechoient, 

Imperfect is wanting. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Dechus, dechus, dechut, I decayed, or did 

Plur. Dechumes, dechnies, dechurent, decay. 

Future. 
Sing. Decherrai, decherras, decherra, I shall, or will 
Plur. Decherrons, decherrez, decherront, decay. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Decherrois, decherrois, decherroit, I should, would, 

or could decay. 
Plur. Decherrions, decherriez, dicherroient, 

Imperative Mood is wanting. 

Subjunctive Mood, 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Deck oie, dechoies, dechoie, that I may decay. 

Plur. Dcchoyions, dechcyiez, dechoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Deckusse, dechusses, dechut, that I might decay. 
Plur. Dechussions, dechussiez, dechussent, 

CHOIR, the primitive of the above verb is obsolete. 
ECHOIR, to fall out, to chance, is conjugated 
like DECHOIR. Its part. act. is tcheants, iohu. p. p. 
22* 



258 

MOUVOIR, to move. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Mouvoir, to move. 
Part. act. Mouvant, moving. 
Part. pass, Mu, we, moved. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Meus, mens, meut, I move. 
PJur. Mouvons, mouvez, meuvent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Mouvois, mouvois, mouvoit, I did move. 
Plur. Mouvions, mouviez, mouvoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mus, mus, mut, I moved, or did move. 
Plur. Mumes, mutts, murent, 
Future. 
Sing. Mouvrai, mouvras, mouvra, I shall, or will move. 
Plur. Mouvrons, mouvrez, mouvront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Mouvrois, mouvrois, mouvroit, I should, could, or 
Plur. Mmivrions, mouvriez, mouvroient, would move. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Mens, meuve, move thou. 

Plur. Mouvons, mouvez, meuvent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Meuve, meuves, meuve, that I may move. 
Plur. Mouvions mouviez, meuvent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Musse, musses, mut, that I might move. 
Plur. Mussions, mussiez, mussent, 
The compound of this verb is, 

Emouvoir, to stir up, to move. 



25X 
pouvoir, to be able, to have in one's power. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Pouvoir, to be able. 
Part. act. Pouvant, being able. 
Part. pass. Pa, been able. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Puis, or peux, peux, pent, I am able, I can or may. 
Plur. Pouvons, pouvez, peuvent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Pouvois, pouvois, pouvoit, I was able, or I could. 
Plur. Pouvwns, pouviez, pouvoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pus, pus, put, I was able, or I could. 
Plur. Pumes, pules, purent, 

Future. 
Sing. Pourrai, pourras, pourra, I shall, or will be able. 
Plur. Pourrons, pourrez, pourront, 
Conditional. 
Sing. Pourrois, pourrois, pourroit, I should be able, I 
Plur. Pourrions, pourriez, pourroient, could, or might. 

Imperative Mood wanting. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Puisse, puisses, puisse, that I may be able, or 

Plur. Puissions, puissiez, puissent, I may. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pusse, pusses x put, that I might be able, or 
Plur. Pussions, pussiez, pussent, I might. 

When the words can, may, could, or might, express an 
absolute or permissive power, or a possibility of doing 
a thing, can and may are rendered hy the present tense 
of the indicative oi this verb : ex. 



2G0 

Je puis vous vendre un bon I can sell you a good horse. 

cheval, si vous en avez L you want one. 

besoin d*un, 
Vous pouvez aller au hal, You may go to the ball, 

rnais revenez a dix heures, but come back at ten 

o'clock, 

N. B. May, expressing a wish, is rendered by the 
present tense of the subjunctive : ex. 

Puissiez-Dows elre heureux ! May you be happy ! 

Could is rendered by one of the following tenses, viz. 
the imperfect, preterite definite or indefinite, or con- 
ditional present ; and might by the last tense : ex. 
Je ne pouvois pas mieux I could do no better. 

/aire, 
II ne put pas venir avec He could not come with us 

nous la semaine passee, last week. 

Vous pourriez vous tromper You might mistake as well 

aussi bien que lui, as he. 

Could or might, being joined to the verb to have, im- 
mediately followed by a participle passive, must be ren- 
dered by the conditional past of the above verb, with 
the participle turned into the present of the infinitive 
mood : ex. 
J'aurois pu vous le dire 1 could have told it to you 

hier au soir, last night. 

Vous auriez pu le /aire en You might have done it in 

trois jours, three days. 



S AVOIR, to know something. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Savoir, to know. 
Part. act. Sachant, knowing 
Part. pass. Sw, ue, known. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Sais, sais, salt, I know. 
Plur. Savons, savez, savent, 



261 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Savois, savois, savoit, 1 did know, or knew* 
Plur. Savions, saviez, savoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Sus, sus, sut, I knew, or did know. 
Plur. Sumes, sutes, surent, 

Future. 
Sing. Saurai, sauras, saura, 1 shall, or will know. 
Plur. Saurons, saurez, sauront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Saurois* saurois, sauroit, I should, would, or 
Plur. Saurions, sauriez, sauroient, could know* 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Sache, sache, know thou. 

Plur. Sachons, sachez, sachent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Sache,} saches, sache, that I may know. 
Plur. Sachions, sachiez, sachent, 
Preterite. 
Sing. Susse, susses, sut, that I might know. 
Plur. Sussions, sussiez, sussent, 



VALOIR, to be worth. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Valoir, to be worth. 
Part. act. Valant, being worth. 
Part. pass. Valu, been worth. 

* This tense, conjugated negatively, is often Englished by cannot : 
ex. 

Je ne saurois vous le dire, I cannot tell it to you. 

+ We sometimes employ the present of the subjunctive of this verb 
instead of the indicative ; but it is never to be used without the ne- 
gation pas, and most commonly in answering a question : ex» 

Le roi ira-t-il a la comedie ? Will the king go to the play ? 

Pas que je sache, Not that I know of. 



2G2 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 

Sing. Vauae, vaux, vaut, I am worth. 
Plur. Valons, valez. valent, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Valois, valois, valoit, I was worth. 
Plur. Valions, valiez, valoient, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Valus, valus, valut, I was worth. 
Plur. Volumes, volutes, valurent, 

Future. 

Sing. Vaudrai, vaudras, vaudra, I shall, or will be 
Plur. Vaudrons, vaudrez, vaudront, worth. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Vaudrois, vaudrois, vaudroit, I should, #*c. be 
Plur. Vaudrions, vaudriez, vaudroietit, worth. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vaux, vaillt, he thou worth. 

Plur. Valons, valez, vaillent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Que que que 

Sing. Vaille, vailles, vaille, that I may he worth. 
Plur. Valions, valiez, vaillent. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Valusse, valusses, valuta that I might be worth. 
Plur. Valussions, valussiez, valussent, 

The compound of this verb is, 
Prevaloir, to prevail, is conjugated as VALOIR : 
but we say in the present tense of the subjunctive. 

Queje preval-e, es, e : ions, iez, enL 



263 

VOIR, TO SEE. 

Infinitivb Mood. 
Present. Voir, to see. 

Part. act. Voyant, seeing. 
Part. pass. Vu, we, seen. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Vois, vols, xoit, I see. 
Plur. Voyons, xoytz, xoient, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Voyois, xoyois, xoyoit, I did see. 
Plur. Voyxons, xoyiez, xoyoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vis, vis, xit, I saw, or did see. 
Plur. Vimes, -cites, xirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Verrai, xerras, xerra, I shall, or will see. 
Plur. Vtrruns, xerrez, xerront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Verrois, xerrois, xerroit. 1 should, #c. see. 
Plur. Verrions, xerriez. xerroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vois. voie, see thou. 

Plur. Voyons, xoy^-.z. xoient, 

Subjuvct've Mood. 
Pres. . 

Que que que 

Sing. Vnip, xoies, xoie, that I may see, 
Plur. Voyitns, voykz, xoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Visse, visses, r?.\ that I might see. 
Plur. Vissions, xissiez, xissent, 

Entrexoi>\ to have a glimpse of. Prixoir, to foresee. 
Revoir^ to see again. Pourxoir* to provide, 



264 

PREVOIR differs from VOIR in the future : ex. 
Sing. Privoirai, prevoiras, prevoira, 
Plur. Prevoirons, prevoirez, prevoiront ; And. 

Conditional. Present. 
Sing. Prevoirois, prevoirois, privoiroit, 
flur. PrevoirioriSi prevoiriez, prevoiroient. 

POWRVOIR makes in the Preterite, 
Sing. Pourvus, pourvus, pourvuL 
Plur. PourvumeSj pourvutes, pourvurent. 

Future. 
Sing. Pourvoirai) pourvoiras, powvoira* 
Plur. Pourvoirons, pourvcirez, pourvoiront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Pourvoirois, pourvoirois, pourvoiroil. 
Plur. Pourvoirions, pourvoiriez, pourvoiroient. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Preterite. 
Sing. Pourvusse, pourvusses, pourvut, 
Plur. Pourvussions, pourvussiez, pourvussent. 



VOULOIR, TO BE WILLING. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Vouloir, to be willing. 
Part. act. Voulant, being willing. 
Part. pass. Voulu, we, been willing. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Veux, veux, veut, I am willing, or I will. 
Plur. Voulons,voule2i veulent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Voulois voulois, vouloit, I was willing, or I would, 
Plur. VoulionSy vouliez, vouloienL 



265 

Preterite. 
Sing. Voulus, voulus, xoulut, I was willing, or I 
PJur. Voulumes, voulules, voulurent, would. 

Future. 

Sing. Voudrai, voudras, voudra, I shall be willing, or 
Plur. Voudrons, voudrez, voudront, I will. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Voudrois, voudrois, voudroit, I should be willing, 
Plur. Voudrions, voudriez, voudroient, or I would. 

Imperative Mood is wanting. 

However, we say, 
Veuilhz bien, be willing to. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Veuille, veuilles, veuille, that 1 may be willing. 
Plur. Voulions, vouliez, veuillent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Voulusse, voulusses, voulut, that I might be wil- 
Plur. Voulussions,voulussiez,voulussent, ling. 

When the words will or would signify a will, choice, 
or deliberation in the agent, and can be expressed by 
choose or chose, will is rendered in French by the present 
of the indicative mood, or future of this verb : ex. 

Je veux y aller, el lui par- I will, or choose to, go 
hr moi-meme, there, and speak to him 

myself: 
II ne veut pas manger, He will not eat, or does 

not choose to eat: 

and would by one of the following tenses, viz. the Im 
perfect, Preterite, Conditional, or Compound of the 
Present. 

23 



2G6 

Si je voulois, je vous dirois If I would, or chose, I could 

ou elle demeure, tell you where she lives. 

77 voulut absolument partir He would, absolutely, or 

hier, absolutely chose to, set 

out yesterday. 

Que voudriez-twwj que je What would you have me 

Jisse ? do ? 

When would is joined to the verb to have immedi- 
ately followed by a participle passive, they are to be 
rendered by the compound of the imperfect or com- 
pound of the conditional of the above verb, with the 
partioiple passive turned into the present of the infinitive 
mood: ex. 

Si favois voulu lui parler, If I would have spoken to 

him, or had I chosen to 
speak to him. 
Vous w'auriez pas voulu You would not have taken 

prendre les armes, si, &x. up arms, if, &c. 

Nous aurions puParreter si We could have stopped 
nous eussions voulu, him, if we would, or had 

chosen, 

EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND 

their COMPOUNDS. 

Why do not you sit down, sir ? - - You 

Pourquoi, adv. 
come to see me very seldom. - - Let us sit down upon 

rarement, adv. 
the grass. - - Do not make (so much) noise, I cannot 

herbe,f* faire,v. Jan/, adv. 

learn my lesson. - - Do you know what has hap- 

apprendre, v. arri- 

pened to her ? - - No, I do not. - - As soon as he saw 
ver, v. Aussilot que,c. 

he could not make her hear reason, he went 

entendre, v. s'en 

away. - - We went there ourselves, and soon knew 
(tiler, v. bientol r adv. 



267 

what she asked. - - See the letter she wrote me. - - We 

ecrire, v. 
will not sit down till you have determined to 

que ne se determiner, v. subj. a 

set out. - - The first time I saw your sister, she pleased 
fois,f. plaire,v. 

me. - I would sit down upon the grass, if it were not so 
damp. -- Mrs. P. desired me to tell you she could 
humide, adj. prier,v. dire, v. 

not come to see you this week, but she would cer- 

semaine, f. cer- 

tainly come at the beginning of next 

iainement,adv. au commencement, m. 

month. - - Cannot you lend me three or four 

mois, m. preter, v. 

guineas ? - - If I would, I could soon know 

guinee,(. bientot,a.dv. 

whether Mrs. D. has seen your aunt or not. « 

si, c. iante, f. 

The last time I was in the park, I could not distinguish 
her on account of the trees that were between 
a cause, p. 

her and me; (I had only a) glimpse of her. 

je rtaifait que <^» 

This cloth is not worth five shillings a yard, but its 

drap, m. 
colour becomes you very well. - - Do you not see the 
defects of it ? - - When you know your lesson 
defaut,m. (by the ful.) 

come and repeat it to me. - - Did you not know that 
«* r6peter,v» 

Mr. A. was to marry Miss B. ? I knew it, but 

epouser, v. mais, c. 

I was not willing to tell your brother of it. - - - I be- 

parler, v. 
lieve you could learn your lessons much bet- 

apprendre,v. beaucoup,zdv. 

tor, if you would, - «• Could you lend me your horse 

preter, v. 



268 

for two or three days ? - - If your brother come with 

jour,m. avec,p. 

me, will he be able to follow me ? - - What will you 

suivre,r. 
lay that he will not come without his sister ? - - This 
2>arur*\. 
room can contain about a hundred people. - -Could 

environ, p. personne, f. 

they see so great an alteration, without being 

changement, m. sans, p. 
vexed (at it)?-- It is better to be unfortunate than 
fdche, p.p. en, pro. valoir,v. malheureux,2n\j. 

criminal. -- He is incapable of commanding others, who 
cannot command himself. - - His best coat was net 

se habit, m. 

worth two-pence when he arrived from Germany. - - - 

sou, m. Allemagne, f. 

We saw them yesterday. - - They did not foresee 

hier, adv. 
what would happen to them. - - We ought to 

arriver, v, devoir, v. 

make a judicious choice of those friends, to 

/aire, v. judicicux,za\}. choix,m, 
whom we intend to give our confidence. - - Do you 

vouloir, v. conjiance, f. 

know where Miss B. lives ? - - Yes, I do (know it), 

ou,adv. demeurer,v. 

and I see her every day at her window. - - - Why will 

fenelre, f. 
you not tell it me ? - - She would marry him in 

epouser, v. en, p. 

spite of all her relations. - - It is for this reason 
depit, m. parent, m. Ce, pro. 

her father says he will never see her again. - - I 

dire, v. 
have spoken of your wine to two friends of mine: 
one has money, but he will not buy ; the other would 
buy, but he has no money. - - Some told me that 
your brother could not pay me, others told me that 



269 

he would not; in short, I find that, when people 

enfin, adv. 
will not pay, we have much trouble. - - We regularly 
pay all that we owe, but he says that he will pay 
nobody. - - All the finest talents united are not 

reunir,v. 
worth one virtue. -- Virtue is a quality which we can- 
on, pro. 
not praise (too much.) - - Severity and rigour may 

louer,v. trop, adv. S6verite,f. rigueur,f. 

excite fear, but not love. - - You saw with what 

crainte, f. amour, m. 

goodness she received him. - - I would not tell her 
bonte, f. recevoir, v. 

what I think about it, for fear of giving her the least 

de, p. imp. 

subject of complaint. - - If you foresee the danger, 

plain(e,{, 
why do you not endeavour to avoid it? - - They were 

tdcher, v. de eviter, v. 
willing to withdraw but your brother hindered 

se relirer, v. empecher, v. 

them (from it), and desired them to sit down again. 

prier, v. de 

- - You can speak to Mr. B. whenever you 

parler, v. quand, adv. 

please, but I may not take that liberty. 

vouloir, v. prendre, v. 

Why may you not? - - - You know the esteem 

esiime, f. 
and friendship that I have for him : you know 
that his father is one of my oldest friends ; 

ancien, adj. 
you yourself know the merit of both. - - He would 
not sell me these buckles under four 

vendre,v. boucle,L a moins de,p. 

guineas. - - I will not see your brother (anymore), 

plus, ad v. 

but I will see you again as soon as I can. 

(by the fut.) 
23* 



270 

Every body thinks, that, if they would have pursued 

poursuivre,v. 

the enemy briskly, they might have ended 

vigour eusemenf, aclv. jinir,v, 

the war on that day. - - Should, we see ourselves re- 

duced to so great difficulties ? - - If I would have be- 

duire, v. 

lieved him, he would have persuaded me to go to Italy 

croire, v. de 

with him. - - He could have done his work in less 

/aire, v. en, p. 

than ten minutes, if he had not amused himself in 

s'amuser, v. a 

reading. - - If you want that book, you may take 

lire, v. avoir besoin de 

it, it is at your service. -- If he sold all his horses now, 

a 
the best of them would not be worth ten guineas. - - - - 

We might have danced till (twelve o'clock) if 

jusqu?a,p, rninuit,m, 
that had not happened. - - Oh ! my children, may you 
be happy, and never bewail the moment of your 

heureux, adj . pleurer, V. 

birth ! - - I spoke to her (a long while), but could 
naissance, f. long~lems, adv. 

not persuade her to come with me. - - May I go 

de 
and see him ? - - - Yes, you may, but come back 

as soon as you can. 
mssitot £ue,e. (by the fut.) 



271 

VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

ABSGUDRE, to aesolve, to acquit. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Absoudre, to absolve. 
Part. act. Absolvanl, absolving. 
Part. pass. Absous, oute, absolved. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Absous, absous, absouf, 1 absolve, 

Plur. Absolvons, absolvez, absolvent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Absolvuis, absolvois, absolvoit, I did absolve. 
Plur. Absolvions, absolviez, absolvoient, 

Preterite is wanting. 

Future. 

Sing. Absoudrai, absoudras, absoudra, I shall, or will 

Plur. Absoudrons, absoudrtz, absoudront, absolve. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Absoudrois, absoudrois, absoudroit, I should, &c. 
Plur. Absoudrions, absoudriez, absoudroient, absolve. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Absous, absolve, absolve thou. 

Plur. Absolvons, absolvez, absolvent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Absolve, absolves, absolve, that 1 may absolve. 
Plur. Absolvions, absolviez, absolvent, 

Preterite is wanting. 

SOUDRE, to solve, (the primitive of this verb), 
is used only in the present tense of the infinitive mood. 



272 

The other compounds are, 
Dissoudre, to dissolve. Resoudre, to resolve. 
Dissoudre has the same tenses wanting as absoudrt. 
Resoudre has its participle passive, resolu ; its pre- 
terite is, 

Sing. Resolus, resolus, resolut. 
Plur. Resolumes, resolutes, resolurent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Preterite. 
Sing. Resolusse, resolusses, resolut. 
Plur. Resolus sions, resvlussiez, resolus sent. 



ATTEIKDRE, to reach, to hit, to attain^ 
to overtake, and 

ASTREINDRE, to oblige ; 

AVEINDRE, to reach, to fetch out, 
are conjugated like CRAINDRE. 

The two foregoing verbs are growing obsolete. 



BATTRE, TO BEAT. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Battre, to beat. 
Part. act. Battant, beating. 
Part. pass. Battu, we, beaten. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 

Sing. Bats, bats, bat, 1 beat, or am beating. 
Plur. Battons, battez, batknt, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Battois, battois, batloit, I did beat, or was beating. 
Plur, Bitttions, battiez, battoient, 



273 

Preterite. 
Sing. Battis, bat lis, bat tit, I beat, or did beat. 
Plur. Battimes, baitites, battirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Batlrai, battras, batlra, I shall, or will beat. 
Plur. Battrons, battrez, baltront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Baltrois, battrois, battroit, I should, &c. beat) 
Plur. Battrions, batlriez, battroient, 

Imperative Mood. 



Sing. 
Plur. 


Battons, 


Bats, balle, beat thou. 
battez, battenl, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 


Sing. 


Que 

Batte, 


que que 

battes, batte, that I may beat 



Plur. Battions, battiez, bat tent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Battisse, battisses, batlit, that I might beat 
Plur. Baliissions, battissiez, ballissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Mattre, to pull down, 

to throw down. 
Combative, to fight. 
Dibattre, to debate. 



Se dibattre, to struggle. 
Rabattre, to abate, to beat 

down. 
Rebattre, to beat again. 



bo ire, to drink. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Boire, to drink. 
Part. act. Bwcant, drinking- 
Part. pass. Bu, ue, drunk. 



• 274 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Bois, hois, boit, I drink, or am drinking. 
Plur. Buvons, buvez, boivent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Buvois, buvois, buvoii, I did drink, or was drink- 
PJur. Buvions, buviez, buvoient, ing. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Bus, bus, but, I drank, or did drink. 
Plur. Bumes, bxites, burent, 

Future. 
Sing. Boirai, boiras, boira, I shall, or will drink. 
Plur. Boirons, boirez, boiront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Boirois, boirois, boiroit, I should, &,c. drink. 
Plur. Boirions, boiriez, boiroient. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Bois, boive, drink thou. 

Plur. Buvons, buvez, boivent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Boive, boives, boive, that I may drink. 
Plur. Bunions, buviez, boivent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Busse, busses, but, that I might drink. 
Plur. Bussiorts, bussiez, bussent, 

N. B. Boire dans quelque chose, is, To drink out of 
something. 



BRAIRE, TO BRAY. 

This verb is seldom used, except in the present 
tense of the infinitive mood, and the third person 



275 

singular and plural of the present, future, and con- 
ditional, of the indicative mood. 

Infinitive. Braire, to bray. — Present, indicative. 
J I brait. Us braient. — Future. // braird. Us braironU — 
Conditional. 11 brairoit, Us brairoient. — This veib ex- 
presses the discordant cry of an ass. 



BRUIRE, TO ROAR, TO MAKE A GREAT NOISE. 

This verb is used only in the present of the infinitive 
mood, and in the third person of the imperfect, indica- 
tive : il bruyoit, Us bruyoient. Its participle active, 
bruyani, is often but a mere adjective. 



CEINDRE, to gird, 

And its compound, Enceindre, to inclose, to encom- 
pass, are conjugated like CRAINDRE. 

CIRCONCIRE, to circumcise, 

is conjugated like CONFIRE, 

but has its participle passive ending in is, ise, instead of it. 



CONCLURE, TO CONCLUDE 



Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Conclure, to conclude. 
Part. act. Concluant^ concluding. 
Part. pass. Conclu, we, concluded. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Conclus, conclus, conclut, I conclude. 
Plur. Concluons, concluez, concluent ) 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Concluois, conclunis, concluoit, I did conclude. 
Plur. Concluions % coneluuz^ conchieient. 



276 

Preterite. 
Sing. Conclus, conclus, conclut, I did conclude, or 
Plur. Conclumes, conclutes, conclurent, concluded. 

Future. 
Sing. Conclurai, concluras, conclura, I shall, or will 
Plur. Conclurons, conclurez, concluront, conclude. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Conclurois, conclurois, concluroil, I should, &c 
Plur. Conclurions, concluriez, concluroient, conclude. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Conclus, conclue, conclude thou. 

Plur. Concluons, concluez, continent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Conclue, conchies, conclue, that I may con- 

Plur. Concluions, concluiez, concluent, elude. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Conclusse, conclusses, conclut, that I might con- 
Plur. Conclusions, conclussiez, conclussent, elude. 



CONDUIRE, TO CONDUCT, TO lead, to carry. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Conduire, to conduct. 
Part. act. Conduisant, conducting. 
Part. pass. Conduit, te, conducted. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Conduis, conduis, conduit, I lead, &c 
Plur. Conduisons, coriduisez, conduisent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Conduisois, conduisois, conduisoit, I did lead. 
Plur. Conduisions, conduisiez, coiiduisoient, 



277 



Sing. Conduisis, 
Plur. Conduisimes, 



Preterite. 
conduisis, coyiduisit, I led, 
condmsirent) 



Sing. Conduirai, 
Plur. Conduirons, 

Sing. Conduirois, 
Plur. ConduirionS) 



conduira, I shall, or 
conduiront, will lead. 



conduisiteS) 
Future. 
co/u?mras, 
conduiYer, 
Conditional. 

conduirois, conduiroit, I should, 
conduiriez, conduiroient, &c. lead. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Conduis, conduise, lead thou* 

Plur. Conduisons, conduisez, conduisent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
que 

conduises, 
conduisiez. 
Preterite. 

conduisisses, conduisit, that I might 
Plur. Conduisissions, conduisissiez, conduisissent, lead. 
Its compound is 
Reconduire, to lead again. 



Que 
Sing. Conduise, 
Plur. Conduisions, 

Sing. Conduisisse, 



que 

conduise, that I may 

conduisent, lead. 



CONFIRE, TO PRESERVE. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Confire, to preserve. 
Part. act. Confisant, preserving 
Part. pass. Confit, te, preserved. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
confis, 
confisez, 
Imperfect 
conjisois, 
confisiez, 



Sing. Confis, 
Plur. Conjisons, 

Sing. Conjisois, 
Plur. Co7ifisions, 
24 



con/»f, I preserve. 
confisent. 



corifisoit, I did pre- 
confisoient, serve. 



278 

Preterite. 
Sing. Confis, confis, confit, I preserved. 
Plur. Confirms, confites, confirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Confirm, confiras, confira, I shall, or will pre- 
Plur. Con/irons, confirez, confiront, serve. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Confirois, confirois, confiroit, I should, &c. pre- 
Plur. Confiriohs, confiriez, confiroient, serve. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Confis, confise, preserve thou* 

Plur. Cgnfisons, confisez y confisent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Quer que que 

Sing. Confise, confises, conjise, that 1 may preserve. 
Plur. Confisions, confisiez, confident, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Confisse, confisses, confit, that I might preserve. 
Plur. Confissions,confissiez, confissent, 



CONNOITRE, to know, to be acquainted 
with, somebody. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Connoitre, to know. 
Part. act. Connoissant, knowing. 
Part. pass. Connu, ue, known. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Connois, connois, connoit, I know. 

Plur. ConnoissonSy connoissez, connoissent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Connoissois, connoissois, connoissoit, I did knovr 
Plur. Connoissions, connoissiez, connoissoient, 



179 

Preterite. 

Sing. Connus, connus, connut, 1 knew. 

Pur. Connumes, conniites, connurent, 

Future. 

Sing. Connoitrai, connoitras, connoilra, I shall, <^c. 
Plur. Connoitrons, connoitrez* connoitront, know. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Connoilrois, connoitrois, connoitroit, I should, &c 
Piur. Connoilrions, connoiiriez, connoilroient, know. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Connois, connoisse, know thou. 

Plur. Connoissons, connoissez, connoissent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Connoisse, connoisses, connoisse, that I may 
Plur. Connoissions, connoissiez,connoissent, know. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Connusse, connusses, connut, that I mightknow. 
Plur. Connussions, connussiez, connussent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Meconnoitre, to take for Reconnoitre, to acknowi- 
another. edge, to know again. 



CONSTRUIRE, to construct, to build, 
is conjugated like CONDU1RE. 



VONTRAINDRE, to constrain, to compel, 

to force, 

is conjugated like CRA1NJ)RE. 



230 

coudre, to sew, to stitch, 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Condrt, to sew. 
Part. act. Cousant, sewing. 
Part. pass. Cousu, we, sewed. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Couds, couds, coud, I sew, or am sewing. 
Plur. Consorts, Cousez, consent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Consols, cousois, consoit, I did sew, or was sew- 
Plur. Cousions, cousiez, cousoient, ing. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Cousis, cousis, cousit, I sewed. 
Plur. Cousimes, cousites, cousirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Coudrai, coudras, coudra, I shall, or will sew. 
Plur. Coudrons, coudrez, coudront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Coudrois, coudrois, coudroit, I should, &c. sew. 
Plur. Coudrions, coudriez, coudroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Couds, couse, sew thou. 

Plur. Cousons, cousez, consent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present, 
Que que que 

Sing. Couse, couses, couse, that I may sew. 
Plur. Cousions, cousiez, consent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Cousisse, cousisses, cousit, that I might sew. 
Plur. Cousissions, cousissiez, cousissent, 

Its compounds are, 
Dicoudre, to unsew. Recoudre, to sew again. 



281 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND 

their COMPOUNDS. 

I know several persons in this country who 

plusieurs, adj. pays, m. 

speak as good French, as if they had been (brought up) 

bien, adv. eleve, p. p. 

in France. - - - - Do you know Mr. A.I - - - 
Yes, we know him very well ; and, though he is 

Oui, adv. soit 

rich, I assure you he is not the more charitable for 
it. - - - He has been beaten (soundly). - - If you 

comme ilfaut, 
knew the question, you would resolve it in two 

question, f. en 

words. - - 1 will soon conclude, if you think as 
mol^m. comwie, ad v. 

your brother does. - - We should beat them, if they 

did not fight in their own country. - - Do not 

propre, adj. 
beat him any more, he acknowledges his fault. - - - 

«<?» fault, f. 

We ran for above two hours, but at last 

pendant, p. plus de, adv. enfin,adv. 

your brother overtook him, and brought him back. - - 

ramener, v. «» 

You would never see him again, if you knew him. 
He struggled a long while, but he was soon obliged 

•^ terns, m. 

to (cry for) mercy. - - This mortification has pulled 

de demander, v. grace, f. 
down his pride, 1 assure you : however, the judge 

cependant, adv. 
has acquitted him of the accusation falsely 

faussement, adv. 
brought against him. - - Mr. R. told me some time 
intenti, p. p. conlre, p. 
24* 



282 

ago, that he would build a ship on a new plan. - - - 
What will you drink ? - - I will drink nothing but 

ne que 
water. - - Do not drink so much. - - If your father 

taut, adv. 
were here, you would not drink (at all). - - - 

du tout. 
Let us fill our glasses, and drink our friend's health. - - 

verre, m. , sante,(. 

We beat them because our troops were better dis- 
parceque,c. dis- 

ciplined than theirs. - - Come with us, we shall 
cipline, p. p. 
see whether she will know you again or not. - - If you 

si, c. non 

knew her, I am certain she would please you. --- 

plaire, v. 
The English drink as much tea as the Venetians 

autani, adv. the, in. Venitien,m. 

drink coffee. - - - After tea we conducted the ladies 

cafe, m. 
to the concert. - - - When they had explained to us 
all that had passed, we acknowledged we (were in the 
se passer, v. avoir 

wrong). -' - - Your brother's coat was torn, 
tort, dechirer y v» 

but our tailor sewed it up again so skilfully, 

tailleur,m. *<» adroilement,cidv. 

that his father did not perceive it. - - - Unsew 
that gown. « - I will sew it to-morrow. - - - The 
Jews and the Mahometans circumcise their 
jjuif, m . Mah am 6tan,m. 

children a few days after their birth. - - - Why 

•o* pen, adv. naissance,L 

do not you preserve some fruits this year? - - - He 

annee, f. 
would not know you if he saw you now. - - - Did 

a present, adv. 



233 
you ask him whether he was acquainted with any of 

5?', C. 

these ladies 1 - - 1 know %v, Y. but I do not trust 

se jier, v. 
to him. - - You will force your father to punish you 

a 
if you do not behave better. - - - The last 

se comporter, v. 
time we went to Vauxhall, we drank three bottles of 
Champaigne-wine. - - The enemy beat us on the 

eighteenth, but we beat them again two days after. 

le 
- - What will you drink, ladies ? - - We shall willing- 

madame, f. volon~ 

]y drink some wine; for we have not drunk 

torn, adv. 
any since our departure from France. - - - - 

depuis,\). depart, m. 

Drink, said she to me, (out of) that cup, the 

dans coupe, f. 

only token which your father has left 

stul, adj. marque,f. laisser,v. 

us of his love. - - - Virtue in indigence is like 

affection, f. daws, p. comme 

a traveller whom the wind and rain compel to 

pluie,L de 

wrap himself up in his cloak. - - I would have 

tnvelopper,v. *» de, manteau,m. 

preserved some fruits this year, but sugar is too 

/rop, ad v. 
dear. - - Thence we concluded you could not come 

De /a, ad v. 
to-day. - - I know nobody in this neighbourhood. - - I 

voisinage, in. 
knew your sister again as soon as I saw her. - - Though 

Quand,c. 
you, should take three dozen of them, I could 

douzaine^ f. 



284 

not abate a farthing. - - The wind was so great that 

Hard, m. vent, m. fort 

U has thrown down one or two trees in our garden. < 



CRAINDRE, to fear, to be afraid* 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Craindre, to fear. 
Part. act. Craignant, fearing. 
Part. pass. Craint, ainte, feared. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Cretins, crains, craint, I fear, or am afraid. 
Plur. Craignons, craignez, craignent, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Craignois, craignois, craignoit, I did fear, or 
Plur. Craignions, craigniez, craignoient, was afraid. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Craignis, craignis, craignit, I feared. 
Plur. Craignimes, craignites, craignirent, 

Future. 

Sing. Craindrai, craindras, craindra, I shall, or will 
Plur. Graindrorvs, craindrez, craindront, fear. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Craindrois, craindrois, craindroit, I should, &c. 
Plur. Craindrions, craindriez, craindroient, fear. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Cretins, craigne, fear thou. 

Plur. Craignons, craignez, craignent, 



285 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Craigne, craignes, craigne, that I may fear. 
Plur. Craignions, craigniez, craignent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Craignisse, craignisses, craignit, that I might fear. 
P) ur. Craignissions, craignissiez, craignissent, 



croire, to believe. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Croire, to believe. 
Part. act. , Croyant, believing. 
Part. pass. Cru, we, believed. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Crois, crois, croit, I believe. 
Plur. Crayons, croyez, croient, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Croyois, croyois, croyoit, I did believe* 
Plur. Croyions, croyiez, croyoient, 

Preterite. 

Sing, Crus, crus, crut, I believed. 

Plur. Grumes, crutes, crurent, 

Future. 

Sing. Crowai, croiras, croira, I shall, or will believe. 
Plur. Croirons, croirez, croiront, % 

Conditional. 

Sing. Croirois, crowds, croiroit, 1 should, fyc. believe. 
Plur. Croirions, croiriez, croirvient, 



286 



Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Crois, croie, believe thou. 

Plur. Croyons, croyez, croient, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present, 
Que que que 

Sing. Croze, croies, croie, that I may believe. 

Plur. Croyions, croyiez, croient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Crusse, crusses, crut, that I might believe. 
Plur. Crussions, crussiez, crussent, 



CROITRE, to grow, 

And its compounds. 

Accroitre, to accrue, | Recrqi ire, to grow again, 

Decroitre, to decrease, to 
grow less, 

are conjugated like CONjYOITRE. 



CUIRE, to bake, to boil, often Englished by 

TO DO, 

And its compound Recuire, to bake again ; 

DEDUIRE, TO DEDUCT, TO ABATE, 

and DETRUJRE, to destroy ; 
are conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



DIRE, TO SAY, TO tell. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Dire, to say. 
Part. act. Disarit, saying. 
Part. pass. Dit, k, said. 



287 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Dis, dis, dit, I say, or am saying. 
Plur. Disons, dites* disent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Disois, disois, disoit, I did say, or was saying. 
Plur. Disions, disiez, disoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Dis, dis, dit, I did say, or said. 
Plur. Dimes, dites, dirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Dirai, diras, dira, I shall, or will say. 
Plur. Dirons, direz, diront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Dirois, dirois, diroit, I should, <^c. say. 
Plur. Dirions, diriez, diroient, 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Dis, dise, say thou. 

Plur. Disons, dites,* distal. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 
Sing. Dise, discs, dise, that I may say. 
Plur. Disions, disiez, disent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Disse, disses, dit, that I might say. 
Plur. Dissions, dissiez, dissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Conlredire, to contradict. 
Se dedire, to unsay, to re- 



Interdire, to interdict, to 

forbid. 
Predire, to foretell. 



* All the above compounds (Redire excepted, which is conjugated 
like its primitive) make isez instead of iies ; and Maudire doubles its 
9 through the whole verb; ex. Nous maudiseons, vous maudissee, ils- 
maxidissent, &c. 



288 



M6dire c?e, to slander, to 
speak ill. 



Maudire, to curse, 



Redire, to say, or tell, 
again. 



ECLORRE, TO HATCH, TO OPEN, TO COME 
TO LIFE. 

This verb is seldom used but in the infinitive mood, 
present tense, and the third persons of the following 
tenses. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Eclorre, to open, to hatch, to come to life. 
Part. pass. Eclos, ose, 

Indicative Mood. 

Sing. II eclot. 
Plur. lis eclosent. 

Future. 

Sing. 77 eclorra. 
Plur. lis iclorronU 

Conditional. 

Sing. // eclorroit, 
Plur. lis eclorroient, 

Suejunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. QuSl eclose, 
Plur. Quails eclosent. 

It is only used when speaking of oviparous animals 
or of flowers. 

The primitive of the above verb is Clorre, to shut, 
to surround, and another compound, Enclorre, to shut 
in, to surround,with walls, hedges, or dilchee. 



289 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sine. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Swig. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Present. 
Part. act. 
Part. pass. 



Ecris, 
Ecrivons, 

Ecrivois, 
Ecrivions, 



ECRIRE, TO WRITE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Ecrire, to write. 
Ecrivant, writing. 
Ecrit, ite, written. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

ecris, ecrit, I write, or am writing. 
icrivez, ecrivent, 

Imperfect. 
ecrivois, ecrivoit, I did write, or was 

writing. 



wrote, or did 
write. 



ecriviez, ecrivoient, 

Preterite. 
icrivis, ecrivil, I 
Ecrivimes, ecrivites, ecrivirent, 
Future. 

ecriras, ecrira, I shall, or will write* 
ecrirez, icriront, 

Conditional. 
icrirois, ecriroit, I should, &c. write. 



Ecrivis, 



Ecrirai, 
Ecrirons, 



Ecrirois, 
Ecririons, 



ecnriez. 



icriroient, 
Imperative Mood. 

Ecris, ecrive, write thou. 
Ecrivons, ecrivez, ecrivent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Ecrive, derives, tcrive, that I may write. 

Ecrivions, ecriviez, ecrivenl, 

Preterite. 
Ecrivisse, ecrivisses, ecrivit, that I might write* 
Ecrivissiont, icrivissiez, ecrivissent, 
25 



290 
The compounds of this verb are, 



Decrire, to describe. 
Inscrire, to inscribe. 
Prescrire, to prescribe. 



Proserin, to proscribe, to 

outlaw, to banish. 
Souscrire, to subscribe. 
Transcrire, to transcribe. 



ENDUIRE, TO DO OVER, 
is conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



ETEINDRE, to extinguish, 
is conjugated like CRAINDRE. 



EXCLURE, TO EXCLUDE, 

is conjugated like CONCLURK 
Its participle passive is exclus. 



faire, to make, to do. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Faire, to make. 
Part. act. Fesanl, making. 
Part. pass. Feat, te, made. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Fais, fais, fait, I make, or am making. 
Plur. Fesons, faites, font, 

Imperfect. 
3ing. Fesois, fesois, fesoit, I did make, or was mak- 
Plur. Fesions, fesiez, fesoient, ing. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Fis, fis, ft, I made,' or did make, j, 
Plur. Fu?ie$, files, firent, 



291 



Future. 

Sing. Ferai, /eras, fera, I shall, or will make. 
Plur. Ferons, ferez, feront, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Ferois, ferois, feroit, I should, #-c. make. 
Plur. Ferions, feriez, feroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Fais, fosse, make thou. 

Plur. Fesons, failes, fassent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Fasse, fosses, fosse, that I may make. 
Plur. Fassio7is,fossie2, fassent, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Fisse, Jisses, /?f, that I might make. 
Plur. Fissio?is, fissiez, fa sent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Conirefaire, to counterfeit, 
to mimic. 

Defaire, to undo, to de- 
feat. 

3e defaire, to get rid of, to 
part with. 



Refoire, to do, or make up 

again. 
Redefaire, to undo again. 
Satisfaire, to satisfy. 
Surfaire, to exact, to ask 

too much. 



FEINDRE, TO FEIGN, TO DISSEMBLE, T6 
PRETEND, 

is conjugated like CRAINDRE. 



202 

FRIRE, TO FRY. 

This verb is more elegantly used in its present infini- 
tive with the verb /aire conjugated : ex. 

Faites frire ce poisson, Fry that fish. 

Its participle passive is frit, ile, fried. 



IKDVIRE, TO INDUCE, 

INSTRUIRE, TO INSTRUCT, 

and JNTRODUIRE, to introduce, 

are conjugated like CONDU1RE. 



JOINDRE, to join, 

and its compound, Enjoindre, to enjoin, 

are conjugated like CRAINDRE. 



LIRE, to read. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Lire, to read. 
Part. act. Lisant, reading. 
Part. pass. Lu, ue, read. 

Indicative Mood* 

JPresent. 

Sing. Lis, lis, lit, I read, or am reading. 

Plur. Lisons, lisez, lisent, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Lisois, lisois, lisoit, 1 did read, or was read in| 
Plur. Lisions, lisiez, lisoient* 



293 

Preterite. 

Sing. Lus, his, lut, I did read, or read. 

Plur. Lurries, lutes, lurent, 

Future. 

Sing. Lirai, liras, lira, 1 shall, or will read. 
Plur. Lirons, lirez, lironl, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Lirois, lirois, liroit, I should, would, fyc. read. 
Plur. Lirions, liriez, liroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Lis, Use, read thou. 

Plur. Lisons, lisez, lisent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Lise, Uses, Use, that 1 may read. 

Plur. Lisions, lisiez, lisent, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Lusse, hisses, lut, that I might read. 
Plur. Lussions, lussiez, lussent, 

Its compounds are, 

Elire, to elect. Retire, to read again. 



LUIRE, TO SHINE, 

and its compound Rehire, to glitter, 
are conjugated like CONDUIRE ; 
but take no i at the end of their participle passive 
ex. Lui, shined. 
25* 



294 



METTRE* to put. 



Infimitive Mood. 

Present. Met Ire, to put. 
Part. act. Metlant, putting. 
Part. pass. Mis, se, put. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Mets, mets, met, I put, or am putting. 

Piur. Mettons, mettez, mettent, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Mettois, mettois, mettoit, I did put, or was put- 
Plur. Mellions, metliez, mettoient, ting. 

Preterite. 



Sing. Mis, 
Plur. Mimes, 



mis. 



mites, 



mit, I did put, or put. 
mirent, 

Future. 



Sing. Mettrai, meitras, meltra, I shall, or will put. 
Plur. Meitrons, mettrtz, mettront, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Metlrois, meltrois, mettroit, I should, would, #*c. 
Plur. metlrions, mcttriez, mettroient, put. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Mets, mette, put thou. 

Plur. Mettons, meitez, mettent, 

* Meltre, when conjugated as a reflective verb, expresses the be- 
ginning or continuation of an action or application ; it is then con- 
stantly followed by the particle a r and an infinitive mood. It is ren- 
dered, in English, by the verb lo begin : ex. 

Toutes Its fois qu'il la voit, il se Every time he sees her, he begins 

met a rire, laughing. 

21 s'est mis tout de bon a etudier, He has begun to study in earnest. 



295 



Que 
Sing. Mette, 
Plur. Metlions, 



Sing. Misse, 
Plur. Missions, 



Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
que que 

mettes, mette, that I may put. 
mettiez, mett-tnt, 
Preterite. 
misses, mit, that I might put. 
missiez, mis sent, 



The compounds of this verb are, 



Admeltre, to admit. 

Commettre, to commit. 

Comprometlre, to compro- 
mise. 

Dimtttre, to turn out, to 
remove. 

Se dimtttre de, to resign. 

Omettre, to omit. 



Permettre, to permit. 

Pr omettre, to promise.* 

Remettre, to deliver up, 
to put back again, to 
recollect, to put off, to 
defer. 

Soumettre, to submit. 

Transmettre, to transmit. 



MOUDRE, TO GRIND. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Moudre, to grind. 
Part. act. Moulant, grinding. 
Part. pass. Moulu, ue, ground. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Mouds, mouds, moud, I grind, or am grind- 

Plur. Moulons, moulez, mordent, ing. 

Imperfect. 
Sine:. Moulois, moulois, mouloit, I did grind, or was 
Plur. Moulions, mouliez, mouloient, grinding. 

* The participle active of this verb (promising), when used ad- 
jectively and expressing the mental qualities of souuebody, is ren- 
dered in French by qui prcmet, or prometioil beauccup, or dont d y 
a, or avoit beaucoup a esperer : ex. 
Le Major Jl. etoit un officier qui Major A. was a very promising 

promettoit beaucoup, ou dontil officer. 

y avoit beaucoup a esperer. 



296 

Preterite. 
Sing. Movlus, moulus, moulut, I ground, or did 
Plur. Moulumes, moulutes, moulurent, grind* 

Future. 

Sing. Moudrai, moudras, moudra, I shall, or * ill grind. 
Plur. Moudrons^ moudrez, moudront, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Moudroisy moudrois, moudroit, I should, would, 
Plur. Moudrions, moudriez, moudroientj <$t. grind. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Mouds, moule, grind thou. 

Plur. Moulons, moulez, moulent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Mouk, monies, moule, that 1 may grind. 
Plur. Moulions, mouliez, moultnt, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Moulusse, moulusses, moulul, that 1 might grind, 
Plur. Moulm>sions,moulussiez, moulussent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Emoudre, to whet. Remmidre, to grind again. 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND 

their COMPOUNDS. 

Do not fear to tell her what you think of it. - - I 
de lui penser,v, 

will speak to her to oblige you, but 1 know she 

pour, p. 
does not fear me. - - Why do you not believe me ? - - 



297 

They (are afraid) of being exposed to some dangers. 
tire, v. 

- - We would not believe him, though he should tell 

quand, c. 
the truth. Why would you not ? - - You should not 

virile, f. devoir 

speak so imprudently before I know not whom, 

devant, p. 
who slanders every body. - - These flowers would 

jleur,(. 
grow much better if you watered them oftener. - - - 

arroser, v. 
Put out the candle, and do not pretend to sleep. 

de 

- - Were I in town, I would tell them all that 

en, p. 
I know (about it). - - Say nothing to her, believe 

en, pro. ne rien 

me. - - I will tell it to you to-morrow. - - I esteem 

e s timer, v. 
your daughter much, because she told me sin- 
cerely that she would do neither. - - - They who 

say all they know, will readily say what they 

volonliers, adv. 
do not know. -- Tell the truth with modesty: they 

who do not love it, will always respect and fear it. - - 

Jf I see your father, shall I tell him your are afraid of 

lui 
not succeeding ? - - - Do you think me capable of 

reussir 
forgetting my friends so soon ? No, 1 do not. - - You 
oublier,v, 

always contradict me when I speak. - - - It is pru- 
dent and humane not to speak ill of any body ; 



298 

but it is a meanness to speak ill of jour bene- 
c£,pro. bassesse,?. bier* 

factors. - - We often do good to those who 

faiieur^m, souvetit,adv. bien,m. 

are not worthy of it, and harm to those who 

mat, m. 
do not deserve it. - - - Will you tell me, after 

meriler, v. 
this, that I am not your friend ? - - I hope she 

que,c. 
will not tell them what happened to me yester- 

leur 
day. - - 1 was telling it yesterday to several friends of 

mine, and every body began crying. - - I do not 

like Miss D. because she speaks ill of every body. 
parceque, C. 

- - Her father has transmitted her all his fortune, but 

lui 
not his virtues. - - - Sylla proscribed above four 

plus de,adv. 
thousand Roman citizens. - - Does Mr. R. write to 

citoyen, m. 
you (now and then) from Paris ? - - - Do you 

de terns en terns, adv. 
know his direction ? - - Would you not write to him 

adresse, L 
if you knew it? - - We were writing while 

pendant que,c, 
they slept. - - H your brother come here, detain him, 

and tell him that I have something to show him. 

a /aire voir, 

- * The last time they wrote to him, they desired 

prier, v. 
him to send them the invoice of the goods, and he 

de leur factnre, f. 

has still omitted it in his letter. - - What are you 

encore^ adv. 



299 

doing now ? - - - I am making a cap for your sis- 

maintenant, adv. 
ter. - - Do not do that, I will do it myself. - - I would 

do it with all my heart if I could. - - What would 

de 
you have done, if you had been in my place ? - - 

st, c. o,p. 

Why do you not fry that fish ? - - - The first time 

fois, f. 
you come to see me, I will show you some 

(by the fut.) 
flowers in my garden which will surprise you. - - 

- - Silk-worms generally hatch at the end of the 

Les vers a soie, m. 
spring. - - - These rose-trees grow perceptibly, 
prrntems* m. rosier, m. a vue d'ce*/, adv. 

and those tulips would soon open, if it were a 

fax soil, v. 
little warmer. - - Though they should deduct ten 

chaud,zdj. Quand, c. 
per cent, they would get still enough. 

pour gagner^ v. encore, adv. 

- - I never buy (an\ tui.ug) at Mr. P***'g ; for, he 

acheter.w rien chcz, car, c. 

always asks too much for his goods. - - - I will 

de march andise, f. 

undo my gown to-morrow, and do it up again imme- 

sur le- 
diately. --- The first time you mimic any 

c/iamp,ae!v. (by the fut.) 

one, 1 will punish you severely. - - I would introduce 

your sister to Mrs. F. if I knew her. - - She would 

consent to that, if you would promise her to come 

vouhir lui de 

here. - - - They were playing while you instructed 

them. - - You truly join what is useful to what is 

vraimtnty adv. 



300 

agreeable. - * - Did not our soldiers join dexterity 

ttdresse,t* 
to valour ? - - If you do not take great care of 

prendre, v. 
your flowers, the frost will destroy them. - - Mr. 

gelee, f. 
S. says he will get rid of his horse (at the) begin- 

au commence- 

ning of next month. - - You would put out the fire, if, 
ment, m. 
&c. - - Undo that, make it up again before dinner, 

avant, p, 
and never defer until to-morrow what you can do to- 

a, p. 
uay. - - Your daughter joins to the love of study the 

desire of surpassing her companions. - - - Always 

compagne, f. 
virtuous, still handsome, she makes herself 

toujours, adv. j 

more enemies than friends; but a day will come, 

when every body will do her the justice she 

que,c. rendre,v, lui 

deserves. - - She reads the History of England every 

meriter, v. 

day from three o'clock till five. - - I will read 

depuis heure,f. jusqu*a,p. 

your letter as soon as I am dressed. - - The 

(by the fut.) habille, p. p. 
inhabitants of W*** have elected Mr. V. W. for 

their representative in parliament. • - I was reading 

representant, m. au 
Marmontel's Tales when you came in. - - Mr. 

Cvnte, m. entrer,v. 

R. wrote to me some time ago, that when he 

was in London, the Earl of E*** told him 

Comte, m. 
we should soon see a great change in the 

changement, m. 



301 

ministry. - - - He often writes to me, and always con- 

ministere,m, 

eludes his letters thus : (Be so kind as to) send me 

Avoir la bonte de 
some news, whatever it may be. - - Put these books in 

their places again. - - - I believe he did it through 

par, p. 
spite. - - Shall I put another trjmming to your 

dipit, m . garniture, f. 

gown ? - - I read last year a very good book, but I 

cannot remember the authors name. - - - What 

grammar do you read ? - - - Whatever merit a master 

has, he cannot succeed in teaching young people 

a, p. 
if he do not join practice to theory. - - - I would put 

all your china in that closet if I had 

porcelaine,f. cabinet, m. 

the key of it. - - You could not do it in ten days, if 

en 
I did not help you. - - We could not permit him 

aider, v. 
lo go out, though they would. - - Why do not you 
de quand,c. 

abstain from wine, since it hurts you ? - - 

puisque,c. /aire mal,v. 

He promised to pay me the tenth of this month, 

but he has now put me off to the third of Decem- 
ber. - - He submitted to it with the greatest pa- 

s« soumettre 
tience. • - You promise enough, but you seldom | 

raremenf,adv. 
keep your word. - - Mr. D. is a very promising 
tenir, v. 

young man. - - It is he who told me, that, be- 

Ce,pro. 



302 
fore the invention of water and wind-mills the an- 
cients used to grind their corn in mor~ 
avoir contumely, de grain, m. dans mor- 
tars. - - Will they not admit Mr» Z. in their society ? - - 
tier, m. 

No, they told me that they would not. - - The Eng- 
lish fleets have performed actions worthy to be 

faire, v. de 

transmitted to posterity. - - Your brother promises 

me every day to amend, but, &c. - - Were I 

de se corriger, v. 
their master, I would not permit them to go out to 

leur de 
day. - - I was writing to you when your servant 

brought me your letter. 



naitre, to be born, to rise. 

Infinitive Mood. 

\ 

Present. Naitre, to be born. 

Part. act. Naissant, being born, rising'. 

Part. pass. JW, ee, been born. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 

Sing. Nais, nais, nait, I am born. 

Plur. Naissons, naissez, naissent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Naissols, naissois, naissoit, I was born, 
Plur. Naissions, naissiez, naissoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Naquis, naquis, naquiU I was born. 
Plur. Naqvimes, naquites, naquirent. 



303 

Future. 

Sing. Naitrai, naitras, naitra, I shall, or will be born. 
Plur. NaitroiiS) naitrez, nailront. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Naitrois, naitrois, naitroit, I should, #*c, be born. 
Plur. Naitrions, naitriez, naitroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Nais, 7iaisse, be thou born. 

Plur. Naissons, naissez, naissent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Naisse. naisses, naisse, that I may be born. 
Plur. Naissions, naissiez, naissent, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Naquisse, naquisses, naquit, that I might be born. 
Plur. Naquissions,naquissiez,naqui$sent) 

The compound of this verb is, 
Renaitre, to be born again, to revive. 



NUIRE, TO HURT, 

is conjugated like CONDUIRE, but makes, in its 

participle passive, nui. 



OINDRE, TO ANOINT. 

This verb is seldom used, except in speaking of sacred 
ceremonies wherein oil is made use of. It is conjugated 
like CRJUNDRE. 



304 

PAITRE, TO FEED, TO GRAZE, 
PAROITRE, TO APPEAR, TO SEEM, 

and its compounds, 



Comparoitre, to appear, to 
make one's evidence 



Disparoitre, to disappear, 
are conjugated like CONNOITRE. 



PEINDRE, TO PAINT, TO DRAW, 

PLAINDRE, to pity, 

and Se Plaindre, to complain, 

are conjugated like CRAIJWRE* 



PLAIRE, to please. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Plaire, to please. 
Part. act. Plaisant, pleasing. 
Part. pass. Plu, pleased. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 

Sing. Plais, plais, plait, I please. 
Plur. Plaisons, plaisez, plaisent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Plaisois, plaisois, plaisoit, I did please, or was 
Plur. Plaisions, plaisiez, plaisoient, pleasing. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Plus, plus, plut, I pleased, or did please. 
Plur. Plumes, plules, plurent, 

Future. 
Sing. Plairai, plairas, plaira, I shall, or will please. 
Plur. Plairons, plairez, plairont^ 



305 

Conditional. 
Sing. Plairois, plairois, plairoit, I should, would, #-c. 
Plur. Plairions, plairiez, plairoient, please. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Plais, plaise, please thou. 

Plur. Plaisons, plaisez, plaisent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Plaise, plaises. plaise, that I may please. 
Plur. Plaisions, plaisiez, plaisent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Plusse, plusses, pluL that I might please. 
Plur. Plussions, plussiez* plus sent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Complaire, to humour. Deplaire, to displease. 



PRENDRE, to take. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Prendre^ to take. 
Part. act. Prenant, taking. 
Part. pass. Pris, ise, taken. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Prends, prends, prend, I take, or am taking. 
Plur. Prenons, prenez, prtnnent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Prenois, prenois ) prenoii, I did take, or was tak- 
Plur. Prenions, preniez, pypywient, ing. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pris, pris, prit, I took, or did take. 

Plur. Primes, prites, prtrent, 
26* 



306 



Future* 
^Sing. Trendrai) prendras, prendra, I shall, or will take. 
Plur. Prendrons, prendrez, prendront, . 

Conditional. 
Sing. Prendrois, prendrois, prendroit, I should, would, 
Plur. Prendrions, prendriez, prendroient, 4'C. take. 

Imperative Mood. 

Prends, prenne, take thou. 
prenez, prennent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

que que 

prennes, prennc, that I may take. 

preniez, prennent, 

Preterite. 
prisses, prit, that 1 might take. 
prissiez, prissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Sing. 

Plur. Prenons, 



Que 
Sing. Prenne, 
Piur. Prenions, 



Sing. Prisse, 
Plur. Prissions, 



Apprendre, to learn. 

des nouvelles, 

to hear of. 

Comprendre, to apprehend, 
to understand, to in- 
clude. 

D&sapprendre, to unlearn. 



Entrcprendre, to under- 
take. 

Meprcndre, to mistake, to 
be deceived. 

Reprendre, to take again, 
to chide, to rebuke. 

Surprendre, to surprise. 



PRODUiRE, TO PRODUCE, 

REDUIRE, TO REDUCE, TO BRING TO, 

are conjugated like COjVDUIRE. 



RESTRAWDRE, to restrain, 
is conjugated like CRAWDRE, 



307 

EIRE, TO LAUGH. 
4 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Rive, to laugh. 
Part. act. Riant, laughing. 
Part. pass. Ri, laughed. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 

Sing. Ris, ris, rit, I laugh, or am laughing. 

Piur. Rions, riez, rient, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Riois, riois, rioit, I laughed, or was laughing. 
Plur. Riions, riiez, violent. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Ris, ris, rit, I laughed, or did laugh. 
Plur. Rimes, rites, rirent, 

Future. 

Sing. Rirai, riras, rira, I shall, or will laugh. 
Plur. Rirons, rirez, riront, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Rirois, rirois, riroit, I should, could, fyc, laugh. 
Plur. Ririons, ririez, riroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Ris, rie, laugh thou. 

Plur. Rions, riez, rient, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Rie, ties, rie, that I may laugh. 

Plur. Jliions, riiez, rient, 



308 



Preterite. 
Sing. Risse, risses, rit, that I might laugh. 
Plur. Rissions, rissiez, rissent, 

The compound of this verb is, 

Sourire, to smile. 



SEDUIRE, TO SEDUCE, 
is conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



SUFFIRE, TO SUFFICE, TO BE SUFFICIENT, 

is conjugated like CONFIRE : but its participl* 
passive is suffi. 



SUIVRE, TO FOLLOW. 

Infinitive Mood. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Suivre, to follow. 
Suivanl, following. 
Suivi, ie, followed. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
sim, suit, 1 follow, or am following. 

suivez, suivent, 

Imperfect. 
suivois, suivoit, I did follow, or was 
suiviez, suivoient, following* 

Preterite. 
suivtS) suivit, 1 followed, or did follow. 
Suivimes, suivites, suivirent, 

Future. 
Suivrai, suivras, suivra, I shall, or will follow. 
SuivronS) suivrez, suivront, 



Present. 
Part. act. 
Part. pass. 



Suis, 
Suivons, 

Suivois, 
Suivions, 

Suivis, 



309 

Conditional. 
Sing. Suivrois, suivrois, suivroit, I should, <^c« follow. 
Plur. SuivrionSy suivriez, suivroient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Suis, suive, follow thou. 

Plur. Suivons, suivez, suivent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Suive, suives, suive, that I may follow. 
Plur. Suivions, suiviez, suivent. 
Preterite. 
Sing. Suivisse, suivisses, suivit, that I might follow. 
Plur. Suivissions, suivissiez, suivissent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 
&Ensuivre, to follow from. Poursuivre, to pursue. 



Se TA1RE, to hold one's tongue, 
is conjugated like PLAIRE. 



TEINDRE, to die, 
is conjugated like CRAINDRE. 



TRADUIRE, to translate, 
is conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



TRAIRE, to milk. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Traire, to milk. 
Part. act. Trayant, milking. 
Part. pass. Trait, aitt, milked. 



310 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 

Sing. Trais, trais, trail, I milk, or am milking. 
Plur. Trayons, iraytz, traient, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Trayois, trayois, trayoit, I did milk, or was 
Plur. Trayions, trayiez, trayoient, milking. 

Preterite is wanting. 

Future. 

Sing. Trairai, trairas, traira, I shall, or will milk. 
Plur* Trairons, trairez, trairont, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Trairois, trairois, trairoit, I should, $rc, milk. 
Plur. Trairions, trairiez, trairoient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Trais, trait, milk thou. 

Plur. Trayons, trayez, traient, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Traie, traies, traie, that I may milk. 
Plur. Trayions, trayiez, traient, 

. - Preterite is wanting. 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Abstraire, to abstract. 
Distraire, to distract. 
Extraire, to extract. 



Rentraire, to fine draw. 
Soustraire 1 to subtract. 



311 

vaincre, to vanquish, to conquer. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Vainer e, to conquer. 
Part. act. Vainquant, conquering. 
Part. pass. Vaincu, ue, conquered. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Vaincs, vaincs, vainc* I conquer, 
Plur. Vainquons, vainquez, vainquenl. 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Vainquois, vainquois, vainquoit, I did conquer. 
Plur. Vainquions, vainquiez, vainquoient, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Vainquis, vainquis, vainquit, I conquered. 
Plur. VainquimeSi vainquites, vainquirent. 

Future. 

Sing. Vaincrai, vaincras, vaincra, I shall, or will con- 
Plur. Vaincronsy vaincrez, vaincront, quer. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Vaincrois, vaincrois, vaincroit, I should, &c, con- 
Plur. Vaincrions, vaincriez, vaincroient, quer. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vaincs, vainque, conquer thou. 

Plur. Vainquons, vainquez, vainqucnt. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Vainque, vainques^ vainque, that I may conquer.- 
Plnr. Vainquions.vainquiez, vainquent, 

| 

* The singular is very little used. 



312 

Preterite. 

Sing. Vainquisse, vainquisses, vainquit, that I might 
Plur. Vainquissions, vainquissiez, vainquissent, conquer. 

The compound of this verb is, 

Convaincre, to convince. 



VIVRE, TO LIVE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Vivre, to live. 
Part. act. Vivant, living. 
Part. pass. Feat, lived. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Vis, vis, vit, I live or am living. 

Plur. Vivons, vivez, vivent, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Vivois, vivois, vivoit, I did live, or was living. 
Plur. Vivians, viviez, vivoient, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Vecus, vecus, vicut, I lived, or did live. 
Plur. Vecfimes, vicutes, vicurent, 

Future. 

Sing. Vivrai, vivras, vivra, I shall, or will live. 
Plur. Vivrons, vivrez, vivront, 

Conditional. 

Sing. Vivrois, vivrois vivroit, I should, would, &C. live* 
Plur. Vivrions, vivriez, vivroieni, 

Imperative Mood, 

Sing. Vis, vive, live thoo. 

Plur. Vivons, vivez r vivent r 



313 



Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Vive, vives, vive, that I may live. 

Plur. Vivions, viviez, vivent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vecusse, vecusses, vecul, that I might live, 
Plur. Vecussions, vecussiez, vecussent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Revivre, to revive. Survivre, to outlive. 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS 
AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

My brother was born in Paris, on the eighth of Feb- 
a ^ Fe- 

ruary, one thousand seven hundred and eighty-one. - - 
vrier, m. 
The same men who seem not to fear death when 

* lorsque, ad v* 
they are in good health, often dread it when 

en redouter, v. 

they are sick. -- What does your sister complain of? 

- - The swallows generally disappear towards the 

hirondelle, f. 
end of autumn. - - You do not seem to pay any 

automne, f. faire, v. 

attention to what I say to you. - - This man paints 

very well, I assure you. - - - Why would you 

assurer, v. 
hurt him, he never did you any harm? - - I should 

lui faire,\» mal, m. 

pity and succour him if it were not his fault. - - 

ce,pro. 
27 



314 

You shall disappear as soon as you have ex- 

(by the fut.) 
ecuted my orders, and take care not to speak 

ayeZ)V. soin,m.de 
to any body, for you know that walls have ears. 

- - - - The last time I saw your sister she ap- 
peared to me thoughtful and melancholy. - - - She 
pensif, adj. milancolique, adj. 

is a lady that pleases every body. She appears 

a 
quite young : how old is she ? - - - Does she not 

learn drawing? - - Your brother has not included his 

dessein,m. 
tailor's bill in the account which he has 

tailhur, m. memoire, m. 

given me. - - I see you do not complain of him 
rendre, v» 
without a cause. - - I really am surprised (at it), but 

«» en, pro. 

he always smiles at (every thing) 1 tell him. - - As sur- 

de tout ce que 
prising as this seems to you, yet it is true. - - 

cependant, adv. ce 
At last the enemy surprised and defeated them in the 
I2n/m,adv. 

space of twelve days. -- They might, if they would, 
espace, m. 

have taken the town three days sooner, but the sol- 
diers were so exhausted with fatigue, that they 

ipuise, p.p. de,p. 
could not even hold their guns. - - May these 

meme, adv. Puisse 

brave men long enjoy the glory which they have ac- 

jouir, de 
quired. - - 1 sincerely wish they may. - - Children sei- 

rart- 
dom forget, when they continually 

merit, adv. lorsque,c. continuellement,adv. 



315 

exercise tl ' r minds to study. - - If my brother do not 

extra 

come this week, as he promised me, if you will, we 

will go and see him in the country. - - Does not 

«* a 

Mrs. H. appear much concerned at her daugh- 

bien affiige,p.p, de 
ter's death ? - - When you see Mrs. B. I am 

(by the fut.) 
certain she will please you. - - Did you never see 

her? - - The children who shall be born from this 

happy marriage, will be the delight of their 

delices, f. pi. 
father and mother. - - She joins to the qualities of the 

body those of the mind. - - Take some pears, and carry 

them to your brother. - - Every time I see him, I take 

him for a foreigner. - - My sister and I learn French, 

** elr anger, m. 
and understand very well all that (is said) to us in that 

077 dit 

language. - - - Though you should learn all the rules. 

langue Quand,c» 

they would not (be sufficient) without practice. - - I did 

svjjire, v. 
not understand what you said. - - Do not undertake to 

de 
undeceive her ; believe me, you will lose your time. 
detromper, v. 

Virtue procures and preserves friendship, but 

oblenir,v. conserver,\\ 

vice produces hatred and quarrels. - - If you 

vice, m. haine,f. querelle,f. 

complain to the master, I will complain to the 



316 

mistress. - - Though you should undertake to prove 

Quartet de 

the contrary, she would not believe you. - - Why did 

not you take the same road as we ? - - He (is not 

que 
pleased) in his situation, now he sees all the dangers 
se phire, v. 
of it. » - He has suffered much, and none of his friends 

has pitted him. - - The idea of his misfortune pur- 
ine e, f. malkeur, m. 
sues him every-where. - - When did you hear of him? 
par-iout, adv. 

- - - Captain D. told my father that he had seen 

him and spoke to him at Madras. ■* - - We often 

mistake when we judge of others by ap- 

se miprendre, v. juger^y. 

pearances; and often a person displeases us by the 

very quality by which another has pleased us. 

mime, adj. 

— The people who often seem the most zealous 

gms,m. zele, adj. 

are not always the most constant. - - - Leave me 

Laisser, v. 
that book a little longer, do not take it again. 

That apple-tree produces no fruit. - - We were 

pommier, m. 
reduced to the last extremity when they retook 

our ship. - - Go and speak to Mr. ; but above all 

^ swr,p. 

do not laugh. - - Would you not laugh, if you were 

in my place? - • - We laughed much yesterday at 
a 



317 

the play. - - - She was an agreeable lady, she was 

ever smiling when any body had the honour 

toujours, adv. 

of speaking to her. - - He seduced her by his fine 

promises. - - Whatever he may undertake, he never 

will succeed, he is too much addicted to the 

adonne, p. p. 
pleasures of this world. - - Young people tell 

gens,m.&f. 
what they do, old people what they have done, 
vieillard, m. 

and fools what they intend to do. We 

sot, m. se proposer, v. de 

learn much more easily the things which 

facilement, adv. 
we understand than those which we do not. - - If we 

go together to my brother's, shall you be able 

chez,p. 

to follow us ? - - I will follow you step by step.. 

pas a joas,adv. 
Why do you follow me as you do ? - - You may set 

comme 
out when (you please), we will fellow you. - - Hold 

it vous plaira 
your tongue, you do not know what you say. • - * 

What books do you translate ? - - My master says I 

shall soon translate Marmontel's Works. - - We should 

have conquered them if we had fought ; and, believe 

combat Ire 
me, you might have done much better, if you had 

followed the advice which he gave you. - - - They 
27* 



318 
have debated the question a long time without 

(being able to) resolve it. - - They were quite trans- 

pouvoir 
ported with joy when they heard of the happy 

<&, p. 

news of the peace. Every thing smiles in 

dans, p. 
nature (at the) return of the spring. - - - As long 

au retour,m. printems,m. Tant 
as her father and mother live, they never 
9?ic,adv. (by the fut.) 
will consent to her marriage with Mr. R. You 

will not live long if you drink so much.- - She lived 

about four years after her husband's death. - - 

environ, p. apres, p. 

George III. the eldest son of Frederick, prince of 

aine, adj. 
Wales, was born on the fourth of June, 1738, and 
Galles, f. w?i 

was proclaimed king of Great-Britain on the twenty- 

proclamer, v. 
sixth of October, 1760.--- Let a man live in any- 
country whatever, he is sure to be respected and 

de 
well treated every where, if his behaviour and 

manners are ruled by the principles of a sound 
maurs, f. pi. rcgler, v. sain, adj. 

policy, and the laws of the country he lives 

politique, f. 
in. 

Olfr. 



319 
OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Verbs which relate to no person or thing, and which, 
as has been before observed, are only conjugated in the 
third person singular, are called impersonal verbs : they 
generally are preceded by one of the following pro-- 
nouns il or on : of this number are, 

77 tonne, It thunders. 

II pleut, It rains. 

On dit, People say, or, it is said, <&-c. 

To which may be added several other verbs, which 
become impersonal when employed in the same man- 
ner : ex. 

11 vous convient d'etre mo- It becomes you to be mo- 

deste, dest. 

II fait beau, froid, &c. It is fine, cold, &c. 

77 semble, It seems. 

II s'ensuit que, It follows that. 

// vaut mieux, It is better, &c. 

These verbs, like others, whether regular or irregular 
have their different tenses, and are conjugated in the 
same manner as the personal verbs from which they are 
derived. The learner having gone through the other 
conjugations, the verbs of this class may the more easily 
be dispensed with. It will only be necessary to select 
one that is not derived, and show the manner of conju- 
gating it, only premising, that the compound tenses are 
formed, like others, by joining the participle passive to 
one of the tenses of the auxiliary verb avoir, to have. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Infinitive Mood. 



Present. Pleuvoir, to rain. 
Part. act. Pleuxant, raining. 
Part. pass. Plu, rained. 



320 
Indicative Mood. 
Affirmatively. 
Present, Ilpkutj it rains, it does rain. 

Negatively. 
// ne phut pas, it does not rain. 
Interrogatively. 



PleuUl ? 

Ne phut-il pas ? 

Imperfect. II pleuvoit, 

Preterite. II plut, 

Future. 11 pleuvra, 

Conditional. II pleuvroit, 



does it rain ? 
does it not rain ? 

it rained, it was raining. 

it rained. 

it shall, or will rain. 

it would, should, <y-c. raini 



Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. QuHl pleuve, that it may rain, 
Imperfect. QuHl plut, 



that it might rain. 



The following being of the first conjugation, I shall 
only^ive the third person, present tense, of the indica- 
tive mood : the learner ma) easily find out the rest. 



// arrive, 


it happens ; from 


ar river, 


to happen. 


II bruine, 


it drizzles ; 


brumer, 


to drizzle. 


II eclaire, 


it lightens ; 


iclairer, 


to lighten. 


11 gele, 


it freezes ; 


geler, 


to freeze. 


// grile, 


it hails ; 


greler, 


to hail. 


II neige, 


it snows ; 


neiger, 


to snow. 


II tonne, 


it thunders ; 


tonner, 


to thunder. 


11 import e 


,it matters, 
it concerns. 


importer, 


to concern- 



321 



EXERCISES ON THESE VERBS. 



Does it rain ? - - It rained just now, but 

tout-a-Vheure, adv. 
it does not rain at present. - - - Was it not raining 

mainienant, adv. 
when you came ? - - I advise you not to go out 

conseiller,v. de 

this morning, I think it will soon rain. - - I am 

6/e??/o/,adv. 
sure it would rain if the wind was not so high. - - - 

fort, adv. 
Do you know what happened to my cousin 

savoir^v. 
whilst he was in town ? - - I foresaw what 

pendant que,c» prevoir, 

would happen.-- The roads were very slippery 

c/te?mn,m. glissant^V), 

yesterday, because it drizzled the whole day. - - Did 

you observe how it lightened last 

remarquer,v. comme, adv. 
night? - - If it did not freeze 1 would go to see them 

voir, v. 
to-day. - - It hailed this afternoon, and it will 

aprzs-midi, m. 
certainly snow to-night. - - It thundered much 

beauconp.adv, 
yesterday, and I think it will still thunder to- 

encore, adv. 
day. - - It matters little whether you do yourex- 

que (subj*) 

ercise now or later, provided it be well 

pourvu que,c. 
done. - - It greatly concerns children to 

beaucoup, adv. aux de 

avoid idleness, because it is the parent of all vice 
eviter, v. mere, f. 

and destroyer of all virtues. 

desiructrice, f. 



322 

The verb Avoir, to have, conjugated impersonally 
with y, adverb of place. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Y avoir, there to be. 

Indicative Mood. 

Affirmatively. 
Present. II y a, there is, there are. 

Negatively. 
// riy a pas, there is not, there are not. 

Interrogatively. 

Y a-t-il ? is there ? are there ? 

JPy a-t-il pas ? is there not ? are there not ? 

Imperfect. II y avoit, there was, there were. 

Preterite. II y eut, 
Future. II y aura, 



there was, there were, 
there shall, or will be. 



Conditional. II y auroit, there should, would, fyc. be* 

Imperative Mood. 

QuHl y ait, let there be. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. QuHl y ait, that there may be. 
Imperfect. QuHl y eut, that there might be. 

Compound Tenses. 

II y a eu, there has, or have been. 

// y avoit eu, there had been. 

// y eut eu, there had been. 

II y aura eu, there shall, or will have been. 

// y auroit eu, there should, #*c. have been. 

QuHl y ait eu, that there may have been. 

QuHl y eut eu, that there might have been,. 



323 



EXERCISE ON THIS VERB. 



There are three ladies who (are waiting for) you 

altendre, v. 
in your brother's study. - - Is there any fire in the 

cabinet, m. 
parlour ? - - No, Sir, there is none. - - There were two 
salle, f. 
men below who asked to speak to you. - - Was 

en bas, adv. a 

there not formerly a (coffee-house) at the 

autrefois, adv. co/*e, m. 

corner of this street ? - - - There were great re- 
coin, m. rue, f. re- 
joicings in France when peace was proclaimed. - - 
jouissance, f. proclami, p.p. 
I was telling you that there will be a grand concert 

dire, v. 
and afterwards a ball and supper at the Pantheon, 

ensuite, adv. 
in the course of this month. - - There would be 

courant, m. 
no harm if you would learn your lesson better. - - - 

mat, m. mieux, adv. 

Let there be any danger, let there be none, I will 

go back, - - - My brother says that there has 

s'en i - ler, v» 

been a bloody engagement between an English 

saa*i '.an I, adj. combat, m. 
frigate and a French one, and there have been 

frigate, f. frigate 

many men killed on both sides. - - There would 

de part et d 1 autre. 
have been a great riot yesterday in the Strand, 

6meute,f. 
if the magistrates had not sent so many constables, 

connitable, m. 
who dispersed the mob in less than ten minutes. 

populace,^ 



3-24 

There is, immediately followed by the negation no 
and a participle active, must be rendered by on ne peut 
pas, on ne sauroit, with the participle in the infinitive 
mood ; the other tenses, as there was, there will be, there 
would be, used as above, and made by the same tenses of 
{he verb pouvoir only : ex. 

On ne peut pas, or, on ne There is no going out to- 

sauroit sortir aujour- day because of the rain j 

cPhui a cause de la pluie, that is, one cannot, fyc. 

On ne pouvoit Vappaiser, There was no pacifying 

him. 

On ne pourra pas jouer de- There will be no acting 

main, mon pere est tres to-morrow, my father is 

malade, very ill. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

There is (such a deal) of snow that there is no going 
taut, adv. 
out of the house. - - You speak so low and so quick 

6u%adv. vite,zdv. 
that there is no hearing nor understanding what 

entendre, v. comprendre, v. 

you say. - - My brother runs so fast that there is 

vile, adv. 
no following him. - - There was no walking yesterday 

hier, adv. 
in the streets of London on account of the dirt. - - His 

a cause, p. bone, f. 

arguments were so convincing that there was no re- 
re- 
plying to him. - - There will be no skating in the 
pliquer,v, partner, x\ 

park to-morrow because it thaws. - - There will be 

degeler,v. 
no going to the play next month, be- 

com6die,(» prochain, adj. parce- 

cause the play-house will be shut. - - There would 
que, c. theatre, m. 



325 

be no living with you, if you were always in the same 

etiez,v, de,L 

humour. - - If a horse knew his strength, there would 

force, f. 
be no mastering him. 
dompter, v. 

This verb il y a, when used to denote a quantity of 
time, is sometimes rendered in English by it is, it was, 
&c. when the English preposition since is rendered 
(in French) by que : but in all cases where the English 
phrase can be rendered negatively, que must be accom- 
panied by the legation ne : ex. 

II y a trois semaines que It is three weeks since 

voire pere est arrive, your father arrived. 

II y a long-terns que je ne It is a long while since I 
vous ai vv, saw you, or, I have not 

seen you this long 
while. 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

How long is it since we saw (one another) ? It is a 
Combien, ad v. nous, pro. 

year since I met your brother in Italy, and 

rencontrer, v. 
it is six months since I heard of him. - - 

entendre parler,\. 
How long is it since you wrote to your mother? - - - 

It is but two months. - - It was a week since I had 

ne que semaine,f. 

seen your brother, when I met him by chance in 

par hasard,adv. 
a coflfee-room. - - How long was it since your friend 

had left France when he wrote to you ? - - It was 

laisser, v. 
three months. - - It may be two years since Mr. Robert 
28 



326 

set out for the Indies. - - How Jong is it since j ou 

partir, v. 

were in England ? - - It is such a long while since I 

learned German, that I almost forgot it, 

Allemand,m. 

It often happens that the verb there is, or it is, &c. 
is understood : in this case, one of the words, ago, these. 
or for <:hese, is expressed as a substitute : ex. 

II y a trois mois que fe- I was in France three 

tois en France, or fetois months ago, 

en France il y a trois 

mois,* 

II y a quatre ans que mon My brother has been dead 

frere est mort, these four years. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

He is the same man whom we saw a quarter of an 

q\xavt «<» 

hour ago. - - When did you see my father? - - I saw 

him (a fortnight) ago. - - We have not heard from my 

quinze jours 
brother these two years. - - You do not seem to 

parol Ire, v. 
be so lively as you were three years ago. - - I would 

enjoue, adj. 
have written to you a month ago, if I had known 

savoir, v. 
your direction. - - - I have not seen your sister these 

adresse, f. 

* From this instance it may be observed, that, if the verb il y a, 
&c. begin the sentence, the word que must immediately foilovv the 
noun of number ; but, if it be transposed, que must be omitted. The 
first construction is to be preferred. The learner must at the same 
time observe, that in the above sentence, the verb, which, in Eng- 
lish, is in the compound of the present, is rendered in French by the 
present of the indicative, and when in the compound of the imperfect 
"by the imperfect of the same mood. 



327 

four months. - - My father has been ill these 

malade, adj. 
six weeks. - - He has been in London these five years. 

and (it is said) he there enjoys a considerable em- 

on dit, v. 
ployment. - - We have neither seen you nor your 

sisters these three days. 

It also happens, that, neither the verbs, nor any of 
the words, ago, these, or for these, are expressed in the 
sentence : ex. 



II y a neufans que ma tante 

demeure dans ce voisi- 

nage, 
II n'y a pas plus (Pune heure 

que nous pechons ici, 
II y avoit deux arts que ma 

sozur etoit en France 

quand fy allai, 
Wy avoit-il pas six mois 

quelle demeuroit avec 

nous quand elle mourut ? 
II y aura six ans a Nozl 

que voire frere est chez 

Mons. O. 
JPy aura-i-il pas un an au 

mois d^AoCd prochain que 

voire sozur est a Paris ? 



My aunt has lived nine 
years in this neigh- 
bourhood. 

We have not been above 
an hour fishing here. 

My sister had been two 
years in France when I 
went there. 

Had she not lived six 
months with us when 
she died ? 

Your brother will have 
been at Mr. O'a. six 
years at Christmas. 

Will not your sister have 
been a year at Paris 
next August ? 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 



Some people have no pity on their poor 

gens, pi. de 

fellow-creatures. - - Some people fancy 

semblable, personne, f. s r imagintr> v< 



328 

that they can learn a language without 

pouvoir, v. 
studying. - - - My brother has been four years at 
itudier, v. 
Mr. VV's. academy, and my father told him that 

he should stay there two years more. - - I had 

rester, v, 
been three years in England when that happened. 

arriver,v. 
- - I had not been three months in France, when 

my brother returned from America to London. 

where he fell ill and died. - - Mr. N. had only 

malade, ne que 

learned French seven months when he wrote me 

a letter in that language. - - - Had not Mr. David 

been four years and a half in Spain when his sister 

was married ? - - My father and mother had not been 

gone out above a quarter of an hour when 

sortir. v. plus de, adv. «^ 

he arrived. - - - We had been playing at cards 

aux carte, f. 
for two hours when you came in. - - Thomas will have 

entrer, v. 
been at the college two years the tenth of nex; 

college, m, 
month. 



The verb etre, to be, becomes impersonal when fol- 
lowed by a substantive, or one of the pronouns personal* 
possessive, or demonstrative, and is always conjugated 
with the pronoun demonstrative ce, whether speaking 
of persons or things : ex. 



329 

C'est la loi qm Pordonne, It is the law that pre- 
scribes it. 
Cest moi qui Vaifait, It is / who have done it. 

Cest mon bienfaiteur, It is my benefactor. 

Cest eux, or, ce sont eux, It is they who have related 
qui me Vont rapporte, it to me. 

From the last instance, it appears that it is, &c. fol- 
lowed by a pronoun of the third person plural, may be 
rendered in French two ways; but, when is it, &.c. is 
used in asking a question, it is generally put in the sin- 
gular, though the pronoun be in the plural number : 
ex. 

Est-ce eux qui Pont fail ? Is it they who have done it ? 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

It is prosperity which commonly makes 

prosperit6,L rendre,v. 

men haughty and proud, but it is adversity 

orgueilleux,a<\'y 
that makes them wise. - - - It was the custom 

coutume, f. 
among the Spartans to inure their 

chez, p. Spartiate,m. de endurcir,v. 

children early to the fatigues of war. 

de bonne heure, adv. travail, m. 

- - It is not 1 who occasioned the quarrel, it is 

causer,\. querelle, f. 

you who began first. - - - It was envy 

avez commence, v. le envie,f. 

which caused the first murder. - - Is it not you who 

causer, v. meurtre,m. 

wrote to Miss A.? No, it is Miss Rose's sister, 

avez 6crit,v. 

- - If you do not succeed, it will not be my fault. 

r£ussir,v. fau*r,L 

- - If you came to lose the friendship of your 

a perdre, v. 
28* 



3W 

parents, It would be the greatest misfortune which 

malheur,m, 
ever might happen to you. - - It is my friend 

jamais, adv. pouvoir,v. 
who told me that it was your father whom we saw 

dire, v. 
yesterday. - - Speak to my brothers, for it is they 

who told it me. - - Why do you not accuse 

Pou rquoi, adv. 
my sisters ? It is they who have done all the 

mischief. - - You blame my aunts, but is it they 
«a/,m. bldmer,v. tante,L 

who have offended you ? 
offenser, v. 

He, she, they, immediately followed by zcho, whom, 
or that, and such as, whether separated in English or 
not, but implying people in general, are often made 
into French by the impersonal c\st, with an infinitive 
followed by que de before a second infinitive, and if 
the sentence be negative, c*est ne pas must be used : 
ex. 

Cest etre fou que de He is a fool who loses his 

perdre le iems a ces time in those trifles. 
bagatelles, 

Cest ne pas gouier les Such as love nobody, do 

plaisirs de Pamitie que not enjoy the pleasures 

de Maimer personne, of friendship. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

He is a blind man who does not 

«* aveugle, adj. «^> 

perceive all the dangers which surround us 

environner, v. 
rn this deceitful world. - - Such as are satis 

trompeur, adj. con- 



331 

lied with their lot are happy. - - He 

tent, adj. de son, pro. sort, m. 
does not know the court who relies 

connoitre.v. cour,f. sefier,\. 

on the promises which (are made) there. - - They 

aux on fait, v. 

are strangers to the charms of society who shun 

fuir, v. 
company. - - They are idle who do not know the 

savoir, v. 
value of time. - - They obey the commands of God 

who love their neighbours, and do not reproach 

prochain,$\ng, 
them with their small defects. - - He is not a Chris- 
lui *» ses 
tian who seeks to hurt his neighbour and speaks 

a voisin,m. 
ill of him on all occasions. - - Such as neglect 

dans negliger,v. 

study do not understand their own interest. 

propre, adj. 

The verb etre, to be, becomes also impersonal every 
time it is followed by a noun adjective used in a vague 
indeterminate sense, and relates to no particular object; 
in which case the verb is generally preceded by the pro- 
noun il ; and when used to denote the state of the wea- 
ther, it is rendered by the third person singular of the 
verb /aire, to make or do : ex. 

// est extraordinaire, &;c. It is extraordinary, $rc 

II fait beau tems, It is fine weather. 

.Ye fait-il pas chaud ? Is it not hot ? 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

It is surprising to see you so lazy and in- 
etonnant 3 ady de 



332 

attentive after having been punished severe- 

apres, p. avoir severe- 

ly for these faults. - - It is always dangerous 

'men J, adv. 

to (keep company with) people without any prin- 
de frequenter, v. aucun prin- 

ciple of religion. - - Does it rain ? No, Sir, 
dipt, m . Monsievtr, m . 

it is fine weather. - - Is it not very cold ? - - - It is 

froid, m. 
neither cold nor hot, - - It is a high wind, and 
m, c. m, c. «<» grand, adj. 

I think it will soon freeze. - - - It is not so cold as 
penser,v. 

it was at the beginning of this month. - - Do 

- commencement, m. 

you think (that) it is hotter in Italy than here? 

The learner must observe, that the following verb is 
absolutely impersonal throughout all its tenses, and that 
nothing is more disagreeable than to hear young people 
say, Jefauti vousfaut, on faut, &c. to prevent which, as 
much as possible, some examples are here set down. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Falloir, to be needful, requisite, necessary. 
Part. pass. Fallu, been needful, &c. 

Indicative Mood. 

Affirmatively. Sing. 

Present. II faut que je fasse, I must do. 

II faut que tu fasses, thou must do. 

// faut qifil fasse, he must do. 

// faut quelle fasse, she must do. 

Plural. 

// faut que nous fassions, we must do. 

// faut que vous fassiez\ you must do. 

II faut quHls, or elles fassent, they must do. 



333 

Negatively 7 . 

// ue faixt pas que je fasse* I must not do. 

// ne faut pas que vous fassiez, you must not do, <$t. 

Interrogatively. 

Faut-il que je fasse ? must I do ? 

Faut-il que vous fassicz ? must you do ? 

Ne faut-il pas que je fasse ? must I not do? 

Ne faut-il pas que vous fassiez ? must you not do ? 

Imperfect. II falloit qu'il ecrhit, it was necessary, &x, 

for him to write. 

Preterite. II fallut quHl partit, he was obliged to set 

out. 

Future. Ilfaudra qu'il vienne, he must come, he shall 

be obliged to come, 

Condit. Ilfaudroii quefallasse, I should go, or it 

would be r>ecessary 
for me to go. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. QuHl faille, that it may be necessary, &c. 
Imperfect. Qu'il fallut, that it might be necessary. 

As to the compound tenses of this verb, they are 
formed by adding its participle passive to the third per- 
son singular of any of the simple tenses of the verb avoir y 
to have: ex. 77 afallu, il avoitfallu, &c. 

From the foregoing instances, it is easy to see, that, 
when the verb falloir is used in the present or future 
tense of the indicative mood, the following verb must 
be rendered by the present of the subjunctive; but 
when it is used in the imperfect, preterite, or conditional 
present of the indicative, the verb following must be 
rendered by the preterite of the subjunctive : ex. 

II fant, or il faudra que I must do, I shall be obliged 
je fasse, to do, or, it will be neces^ 

sary for me to do. 



334 

11 falloit, or, il fallut que I was obliged, or, it was 
je parlasse, necessary for me to 

speak. 
II faudroit que je vendisse, I should be obliged to 

sell. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

If you go to Coxhcath to-day you must 

aujourd'hw\adv. 
come back to-morrow. - - - You may go to 

revenir,v. pouvoir,v. 

London this morning, but remember that you must 

be back at three o'clock. - - - You must get 

de retour se 

up to-morrow morning at four o'clock. - - . - 

fever ,V. 
Custom must not always prevail over reason. - - - 

sitr, p. 
Shall I be obliged to carry them there ? - - - 

falloir, v. mener, v. 

Must I not show you my work ? - - - You 

montrer, v. ouvrage, m. 

must have been well (acquainted with) the places 

connoUre^v. endroit,m. 

k> expose yourself in that manner. - - If he 

pour,c. de,p. 

wished to pay his debts, he would be obliged 
vouloit, v. ^cr, dette, f. 

to sell all his property. - - If your brothers had not 
de bien, m. 

ceased to quarrel, it would have been nc- 

cesser, v. de quereller, v. 

cessary* for them to part. - - It is impossible for you 
se separer^ v. 

* After the words better, necessary, needful, expedient, good, im- 
possible, Sec. joined to the verb to be, conjugated impersonally, the 
preposition for is to be rendered by que, with the following verb in 
the subjunctive mood, either present or preterite, according to the 
tense of (he preceding verb. 



335 
to succeed in that undertaking, all your friends 

oppose it. 

s\pposer,wy. 

The same observation is to be made on the verb valoir 
mieux, to be better, used impersonally ; and the adjec- 
tives bon, difficile, impossible, necessaire, a propos, &c. join- 
ed to the verb etre, used in the third person singular 
only : ex. 

11 nhst pas bon que vous It is not good for you to 

soyez seul, be alone. 

// vaut mieux que vous ayez It is better for you to have 

compagnie, company. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

It is difficult for you to improve if you 

faire des progres, 
do not apply better to study. - - - It was impossible 

s'appliquer, v. 
for you to have succeeded unless you had taken 

a moins que,c. ne. (by the sub.) 
more convenient measures. - - It would be expedient 

convenable, adj. a propos 

for you to read this book from the beginning 

dcpuis,p, ' 
to the end. - • Believe me, it is better 

jusqu'a,^. fin^* valoir mieux, \. 

for you to go there to-morrow, for it will snow 

car, c. 
soon. - - - Will it not be better for me to be at 
bientot,adv. 
school tuo soon than too late? - - Would it not 

tot, adv. tard, adv. ♦ 

be better for him to go and speak to them himself, 

than to send his servant ? - - - It is good for ue 

dt domes ti que, m. & f. 

to help one another in our troubles. 
s' aider, v. peine, f. 



336 

The above verb falloir, being used before the verb 
to have, followed immediately by a noun substantive, 
may be rendered without expressing the auxiliary verb ; 
instead of which, insert one of the following pronouns, 
me, te, lui, nous, vous, or lexir, according to the number 
and person : ex. 

// me faut des livres, I must have, or, I want 

books. 
// luiy*atu* un chapeau, He must have, or, he 

wants a hat. 
II lui faut un bonnet, She must have, or, she 

wants a cap. 

N. B. If the verb to have be expressed in French, it 
must be rendered by the subjunctive mood : 

II faut quefaie des livres, I must have, or, I want 

books. 
This method, however, is not so elegant as the 
former. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE, 

1 shall want paper, pens, and ink. - - What do 
falloir, \, 
you want ? - - I want nothing (for the) present, but I 

a 
think I shall soon want a French grammar. - - - 
penser, v. 
My brother has an old hat, and he will sood 

vieux, adj. 
want a new one. - - If you like to 

net//*, adj. <*> aimez,v, a 

speak much, you must have (a good deal) of 

bicn, adv. 
circumspection not to (speak ill) of others. - - - 

Yetenue, f. pour ne pas me dire, v. 

Since. I cannot find my book, I must have 

Puis que, c. 

another. - - If we wish to succeed in our under- 
vouloir, v. 



337 

taking, we must have (a great deal) of patience. - - • 

beaucoup, adv. 
My brothers have lost their buckles, they must have 

boucle, f. 
others. 

Before the conclusion of this section, it will be pro- 
per to say something about the pronoun general on, 
which commonly precedes a verb used impersonally 
(viz. in the third person singular) in French, and in 
English is made by a passive voice : ex. 

On m'a permis de chanter, I have been allowed to 

sing. 
On lui a difendu de sorlir, He has been forbidden to 

go out. 

In this case, the verb which, in English, is in the 
passive voice, must, in French, be turned into the ac- 
tive, when the English nominative becomes the regi- 
men of the verb in French, the sentence beginning 
with on, and translated as if the English were, one has 
allowed me to sing, one has forbidden him to go out. 

It is the same with, 



On dit, 

On me dit, 

On dit a voire frere, 

On disoit, ) 

On dit, I 

On dira, 

On dira a nos enfans, 

On a dit, 

On nous a dit, 

39 



It is said, or people say, 

I am told. 

Your brother is told. 

It was said, or people said, 

or were saying. 
It will be said, or people 

will say. 
Our children will be told. 

It has been said, or people 

have said. 
We have been told* 



338 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

In time of war, peace is always spoken of. - - - 

En, p. 
Where is your brother ? it is not known ; for, we 

savoir, v. 
have not heard of him these two years. - - - - 

The death of the invincible admiral Lord Nelson 

mort, f. 

is daily lamented, and will be 

tous les jours, adv. regre(ter,v. 

so a long time. - - - 1 was told yesterday that 

your brother has been punished for his idleness ; 
had your father been told of it, he would have been 

very angry with him. - - As soon as your 

contre,\>. Aussitot que,c. 

book is printed, people will be eager in 

sera imprime, v. s'empresser,v. de, p. 

buying it, and it will be read with avidity. - - Learned 

men are found in villages, as well as in large 

grand, adj. 
towns. - - It is reported on all sides that we shall 

de cute, m. 

soon have peace, but the news has not yet been 

received, though it be ardently (wished for), 

ardemmtnl, ad v. soahaiter, v. 
however, it is thought that the secret expedition 

will sail in a few days. - - It was as- 

metlre a la voile, <o> 

serted that you were lazy. - - It will be believed that you 

blame me. - - It would not be supposed that you praise 
us. - - I have been assured that he has threatened him. 



339 

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE on the 
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

There is no going out to-day, it rains apace. - - - 

a xerse, adv. 
Do not make so much noise, there is no hearing 

s'enlendre, v. 
one another. - - Is it cold this morning ? Yes, Sir, it 

is very cold ; however, I am told it is not so cold as 

it was yesterday. - - The weather is very inconstant 

in this country, it was very hot yesterday, it is 

•pays, m. 
excessively cold to-day : it did freeze this morning, 

it is, adv. 
it hailed at noon, it rained in the afternoon, and 

midi,m, *<» apres-midi, 

now it drizzles. - - It sometimes lightens when it 

quelquefcis,adv, 
does not thunder, but as often as it thun- 

tGutes les fois,c. 
ders, it lightens. - - If it be fine weather next week, 

1 shall go to London, but if it be bad weather I 

shall stay at home. - - It is a pleasure to see 

rester, v. au logis. de 

bees (coming out) of their hives when it is 
abeilleS. sorlir,v. ruche, f. 

a sunny day. - - Had I known you were returned 
^c^soleil *<* revenir,v. 

from the continent, I would have gone to see you 

long ago. - - My father and mother were told you 

were in England ten years ago, but you neither saw 

nor wrote to them, - - Every body agrees there 



340 
are fine women in Great-Britain, but there is not 

such good wine as in France. - - It greatly 
si beaucoup, adv. 

concerns children to avoid bad company. - - 

aux de eviter, v. 

If there were any real virtue in the world, should 

we (meet with) so many false friends ? - - If he 

irouver,\. 
behaved well, there would not be a man 

se comporter, v. 
(in the world) that I should esteem more. - - ISo 

au monde, 
object is more pleasing to the eye than the sight of 

plaire,v. ime,f. 

a man whom you have obliged, nor (is) any music 

so agreeable to the ear as the voice of a man 

oreille, f. 
who owns you for his benefactor. - - It is a 

reconnoitre, v. «* 

sad thing to see unfortunate people and be 

k» de malheureux^dj. 

unable to relieve them. - - Such as support the 

secotmV, v. encourager^y, 

conduct of idle and obstinate scholars, make them- 
selves contemptible. - - They are not acquainted with 

miprisahle, adj. 
the human heart, who rely upon the vain 

fair e fondly, 
promises of men. - - You have already been told 

deja, adv. 
that nobody in the world has prepossessed me 

against you, how many times must I repeat 

contre, p. combien, adv. 

it to you ? - - I was told yesterday that you were very 



341 

ill, and I am truly glad to see you so well. - - - 

de bien portanL 

There is no persuading you when you have a mind 

u^p envie,{. 
not to believe what you are told. - - - More virtue is 

de • 
requisite to support good fortune than bad. - - 

pour, p. 
Much art and nicety are requisite to 

delicaiesse, f. pour, p. 

please every body. - - It matters little whether it be 

my servant or yours who carries the letter to the 

porter, v. 
post. - - You must honour your father and mother if 
poste,f. 
you will live long and happy. - - It is more glo- 

vouloir, v. 
rious to conquer one's passions than to conquer 

de vaincre, v. conquerir, v. 

the whole world. - - Sir, I want a pair of boots, 

entier, adj. 
have you any in your shop that will suit 

bouiique, f. convenir, v. 

me ? - - It is reported that the Russians have beaten 

Russe, m. 
tbe Turks ; it is said so, but it is not yet known for 

Turc, m. 
certain. - - It is thought Sweden has declared war 

Suede, f. 
against France. - - It is true ; but it is much 

a vrai,adj. 

feared lest the Swedes should be 

craindre,v. que,c. Suidois,ne, (by the pre. subj.) 

beaten, though they fight most courageously. 

se batlre, v. ires, 
- - - Have the letters been received which were 

expected yesterday ? No, but the mail is ar- 
altendre, v. malle, f. 

rived, and they will be delivered this morning. 
29* 



342 

SECT. V\ 

OF PARTICIPLES. 

Participles are either active or passive. The par- 
ticiple active, in French, always ends in ant : ex. par- 
lant ; punissant, and in English in ing : ex. speaking, 
punishing, &c. It is always, in its own nature, inde- 
clinable : ex. 

Je vois des hommes et des I see men and women 
femmes venant a nous, coming to us. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

The persons whom you saw with us are people 

gens,pl 
fearing God and loving virtue. - - - She met your 

father and sister (as she was) coming here. - - My 

en ici, adv. 

mother was told (the day before yesterday) that 

avant-hier, adv. 
your sister, remembering the injuries she had 

se ressouvenir, v. des 
received from your brother, refused to 

recues, p.p. de la part de, de 

see him, and we are all glad to hear it. - - - 

de apprendre,v. 
Your aunt, having given the necessary orders to your 

cousins, set out immediately for London. - - - Did 

partir,v. 
you not see them coming to us ? - - How many 

lowing oxen, bleating sheep, neighing 

mugir,v, boz\jtf,m. beler, v. brebis,f. pi. hennir,v* 
horses 1 hear afar off! - - Do you not admire these 
de loin, adv. 



343 

skipping lambs in your father-in-law's meadow ? 
bondir,v. agneau,m. prairie,?. 

- - Do you see the flocks languishing with 

lroupeau,m. languir,v. de,p. 
thirst, and drinking (on the) margin of this limpid 

au bord, m. 

brook ? 
ruisseau^ m. 

When the participle active is preceded by another 
verb, an article, or a preposition, it must be rendered 
in French by the verb in the infinitive mood, and it is 
sometimes used as a substantive: ex. 

Faut-il que je parte sans Must I set out without 
lui parler ? speaking to him ? 

La pauvrete du corps est The impoverishing of the 
la richesse de Paine, body is the enriching of 

the soul. 

N. B. There are some active participles which, by 
use, have been converted into substantives or adjec- 
tives, as medisant, slanderer, ignorant, ignorant, &c. 
which are declinable. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

1 assure you there is a great deal of pleasure in 

f), p. 
teaching diligent scholars. - - We are told there 
enseigner, v. r 

will not be so much danger in travelling, as there 

voyager,v. que 
was before. - - - There is a real advantage in 

auparaxant, adv. 
being learned, but science must not create 

savant, adj. inspirer,v, 

pride. - - Lewis the Great had especially the su- 

sur tout, adv. 
perior and rare talents of knowing and choosing men 

of merit. - - He left the house without seeing his 



344 

father, and even without speaking to his mother. 

meme, adv. 
- - He was hanged for robbing Mr. D. - - I should 

pendre,v, . {avoir vole) 
despise a man who is capable of deceiving 

mepriser, v. tromper, Vi 

his friends. - - After having (waited for) her a long 

attendre, v. «» 

while, she (sent me word) that she was not ready 

envoyer dire, v. jore/,adj. 

to go out. - - She spends all her time in reading or 
a passer,\. 

writing. - - My mother takes an infinite pleasure in 

admiring the situation of your house. - - The grace 

situation^, 
of God will always keep us from sinning. - • 

empecher,v, pecker, v. 

I often admire the rising and setting of the sun. 

soleil,m. 
The defending of a bad cause is worse than 

defense mauvais, adj. 

the cause itself. 
mime* 

The participle passive is sometimes declinable, and 
sometimes indeclinable. 

It is declinable, 

First, when it is joined to the verb etre, to be, forming 
a passive verb, and agrees with the nominative case of 
the verb in gender and number ; and after the verbs 
paroitre, naitre, &c. : ex. 

Mon frere est (time. My brother is loved. 

Ma sozur est aimee, My sister is loved. 

Mes cousins sont partis, My cousins are gone. 

Mes cousines sont parties, My cousins are gone. 

Elle paroit qffligee, She appears afflicted. 

Elks paroissent affligees, They appear afflicted. 



345 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 



I have been told jour brother-in-law is gone to 

beau-frere, m. 
the Continent; have I been told the truth?- - I have 

not seen your mother since she arrived 

depuis que,c. 
from France ; does she appear satisfied with her 

de 
journey ? - - My brothers are gone to Dover, and 
voyage, m. 

intend to pay you a visit when 

se proposer, v. de rendre, v. ^ 

they are come back. - - The houses which are 
(by the fut.) revenir, v. 
built in the winter are not so wholesome as those 

sain, adj. 
which are begun (in the) spring and finished in the 

au 
middle of summer. - - The wicked are always tor- 

m6chant,adj. hour- 

mented, and the righteous are comforted by their 
reler, v. juste, adj. consoler, v. 

own conscience. - - Virtuous people are esteemed 

personne, f. 
and respected by those who are so, and even 

mime, adv. 
by the wicked. I assure you that Mr. Brown's 

wife appears much afflicted at the death of 

femme, f. de 

her husband, but her sons appear as much affect- 
man, m. 
ed by it as she. - - Children (are born) poor and 

naitre,\. 
helpless, and sometimes they die very young. 

foible, adj. mourir, v. 



346 

Secondly, when it is joined to the verb avoir, or etre,. 
forming the compound tenses of an active or reflected 
verb, immediately preceded by a pronoun which it gov- 
erns in the accusative case ; it must then agree with the 
gender and number of the substantive to which that 
pronoun refers : ex. 

J-ai parli a voire frere et I spoke to your brother 

Pai prie de venir nous and desired him to come 

voir, to see us. 

J-ai vu Madame Wright et I saw Mrs. Wright and 

Pai entendue chanter, heard her sing. 

J-m lu tous les livres que 1 have read all the books 

vous rrCavez pretes, which you lent me. 

Avez-vous vu les marchan- Did you see the goods 

dises que fai recues, which I have received? 

Vous Vavez souvent priee You often desired her to 

de passer chez vous^ call at your house. 

Elks se sont repenties de They have repented of 

leurs fautes, their faults. 

In the above instances the pronouns are governed 
by the verbs avoir or etre, and the participle passive. 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

I spoke to your brother this morning, and 

ai parle, v. 
desired him to come and dine with us to-morrow.- - - 

The resolution which she has taken of going into 

a 
the country surprises me very much ; I have spoken 

6tonner,v. tres fort, 

to her myself, but I have not been able to learn 

pouvoir, v. 
the reasons which have induced her to it. - - - Miss 

engager, v. 
Farren was an excellent actress, 1 have seen her 
actrice, f. 



347 

play several times. - - I am very sorry for the 

fdche, adj. de 
trouble that affair has given to your aunt. - - If you 
peine, f. tante, f. 

can come with me, I will show you the lady 

montrer,v, 
whom I have heard sing. - - What stuff have 

entendre, v. e/o^, f. 

you chosen ? - - The letter which you have written to 

choisi.p.p. 
me in French was tolerably well ; I have shown 

passablement, adv. 
it to your aunt, who is much pleased 

ires, adv. content, adj. 
(with it). - - 1 have not yet received the goods, 

e?i,pro. marchandise, f. 

which you sent me by the ship Good- 

vaisseau, m. 
Will. - - Ladies, have you returned him the letters 

rendre, v. 
which he had desired you to read ? - - - Where 
prier,v. de Ow,adv. 

did you buy those gloves ? I bought 

acheter, v. 
them in France. - - - Alexander conquered Aaia with 

the troops which his father Philip had disciplined. 
troupe, f. 

- - The faults which he had committed, greatly 

beaucoup, sdv. 
increased his prudence. - - He has spent all the 
augmenter, v. 

treasures which his father had amassed with so much 
tresor, m. 
care and labour. - - I shall never forget the good 

oublier, v. 
services which you have done to my mother. 

service, rn, rendre,\. 

- - Of all the letters which my brother has received 



348 

to-day, there is not one (of them) for 

aujouroVhui, adv. 

me. - - The reasons, which you have given us. have 

satisfied us. - - What books have you lost ? - - The 
satisfaire, v. 

fine actions your brothers have done in 

beau, adj. faire, v. 

America deserve great praises, and (ought to) be 

meriter,v. louange,f. devoir. v. 

transmitted to posterity. - - The three country 

houses, which your father is said to have bought, 

metis on, f. 

are extremely fine and well situated. - - The 

s?7ue,p.p. 
soldiers, whom they obliged to set out, are 
soldat, m. a 

come back already. - - - My sisters have 
revenir, v. 

quarrelled the whole day, and are now reconciled. 
se quereller, v. 

The participle passive is indeclinable in the follow- 
ing cases ; 

First, when the contrary to the above rule happens ; 
that is, when the pronoun, though preceding the parti- 
ciple passive, is governed by another verb : ex. 

Plusieurs personnes se sont Several persons came to 

presentees a la porte, the door, the sentinel 

la sentinelle les a laisse let them pass, 
passer, 

C^est une belle chanson, It is a fine song r J have 

je Pai entendu chanter heard it sung many a 

plusieurs fois, time. 

J^y suis alii avec elle et I went there wth her, 

Pai va peindre, and saw her picture 

drawn. 



349 

La langue que fai com- The language I have be- 
mence d'apprendre est gun to learn is very 
fort utile, useful. 

In the above instances the pronouns are not governed 
by the participle passive, but by the verbs passer, chan- 
ter, peindre, and apprendre. 

EXERCISES ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULE. 

I cannot forget the good actions, which I have seen 

you do. - - - The goods which you ordered me to 

de 
send, arc arrived ; permit me to show you the letters 

de 
which we have received from Germany. - - The 

Allemagne, f. 
fable which I gave you to translate is not difficult. 

a traduire, v. 
- - Have you already read the books, which I saw you 

buying ? - - Not yet, for I have sent them to my 

Pas, adv. 
sister, who is in the country. - - - I have bought the 

a 
clothes for which you saw me bargaining. - - The 
habit, tn. «& marchander, v. 

history which I have begun to read is not enter- 

d amu- 

taining. - - She has written more books than you ever 
sant, adj. 

have read. - - The lady whom I saw singing is hand- 
some and young, but the song which I have heard 

sung is the best, as to words and music, that 

quant, 
your brother ever wrote. - - Miss B. has spent 

passer, v. 
30 



350 
two or three days with your sisters, and saw their 

(picture drawn) ; their cousins were in the next 

peindre, v. 
room, and my sister saw them painting in minia- 

en,p. 
ture. 

Secondly, when it is immediately followed by a noun 
(either substantive or adjective) in the accusative case, 
or by another participle passive, though it should be 
preceded by a pronoun : ex. 

Ma sceur s'est casse le bras, My sister broke her arm. 

Les Anglois se sont ren- The English made them- 

du fameux dans cttte selves famous in this 

guerre, wa r. 

Les Espagnols se sont The Spaniards found them- 

trouve obliges de lever selves obliged to raise the 

h siege, siege. 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Your sister has rendered herself celebrated by 

ce7efrre,adj. 
her wit and beauty. - - My mother has bought 

esprit, m. acheter,v. 

herself a fine gown, my sister had made her- 

faire, v. 
self a good cloak, and my brothers had built 

mantelet, m. bdtir, v. 

themselves an elegant house. - - - They found 

themselves surrounded by soldiers, who carried 

conduire, v. 

them to prison, where they have been detained 

en, p. retenir,v. 

for eight days; but they have been found 

pendant, p. 



351 

innocent of the clime with which they were ac- 

de 
cused, and at last (acquitted). - - - The city 

(rent oyer absous.) 
of Liverpool has rendered itself flourishing by its 

florissant, adj. 
trade. - - Did you hear the new song? 

cormnerce.m. entendre chanter 

Yes, 1 did. 

Lastly, when the auxiliary verb and the parti- 
ciple passive are used impersonally. Du (when not 
signifying owed), pu, and voulu, are also indeclinable : 
ex. 

Les pluies qifil a fait, The rains which we haze 

had. 
Je vous ai moutre la re- 1 have shown you the gra- 

connoissance quefaidu, titude I ought. 

Ma sceur a fait tout ce My sister has done every 

qa tilt a pa, thing she could. 



EXERCISE OX THIS RULE. 

The storm, which we had yesterday, has 

ternpctej. 
done (a ereat deal) of damage to our 

causer, v. beaucoup, adv. dommage,m. 

ships. - - The abundant showers which we have 

pluie, f. 
had this week, have prevented me from going 

emp£cher,V. 
into the country. • - The high wind which 

grand, adj. vent, m. 
they have had in the county of Kent, has (blown 
cornte, m. renver- 

down) many houses and trees. - - At last he has 

ser,v. En fin. adv. 



352 

relumed me all the sums which I had lent to 

rendre, v. somme, f. 

him, and which he had owed me so long. - - I 

devoir, v. 
have not paid all the attention which I ought to 

faire, v. 
the advice jour father gave me. - - She has oh- 
avis, m. ob- 

tained from the king all the favours she would, 
tenir, v. grace, f. 

- - My hrother might have improved more, 

faire des pr ogres 
but he has not made all the efforts he could. - - The 

effort, m. 
excessive heat that (we have had) this summer, 

chaleur, pi. il a fait^ p.p. 

has caused many diseases. 



In order to illustrate in a single example the appli- 
cation of the above rules about participles passive, we 
must write, 

pai recu les lettres que I have received the letters, 

vous rrCavez ecrites au which you wrote to me 

sujet de Paffaire, que je with respect to the affair 

vous avois proposee : et which I had proposed to 

apres les avoir lues avec you : and after having 

attention, fai reconnu, read them with attention, 

comme vous, que, si je 1 perceived, as you did, 

Pavois entreprise, fy that, if I had undertaken 

aurois trouve des ob- it, I should have met with 

stacks que je iPavois pas obstacles, which 1 had 

prevus, not foreseen. 

In this period, recu is indeclinable, because it is not 
preceded by any regimen ; ecrites is declinable, and 
agrees in gender and number with its absolute regi- 
men, or accusative, expressed by the pronoun relative 
que, which precedes the verb and relates to letters ; 
proposee likewise agrees with que, by which it is pre- 



353 

ceded, and which relates to the word ajfinre : lues is 
declinable on account of its rc^men Us. which pre- 
cedes it and relates to letters ; rcessnm is indeclinable. 
::'jse it ii not preceded by any regimen to which it 
can relate : entreprisc. on the contrary, is declinable, 
and takes the gender and number of the conjunctive 
pronoun f, which is its absolute regimen and its ante- 
ent, relating to cf\. ..■■ : tro rs is indeclinable, be- 
cause it is not preceded but followed b) its absolute 
regimen obstacles : prz-.us. on the contrary, is declina- 

i - it is preceded by its absolute regimen _ 
which relates to ibstachs. 

If custom, in any case, lias deviated from the piece d - 
ipg rules, it is sufficient to observe, that they have the 
M authors. A little prie'ice i 
e many of these apparent Ities. 



SECT. VI. 

IXDECLLXJBLE PJRTS OF SPEECH. 

Under this head are comprehended ■sforen, preposi- 
i ins, conjunctions, and inttrjections. 

OF ADVERBS. 

been distingi s d. according to their 

al signiBcations. into advert; of place, tinu. quality* 
ifi/y, numbtr, order, arffirmu'ion, negation, do. r 
ion, comparison, coll -c '.ion. separation. 6zc. E lit this 
class. r ingenious, is far from being 

exact: it berefore judged, that, if those ci the 

:ucnt use, an I when compounded, form 

11 tieular idiom, were : ted. and arrang- 

ed in an alphabetical leries, it would be more to the 
: of the learner. 



35^ 



TABLE OF ADVERBS. 

Abondamment, abundantly, plentifully. 

a P Abandon, at random, in confusion, in disorder 

D'Abord, at first, immediately. 

Absolumcni, absolutely. 

D' Accord, grant it, done. 

A gr tablemen!, pleasantly, comfortably. 

Ainsi (de meme), so, thus, in the same manner. 

Aisiment, easily. 

Mai aisernent, with difficulty. 

Dans un an dHci, a year hence. 

Dannie qui vieni, the next year. 

Anciennement, ) r * ., 

~ , r • ' > formerly, anciently. 
Autrejois, ) J ' J 

En ami, friendly. 

a Vamiable, amicably. 

En arriere, Tomber en arriere, to fall backward. 

a reculons, Marcher a reculons, to walk backward. 

Assez, enough. 

Assurement, certainly. 

Aujourd'hui, to-day. 

Time to ( D'aujourd'hui en huit, this day se'nnight. 

come. ( D'aujouraVhui en quinze, this day fortnight. 

f II y a aujourdViui huit jours, this day week, this 

Time! , day se'nnight. 

past, \llya aujourd'hui quinze jours, this day fortnight. 

[ II y a aujourd'hui un an, this day twclvs months. 

Autani, as much, as many. 

D'aulant plus, so much the more. 

D'auiant moins, so much the less. 

Tout an I ant.) . . . , , ,.. 

Tout aussi, I J ust as 'J ust aS mucn ' ever y whlt - 

Dorznavant) in future. 

a Pavenir, for the future, hereafter. 

a PAngloise, after the English manner, fashion, or way. 

a PItalienne, after the Italian, #-c. 

a la Franchise, after the French, fyc. 

a la Turque, after the Turkish, &c. 



355 



"EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Our garden produces all kinds of fruits plenti- 

sortt, f. 
fully, - - Your sister left all her things in dis* 

laisser, v. 
order, - - You did not know me at first, - - He would 

vouloir, v. 
absolutely do it. - - If you please, I will go to 

vouloir,v. 
London with you. Done, - - 1 hope we shall spend 

passer,v. 
the day pleasantly, - - Have we not spent it so? 

My brother learns his lessons easily, and 1 with dif- 
ficulty, - - A year hence you will (be able to) speak 
French tolerably well* - - My father says I shall go 
to *France next year, - - - It was done so an- 
ciently, - - - 1 had the honour of seeing you formerly, 

but I do not recollect where I had that pleasure : 

se rappeler, v. 
I believe it was at Mr. P's. who received us so 

friendly, Your brother and mine have settled 

regler,v, 
their affairs amicably, - - Make two steps back- 
pas, m. 
ward, - - He cannot see his way who walks back- 
ward, - - Have you played enough? - - Certainly 

you must be tired. We do not expect him 

devoir, v. 

• See the article indefinite, page 41» 



35C 

to-day* - - If it be fine weather, I shall be back 

de retour 
this day se'nnighU * - I shall see you this day fortnight 

if I am well. - - This day week I was (at your house). 

chez vous. 
- - - This day month I met your brother. » - I came 

here this day twelve months. - - - He has as 

i«,adv. 

much money and as many friends as you. - - I was 

so much the more persuaded of what you told me, 

that I dismissed him this day three weeks. - - 

renvoyer, v. 
1 will do it so much the less, as I promised him not 

to meddle with that affair. - - My sister has 

de se meler,v. de, p. 

just as much wit, and is just as amiable as yours. - - 

Your son has given you some trouble, but I 

maiss c. 
hope he will give you pleasure hereafter. - - If you 

forgive him this time, he will not do it for the 

future. - - - In future, 1 never will trust him 

any more. - - She dres?es after the English 

sliabiller, v. 
fashion, but she lives after the French way. - - - She 

plays after the Italian manner. - - Your sister h3s a 

cap after the Turkish fashion. - - Come here, 

bonnet, m. 

go there, look every where. 

chercher,v. 



357 
ADVERBS. 

a%v en bas, } ° ff ' down > down with ' beloW 

En badinant, for fun. 

Beaucovp, ) , , , , 

d- J > much, many, a great deal_ 

ff beaucovp pres, nothing near. 

De beaucovp, by much, greatly. 

Bien, well, very. 

De bon cceur, heartily, with a good will. 

De bonne foi, ) • T 

c . n J m \ sincerely. 

bmctrement, J J 

De bonne heure, betimes. 

De bon jeu, fairly. 

De bon malin, early. 

De bouche, by word of mouth. 

a la bonne heure, in good time, luckily, well and good. 

a bon droit, deservedly. 

a bon marche, cheap. 

a bride abaltue, full speed. 

ca et la, to and fro. 

a cause de quoi, on what account. 

a cela pres, that excepted. 

Cependant, in the meanwhile, nevertheless. 

& chcval, on horseback. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Hats off, gentlemen, and sit down. - - - The whole 

army surrendered and laid dozen their arms 

mettre,\» 
upon the ramparts of the citadel. - - There is a man 

below, whom you will see with pleasure. - - Though 

Quoique,c, 
we said it for fun, he was very angry with us. - - 

con Ire, p. 
There were many ladies, and we had a great deal of 

pleasure. - - You may say what you please, 

pouvoir,v. il vous plaira,v» 



358 
but she is nothing near so handsome as her sis- 
ter. - - He -has by much increased his fortune. - - - 
Whatever you do, do it well. - - If you do not do it -with 
a good will, I will do it myself. - - He has acted very 
sincerely in that business. - - Do you speak sincerely ? 

- - We will get up betimes, - - Have 1 not won 

se lever, v. gagner,v, 

fairly ?- -We will set out early, that we may arrive 

before the heat of the day. - - Jt (is 

chaleur,(, valoir 

better) to tell it him by word of mouthy than to 
mieux, v. de 

write to him. - - Sir, I have done my exercise. - - Well 

and good, - - He has obtained it deservedly, - - My 

obtenir, v. 
father has bought a horse very cheap, - - Do you see 

those two horsemen, who come to us full speed ? - - - 

cavalier, m. 
They wandered to and fro without knowing whither 

to go. - - On what account is he angry with me ? 

- - That excepted, 1 have nothing to reproach him 

a reprocher,v, lui 
with. - - - I should speak, but, in the meanwhile, 1 

«* dtvoir,\, 

(hold my tongue). - - Miss White is very handsome, 

se taire,v, 
nevertheless, I do not love her. ■• - - Some went 

to London in a coach, others on horseback, 
en, p. «& a 



3j9 



ADVERBS. 

Combien, How much, how many, how ? 

Combien y a-t-il que, ^ 

Combien de terns y a-t-il que, j 

Combien y avoit-il que, I how j 9 

Depuis quand, f e 

Combien de terns, 

Pendant combien de terns, J 

N. B, 1. How much, how many, how, are rendered in 
French by que before an admiration : ex. 

Que vous ties jolie ! How pretty you are ! 

2. We make use of combien y a-t-il que, when the 
action mentioned in the interrogation has not yet ceas- 
ed ; and then the verb, which (in English) is in the 
compound of the present, must be rendered (in French) 
by the present of the indicative mood : ex. 

Combien y a-t-il que vous How long have you been 
etes, or, depuis quand in London ? 
etes-vous a Londres ? 

3. If the verb (in English) be in the compound of the 
imperfect, it is to be rendered (in French) by the im- 
perfect of the indicative: ex. 

Combien y avoit-il que vous How long had you been 

itiez, or, depuis quand in London, when he 

etiez-vous a Londres died ? 
quand il mourut ? 

4. If the action have entirely ceased, we make use of 
pendant combien de terns, with the following verb in the 
compound of the present : ex. 

Pendant combien de terns How long were you in 
avez-vous iii a Londres ? Loodon ? 



360 

o. How long, in the sense of for what time, is also 
rendered by pendant combien de terns, with the verb in 
the same tense as it is in English : ex. 

Pendant combien de terns How long do you intend 
vous proposez-vous de to stay in Italy ? 
rester en Italie? 



EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

How much do you owe him ? - - ■ - You see to how 

many dangers and how many reproaches we are 

liable. - - - How many times shall I be obliged to 
expose, p.p. de 

bid you to (be silent) ? - - How troublesome 
dire, v. de se taire,v. importun,adj. 

you are 1 How sorry I am for having displeased 

de 
you ! - - How much I should be obliged to you, if 

you would grant me that favour! --How long 

accorder, v. 
have you been learning French ? - - How long have 

they been in Paris ? - - How long had you been in 

London, when you married ? - - How long had you been 

learning Italian, when you wrote to me ? - - How long 

have your parents been in England ? - - Hoio long 

had your brother been in Germany, when we left 

it ? How long were you in Holland ? - - How long 

did your cousin learn the mathematics ? - - How long 



361 

have that gentleman and lady been waiting for 

me ? - - How long has your relation been dead ? - - 

How long had he been in his regiment, when he 

died ? - - How long was he ill ? - - How long does your 

uncle intend to leave his son on the continent ? - 

se proposer de 
How long had your father and mother proposed 

to stay in America, when they first went thither ? - - 

de 

Why are you proud of your beauty ? You do not 

s^enorgueillir, v. 
know how long it will last. 

ADVERBS. 

Combien y a-t-il dHci ? How far is it hence ? 

Dans combien de terns ? How long will it be before ? 

Comme, as, like, how. 

Comme il faut, soundly, as it should be. 

Comment, how. 

a contre-cozur, against our will. 

a contre-sens, the contrary, or wrong way, in a wrong 

sense. 
a contre-tems, unseasonably. 
a corps perdu, hand over head, desperately. 
a cote, } 

a Picart, f ., 

. ' > aside. 
a part, ( 

a quartier, j 

a coti Pun de Pautre, abreast. 

De ce coteci, on this side. 

De ce cdt64a, on that side. 

De cote et d^autre, up and down, about. 

De ious cotes, on all sides, on every side. 

Coup sur coup, one after another. 

31 



362 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

How far is it hence to Dover 1 ■- - How long will it be 

before you send me back the books I lent you? - - - 

They are punished as they deserve. - - My father's 

house is like yours, it is very badly built. - - ~ 

ma/, adv. 
See how it rains. - - - Have they not been beaten 

soundly? - - This exercise is done as it should be. 

- - How can you speak thus ? - - We went to the play 

against our will. - - You hold your book the wrong 

way. - * Your brother took in a wrong sense all 

that I said to him. - - Our master arrived very 

ce que 

unseasonably. - -- The French rushed on the 

fondre, v. 
Austrians desperately. - - Put that^ aside. - * I 
Jlutrichien, m. 
perceive two ships sailing abreast. - - Let us walk 

on this side, and our companions will go on that 

side. - - They run up and down all day, and 

do nothing but play. - - How dare you run about 

ne que 

while your mother is waiting for you ? - - 

pendant que,c. 
The enemies were victorious on all sides. - - We 

hear on every side, that peace will very 

apprendre,v, 

soon take place. - - They drank three bottles of 

avoir lieu, v. 
Burgundy wine one after another. 



363 

ADVERBS. 

Davantage, more. 

Dedans; \ wftM , rf , 

En dedans, ^ ' J 

Dehors, ) ..• . 

r. j l > Without. 

Jkn dehors, ) 

Dija, already. 

Dtmain, to-morrow. 

L° lendemain, the day after. 

Aprts demain, the day after to-morrow= 

Dernierement, lately. 

Ci-dessus, above. 

Par dessus, above, over and above. 

Dessous, > underneath . 

Jiu dessous, J 

a decouvert, openly. 

■ den V?, ] half, by halves. 

a dessein, on purpose, designedly. 

a droite, to the right. 

a double entente, with a double meaning. 

Encore, again, yet, as yet. 

Enfin, at last. 

Ensuite, afterward, then. 

Entierement, entirely. 

Expris, on purpose. 

a Vecart, out of the way. 

a Ventour, round about. 

a. Venvers, the wrong side outwards. 

a I'envi, in emulation. 

aux environs, thereabouts. 

En nulle maniere, in no wise. 

p ei j , # ^ noon at m id-day. 
Ln plein midi, y J 

En terns et lieu, in a proper time and place. 
En tous cas, whatever may happen. 
En un din oVozil, in the twinkling of an eye, 
En sursaut, suddenly, 



3(34 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

I know how that happened, talk no more of it. - - 
Look within and you shall see it. - - She was within 
and I was without. - - Have you already done your ex- 
ercise ? - - J will call upon you to-morrow, and 

passer, v. chez, p. 
the day after we will go and see my uncle. - - We 

will pay you the day after to-morrow if we can. - - 

I was lately (at your house). - - You will find it above, 
chez vous. 

- - I like your garden and walks above all. 

aimer, v. 

- - Look underneath this stone. - - Underneath 

you will find something curious. - - Speak and show 

yourself openly. - - We were half dead. - - I never do 

things by halves. - - They killed him on purpose. - - 

They did say so designedly. - - Go to the right. - - 

My brother always speaks with a double meaning. - - 

I tell the truth, yet he does not believe me. - - At 

last the rebels retired into the woods with 

se retirer,v. dans,\>. bois,m. 

a great loss. - - Do first what you have to do, 

perte, f. Faire, v. 
afterward you shall go out. - - He did it entirely 

to please you. - - 1 came on purpose to see you. 

pour,y. 



365 

- - Take all these papers, and put them out of thi 

way, - - How can you find the place, if you always 

turn round about ? - - You have put on your 

mettre, v. 
waistcoat the wrong side outwards, - - My brother 
veste, f. 
and yours work in emulation of one another, - - - 

He lives in London or thereabouts. - - I will do it in 
no wise, - - I was stopped at noon, • - We will tell him 
what we think in a proper time and place, - - What- 
ever may happen, I (do not care) for it. - - He did 

se soucier, v. 
it in the twinkling of an eye, - - This morning I 

awoke suddenly, but I soon fell asleep again^ 

s'iveiller, v. 

and did not wake again till seven o'clock* 
se reveiller, v. 

ADVERBS. 

Facilement, easily. 
Fidelement, faithfully. 

in a file. 



a la fie, ) 
Defile, I 



a la fois, together. 
Combien de fois ? how many times ? 
Une fois, once. 
Deux fois, twice. 
Trois fois, thrice, three times. 
Tant de fois, so many times. 
Par fois, now and then. 
Fortement, strongly. 
Fort, very. 
Fort et ferme, stoutly. 
31* 



36a 

a fond, thoroughly. 

De fond en comble, from top to bottom, to all intents 

and purposes. 
De front, abreast. 
Galamment, genteelly, gallantly. 
Goutte a goutte, by drops. 
Guere ou Gueres, (with ue before the verb,) little, but 

little. 
a la hate, in haste. 

La h t i U P * nere ' U P stairs, above stairs* 

D'keure en heure, hourly, every hour. 
Hitr, yesterday. 
Hier-au soir, last night. 
Avant-hur, the day before yesterday. 



EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Your brother learns easily, but he forgets almost 

oublier, v. 
as easily as he learns. - - In the last battle our troops 

fought (with the) French, all the soldiers and 
livrer,v, aux 

officers did their duty faithfully : the enemy sur- 
rendered at discretion, and were obliged to (march 

de sov" 
out) of the country in a file. - - Let every one speak 
tir,v. 

in his turn, for if you speak all together, how can 
a 
I hear what you say ? - - How many times did I tell 

you to write to your parents ? - - I spoke to him only 

de 
once, but I saw him twice, - • My father generally 

goes to Germany thrice a year. - - I told it you three 



367 

times. - • I saw him so many times. - - Do you go 

often to London ? I go noiv and then. - - The king 

strongly opposed the enemy in the action, where 

s^opposer a melee, f. 

he fought gallantly. - - Your little sister is very 

combattre, v. 
pretty. - - In all that they undertake they always act 

stoutly. - - My brother knows French thoroughly. - - 

They demolished the house from top to bottom. - - 

1 travelled in a post-chaise drawn by three horses 

abreast. - - Always behave genteelly. - - Your brothers 

came to see us, and we received them politely. - - 

The wine runs from the hogshead by drops. - - Give 

him but little wine. - - ^Never 3 do 2 things in 

Ne jamais, adv. 
haste. - - Is Mr. D. above stairs ? - - Go up stairs, you 

will find what you (look for) in the drawer 

chercher, v. tiroir, m. 

behind the door. - - After having (waited for) him 
derriere, p. attendre, v. 

hourly, he arrived at last. - - We see the army 

increasing every hour. - - I went yesterday to London. 

grassir, v. 

- - It rained very much last night, and it has frozen 

very hard this morning. - - The day before yesterday 

tres fort 

I met your brother, who was riding on horse- 

sej)romener,v. 
back. 



368 

ADVERBS. 

Ici, here. 

Ici autour, hereabouts. 

Ici pres, hard by. 

DHci, hence. 

DHci en quinze jours, within a fortnight, 

Par ici, this way. 

Par ici par la, here and there. 

a Pinstant, immediately, instantly. 

Jamais, ever. 

JVe jamais, never. 

a jamais, for ever. 

Justement, just, precisely. 

Jusqu'a quand? how long? 

JusquHci, hitherto, as far as this. 

Jusque-la, so far, as far as that. 

Jusqu'ou ? how far ? 

De jcur, in the day time. 

De jour a autre, ) r , , , , ., 
r> < ' > from day to day, daily. 

De jour en jour, ) J •" J 

De deux en deux jours, } 

De deux jours Pun, > every other day. 

Tous les deux jours, ) 

Dans quinze jours, in a fortnight. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Did I not tell you to stay here ? - - How 

many miles is it hence to Hampton-Court? - - 

(There must) be a great deal of game here- 

II doit,v. gibier,m. 

abouts. - - How long has he lived hard by? - - How 

demeurer,v. 
far is it hence to Canterbury? - - I will call upon your 

Cantorbery 
brother within a fortnight, - - Come this way, - - Your 



369 

books are scattered here and there, - - Come back 

ejoars,adj. 
immediately. - - They instantly invited him to dine 

a 
with them. - - I do not believe that he ever will follow 

(by the subj.) 
your advice. - - My father never will see him again. 
conseil, m. 

- - Great men will for ever be celebrated in history. 

- - (This is) just what I say. - - How long, O 

Voila,adv. 
Catiline, will you abuse our patience? - - -■ 

Catalina abuser, v. de 

Hitherto the enemy has done nothing considerable. 

- - Learn this piece of poetry as far as that. - - 

poesie,L 
How far will you go ? - - You always come to see me 

by night, why do not you come in the day-time ? - - 

de 

We expect from day to day to receive news from 

de 
the Continent. - - We are daily exposed to great 

dangers. - - My master comes here every other day* 

- - I shall go to France and Italy in a fortnight. 

ADVERBS. 

La, there, thither. 
La autour, thereabouts. 
La has, yonder. 

?H*/aJ thenCe * 

Par Id, that way. 

Loin, far. 

Qe loin % afar off, at a distance. 



370 

Long-terns, a long while, long time. 

Lors, then, at the time. 

Alors, > ., 

Four lors, \ 

Des-lors, from that time. 

Mai, ill, wrong. 

Maintenant, now. 

Mediocremenl, indifferently. 

Mime, even, yet. 

De meme, so, in the same manner* 

Mieux, better. 

De mieux en mieux, better and better, 

Moins, less. 

Moins — Moins, the less — the less. 

a moins, for less, at less. 

Au moins, du moins \ , . , , 

Tout au moins, \ at least ' at lhe least ' 

En moins de rien, in a trice. 

Naivement, plainly, ingenuously. 

Naiurellemenl, naturally, by nature. 

au Katurel, to the life. 

JV*e ni, ni, neither — nor. 

Non pas, nepas, ne point, non, no, not.* 

De nuit, by night, in the night-time. 

Obligeamment, kindly, obligingly. 

Ou, where. 



OBSERVATION ON THE ADVERB Ou. 

The adverb of place, Ou, where, is most commonly 
and more elegantly turned into French by que after the 
two other adverbs ici, here, la, there, to prevent the hia- 
tus caused by the meeting of lhe two vowels ; and some- 
times after nouns expressing the place where something 
has happened, been done or committed, especially when 

* Pas, with the negation ne before it, merely expresses a negative, 
without affirming it, whereas point denies and affirms at once. Pas 
often denies' but partly, or with some modification ; point, on the 
contrary, always denies absolutely, totally, and without any reserve 



371 

the sentence begins with the verb etre, to be, used im- 
personally, as, it is, it was, it will be, &c. : ex. 

Cest ici que nous Patten- It is here (where) we are 
dons, waiting for him. 

Ce fat la que je le vis pour It was there (where) I saw 
la premiere fois, him for the first time. 

Ce fut en plein senat que It was in full senate 
Cesar fut inhumahu- (where, or in which) 
ment assassins, Caesar was inhumanly 

murdered. 



EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERES. 

'It was there or thereabouts that I met him. - - Do 

you see that tree yonder? - - Thence I went to France, 

and soon after to Germany. - - If you go that way, 

apres, p. 
you may call at Mr. H's. - We are yet far from 

pouvoir,v, passer chez 
our house. - - I see many ships afar off, - - I saw him 

yesterday, but it was at a distance, - - You made me 

wait a long -while, - - The fight lasted a long 

combat, m. 
time, - - He was ill at the time of my arrival. - - Then, 

I believe you. - - From that time I began to 

commencer,v. 
speak to him. - - Does your son behave ill now? - - 

When I do wrong, I repent immediately, - - They are 

mal 
now in England. - - The tree that I planted grows 

indifferently. • • Virtue is amiable even in an enemy. 



372 

You blame him, and nevertheless you act in the 

agir, v. 
same manner. - - You work better than your sister. - - 

She reads French better and better. - - - My cousin 

has less money and merit. - - The less you work 

(by the fut.) 
the less you will improve. - - - - He will not do 

faire des pr ogres, 
it fir less. - - - There are now in America 30,000 men 

at the least. - - - If you cannot come, at least write 

to us. - - - He replied plainly to all my questions, and 

I am much pleased with him. - - - What he does, he 

de,p. 
does it naturally. - - - Miss Nichol's picture is 

portrait, m. 
drawn to the life. - - - I will neither see him nor 
/ai*, p.p. 
speak to him. - - - My mother and sisters (were to) go 

devoir , v. 
next week to France, but my father says, that he 

neither can nor will expose them to the caprice of the 
vouloir, v. 

fashion which now reigns in that country. I (asked 

de- 
fer) a glass of wine, and not a glass of water. 
mander,v. 
.***'- Will you come with me? No, for you always 

travel by night. - - Always speak kindly. - - Where did 

you meet them ? - - It was here where I saw your brother 

for the last time.* - - It was at Caernarvon zchere 



373 

Edward the Second was born, the first who bore the 

nuitre, v. 
title of Prince of Wales. - - It was near the walls of 

Galles,(. 
"Corunna in Spain, where (or near zchich) the brave 

Sir John Moore was wounded, and died a 

chevalier, m. 

few hours after; England will long regret the los6 

of that great general. It was there also where that 

famous battle was fought in which both our 

se dormer, v. 
officers and soldiers showed so much courage, and 

performed so many prodigfes of valour. -■ - It is not 

/aire, 

amidst the pleasures of this world where (or amidst 

par mi, p. 

which) we find happiness, it is in the bosom of inno- 

sein, m. 
cence and peace where (or in which) we ought to 

(look for) it. - - It is in the county of Huntingdon 

chercher,v, province, f. 

where the best cheeses in the kingdom are made. 

ADVERBS. 

D'oii ? whence ? 

Par oil, through what place ? which way 1 through 

which ? 
Oui, yes. 

D'outre en outre, through. 
Pas a pas, step by step. 
De part el d'autre, on both sides. 
Nulle part, no-where, any-wherc 
a peine, hardly, scarcely. 
Pck-mek, helter-skelter. 
33 



374 

Petit- etre, may be, perhaps. 

Peu, little. 

Peu a peu, by little and little, by degrees. 

VpZ P d? S cLeprh, } almost ' wr y near ' hereabouts. 

Dans peu,, in a short time. 

Depuis peu, lately, not long ago, a little while ago. 

a pied, on foot. 

a pieds nuds, barefoot, barefooted. 

Aupis aller, let the worst come to the worst. 

Depis en pis, worse and worse. 

Depleingre, with a good will, freely. 

De plein pied, on the same floor. 

a pleines mains, largely* 

Plus, more, above. 

Plus — Plus, the more — the more. 

Plus quHl n'en faut, more than enough. 

Au plus, tout au plus, at the most. 

De phis en plus, more and more. 

a plus forte raison, much rather, much more so. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Did my brothers tell you whence they came ? - • 

Which way are they gone ? - - The hole through 

which they (made their escape) was so small, that 1 

s'echapper, v. 
do not know how they could get out. - - Do you know 

sortir, v. 
your lesson ? Yes, Sir. - - The barrel is pierced 

baril,m. 
through. - - I will follow you step by step. « - 

The battle was cruel and bloody, and 

combat, m. sanglant, adj. 

kept up a long time with an equal advantage 

se maintenir, v. 
on both sides. - - I can find my book no-where. - - 



375 

There is no going any-ivhere in winter. - - He speaks 

so low, that I can hardly hear what he says. - - The 

Spaniards pursued them so closely that they 

Espagnol, m. de si pres, adv. 

entered the town helter-skelter, - - I shall see you 

perhaps to-morrow. - - He has little money. - - If you 

give me a verb, I will learn it by little and little. - - 

She is as tall as you, or thereabouts. - - I heard that 

your sister will (be married) in a short time. - - Have 

se marier 
you heard from your mother lately ? - - I received a 

letter from her not long ago. - - I was on foot, and 
he was in a coach. - - I often pity the poor little 

chimney sweepers, who walk barefooted in 

cheminee, f. ramoneur, m. 

winter. - - Let the worst come to the -worst, I will 

(get rid) of it. - - Your brother writes worse 

se d£faire,\. 

and worse. - - He submitted to it with a good zvill. - ~ 

se soumettre • 
All our rooms are on the same floor. - - He is so cha- 
ritable, that he gives alms largely. - - I shall 

aumone, f. 
never more complain of the rude reception 

malhonnete,a.dj. accueil,m. 
which your uncle has given to my father. - - I have 

Jm7,p.p. 
written three letters, neither more nor less. - - You 

are above twenty years old. - - The more we are 



S76 

above others, the more it becomes us to be 

an dessus de, p. de 

modest and humble. - - You give me more than 

enough. - - You study more than ever. - - How many 

coats have you ? I have six at the most. - - I shall 

endeavour to deserye your kindness more and more. 

- - If I have done that to oblige my friend, I 

pour, p. 
would much more so do it for my relations. 



ADVERBS 

Plutot, sooner. 

Point du tout, not at all. 

a point nommi, seasonably. 

Tout a point, in the nick of time. 

apropos, seasonably. 

Pourquoi ? or que ne ? why ? 

Deprls, near, nearly, narrowly. 

fWeVemen/, > fi . ^ , 

fan premier Lieu, y l 

Des a present, from this moment. 

Presque, almost, hardly. 

Presque jamais, hardly ever. 

Presque toujours, most commonly. 

De propos dilibiri, on purpose, purposely, deliberately . 

Par cas fortuit, by chance, accidentally. 

Par derricre, behind. 

Par dessus le marche, into the bargain. 

Par en has, downward. 

Par en haut, upward. 

Par malice, through ill-nature, out of ill-nature>. 

Par megarde, unawares, 

Par terre, upon the ground) down,. 



377 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

My father arrived yesterday sooner than we ex- 

ne 
pected him. - - How do you like that book ? Not at 

all. - - You come very seasonably, and your brother 

came in the nick of time. - - He speaks little, but he 

speaks seasonably. - - Why do you not learn your 

lessons better ? - - Why do not you come yourself? 

- - Your dog is so snarling, that there is no ap- 

hargneux,Z(\j. 
proaching him near. - - He narrowly escaped 

being killed. - - In the first place, I must tell 

tf£tre,v. 

you, that I shall punish you, if you do not 

behave better. - - From this moment I begin to 

se comporter,v. a 

believe that you are altered. - - You are almost 

change, p.p. 
as tall as I am. - - He is hardly ever at home. - - We 

dine most commonly between three and four o'clock. 
entre, p. 

- - They killed him purposely. - - I met him by chance. 

- - That has happened accidentally. •■ - He struck 

f rapper, v. 
his enemy behind. - - He gave me three yards of 

muslin into the bargain. - - Shall I begin 'dozun- 

rnousseline, f. 

ward or upward ? - - Begin dowmvard. - - He has 

torn t my book through ill-nature. - - If I have 

dechirer, v. 

32* 



done him any harm, certainly I did it unawares* • - 

I always find your books and hat upon the ground* 

- - It was Peter who threw me down, 
jetter, v. 

ADVERBS. 

Quand ? when ? 

Depuis quand ? how long is it since ? 

Que ? why ? how ? 

Quelquefois, sometimes. 

a quoi bon ? to what purpose ? 

Rarement, seldom. 

Au reste, ) ... 

r, , ' > as to the rest. 

Uu reste, y 

a rebours, the wrong way. 

a la renverse, backward, upon one's back* 

a reculons, backward. 

a rez de'chausste, even with the ground* 

sens devant derriere, preposterously. 

Seyis dessus dessous, topsy-turvy. 

Dt tons sens, ) 

De tous les sens, y J J' 

Separement, separately. 

Seulement, only.* 

De sang froid, in cold blood. 

De suite, together, one after another. 

Dans la suite, ) afterward . 

Par la suite, y 

Sur le champ, directly, upon the spot. 

Surement, safely. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS* 

When shall I have the pleasure of seeing you ? - - 

Flow long is it since you lived in London 1 - - Why do 

a 

* Only is also expressed, in French, by ne before the verb and que. 
after it, when it becomes a conjunction. 



S79 

you not come to see us sometimes ? - - To what pur- 

pose shall I write to him ? - - He writes to me very 

seldom, - - As to the rest, do as you please. - - You 

do every thing the wrong way. - - - You hold your 

book the wrong way. - - He fell upon his back. - - - 

If you walk backzcard, you will fall backward. - - Our 

eating-room is even with the ground. - - You put all 

your things preposterously. - - She has left (every 

thing) topsy-turvy. - - You may find it every- 

pouvoir,\. 
where. - - He defeated them separately. - - I only saw 

him once. - - He committed the murder in cold 

meurtre, m. 
blood. - - They go together. - - He will give you much 

pleasure afterward. - - Do directly what I bid 

dire, v. 
you. - - We arrived safely. 

ADVERBS. 

Tant, so much, so many. 

Tant mieux, so much the better. 

Tant pis, so much the worse. 

Tantot, by and by, sometimes. 

Tantot — Tantot, sometimes — sometimes. 

Tot, ) 

D . ',„. > soon. 

Bientot, > 

Tot ou tard, one time or other, sooner or later, soon or 

late. 

Tant soit pen, very little, ever so little. 

Tard, late. 



380 

a, terns, time enough, in proper tome. 

De long-terns, for a long time, this long while. 

De tern, en Urns, i nQw d ft from , ime tQ ^ 

.De terns a autre, ) 

a tort, wrongfully. 

a tort ou a droit, right or wrong. 

a tort et a travers, at random. 

Trop, too much. 

Toujour s, always, ever. 

Pour toujours, for ever. 

Tous hs jours, every day. 

Tour a tour, by turns. 

Tout, quite, wholly, thoroughly, entirely.* 

Tout a coup, suddenly, on a sudden, all at once. 

Tout has, softly, with a low voice. 

Tout cPun coup, suddenly, on a sudden, all at once. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

He has so much money, and so many goods, 

that he does not know what to do (with them.) - - 

en, pro. 
(It is) so much the better for me, but it will be so 
C'esf, v. ce 

much the worse for you. - - My father will come back 

revenir, v. 
by and by. - - Sometimes you write well, some- 
times you write very badly. - - My father says I shall 
soon go to France. - - Have patience, you will suc- 
ceed one time or other. - - The sun is the em- 
blem of truth, which dispels, sooner or later, the 
dissiper, v. 

* This adverb takes the nature of a noun adjective, and becomes 
declinable, in French, when placed before another adjective feminine 
beginning with a consonant: ex. 

Ces femmes paroissoient lout These women seemed quite fright- 
tjfraycts tl toutes const ernies, ened and quite dismayed. 



381 
vapours of slander. - - Dia* he give you any meat?' 

- - He gave me very little. - - You arrived late, but I 

came in proper time. - - I have not heard from my 

brother for a long time, - - Come and see us now and 

then, - - You accuse him wrongfully* - - Right or 

wrong he will speak, and always speaks at 

vouloir^v. 
random. - • Give him a little money, but never give 

him too much. - - You always contradict me when I 

speak. - - my children ! be ever good, and you will be 

ever happy. - - I bid you adieu for ever. - - I go every 

dire,v. 
day to town. - - We will dance by tarns. - - I am 

quite tired with repeating the same things. - - My 

de 
sisters were quite transported with joy when they 

de 
heard the happy news of the victory. - - Misfortunes 

come sometimes suddenly upon us. - - Speak softly. 

- - A storm arose suddenly, and all the sailors 

s'e7ei?er,v. 
were quite frightened. - - The ladies I saw at the 

a 
play were quite young and agreeable. - - He has more 

brilliancy than solidity. - - Science is estimable., 
brillant. m. solide, m. 

but virtue is more so. 

davantage,adv. 



382 

ADVERBS. 

Tout a fait, quite. 

Tout a Vheure, this minute, presently. 

Tout droit, straight along. 

Tout de bon, in good earnest. 

Tout de long, all along. 

Tout franc, frankly, freely. 

Tout haul, aloud. 

Tout outre, through and through. 

a tout bout de champ, ) 

a , r > at every turn. 

a tous coups, ) J 

a tous egards, in all respects. 

De toutes ses forces, with all his or her might. 

Par tout, every-where. 

Par tout oil, wherever. 



vlument, \ 1 uick1 ?- 



Vivement, ) , ,» . , 

a •/. > to the quick. 
Jiu vif, 5 

a vide, empty. 

Au plus vite, with all speed. 

Void, here is, behold. 

Voila, there is, behold. 

a vue deceit, perceptibly. 

Y, there, therein, within, thither. 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

You are quite altered. - - I will do it presently, - • 

If you do not come this minute, I shall go and 

fetch you. - - Go straight along, - - Do you be- 

chercher, v. 

lieve it in good earnest ? - - He was lain down all 

couche, p.p. 
along, - - He acts frankly, and speaks aloud. - - He 

ran him through and through, - - She speaks 

percer, v. 



383 

at every turn, without knowing what she says. - - 

sans, p. savoir, v. 
She is better than her sister in all respects. - - He 

struck me with all his might. - - I have (looked 
frapper, v. cher- 

for) you every-where. - - I will follow you wherever 
cher, v. 

you go. - - Set out quickly. - - Her misfortunes 
(by the fut.) malheur, m. 

touch me to the quick. - - The coach was returning 

empty. - - Go with all speed to Mrs. Lucas, and 

chez, p, 
tell her to come directly. - - Here is my room, and 

de 
there is yours. - - These children grow percep- 

grandir,v. 
tibly, - - Go thither instantly. 



SECT. VII. 

OF PREPOSITIONS. 

Prepositions are divided into the three following 
classes. First, those that govern the genitive or abla- 
tive case. Secondly, those that govern the dative. And, 
lastly, those that govern the accusative. 

First, the following govern the genitive or ablative. 

Autour de, about, round. 

a cause de, because of, on account of. 

a cause de vous, de lui, d\lle, de nous, &c. on your, his, 

her, our, fyc. account. 
a cote de, 3side, by. 

a couvert de, free, secure, or screened from. 
a jleur de, close to, even with, 
a moins de, under. 



384 

a force de* by dint of. 

a raison de, at the rate of. 

a Vabri de, sheltered from. 

a Pegal de, in comparison of. 

a Vigard de, with regard, with respect, as to, concerning 

a la faveur de, by means of. 

a Vinsqu de, without the knowledge of, unknown to. 

a la maniere de. } . e , .. ... 

a la mode de, \ ln or after the manner or fashlon of - 

a V opposite de, ) . , 

Visavhde, I °ver-aga. DS t. 

'InSSt', |° nthisside - 

Au dela de, on that side, on the other side, 

Au dehors de, out, without. 

Au dessus de, above, over. upon. 

Au dessous de, under, below, beneath. 

Au devant de, before. 

Alter au devant de, to go to meet. 

Au derriere de, behind, in the back part. 

Au dedans de, in, within. 

Au lieu de, instead of. 

Au milieu de, in the middle of. 

Au prix de, en comparaison de, in comparison to, 

Aux enviro?is de, about, round about. 

Ensuite de, after. 

Faule de, for want of. 

a la hauteur de, (sea term), oft 

Hors de, out of. 

he long de, along. 

Loin de, far from. 

Pres or proche de, ) . , , 

Avpri.Se, j near, or nigh, by. 

Pour V amour de moi, de lui, dhlle, de vous, &c. for 

my sake, for his, her, your sake, <frc. 
Tout aupres de, close, hard by. 
& Vepreuve de, proof, (able to resist). 

* This preposition is sometimes Englished by tvith : ex. 
Ilpleure a force de rite? He cries with laughing. 



385 



EXERCiSE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

Come this way ; we shall walk round the meadow. - - 

prairie, f. 
I have sent nothing to your brother because of his idle- 
ness, but I forgive him on your account* - - Sit down by 

that lady's sister. - - Endeavour to set yourself 

mettre^v. 
free from blame. - - We are not yet secure from all 

danger. - - Cut that sorrel even with the ground, 

oseille, f. 

- - He is become a very good master by dint of 

study and practice. T - He will not sell it under 

vouleir, v. 
twelve guineas. - - My brother bought yesterday 

twenty pair of silk stockings at the rate of fourteen 

shillings and sixpence a pair. - - Under that tree 

Sous, p. 
we shall be sheltered from the rain. - - Your horse 

(is worth) very little in comparison of his. - - With 

valoir, v. 
regard to what you say, I do not mind it. 

se soucier,v. en 

- - All the prisoners (made their escape) by means of 

s'ichapper, v. 
the darkness of the night. - - Your brother is 

obscuriie^L 
gone to London without the knowledge of your 

mother. - - He (left off) Latin unknown to his 

qui Her, v. 
father. - - Now the English ladies (dress themselves) 

s'habiller, v. 
after the French fashion. - - Mrs. Tart lives in 

demeurer,Y* 
33 



386 

the Strand over-againsl Catharine-street. - - We now 

live on this side of the river. - - Do not you say that 

demeurer 

you met my father on the other side of the hridge ? 

- - Why did you stay out of the house ? - - Mrs. A. 

is very proud, she thinks herself above every body, 

se croire 
and consequently she (looks upon) every body as 

regarder,\. 
beneath her. - - Did you observe the elegant 

remarquer^v. 
lady who was in the box below you ? - - There 

loge,f. 
is a large tree before the house. - - I am 

going to meet my aunt, will you accompany me ? - - 

My uncle has a rich plantation in the back 

part of Virginia. - - There is a fine statue within the 

garden. - - He took my hat instead of his. - - Let us 

go in the middle of the meadow. - - My house (is 

va- 
good for) nothing in comparison of hers. - - He 
ZoiY, v. 
walks two or three times a * day about the garden. - - 

foisj. 
We drank tea, after which we went to 

prmdre,v. quoi, pro. 

the play. - - I can do nothing for want of money. - - 

They were off the Cape of Good Hope when they 

were taken. - - Do not push , me out of the 

pousser^v. 

* Remember the observations after the article m», ime, a or an, 
page 48. 



387 
room. - - He is gone along the river. We are still 

far from our house. - - I met your friend Mr. A. 

near the church. - - My mother was buried nigh thi-s 

marble pillar. - - He passed by me without knowing 

sans, p. connoitre 
me. - - 1 do it for your sake as well as for theirs. 

%- My best friend lives close to the Royal Exchange, 

demeurer 
and he lived formerly close to St. James's palace. - - 

The officers and soldiers were lodged in barracks 

caserne,?. 
cannon and bomb-proof. - - My shoemaker very 
canon, m. bombe,i. pi. 

much wanted to make me a pair of boots water- 

disirer,\. 
proof but I had not money enough to pay 

pour, p. 
him. 

Secondly, the following govern the dative, 

Conformement, according, pursuant. 

usqu ,^ t j.jj unt jj even l0 as f ar ag> to> 
Jusques a, $ ' ' 

Par rapport a, with respect to, on account of. 
Quant a, as for, as to. 

EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

A candid and sincere man always speaks and acts 

according to what he thinks. - - He has been punished 

pursuant to an act of parliament. - - Yesterday we 

parlemenl,rc\. 
waited for him till five o'clock in the morning. - - 

du 



388 
They fought with obstinacy on both sides until the 

beginning of the night. - - If I had not stopped him, 
entree, f. 

he would have gone even to Dover. - - We accompa- 
nied them as far us Rochester, and they pursued 
their way to Canterbury. - - I will do it with respect 
to you, but never on account of them. - - As for me 
I will not give him a penny. - - As for us we were 
very much dissatisfied, I assure you. - - As to what 

people may say, I do not care for it* 

pouvoir, v. (fut.) se soucier, v. 

Thirdly, the following require the accusative. 

Apres, after. 

D'apres, after.* 

Avant, before. 

Avec, with. 

a travers, cross, through. 

Chez, in, to, at, among. 

Chez moi, chez toi, chez lux, chez elie, chez nous, &c. at o- 

to my, thy, his, her, our, fyc, house. 
Contre, against. 
Dans, in, into, within. 
JDe, about, through. 
Depuis, since, from. 
Derriere, behind. 
Dts, from. 
Devant, before. 
De dessus, from the top. 
De dessous, from under, from beneath. 
Durant, during. 

* We make use of this preposition in the following sense only i— 
II }Hint cPa-pres un bon matt re, He paints after a good master. 



389 

£n, in, into, like, as a, at. 

Entre, between. 

Envers, towards, with regard to. 

Environ, about. 

Excepts, } 

Hors, > except, but, save. 

HGrmis, 3 

Moyeixnant, for, provided. 

~MaM an '' } notwithstanding, in spite of. 

Outre, beside. 
Par, by, through. 
Par deca, on this side. 
Par dela, on that side. 
Par derriere, behind. 
Par dessus, above, over. 
Par dessous, under, below. 
Parmi, among. 
Pendant, during, for. 
Pour, for. 
Sans, without. 
Sauf, saving, but with. 

a • . I according ttf. 
Swvant, > ° 

Sous, under. 

Sur, upon, about. 

Tcnchant. concerning, about. 

Vers, towards, to. 

EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

He arrived here an hour after you. - ■ Miss A. 

paints after nature. - - Let me drink before you. - - 

Laisser,r. 
Did you not see her walk with her father ? - - It was 

the ancient Britons, who cut a road through 

chemin, m. 
this mountain. - - Such was the custom among the 
33* 



390 

Komans. - - 1 was going to your house : but as 1 have 

met you, we will go to my house, where we shall dine. 

- - Do not lean against that wall* - - Go and 

s'appvyer,v. x> 

take a walk in the garden. - - I am going into my 

faire un lour 
room. - - Keep yourself within the limits of de- 

Tenir, v. 
cency. - - 1 spoke to your father about your affairs. - - 

His father died through grief. - - I have not heard 

from her since her departure. - - Go into my room ; 

you will find a letter behind the looking-glass ; 

miroir, ni. 
(be so kind as) to bring it to me. - - From this mo- 
avoir la bonti, de 
ment 1 believe you. - - Do not put yourself before 

me. - - We saw the camp from the top of the hill. - - 
I saw it from under a tree. - - He behaved well during 
your absence. - - My sister is in England. - - He be- 
haved like an honest man in that affair. - - He acts as 
a tender father who loves )ou. - - Tell nobody what 

passed between you and me. - - Be n«t unjust towards 

se passer 

your neighbours. - - It was about four o'clock when 

2?roi7iam,m.shjg. 
we set out. - - Take all that you please except my 

vouloir, (fut.) 
sword. - - I give you all my books, but the History of 



391 

France. - - They were all drowned save my friend. - - 

it oyer, v. 
He will do it for two guineas. - - I walk every day 

notwithstanding the bad weather. - - I hope you will 

succeed in your undertaking in spite of Mrs. Slander. 
riussir 

- - Beside his own money, he spends all his sister's. 

- - }t is said that Gibraltar is (blocked up) by land 

bloquer, v. 
and by sea. - - 1 have passed through France and 

Italy. -• - We have passed through Germany. - - He 

Alltmagne* 
lives on this side, and his brother on that side of 

London. - - He is a coward who attacks his enemy 

behind. - - Let us see whether you can jump over 

s?,c. sauter,v. 

the table. - - Look under the door, and you will see 

it. - - Envy, jealousy, and slander, always reign 

medisance, f. 
among authors. - - What have you done during my ab- 
sence ? - - I have been expecting you for a long time. 
* - - Your aunt has sent me some books for you. - - - 

Withouth'un what could 1 have done?- A woman may 

pouvoir, 
please without beauty, but she cannot succeed without 

Virtue. - - He always goes out without me. - - The 

army marched three days and three nights without 

stopping. - - He carried away all my furniture, saving 

mewfc/es,m.pl. 



392 

my bed. - - Do 1 not live* according to the rules 

regie, f. 
which you have prescribed ? - - 1 found your buckle 

prescrire, v. boucle, f. 

under the chair. - - You said you had left it upoti 

chaise, f. laisser, v. 

the table. - - How could I lend you a guinea ? I had no 

money about me. - - Did not my brother write to you 

concerning that affair ? - - It was towards the evening 

when he arrived. 

OBSERVATIONS on some PREPOSITIONS. 

Above, This preposition, when preceding a noun 
expressing time or number, so as to signify more than 
or longer than, is to be rendered in French by plus de : 
ex. 

Le combat dura plus de -The fight lasted above 
deux heures, two hours. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

My brother was not above twenty years old, when 

he (was married). - - He made us wait above a week. - - 

se marier 
My father's country-house is very handsome, but it 

costs him above six thousand pounds. - - In the last 

sea-fight which took place between the French and 

the English, above twelve hundred men perished in 

the action on the side of the French, and the 

du, 

* See the N. B. before the Exercises upon the first Conjugation, 

page 178. 



$93 
English took above fifteen ships of the line. - - It is 

above a year since my cousin set off for Jamaica. 

J ama'ique,i. 

At is most commonly rendered hy a, and some- 
times by one of the French articles an, a la, a l\ aux, 
according to the gender and number of the noun fol- 
lowing : ex. 

Nous etions a diner, We were at dinner. 

Elle est a la maison, She is at home. 

// joue bien aux cartes, He plays well at cards. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

If you be at Rome, live as they do at Rome. - - 
vivre on, 
We will get up next week at six o'clock. - - When I 

se lever 
called -upon Mr. B. he was at breakfast. - - Every 
passer 
thing I have is at your service. - - My brother is at 

Mr. H's. academy. - - Were you at Mrs. C's. ball last 

week ? - - You always travel by night at the peril of 

your life. - - I will pay you at the end of the year. - - 

My mother is at the height of happiness. - - He plays 

comble 
very well at chess, and his companion begins 

tehees, m. pi. 
to play a little at draughts. - - He did it at the insti- 

dames,L pi, 
gation of his friend. 

After nouns or verbs denoting anger, derision, joy, 
provocation, resentment, sorrow, surprise, or concern, at is 
rendered by one of the following articles, de, du^ de la % 
de l\ des : ex. 



394 

// se rnoque de vous, He laughs at you. 

Je me rejouis de voire I rejoice at your good 

bonheur, luck. 

Nous sornmes surpris de ce We are surprised at what 

que vous dries, you say. 

EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

Exasperated at his conduct, he told him never to 

I r rite, adj. 
laugh at poor people. - - We always ought to rejoice 
se moquer, devoir 

at the good fortune which befalls our neighbours. 

arriver, v. a 
- - I am vexed at the news which we received last 

week. - - A good Christian never shows any resent- 
ment at the injuries which are offered to him. - - He 

fairc 
always smiles at (every thing) which is said. - - A pa- 

tout 
lient man never grieves at his misfortunes. - - - 

s^attrister^v. 
I cannot help being surprised at her manner 

s^empicher^Y.de 
of answering. - - I am concerned at the loss which 

you sustained in your trade. - - He was so mortified 

essuyer,v, 
at the disobedience of his sons, that he died through 

de 
grief. 

Jit is rendered by chez, when, in English, it precedes 
the word house, either expressed or understood, and the 
same rule is to be observed with respect to the preposi- 
tion to : ex. 

J'etois chez voire frcre, I was at your brother's. 

Je vais chez Madame I am going to Mrs. 
Lucas. Lucas's, 



yyo 



EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITIONS. 

I (called upon) Miss Brown this morning, as 1 had 
passer 
promised your mother, but she was not at home. - - 

a 
Where was she then ? She was at her aunt ? s. - - I 

thought my friend was at his father's, but I mistook, 

se tromper 
for he was at his uncle's. - - How long have you been 

at Mr. H's. ! - - We lodge at mj friend's, but we board 

manger 

at the pastry-cook's. - - ]i you go to my brother, tell 

him to come to my cousin's, where I am to spend 

de passer,v t 

the day. and we will go together to his friend's. 

By. when preceding a numeral adjective immediately 
followed by another adjective expressing the dimension 
or superficies of 3n object, is rendered in French b\ mr, 

and when it precedes a verb in the participle active, it 
is then rendered by en : ex. 

Ceite chambre a dix pitch This room is ten feet 

dt longueur snr sept et long by seven and half 

demi de largev.r. wide. 

En agissant cimi. zous By acting thus, you will 

zous ftrtz des ennemis, get enemies. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

My box is a foot and a half deep by two wide and 

four. long. - ■ The general (drew up) his army in order 

ranger, v. en 

of battle, and planed his best soldier? in length by 



396 

fifty feet deep. * - Our (school-room) at Alfred 

ecole, L 
House, Camberwell, is forty feet long by 

thirty-six wide, and our play-ground contains above 

an acre of land. - - You will soon speak French 

arpent, m. 
by applying so. - - Your father gets a considerable 

s'appliquer faire, v. 

fortune by buying cheap and selling dear. - - Men 

acquire learning by working and not by sleeping. - - 

Water hollows a stone, not by falling with force, 

creuser,v, 
but by falling often ; so a man becomes learned, not 

by studying with force, but by studying often. 

By, after the verbs to sell, to buy, to work, and the 
like, preceding a noun of weight or measure, day, week, 
month, or year, is rendered into French by a, au, a la, a 
l\ aux, according to the gender and number of the fol- 
lowing noun : ex. 

Je we vends rien a la I sell nothing by the 

livre, pound. 

// achete ton jours a Yaune, He always buys by the ell. 

Nous iravaillons a Yheure, We work by the hour, or 

ou a la journie, by the day. 

EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

Always buy tea by the pound, and never by the 

ounce, you will get it cheaper. - - I never buy my 

avoir 
-cloth by the ell, but by the piece. - - It is a sad thing 

to buy coals by the bushel. - - How do you sell your 

de 

brandy? We sell it by the gallon, and not by the 



o97 

... - - He sells Lis wine Eg (be dozen. - • I sei 

eggs hu the hundred, and cbesoots by the quarter. 

- - Hew do you measure your cambric ? by the el!, 

6afj*fe,m. 

or by the yard ? - - Do you buy cider by the hogshead, 

tonrtr.au. m. 
or by the pipe ? - - Does your father work by the 

week or the month ? - - No. Sir. he works bv the vear. 

I always thought he worked by the piece. 

By. immediately following the verbs to kill to remind, 
to knock r. : . and the like, is made into French, by 
i coup de, when it expresses Ibe effect, blow, thrust, 
stroke, firing. *jcc. of an instrument by which a man was 
either killed, wounded, 6cc. provided the blows have 
not been repeated : if the blows have been repeated, we 
make use of a coups de. in which case it is most com- 
monly rendered in English by with : ex. 

II fat bltsst cVun coup d'. He was wounded by an 

jteche, arrow. 

Hi Passcmmeraii a coups They knocked him down 

mth a stick. 

EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

Achilles was killed at the siege of Troy by an 
au 
arr: ::h Paris, king Priam's son. (let fly) 

- ocher.v. 
at his heel. - - (Unable to) catch the thief, 

talon. m. .Vg pou-oir attrcper.v. 

they knocked him down ui:h a stick. - - At last 

£Y*/m.adv. 
5, having broke his battle-axe and 

bc-che-d* arm*?. (. 
sword by the force of his blows, was knocked down 



398 

by a stone, and taken prisoner. - • William the 

/a**,p.*, 
Second was killed by an arrow in the New-Forest. - * 

My brother was wounded by a gun, and my 

fusils m. 
cousin was killed by a cannon-ball. - - Edward the 

boulet de canon,m. 
First was wounded in Palestine with a poisoned 

dagger. - - He is so strong, that with his fist he 

poignard^m. 

could knock down an ox. - - He threw my brother 

down, and almost killed him with his feet. - - 

par terre, 

They killed feim not with stones, but with arrows. - - 

The soldiers kill one another with bayonets, and the 

st tuer 
officers with sabres and sworOs. - - My mother's 

watch (goes too fast) by half an hour, but yours 

avancer, v* 
(goes too slow) by twenty minutes. 
retarder, v. 

For, after reflected verbs, as also those which denote 
thanksgivings &c. is rendered by one of the following 
articles, de, du, de la, de /', des : ex. 

Je me rejouis du service I rejoice for the service 
quHl vous a rendu, et je which he has done to 
Pin remercierai demain, you, and will thank 

him to-morrow for it. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

1 am very grateful for all the kindness 

reconnoissani, adj. bonte,L 

you have had for mo. - - He is very sorry for the 



399 

grief he has caused you. - - When we have reached 

atteindre, v. 
the age of reason, we are often sorry, but too late, 

for the time we lost when we were young. - - My 

brother desired me to thank you for the part you 

de 
took in his troubles. - - Every one leaped for joy, 

peine, f. tressaillir 

when the happy news of peace arrived. - - A child 

who cares little for those who gave him life, 

se soucier, v. 
is an unnatural being. - - An ungrateful son will be 

denature, adj, 
punished (one time or other) for his ingratitude. 

From* preceding the name of a man or woman, or one 
of the personal, possessive, relative, or interrogative pro- 
nouns, after the verbs to go, to come, to send, &.c. is gen- 
erally rendered in French by de la part de, or de ma, de 
sa, de notre part, de voire part, &c. : ex. 

Allez de ma part chez Go from me to Mr. D. 

Mons. D. 
Je viens de sa part, J come from him or her. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

Go from me to Miss Dunkin's and tell her I shall 
be glad to see her : no, stop a little, tell her that 
you come from my cousin, who has something very 
pretty to show her. - - From whom do you come ? 
said she to me. - - Madame, replied I to her, I come 
from my parents, who sent me. - - Well, answered 



400 
she,* any one is alwa3 7 s welcome, who comes from 
them. - - Send from me to Mr. Lucas, and let him 

know that I am (very much) vexed at the letter 1 

Ires de 

received from him ; 1 never could Lave expected 

s^attendre^v. 
to receive such an affront from such a gentleman. 
a 

In requires some attention from the learner, who is 
to observe that dans always conveys a limited idea, 
and is followed by the article ; when, on the contrary, 
en conveys a very determinate idea, and seldom admits 
of the article, whether expressed in English or not : 
ex. 

II est dans la maison, He is in the house. 

Elle est en Angleterre, She is in England. 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

He always keeps himself shut up in his room. - -> 

Take all the linen which I shall want in our jour 

linge,m* 
ney, and put it into my box. - - Walk into the parlour. 

- - We live in the county of Surrey. - - Is there a good 

fire in the room ? - - Ovid, one of the finest poets of 

the Augustan age, expired in the seventeenth 

d^uguste.m* siecle,m. 
year of our Lord, at Tomi, near Varna, on the 

sur,p. 
western coast of the Black Sea, whither he 

occidental^ Ay cote,f. 
had been banished by the emperor Augustus. - - - 

Is your sister in France?. * No, madam, she is in 



401 

Spain. - - How long do you intend to stay in town ? - - 

Sir, do you keep house ? - - No, we live in 

(ready furnished) lodgings. - - When we are in 

garni, adj. chambre, f. on 

peace, people talk of war ; and when in war, they 

on on 

talk of peace. - - Your eldest son behaved like a 

hero. - - If my son behave like an honest man, I shall 

act towards him as a tender father. - - In what does 

human happiness consist? - - If you wish to be happy 

and esteemed in this world, live like a man of 

honour and probity. - - He walks in the garden with 

his friend. - - He is gone to spend the winter in 

Italy. - - The American navy officers have acted 

like heroes. 

In, after words denoting pain, hurting, or wounding, 
and preceding one of the possessive pronouns in con- 
junction with any part of the body, is to be rendered by 
one of the following articles, a, au, a la, a /', aux, and 
the possessive pronoun left out ; and when in precedes 
a noun denoting a part of time, it is not to be expressed 
in French : ex. 



II itoit blessi au bras et He was wounded in his 
non a. la jambe, arm, and not in his leg, 

Vous le irouverez toujours You will always find him 
chez lui le matin, at home in the morn- 

ing. 
34* 



4M 

EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

My brother has constantly a pain in his head, and 

I have very often a pain in my teeth. - - Never eat 

any fruit which is not ripe, for there is nothing 

more apt to give you a pain in your stomach. - - My 

companion, by jumping over a form, (fell down), 

banc, m. tomber,v. 
and was much hurt in the shoulder. - - Your brother 

was wounded in the arm, but not dangerously, and 

my cousin was mortally wounded in the head. - - 

My master comes generally in the morning. - - I will 

call upon you in the afternoon, and in the evening go 

to the play. 

On or upon. This preposition is rendered by de after 
the verbs to depend, to live, to subsist, and the like ; and 
by one of the following articles, de, Jm, de la, de l\ des, 
after the verb to play, preceding the name of an instru- 
ment : and before the days of the week and the names 
of the month, preceded by a numeral adjective the 
above preposition must not be expressed : ex. 

II vit de pain et d'eaw, He lives on bread and 

water. 
Vous jouez du violon, et il You play on the violin, 
joue de la flute, and he plays on the 

flute. 
Cela arriva le dix-huit du That happened on the 
mois dernier, eighteenth of last month. 



403 

EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

We all depend upon divine mercy. - - A 

misericorde, f. 
good end generally depends on a good beginning. - - 

Men do not live only on bread and meat, but on the 

grace of God. - - Birds subsist upon what they can 

catch. - - What do you live upon, you who never eat 

any meat ? - - In winter 1 live on milk and vegetables, 

and in summer 1 live upon bread and butter, cheese, and 

all sorts of fruits. - - Upon what instrument does your 

sister play ? - - She plays very well on the harpsichord, 

and she is now learning to play on the harp. - - Come 

on Friday early, and I will go to see you on the Saturday 

following. - - Why did you not play on the violin on 

Wednesday last ? - - On June the eighth, 1376, died 

Edward, prince of Wales, the delight of the 

(in the pi.) 
nation, in the forty-sixth year of his age. - - - On the 

third of June, 1664, the English obtained a great victo- 
ry over the Dutch off Harwich, took eighteen 

Hollandois, m. 
ships, and destroyed fourteen more. 

Over, This preposition is commonly rendered in 
French by sur ; but it must be rendered by the partici- 
ple passive of the verbs jinir, passer, achever, when it 
denotes an action ended ; ex. 



404 

// a Vavantage sur vous. He has the advantage 

over you. 
Voire frere pariit des que Your brother set out as 
la pluie fut passee, soon as the rain was 

over. 
Le diner est-il fini ? Is dinner over ? 



EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

A coach passed over his body and killed him. - - 

Tullia, Tarquinius' wife, the unnatural daughter 

denature, adj. 
of Servius king of Rome, ordered her coachman 

ordonner a 
to drive over the dead body of her father. - - In 
de passer, v. 
going to London, did you go over Westminster 

bridge ? - - Yes, but in coming back I passed over 

Blackfriars bridge. - - They dissolved the army 

disperse^ v. 
as soon as it was resolved that the campaign was 

over. - - In France they drink coffee as soon as 

prendre 
dinner is over. - - You may go and walk when 

(by the fut.) 
the rain is over. - - They fought well, and the 

(by the fut.) 
battle was soon over. 

With is rendered by dans, when it is used before 
nouns denoting the purpose, design, or motive of the 
agent : ex. 

// le Jit dans Vattenie oVetre He did it with an ex- 
bien recompense. pectation of being well 

rewarded. 



405 



EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

He poisoned his brother with the hope of 

empoisonner, v. 
inheriting his estates. - - My brother is gone to 
heriter, v. de bien, m. 
your house with the design of scolding you 

gronder,y. 
well. - - He who beats another with the intention of 

killing him, is a murderer at the bottom of his 
heart. - - He did it with the intention of pleasing 
you, and not with any design of hurting you. - - I 
went last week to Mr. Olympus, with the expecta- 
tion of receiving the money which I lent him a 
month ago, but he was not at home. - - I live with 
the hope of receiving it (one time or another). - - 
He said so with a design of deceiving you, if he 
could. 

With must be made by de after the following 
verbs, to starve, to die, to do, to dispense, to meddle, 
to encompass, to load, to cover, to strike, and those 
denoting fulness: likewise after the following adjec- 
tives, amorous, charmed, pleased, displeased, endowed, 
&c. ex. 

Elle meurt de froid et de She dies with cold and 

faim, hunger. 

Je suis content de ce que I am pleased with what I 

fai, have. 



406 



EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

Lazy people ought to die with hunger and 

devoir ', v_* 
cold. - - The winter was so severe, that I was dying 

with cold. - - They are so rich, that they do not know 

xvhat to do with their money. - - I hope you will dis- 

que «* 

pense me with that disagreeable (piece of work), 

besogne, f. 
- - Do not meddle with my affairs, meddle with your 

own. - - It is reported on all sides, that Paris is to be 

encompassed with walls. - - Do you see that waggon ? 

chariot, m. 
It is loaded with goods. - - Do you wish your house 

que 
(be) covered with slates or tiles ? - He was overwhelmed 
so?'/, v. tuile^f, accable,adj, 

with grief. - - The enemy, struck with terror and 

astonishment, ran away. - - Honour me zvith your 

commands. - - I have filled my cellar with good beer 

and excellent wine. - - Narcissus, seeing himself in a 

clear fountain, fell in love with his own 

devenir, v. amoureux, adj. 
person. - - I am charmed with the agreeable company 

of your sister. - - As to us, little satisfied with his 

answers, we took other measures. - - Are you not 



407 
pleased with the behaviour of your son Thomas ? - * 

You would be wroDg to be dissatisfied with 

avoir tort, de m6content,adj, 

him, for he behaved like an honest man in 

se conduire,v, 
that affair, and he is endowed with many good 

doue, adj. 
qualities. - - The man who meddles with nobody's 

affairs, but quietly follows his own, seldom makes 

himself enemies. 

With is rendered by contre after words denoting 
anger or passion : and before nouns denoting the 
matter, instruments, tools, or expressing how and in 
what manner a thing is done or made, it is rendered by 
one of the following articles, a, an, a la, a l\ aux, ac- 
cording to the gender and number of the foliov\ing 
noun : ex. 

Madame votre mere est tres- Your mother is very angry 

fdch.ee contre vovs, with you. 

Une table a tiroirs, A table with drawers. 

Dessiner au crayon, a la To draw with a pencil, 

craie, with chalk. 

Se battre a Yepee, au pis- To fight with swords, with 

tolet, pistols. 

EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION*. 

My brother was in 2 such 1 a passion 3 with me, that I 
si fO- colere, f. 
thought he would have beaten me. - - I believe what 
croire, v. 
you say, but I was very angry zoith her when she 

told me she would not do it. - - I live near the river, 



408 
and if you will come to see me, we will fish with a 

net or a line. - - Your brother and my cousin 

filet, m, ligne, f. 

fought with sabres and pistols ; the former was 

wouned in his thigh, and the latter in his side. - *• 

My house has been built with lime and sand. - - Did 

Miss Arnold show you the picture she has drawn 

with India ink ? - - No, but she showed me her 

Chine, f. 
mother's picture done with chalk, I assure you it is 

very like. - - Do not go so near that wall, it is newly 

ressem&/an/, adj. 

painted with (white lead). - - I bought a penknife with 

ceruse, f. 
two blades. - - The Americans fought bravely 

lame, f. se batlre 

with the English at New-Orleans. 
nouvelle 

With is not to be expressed after some verbs, such as, 
to meet with, to trust with, to supply with, to reproach with, 
&c. It is likewise to be suppressed where it expresses 
the situation, position, &c. of a person, or when it is used 
in the sense of having, holding, &c. : ex. 

// a essuye bien des cha~ i He has met with many 

grins, troubles. 

Nous lui fournirons, tout We will supply him with 

ce dont il aura besoin, every thing he wants. 

// se promene toujours un He always walks with a 
livre a la main, book in his hand, that 

is, having or holding a 
book, &c. 



409 

EXERCISE ON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

He met with so many mortifications from his 

essuyer, v. 
sons, that through grief he fell ill and died 

de lomber, v. 

almost with despair. - - When you meet 

rencontrer, v. 
a poor man, never reproach him with his poverty. 

but endeavour to furnish him with the means 

moyen,m» 
of emerging from his misery. - - I have trusted Mr. 

N. with my son's education, with the utmost con- 
fidence that he will answer my expectation. - - - The 
New River supplies London with all the water which 

the inhabitants stand in need of. - - I reproached 

avoir besoin.v, 
her with her ingratitude towards her benefactors. - - - 

He always walks round the premises with a stick in his 

baton,m. 

hand. - - Never speak to any body with your hat on 

k 

your head. - - He is represented on horseback, with 

a sword in his right-hand and a horse - pistol 
Vepee arcon, m.pistolet, VCk* 

in his left. 

gauche,adj. 

Without (sans) : this preposition is sometimes ex- 
pressed (in English) by the imperfect or compound of 
the imperfect of the verb to be, preceded by the con- 
junction if, and sometimes by but for,: ex. 
35 



410 

Sans vous, je ne sais ce que If it were not for you, I do 
je deviendrois, not know what would 

become of me. 
Sans lui, mon frcre auroit Had it not been for him, 
ete puni, my brother would have 

been punished. 
Sans elle, je serois mort de But for her, I should have 
faim, starved. 



EXERCISE ON THIS PREPOSITION. 

Without the assistance of the divine Providence, 
secours^m, 
what are we ? What are we capable of? - - Accord- 
ing to what you tell me, and what I have heard, 
she has a great deal of wit and merit ; and, but for 

that large scar which she has in her fore- 

gran J, adj. cicatrice, f. 
head, she would be very handsome. - - Had it not 

been for the help of good and honest people, what 

could you have done ? - - If it had not been for me, 

he never would have paid you. - - Were it not for rich 

and charitable persons, what would become of the 

poor and needy ? - - Our neighbour fell into the river, 

voisin^m, 
and but for my father, who was passing that way, he 

would have been drowned. - - Were it not for emula- 
te noyer,v. 
tion, (every thing) would languish in the world. 

tout 



411 

SECT. VIII. 

OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

Most of the conjunctions are adverbs and preposi- 
tions, but always attended by de or que. They -have 
been divided into copulative, comparative, disjunctive, ad- 
versative, casual, dubitative, exceptive, conditional, continu- 
ative, conclusive, &c. Instead of following this arrange- 
ment, it will be of more importance for the scholar to 
understand, that different conjunctions require different 
states of the verb. Some require the following verb in 
the infinitive mood, others in the indicative, and others 
again in the subjunctive. 

These require the following verb in the infinitive 

mood. 

Afin de, in order to. 

a mains de, or ) , 

' j > unless. 
a moins que de, ) 

Avant de, or ) , c 
n j t before. 

Avant que de, ) 

Au lieu de, instead of. 

De crainU de, or ) f f f 

De peur de, J 

Exceptt de, except to. 

Faute de, for want of. 

Jusqu'a, to that degree that, till. 

Loin de, far from. 

Plutot que de, rather than. 

EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 

In order to learn well, we must study with a 

on devoir, v. 
great deal of attention. - - It will be impossible for 

<<* 
you to learn French unless you be diligent. - - Let us 



412 

breakfast before we begin (any thing). - - A prudent 

rien, 
man ought to think several times, before he acts. * - 

agir,v. 
He is gone to church, instead of coming with us. - - 

I would not do it for fear of displeasing you. - - He 

is capable of (every thing) except of doing good. - - 

tout 
For want of sending for a surgeon in 

envoy er chercher,w. chirurgien,m. a 

time, he lost his arm. - - He carried his inso- 

pousser, v. 
lence to that degree that he spoke injurious words 

dire, v. 
to him. - - Your cousin has humbled himself, till 

s'humilier, v. 
he fell (on his) knees before the idol. - - Far from 

a 
exciting them to fight, I did all that I could in order 

a 
to prevent them. - - She would do (any thing) (in the) 

tout au 

world rather than speak to him. - - Rather than study, 

he loses his time, or spends it in trifles. 

passer, 

The following require the verb in the indicative mood. 

Ainsi que, * as. 

Tout ainsi que, * just as. 

Apres que, * after that, after. 

« cause que, ) . 

n * ' > because. 

farce que, 5 

a ce que, according ag, or to. 

d. condition que, on, or upon condition thak 

ft mesure que, * in proportion as, as, 

Au luu que, whereas. 

* See page 417. 



413 

Dcs le moment que, * the moment that. 

Aussi long-tems que, * as long as. 

Aussi loin que, * as far as. 

Aussitot que, } 

D^abord que, f * 

r>. * ' >* as soon as. 

JJes que, ( 

Sitot que, j 

Attendu que, considering that, seeing that. 

Comme, or ) % 

En tant que, } 

De faqon que, 

De manure que, 

De sorte que, )> in such manner that, so that, so. 

Si bien que, 

Tellement que, 

Depuis que, ever since, since. 

Puis que, since. 

De mime que, even as. 

£)'ow vient que, how comes it to pass that, why. 

£»9f...l • whan; 

Quana, 5 

Mais, but.f 

Outre que, beside that. 

a peine que, hardly, scarcely, — but, or when. 

Pendant que, > * wh[] ^ 

Tandis que, J 

Peut-etre que, perhaps. 

% uan i' . j though.' 

Quand meme, $ & 

Selonque, * accordi 
Suivant que,) & 

Tant que, * as long as. 
Que — de — ne, than only. 
Autant que, * as much as. 

t This conjunction, when beginning a sentence, is always rendered 
by mats. In the middle of a sentence, the word but is always ren- 
dered by ne before the verb, and que after it : ex. 
Je n'ai parte a votre frtre que I have spoken to your broth^f 

deux fois, but twice. 

35* 



414 

JDPaulant que, whereas, for so much as, since. 

D'auiant plus — que, so much the more, the more, — as. 

Toulefois, yet, nevertheless. 

Toutes les fois que, every time? as often as, whenever.. 

Sinon que, except that. 

Si, if, in case, whether. 

EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 

I called at your sister's, as you had desired me* 
passer, v. 
- - I punish you as you deserve (it). - - After you 

were gone, 1 began writing. - - I love you because 

you behave better than your brother. - - According 

as I see, you are very well. - - He will write to you, 

on condition that he shall speedily receive 

promptement,2i(\y» 
your answer. - - In proportion as we study, we 

become learned. - • A skilful gardener pulls up 

arracher,v. 
weeds as they grow. - - Your brother 

mauvaise herbe^ f. I 

learns his lessons, whereas you do nothing. - - The 

moment that I saw you, I knew you again. - - I did 

not stay in Italy, as long as you did. - - I followed him 

(with my) eyes as far as I could. - - As soon as they 

des 
had taken the general, the army surrendered. - - Why 

did you give it to him, considering that you had 

promised it to me ? - - I did not come to see you, 



415 
seeing that 1 did not know that you were ill. - * 

You (look at) me, as if I had taken your book. - - 

regarder,v. 
I will lend you my horse, as you are my friend. - - 

So you will not come when I call you? - - He 

beat him so that he almost killed him. - * .- 

Youf mother is quite altered, since I saw her 

change, p.p. 
last. - - - - You must stay at home, since you 
dernier emcnt, adv. 
are not well. - - The thing happened even as I had 

foreseen it. - - How comes it to pass, that I have not 

seen your friend until now ? - - Why, in proportion as 

we grow older, do we not grow wiser ? - - When 

devinir,\. 
you are going to undertake an affair of importance, 

permit me to tell you, that you ought to consult 

de 
your friends before you begin it. - - When she had 

US" 

done speaking, she (fell asleep). - - Did you not see 

s^endormir, v. 
Mr. Brown this morning 1 - - Yes, but I could not speak 

\o him. - - Sometimes those who meddle with our 

affairs but to serve us, are those who do us most 

harm. - - The misfortunes of others seem to us 
tort, m. sembler, v. 

but a dream in comparison to our own. - - If you 
songe, m» 



416 

could give me but half of the money you owe me, I 

should be very much obliged to you, - - Beside that 

he does not apply as he should, he is often absent 

from school. - - We were hardly arrived, when it 

began to rain. - - While you lose your time, your 

a 
brother improves fast. - - Play on the harpsichord, 

beaucoup, adv. clavecin, m. 

while I write my exercise. - - Perhaps the master will 

forgive me. - - Though you should cheapen for 

marchander, v. 
two hours, I could not abate sixpence. - - Our father 

punishes and rewards us according as we deserve. - - 

Speak as long as you please, I will not grant you 

what you ask me. - - He had rather do harm 

aimer, v. mieux, adv. 
to his companions than (be doing) nothing. - - If 

faire,v. 
you loved to study, as much as you love to play, I 

a 
should have (no occasion) to complain. - - I avoid 

aucun sujet, m. eviter, v. 

slanderers, as much as I fear them. - - You may 
m6disant,m. 
believe me, for so much as I was present when he 

said so. - - This proceeding was the more extraor- 
dinary, as it was contrary to the laws of the king- 
dom. - - The belief of another life appears to 
croyance, f. 



417 

me so much the more conformable to truth, as it is 

the more necessary to virtue. - - - Virtue reigns so 

much the more sovereignly, as it does not reign by 

force and fear. - - All men (seek after) riches, and 

rechercher, v. 
yet we see few rich mei happy. - - I see the king and 

queen every time 1 go to Windsor. - - He interrupts 

me as often as I speak. - - Whenever I go to London, I 

meet him. - - - She said nothing to me, except that it 

was impossible (for her) to do what you required of 

lui, pro. 
her. - - I know not whether he would come, even though 

you should desire him. - - In case Mr. S. calls 

passer,?* 
here, tell him I am not at home, and ask him when 

he will come again to see me. - - - If you do it, you 

will be punished. - - - Tell me sincerely whether he 

did it or not. - - - We should spare ourselves 

s'epargner, v. 
many troubles, were we more prudent. 
peine, f. 

The conjunctions that have this mark * affixed, 
as it appears in the preceding ones, when followed, 
in English, by a verb in the present of the indica- 
tive mood, and connected with another verb denot- 
ing futurity, require the verb, which, in English, is 
put in the present, to be rendered in French by the 
future. 



418 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

You will be rewarded just as you deserve. - - 

After you have done your exercises, you shall go out. 

devoir, m. 

- - I will explain these rules to you, as we read them. 

- - The moment that you burn this letter, the danger 

will be over. - - We will follow you as far as you go. 

~* - As long as you (keep company with) those people, 

frequenter, v. 
never come to my house. - - We will set out as soon 

as we have dined. » - As you deserve, you will be 

rewarded. - - Send me Miss White, when she has 

done writing. * - You will write the words accord* 

fini, p.p. de 

ing as I dictate them. - - As long as you hehave 

se comporter,v, 
well, you will be dear to me. - - In short, said this 

good king, I shall only think myself happy in as much 

se croire 
as I cause the happiness of my people. 
faire 

It has been remarked in the degrees of comparison, 
that every comparative must be attended by the con- 
junction que, than; it must now be observed, that, if 
que precede a verb in the infinitive, it is to be followed 
by de. But if the verb be neither in, nor can be turned 
into the infinitive, the conjunction must then be attend- 
ed by ne ; that is, que before the noun or pronoun, and 
m before the verb : ex. 



?19 

// vaui mieux -etre mal- It is better to be unfor- 

heureux que d'etre cou- tunate than criminal. 
pable, 

Mgn pere est rtvenu My father came back 

plutot que nous ne Pat- sooner than we ex- 

tendions, pected him. 



EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

It is more pleasing to enjoy good health, 

agreable^dj. 
than to possess a large fortune. - - It is harder (to 

be revenged) of an enemy, than forgive him. - «. 

se venger, v. 

It is better to make a sacrifice of a limb, said the 

surgeon, than lose your life. - - When the thunder 

roars it is less dangerous to be in an open field, 

gronder,v. 

than to take shelter under a tree. - - Should you 

se metlre, devoir, 

not apply more than you do ; you, especially, who 

are to be useful to your country ? - - That would 

give me more pleasure than you imagine. - - Did you 

not receive your goods before war was declared ? 

- - How many people can say to themselves, Had I 

employed my time better than I did when I was 

young, I should be (in good circumstances) now. - - 

a mon aise, 
Diseases come faster than they go away. 

shn retourner, v. 



420 
The following require the verb in the subjunctive mooa\ 

p{ur q que, \ that ' m 0rder that ' to the end that 

Avant que, before. 

Au or en cas que, in case that, if, suppose that. 

A moins que* } 

Excepte que, f , .... 
e-«?* > unless, till. 

oi ce west que, C 

Que — ne, j 

Bun que, ^ 

QuZqueT^ ( thou S h ' althou g h > for all that, as. 

Tout) que, j 

Bien entendu que, with a proviso that, upon condition 

that, provided that. 
DecrainlequeJ ) , foj . f 
JJe peur que, y 

Dieu veuille que, God grant. 

Plaise, or p tut a Dieu que, please God, or would to God. 
« Dieu ne plaise, God forbid. 

ormis que, t that, unless, except. 

Hors que, y r 

Jusqu'a ce que* till, until. 
Loin que, far from. 

Moyennant que, ) saye ft iAed that# 

rourvu que, J r 

Nonob^tant que, notwithstanding that. 
Pour peu que, how little soever, however little. 
Sans que, without that. 
Soit que, whether, — or. 
Supposons que, suppose, let us suppose that. 
Tant s^en faut que. je, I am so far from. 
Tant s^m faut qufil, or elle, he, or she is so far from. 
Tant a? en faut que nous, or vous, we, or you are so far from. 

* These conjunctions require the negation ne before the following 
verbs: ex. 

A moins qu'iZ ne le fasse, Unless he does it. 

De crainte, or de peur qu^7* ne viennent, For fear, or lest they come. 

t See observations upon the pronouns indefinite, page 1 18. 



421 



EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 

I will explain to you every difficulty, that you 

may not be disheartened in your undertaking. - - 

d6courager,v. 
Carry that money to Mrs. Nolle, in order that she 

may pay the writing-master when he comes. - - A 

(by the fut.) 
wise and prudent man lives- with economy when 

young, to the end that he may enjoy the fruit of 

his labour when he is old. - - Before you begin an 

(by the fut.) 
action, consider well, and see whether you can bring 

en venir 
it about ; for, it is the end that crowns the work. - - - 
a bout ceuvre,m. 

In case you want my assistance, call me, I shall be 

near you. -•— If I do not call upon you this afternoon, 

1 will write to you. - - Suppose you should lose your 

friends, what would become of you ? - - You will 

never be respected, unless you forsake the bad 

abandonner,v. 
company you keep. - - You cannot finish (to-night), 

ce soir, 
unless I help you. - - I will not lend it you, unless 

you promise me to return it to her, as soon as you 

de rendre,v. 
can. - - I shall not cease to importune you, till you 
(by the fut.) de 

have forgiven me. - - They are not happy, though 
36 



422 
they be rich. - - The general arrived yesterday morn- 
ing at the camp, weary and tired, but very season- 

/as, adj. 
ably ; immediately he gave his orders to 

pour, p. 
begin the action, though he had not yet all his 
engager, v. 
troops. - - Although you have a good memory, this 

is not enough to learn any language whatever, 

pour,p, 
you must make use of your judgment* - - For all 

that she has no fortune, I do not love her the less for 

it. - - As zealous a friend as he appears, I know one 

action of his life which is neither Christian nor 

equitable. - - I lend you my violin with a proviso that 

you will return it to me in an hour. - - My mother 

will come to see you, upon condition that you promise 

me to go to the play with her. - - - I give you 

that penknife, upon condition that you will not make 

a bad use of it. - - 1 will go to London to-morrow, 

provided you accompany me. , - - I will write again to 

your brother to-morrow, lest he should not 

(present of subj.) 
have received my last letter. - - We avoided an engage- 
ment, for fear we should be taken, their force being 

t 



423 

superior to ours. - - God grant you be not disappointed 

in your hopes ! - - Would to God I had been there ! I 

wou'd have conquered or perished. - - God forbid I 

vaincre 
should blame your conduct. - - Your business never 

will be done properly, unless you do it yourself. - - I 

shall not go out to-day, except you go with me. - • 

<*> 
They fought with fury on both sides, 

sebaifre,v* acharnement,m, 

till night came. - - I shall not set out, till I have 

dined. - - 1 am going to write, till we go out. - - Far 

from hating him, I wish him all kinds of prosperity. 

- - I forgive you this time, provided you promise me 

to be lazy no more, and pay more attention to 

de faire,v» 

what you are told. - - I will give you leave to dance, 

provided you give me your word of honor 

parole, f. 
not to overheat yourself. - - Why did you tell 

de s^echauffer^v. 
me my father was arrived, notwithstanding you 

knew the contrary ? - - He is so quick, that 

prompt, adj. 

however little he is contradicted, he (flies into a passion) 

s'emporter,?. 

in an instant. - - However little you give her 

she is ef so good a temper, that she is always 
naturel % m* 



424 

pleased. - - Can you touch it without my brother 

content, adj. 

perceiving it 1 - - Suppose we dine here to-day, 

swapper xevoir de, 

and to-morrow at our house. - - I am so far 

from blaming you for assisting him, that, on the 

(com. of the pres. inf.) 
contrary, I very much admire your conduct. - - 

He is so far from despising her, that, on the con- 
trary, he respects and honours her. - - It is so 
far from raining, that, on the contrary, I think 
we shall have dry and hot weather during all 
this week. 

The conjunction si, if, instead of being repeated in 
a sentence, is more elegantly rendered by que, with 
the verb following it in the subjunctive mood, as, in- 
stead of saying, 

Si vous venez chez moi, et If you call upon me, and 
si votes ne me trouviez do not find me at 
pas, home, 

It is more elegant to say, 

Si vous venez chez moi, et 
que vous ne me trouviez 
pas, &x. 

Que must also be repeated in the second part of a 
sentence, as well as the pronoun, when there is a con- 
junction in the first part of it ; in this case que requires 
the following verb to be put in the same mood as the 
preceding : ex. 



425 



Des que je Vaurai vu et As soon as I have seen him 

que je lui aural parU, and spoken to him, I will 

je vous le ferai savoir, let you know it. 

QuoiquHl soil plus riche que Though he be richer than 

vous, et qu'z/ ait de meil- you, and have better 

leurs amis, friends. 



EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

If your father do not arrive to-day, and if you 

want money, I will lend you some. - - 

avoir besoin de 

If you should see jour sister, and speak to 

her, &c. - - If you study and take pains, I 

assure you that you will learn the French 

language in a very short time. - - Whether 

you eat or drink, sing, dance, or play, do 

every thing with grace and attention. - - - 

If you love me, and be willing to oblige me ; 

do not go to France with her. - -' If men 

were wise, and would follow the dictates of 

iumitre, f. 
reason, they would save themselves many sor- 

epargner.v. 
rows. - - If you meet my brother, and he speak 

to you, do not answer. - - So that you saw and 

spoke to her. - - Though you have good relations, 

parent, m. 
36* 



your merit be known, and you do not want 

manquer de 
friends, your projects will not succeed without your 

brother's assistance. * - As soon as I have dressed 

myself, and breakfasted, I will go to see him. - - 

While you play and lose your money, your sister is 

learning her lesson. - - We must pity him who has 

no talent, and only despise him who has no virtue. 

- - Play on the organ, while J read my brother's 

letter and answer him. - - Beside that he never 

studies, and is always in the country, he has not 

so much wit as his sister. - - I will explain to you 

every difficulty (in order) that you may take 

courage and learn well. - - Though you should have 

the best master in England, and learn all the rules 

of the grammar, if you do not put them in practice, 

you will never speak good French. - - God grant 

you may succeed in your pursuits, and obtain the 

entreprise, f. 
favour you solicit so ardently ! - - - Whether 

God raise up thrones, or pull them down ; 

6lever,v. abaisser,v. en 

whether he communicate his power to princes, 

puissance, f. 



427 

or withdraw it to himself, and only leave them 

retirer, v. 
their own weakness; he teaches them their duty 

in a sovereign manner. - - Whether you speak or 

</e,p. 

(hold your tongue,) you will obtain nothing from 

se taire,\, 

me ; but whatever you may say, speak so that you 

may never offend any one. - - Your brother told me 

per sonne 
he was young, and was* but twenty years old when 

he was made a captain ; I think he was better in- 
formed and had more experience than you have. - * 
I can assure you, that both our officers and soldiers 

have behaved nobly, and performed prodigies of 

/aire 
valour, though the enemies were superior in num- 
ber, and had the advantage of the ground. 

terrein 

It is here necessary to observe, that verbs denoting 
wish, will, command, desire, doubt, fear, ignorance, entreaty, 
persuasion, pretension, surprise, &.c. always require the 
conjunction que after them, with the following verb in 
the subjunctive mood. 

In short, in those dispositions of mind where the will 
is chiefly concerned, or whenever we express a thing 
with some degree of doubt or hesitation, then the verb, 
which, in English, is put in the infinitive mood, the 
participle active, or the future tense, must, in French, 
be put in the subjunctive mood : ex. 

* See the remark after the verb ttre, to be, page 174, 



428 

Croyez-vous quHl soit hon- Do you believe him to be 

nete ? honest ? 

Je doute que vous le fas- I doubt of your doing it. 

siez 1 

Je ne crois pas quelle I do not believe she will 

vienne, come. 

See Falloir, and the rules after it, page 332. 



EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

You wish him to pay you ; he has no money, I am 

obliged to lend him some every day. - - I do not 

de 
think that true philosophy may be less useful to 

women than men; but I remark, that the most 

remarquer, v. 
part of those who meddle (with it) are but 

se meler, v. en 

very bad philosophers, without becoming better 

wives for it. - - I do not believe that your mother will 

arrive to-day. - - She wishes you may succeed 

pouvoir, v. 
in all your undertakings. - - I fear she (will go 

craindre, v. s'en al- 

away) without speaking to me. - - 1 much fear he 
Zer, v. 
will come sooner than you expect him. - - Do 

atimdre, v. 
you not say you are surprised that William has not 

spoken to you ever since last week. - - For my part, 

Quant a raoi, 
I am not surprised at it, for he is always pouting. 

bonder^ v. 



42& 
• - T)o you think he will succeed, and obtain the place 

he aims at? - - You have had much trouble, and we 

aspirer, v. 

all fear lest hereafter she should give you much 

(pres. of subj.) 
more. - - If you believe him to be your friend, why 

then do not you follow his advice ? - - It is necessary 

for you to go thither, and assure him, that 1 am very 

que 

thankful for all his kindness. - - I wonder that 

reconnoissant, de, 

Mr. R. has not yet asked your sister in marriage. - - 

If you see her and she speaks to you, do not answer 

her. » - Order her to do it. - - Do you imagine 

Zh're, v. sHmaginer, v. 

we are sure they will come to-night? - - Do you 

think At is possible for you to (bring it about)? 
croire,v. de, en venir a bout^v. 

- - It is just we should suffer, since we deserve it. - - 

I do not say I have seen it. - - He (was afraid) lest 

craindre^Y. que 
you should come while he was (gone out). - - - 

sortir, v. 
Our master has ordered, that we should (get up) to- 

se lever 
morrow morning early. - - You did not think that she 

wanted to deceive you, when she told you that. 
vouloir, v. 

- - I wonder you should doubt, that it is your 

etre surpris,v. 
daughter who told it me. - - Do you think my mother 



430 
will let us go to the ball next week? - - Were Mr. S. 
discreet and willing* to undertake that affair, I 
would communicate it to him immediately. - - It 
will be better for you to go and speak to him your- 
self, while he is in town, because I do not doubt of 
his undertaking it. - - Were I certain that you would 
speak to him about it, I would desire him to come 
and dine with us to-morrow ; for I am to see him to- 
night at his brother's. - - I am certain that he will 
satisfy you : are you certain he will satisfy me? • • 
Your uncle is very glad you have written to your 

father. - - I am very glad to hear you have over- 

de sur- 

corae all difficulties, - - I will give you no rest, 

monter, v. 

unless you are reconciled with your mother. - - I 
que ne, 
do not believe it is she who has done it. - - Do you 

believe it? - - My brother is not well, and I doubt 

(very much) of his coming to see us before next 

fort, 
spring. - - Do you think he is on the road ? - - 1 

en, p. ^ 
doubt whether he will come before next week. 

suiu an J, adj. 
* - I did not know you had studied geography^so long. 



431 

It must be observed, that, after the verb vouloir, the 
verb to have is not expressed, but rendered in French by 
que. It must also be observed, that the sign of the fu- 
ture tense, shall, when it refers to the will of a person, 
and meaning, / choose, I do not choose, do you choose, &c. 
must be rendered in French by the present tense of the 
indicative mood of the verb vouloir, according to the 
number and person, with the following verb in the sub- 
junctive mood : ex. 

Je veux qxPil fasse cela, I will have him do that. 

Je veux que vous me mon- You shall show me that 
triez cette lettre, letter, that is to say, 

I choose you should 

show, &c. 
VouleZ'Vous que je danse? Shall I dance ? that is, do 

you choose, &x. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

You would have your daughter return to- 
vouloir, v. revenir, v. 

morrow, but that is impossible. - - I will have your 

father know what you have dbne : you must stay 

rester, v. 
here till he comes. - - Your mother would have you 

come directly ; why do not you come then ? - - I 

absolutely intend that she shall go thither 

vouloir, v. 
directly, and tell him, that, whether he be ill or 

well, I will have him set out as soon as he has re- 
ceived my letter. - - I will have you see my house. 

and tell me what you think of it. - - She shall not go 
penser. v. 



432 
into the country, unless I go with her. - - My father 

would have me and my brother walk all the 

faire a pied, v. 
way. - - Your sister shall go with me to Croyden, and 
chemin, m. 
not you. - - Your father will have you go to France 

in a month ; I am very glad of it, however I would 
not have you do things too precipitately. - - Shall 
my brother show you his translation? • - Your brother 
asked me whether he might go home to-morrow; I 
told him he might go whenever he thought he 
should be w r anted : but you shall remain here till 
you have learned all your lessons. - - I know a gen- 
tleman who is going to Paris ; shall I tell him to call 

passer, 
upon you? 1 would not have you go to Germany 
chez, 
without understanding French well, as that language 

will enable you to learn German much sooner than 

you expect. - * Your brother shall not go out to-day. 

s^attendre, 
- - Will you be so good as to go and carry that letter 

to the post ? No, I cannot leave my play. But I tell 

you, that you shall (go) ; I would have you pay more 

faire, v. 
attention to what you are told, 



433 

Qui, que, or dunt, preceded by a superlative, equine 

the following verb in the subjunctive mood, and when 
qui stands as a nominative to a verb, denoting a condi- 
tion, it also requires the following verb to be put in the 
subjunctive mood : ex. 

Oest la plus belle femme qui She is the handsomest wo- 

puisse se voir, man that can be seen. 

C'est le plus mechant gargon He is the most wicked boy 

que je connoisse, that 1 know. 

Je veux une femme qui soit I will have a wife who is 

belle, handsome : 

that is, I will not have any woman for a wife, but 
on condition she be handsome. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

Do you say you are surprised, that he has not 
yet written to you ? I assure you it is not to be won- 
dered at, for he is the most negligent man I know. 

- - It is necessary for you to go thither, and assure 

<& que 
him that he has done nothing that should 

devoir, v. 
(make me angry). - - He is the most charitable man 

fdcher, v. 
we have in this neighbourhood \ his purse is always 

open to any one who is poor and industrious. - - Did 

you not tell me you (sought for) a master who had 

chercher^w 
a good pronunciation, and was endowed with a 

great deal of patience ? - - When a father is capable 

of teaching his children, he is the best master whom 
37 



434 

they can have. - - I know nobody that improves 

faire des progres, 
more than Miss K ; and when she was learning 

French, had she learned it by rules, she would speak, 

write, and translate now much better than Miss S — , 

though she was two years in France, - - Has not your 

brother some friends whom he can trust ? - - Your 

sejier a, v. 
father has bought the finest horse that I have ever 

seen. - - Is there any lady that appears more reasonable 

than she does ? - - If you ever choose a friend, I wish 

you may choose one whom you esteem, and who 

may be an honest man. - - It will be better for you to 

go and speak to him yourself, instead of writing to 

him, because I do not doubt of his undertaking and 

(bringing about) your affair ; he is the most diligent 

venir a bout de 
and the most careful man we have in this country. - - 

Before you begin any thing of importance, consult 

some body who is your friend, and on whom you can 

rely. - - - Do you know any body who goes to 

faire fond,v. 

France ? - - I have something to send to my sister. - - 

If you do not follow my advice, believe me, it will 



435 

be the greatest misfortune that can happen to you. 

- - Babylon was the finest city that ever was built. - - 

The best reason 1 can give you is, that I 

pouvoir, v. 
(was not well). - - If you lend me a horse, lend me 
se bien porter, v. 
one that goes well. - - The God who has created us, 

and who created the universe, is the only one 

seul, adj. «* 
to whom we owe homage, and the only one whom we 

ought to fear. 



SECT. IX. 

OF INTERJECTIONS. 

Interjections, as before observed, serve to express the 
sudden emotions of the soul. 

There are several sorts, viz. 

Of j o y* g rie f-> pain, admiration, aversion, silence, calling, 
encouraging, warning, &c. such as, 

Allons, gai ! come, be cheerful ! 

ca, courage ! come, come on ! 

Bon ! good ! 

Ah, mon Dieu ! oh, my God ! 

Ah, onida ! ay, marry ! 

Ha, quelle joie! O, joy ! 

6 del ! O Heaven ! 

Fi ! fi ; fy upon ! 

Hold, ho ! ho there ! 

Helas ! alas ! 

Malheur a ! wo to ! 

Misiricorde ! bless me ! 

Prenez garde, gare ! have a care ! 

Paix, chut, st ! hist, hu>h ! 

Silence ! silence ! 



436 



EXERCISE ON THE INTERJECTIONS. 

Come, friends, let us rejoice ! - - Good ! here are 
se rejouir,v. 
news for you, brother. - - Fy, fy ! Robert, you* do 

not think of what you say. - - Oh! how lovely a 

penser, v. a, que 

virtue is modesty ! Why do you not endeavour to 

s\fforcer, v. de 
acquire it ? - - Alas ! who can express the torments 

I suffer here ? - - - Man without religion, never 

having his heart or mind at peace, can, alas ! 

esprit, m. en^p, 
be but a very unfortunate creature. - - Wo to you ! 

usurers, misers, unjust possessors of (other people's) 
usurier, m. avare,m. autrui, pro. 

goods, hearken to these words : The treasures 

bien,m. 6couter,v 9 ^ parole,L 

of iniquity (will be of no service) to you. - - O 

ne servir de rien 
(lazy people), go to the ant, consider what she 

paresseux, fourmi, f. 

does, and learn from her, wisdom and industry. - - 

Bless me ! I am undone ! - - Hush there ! silence ! 

perdu,p.ip. 
- - Oh ! the dismal effects which laziness pro- 

funeste, adj. 
duces ! - - How 1 tremendous 8 an 2 office 3 is 7 that 
terrible, adj. le «s» 

of 4 a 5 judge 6 ! What wisdom, what integrity, what 

knowledge, what sagacity of mind, what experience, 

science, f. 

(are required !) 

ne faut-il pas avoir, v. 



437 

REMARKS and EXERCISES on the WORDS 

de, a, and pour. 

Having, in this manner, gone through the respective 
parts of speech, there will be no occasion for a syntax. 
It will, however, be necessary to give some rules for 
ascertaining the proper use of the particle de or a, and 
the preposition pour, before a verb in the infinitive 
mood, and then to point out, by way of exercise, some 
idiomatical expressions that most frequently occur in 
the French tongue*. 

When two verbs come together in a sentence, the 
latter, having no subject expressed nor understood, must 
be put in the infinitive mood, whether the English sign 
to, be prefixed or not. 

In the following cases, the infinitive mood must 
never be preceded by a particle. 

First, when the verb in the infinitive stands nomina- 
tive to another verb : ex. 

Aimer est un verbe, To love is a verb. 

Secondly, after the following verbs, ctller, croire. de- 
voir, /aire, il fctut, savoir, valoir mieux, venir, pouvoir, 
oser, vouloir, and penser, when rendered by to be like or 
near* 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

To know how to give seasonably is a talent every 

body has not. - - To be able to live with one's self, 

and to know how to live with others, are the two 

great sciences of life. - - I had rather doit 

aimer mieux, v. 

* The great number of idiomaticai expressions in the French lan- 
guage has long been considered as an almost insuperable difficulty in 
the way ol* its easy acquirement ; however, this difficulty is ( aily 
decreasing ; these peculiar expressions are now giving way to a reg- 
clar construction, and are very little used by the best writers. 
37* 



433 
now than later. - - Why dare you not undertake it 1 

I think you might succeed. - - He says he will lend 

pouvoir, w reussir, v. 
you his gun with all his heart, because you know 

fusil^m. 
how to make use of it. - - Aristotle, though so 

•O' se servir, v. 

great a philosopher, was never able to penetrate the 

cause of that prodigy. - - Tell him, that he may set 

out when (he pleases). - - You never could 

il lui plana, v. pouvoir, v. 

come more seasonably. - - We are to go to Vauxhall 

to-morrow. - - I am going to see your brother. - - 

(Is it not better) to set out now, than wait 

Valoir mieux, v. de attendre, v. 

any longer ? - - - If you think to oblige her, 

plus croire, v. 

you mistake. - - We were to have had a ball yester- 

se tromper*v* 

day, but my sister was not well. - - You did very 

right, for you ought not to speak to him. - - I 

Men, adv. car,c. devoir,v. 

had like to have fallen twenty times coming 

penser, v. 

hither. - - To instruct, please, and move the passions. 

are the three principal qualifications requisite in an 

qualite, 
orator. - - If you would read this book, I could 

vouloir, v. pouvoir, v. 

lend it to you for four or live days. - - He wishes to 

vQuloir, 
learn without taking pains. 

peine, singi 



439 

The particle de is put before a verb in the infin- 
itive mood : First, when any of the following words, 
of, from or with, are used before the participle active 
of any verb. (See the JV. B. upon the participle 
active, page 343.) 

Secondly, after a noun substantive joined immedi- 
ately to a verb, either without any article at all, or with 
the following articles, le, la, or les. 

Thirdly, after the following adjectives, decent, glad, 
impossible, necessary, sorry, worthy, vexed, and the like. 

Fourthly, after the following verbs: to advise, to ap- 
prehend, to bid, to cease, to command* to conjure, to coun- 
sel, to defend, to defer, to deserve, to desire, to endeavour, 
to entreat, to fear, to hasten, to long, to order, to permit, to 
persuade, to pray, to pretend, to promise, to propose, to re- 
fuse, to remember, to threaten, to tell, to warm, to undertake, 
#*c. and the greater part of the reflected verbs. 

And lastly, after the conjunction que, preceded by the 
comparative degree. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

I have desired your brother, to lend me some 
pricr, v. 
money. - - My mother ordered me to tell you, to 

ordonner, v. 
go an'd speak to her directly. - - Did you not permit 

him to go out this morning ? - - I am surprised to 

sortir, v. 
find you so ill. - - I have not desired you to play. - - - 

Bid your sister to send me my book. - - We 

Dire, v. a 

were afraid of displeasing you. - - What do you 

advise me to do in such a case ? - - My sister 

conseiller, v. 

and 1 intend to (call upon) you on Friday next. 

passer, v. chtz, v. 



440 

I am very glad to hear you are better. - - - 

apprendre^v. 
She does not pretend to speak French as well as 

se pique r, v, 
you. - - We are tired of repeating to you the same 

things so often. - - If you finish your exercise soon 
you will have the pleasure of walking, while the 
others will have the trouble of working. - - It is neces- 
sary to tell her not to go thither (any more) ; for, 

plus, adv. 
she would be in danger of losing her life. - - En- 
deavour to please your masters by your application to 

a 
study. - - Do not yon remember having said you 

would carry me to the camp ? - - Do not they 

mener,v, 
deserve to be encouraged, who undertake to servf 
m£riter,v. 
the public? - - We are all glad to hear you have 

overcome your enemies; we should have been sorry 

to have heard the contrary. - - What a fool you are 

to grieve so, when you have so much reason to 

s'affliger, v. 
rejoice ! - - Never expect to speak French well, un- 

s'attendre, 
less you practice it (very much.) - - I shall never refuse 

beaucoup, 
o do you a service, as long as it is in my power. 
rendre,v. 
- - Have you a mind to do what you have pro- 

«» envie,f. 
raised me ? - - I cannot give you the book you asked 



441 

me for, my brother has not (thought fit) to send 

us* juger a propos, v. 

it me back again. - - I desired you to bring your 

sister with you; why did you not?* - - I forbid 

defendre,v. 
you to speak or write to him (any more). - - Would 

davaniage, adv. 
you not be very glad to read and speak Italian ? - - 

- • Condemn the opinion of no one hastily, but 

endeavour to regulate your own by the line of 
Jefforcer, v. ^ ^ 

truth. - - Who can hinder me from speaking or 

virile, f. empicher, v. 

writing to her ? - - (Give me leave) to tell you, that 

Permettre, v. 
you do very wrong to disoblige your aunt. - - He 

mal, adv. 
(was not contented) to demolish the temple and pull 
se contenter,v* a- 

down the statues, but, &c. - - Is there any thing 
baitre,v, 
more glorious, than to change anger into friendship ? 

- - - (I long) to see your mother, and tell her all 

Tl me tarde,v, 
that I think (about it.) 
en, pro. 



The particle a is to be placed before a verb in the 
infinitive mood : First, after the auxiliary verb, avoir, 
to have, immediately followed by a substantive or 
an adverb, expressing a futuiity in the action : ex. 

J^aiplnsieurs lettres a ecrire, I have many letters to write. 

Secondly, after nouns substantive joined to the verb 
avoir, or nouns adjective joined to the verb tire, 
signifying to be addicted, apt, bent, diligent, disposed, 

• Do it, is understood, and must be expressed in French. 



442 

dreadful, easy, jit, hard, inclined, quick, ready, subject. 
used, &c. 

Thirdly, after the following adjectives, admirable, 
good, dexterous, handsome, scarce, the last, the first, the 
second, &c. 

And, lastly, after the following verbs, to amuse, to 
aspire or aim at, to begin, to condemn, to continue or go 
on, to compel or force, to design, or destine, to dispose, 
to employ or spend, to encourage, to engage, to excite, 
to exhort, to help, to induce, to invite, to learn, to please, 
to serve, to take a pleasure or delight in or to, to teach, to 
think, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 

Come hither, Paul, I have something to communi- 
cate to you. - . We have much to fear in our present 
situation, and a great many hazards to run. - - I 
cannot go to the play to-night; for, I have five or 

six visits to pay. - - Is there any thing pleasanter 

rendre* v. 
to behold than the flux and reflux of the sea ? - - We 

voir, 
ought to learn how to subdue our passions, 

«o» subjuguer, v. 

conquer our desires, and suffer patiently the most 

cruel misfortunes. - - She is always the first to 

disgrace, f. 
(find fault) with what I do. - - Do not gather 
trouver a redire, a 

that apple, it is not yet good to eat. - - Mr. N. told 

me you had a country-house to let. - - Mr. F. is a 

louer, v. 
very agreeable man, always ready to serve his friends, 

but he has the misfortune to be inclined to gaming. 



443 

- - - Your master does not love you, because you are 

not diligent in learning your lesson. - - - We had for a 

long time nothing to eat but the fruits which we had 

gathered. - - - The greatest part of men spend their 

time either in doing nothing, or doing what they ought 

not to do. - - What you say of her is very hard 

difficile, adj. 
to believe. - - Tell him, I have no complaint to 

make about his conduct. - - - Why do you oblige her 

de 
to ask my pardon, since she is not inclined to do it her- 
self? - - - I believe she takes a delight in tormenting 
me. - - - Life is so short, that we should employ all 
our days in preparing ourselves for the other world. - - 

There is no more danger to fear. - - - Use yourself, 

S'accoutumer, v. 
said a father to his son, to practice virtue : that alone 

will help you to bear with patience all the vicis- 

supporler,v. 
situdes of fortune. - - - Never amuse yourself in read- 
ing bad books. - - - You can never spend your time 

passer, v. 
better than in reading and studying the history of your 

own country. - - - Learn to speak well ; but, above all? 

to speak truth. - - That science, which teaches us to 

dire, v. 
see things as they are, is highly worthy of cultivation. 

*■ - - An honest man always takes pleasure in obliging 

his friends. - - - Does your master teach you how to 

translate English into French ? - - - Do you begin to 

translate French well ? - - - Why did you not oblige 

him to pay you what he owes you ? - - - Why do you 



444 

not (get ready) to set out with us ? - - - I love to 

s'appreter,v. 
discourse with polite and sensible people. 
s^entretenir,v. sense, 

N. B. For the sake of euphony, the following verbs, 
to begin, to continue, to constrain, to engage, to exhort, to 
compel, or force, to endeavour, to oblige, may be succeeded 
by de, or a, as most convenient. 

The preposition pour is to be used before a verb in 
the infinitive mood, when it expresses the cause, the 
design, or the end, and then the English particle to 
may be expressed by in order to, to the end, or for to* 
This preposition is also used after the adverbs, enough, 
on purpose, too, too much, or less ; and before an infini- 
tive in the beginning of a period. 

EXERCISE ON THESE RULES. 

I will do every thing in my power to please him. - - 

Good rules are useless, if the attention, industry, and 

assiduite,f. 
patience of the scholar be not put into practice to learn 

them. - - Mrs. B. has too much pride to confess she 

(is in the wrong.) - - To understand geography well, we 

avoir tort on 

must, &c. - - I assure you that I came on purpose to 

see you. - - She will do all that is in her power to 

oblige you, and prove to you that she is truly your 

friend. - - The wicked live to die, but the righteous 

die to live. - - She has vanity enough to believe all 

you tell her. - - What makes the misfortunes of kings, 

is not to have friends bold enough to tell them the 

truth. - - I wrote to you some time ago, to let 

faire, v. 
you know, that your brothers were arrived. - - He 



445 
promised me, that he would do every thing to de- 
serve the honour of your protection. - - - I sent yes- 
terday my servant to your aunt's to desire her to 
send me back again the book I lent her a month 

ago, but she was not at home. - - We did all that 

/aire, v. 
we could to pass the river, but could not (accom- 

venir a 
plish it). - - To convince you that I am ready to do 
bout de, v. 
you any service, (be so kind as) to command me. 

avoir la bonte,v. 
- - Why did you not punish her for having done 

what you forbade her to do ? - - A man should live 

devoir, 
a century at least to know the world, and many other 

connoitre, 
centuries to (know how to) make a proper use of that 

savoir, 
knowledge. 



SECT. X. 

OF IDIOMATIC AL EXPRESSIONS. 
ON THE VERB AVOIR, to have, &c. 

Avoir mal a la tete, \ t0 have the head-ache, or 

( a pain in the head. 

Avoir mal aux oreilhs, \ to . ha * e sore ears > or a P ain 

( in the ears. 

Avoir mal aux yeux, i t0 ha y. e sore e y es > or a P aia 

* I in the eyes. 

Avoir mal au nez, \ to have . a t s ° re nose ' or a 

( pain in the nose. 

Avoir mal a la bouche, \ to hav f a s ° re mou ' h ' or 

? ( a pain in the mouth. 

Avoir mal aux dents, #c. to have the tooth-ache.- 



38 



446 

We say, after the same manner, 
Avoir froid aux mains, aux pieds, &c. ex. 
Tai froid a la tete, aux My head, my hands, and 

mams, et aux pieds, my feet, are cold. 

Avoir beau, to be in vain : ex. 

Vous avez beau parler, It is in vain for you to talk. 

Avoir beaucoup de peine, to have much ado. 
Avoir de la peine a : ex. 

J'ai de la peine a vous croire^ I can hardly believe you. 
Avoir besoin de, to want, to have occasion for. 
Avoir la bonte de, (daigner), to be so kind as. 
Avoir connoissance, avis de, to have notice of. 
Avoir cours, to take, to be in vogue. 
Avoir honte, to be ashamed. 
Avoir la mine de, to be like, to look like : ex. 
Vous avez la mine d'e/re You look like a man of un- 

intelligent, derstanding. 

Avoir pitie de, to pity. 

Avoir part an gateau, to share in the booty. 

Avoir bonne mine : ex. 

Vous avez tres-bonne ) v , , „ -, . 

7 ,, • > You took veru well to-day. 
mine aujourcvhui, $ a j 

Avoir plus de peur que de mal, to be more afraid than hurt. 

Avoir raison, to be in the right. 

Avoir soin^ to take care. 

Avoir tort, to be in the wrong. 

,., r • , S to have no occasion or business 

N'avoir que fare de, J of Qr ^ 

N avoir garde de, or > are ex- ( to be sure not, or 

Se garder bien de, $ pressed by ( by no means. 

Alter son train, to go our own way. 

Aller trouver quelqu'un, to go to somebody. 

Venir trouver, to come to. 

EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES. 

I could not call upon him this morning, because i 
had a pain in my head. - - My brother would have 
come with me, but he has a sore leg, and is obliged to 



447 
keep his bed. - - • I heard your mother had the 
tooth-ache : Is it true ? No, madam, but she has 
a pain in her side which prevents her from going 
out. - - - I have not yet finished my exercise ; 
for my hands were so cold, that I could not write another 
word ; besides, I had much ado to find my books, I 
did not know where to look for them. • ~ - It will 
be in vain for you to write to me, I never will answer 
you. - - - I can hardly believe what you tell me. - - - 
// is in vain for me to speak to her, she still goes her 
own way, - - - Miss N. cried very much yesterday, but 
I think she was more afraid than hurt, - - - It has been 
in vain for him to torment your sister, she never would 
tell him what happened to her when she was at Mr. 
P's. - - - Go to him, and tell him that, unless he re- 
turns me my books in a very short time, I will desire 
his father to send them to me : when you have told 
him that, do not wait for his answer ; come to me im- 
mediately, I shall be at your mother's, where I am to 
dine, and thence go to the play with the whole family. 
- - - In vain I give myself trouble, I am not the richer 
for it. - - - Your sister does not look so well to-day as 
she did yesterday. - - - Am I not in the right to go 
there no more ? - - - I will take care to prevent them 
from coming hither. - - - Believe me, I have long sus- 
pected them, and now I am very certain that both your 
cousins and they have had a share in the booty, - - - We 
should often be ashamed of our finest actions, if the 



448 

world knew all the motives which produce them. - - «? 

You are in the wrong not to ask for his horse, he would 

lend it to you. - - - Why should I borrow his horse, 

when I have one (of my own ?) - - I have no occasion for 

a moi, 
his. - - - Be so kind as to carry that letter to Mr. H's. 

but be sure not to tell him who sent you. - - - I hope 
you will by no means go there again, after what has hap- 
pened to you. - - - He was so altered, that she had 
much ado to recollect him, but he now begins to look 
very well. - - - Somebody having advised Philip, Alex- 
ander's father, to banish from his states a man who had 
spoken ill of him, I shall by no means do it, answered 
he, he would go every where and speak ill of me. 



ON ETRE, to be. 

a son axse^ 

C lo 

stances. 



~ ^ , ' f to be in good circum- 

Litre < en bonne passe, > , ° 

i , . , r V . ( stances. 

( men dans ses affaires, ) 

r,, ,. .j r , ( to be in great favour 

Eire bien aupres de quelqu'un, ^ witf| ^ one# 

— ? , , ( to be out of favour with 

Etre mal avec quelqu'un, < gome Qne> 

f to be chargeable, trou- 
Etre a charge a quelqrfun, < blesome, or a burden 

( to some one. 
Etre but a but, to be equal. 
Etre de moitie, to go halves. 

" v . . , , - ., 7 (to be within mus- 

Eire a la portte du fusil, du canon, J ket . shot? gun . s hot. 

Etre a la portie de la voix, to be within call. 
F ( a la veille de, ) to be upon the brink, or very 
( sur le point de, \ near to. 

E J". m , llal *». \ to afford. 

Avoir h moyen de, 



449 



EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

Your brother is in good circumstances now. - - - 
Somebody told me he was in great favour with the 
king. - - - Yes, it is true, but he is out of favour 
with my father, because he is troublesome to the family. 
- - - Well, Mr. R. and he are equals. - - - I thought 
Mr. A. and Mrs. D. went halves in that affair, but I 
heard the contrary. - - - Suffer me to tell you, you do 
very wrong to treat her as you do, you undoubtedly 
must have forgotten she is in the queen's favour. - - - 
"Well, if she be in the queen's favour, do you imagine I 
am not to tell her what I think of her conduct ? - - ^ 
The two fleets were within gun-shot, and very near be- 
ginning the engagement, when we left them. - - - We 
will be within call. - - - Why do you not take a coach 
now and then ? said she to me. I would willingly take 
one sometimes, replied I to her, but I cannot afford it. 

ON FAIRE, TO MAKE, OR DO, 

Faire cas de, to value, to esteem. 

Faire un tour de promenade., to take a walk* 

Faire le malade, to sham sickness. 

Faire Pecule buissonniere, to play truant. 

Faire beaucoup de chemin, to go a great wav. 

Faire le bel esprit, to set up for a wit. 

Faire fond sur quelqu'un. to rtly upon one. 

ir» • • / r x S to l et one know, to inform. 

kaxre savoir, (enz oyer dire.) \ 4 -. ' 

' v J " ( to send word. 

Faire voile, or ? . , ., 
m ,, - j •/ Mo set sai . 
Mettre a la voile, S 

Faire faire, to bespeak, to get made, to oblige one to do, 
38* 



Faire de son mieux, to do our best. 

Faire semblant, to pretend. 

Faire de son pis, to do our worst. 

Me /aire que de, to be just, or 

Venir de, to have but just: ex. 

Il ne fait que (Yarriver, He is but just arrived. 

Me faire que, to do nothing but. 

Se faire des amis, des ennemis, to get friends, enemies. 

Se faire des affaires, to bring one's self into trouble. 

c , r • • $ to be conceited, to have a good 

o en faire accroire, i . . r \ lt & 

J ' I opinion oi one's sell. 

Cm est fait de moi, I am undone, it is over with me. 

C\n iloit fait de lui, he was undone, it was over with him. 

p, f ii it $ she will be undone, it will be over 

Ks en sera Tan a eiie* \ •.• > 

J ' ( with her. 

^, -,/-•,> S we should be undone, it would 

C en seroit tail de nous^ < • ... 

J ■ ( be over with us. 

The English verb, to cause, preceding the verb to be, 
immediately followed by a participle passive, is render- 
ed in French, by the verb faire, and then the verb to be 
is not expressed, but the participle passive is turned 
into the infinitive mood : ex. 

II lui fit couper la tete, He caused his head to be 

cut off, 

EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

Do not lose that ring, for I value it much ; it is a 
particular friend of jours who gave it me. -- I would go 
and take a walk, if I were well. - - - Do you not sham 
sickness now and then ? - - - Did not your brother play 
truant last week ? - - - That man goes a great way for 
a trifle.- - - Mr. P. sets up for a wit, wherever he goes. 
- - You may rely upon what 1 tell you. - - He succeeds 
better in being conceited, than in giving others a 
good opinion of himself. - - - I begin to be very much 



451 

satisfied with his brother, who now does his best, and 
will soon be able to write a French letter to his father. 
- - - Let me know whether he will pay you or not. - - 
We shall set sail about the fifteenth of the next month. 

Why did not you bespeak three or four pair of shoes 

rnoie ? - - - Send zvord to your brother, or let him 
know, that there is a letter for him here. - - I will give 
him an exercise, and oblige him to do it in my pre- 
sence. - - - She told me if she were obliged to do it, 
she would do her zvorst. - - - She pretends not to 
listen, but I assure you she does not lose a word of what 
you say. - - - We were but just come in when it began 
to rain. - - - It would have been over with us, could the 
enemy have known what passed in our camp. - - You 
do nothing but play from morning till night. - - - - 
That young lady will get friends every where. - - - 
If you do not take care, you will bring yourself 
into trouble, - - - Permit me to tell you, that they 
are too much conceited. - - - Your brother is un- 
done, if his master come to know of it. - - - In 1606, 
King James caused the oath of allegiance to be drawn 
up ; and, in 1621, summoned a parliament, in which 
were formed the two parties, called Whigs and Tories. 

ON DIFFERENT VERBS. 

Aimer mieux, to have rather, to choose rather. 

Se donntr bien des airs. \ l ° tak , e a S reat deal u P on 
' ( one's sell. 

11 ne faut pas s^etonner, it is no wonder. 

// me tarde de, I long to. 



402 

Pemer. to be like. (Followed by a verb in the infini- 
tive mood.) 

«, 7 v \ to lay the fault or blame upon one, 

o en prendre a. i , i i 4 f * 

i ' f to look to one for. 

S'y bien prendre, or ^ to go the right way to 

<6"i/ prendre de la bonne facon, ( work. 

S'y prendre mal, to go the wrong way to work. 

c , j . . , ^ to go quite a different, or 

o V prendre tout autrement, \ ° .1 . , 

^ r ( another, way to work. 

Prendre en mauvaise part, to take amiss. 

Finir a bout de, to bring about, to accomplish. 

EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

J choose rather to set out now than later. - - - She 
told me she had rather do any thing than speak to Mr. 
L. - - - They had rather have had you stay in Italy 
two or three years longer. - - - Do not you think Mrs. 
H. takes a great deal upon herself? - - - // is no wonder 
that I do not speak French so well as you ; you have 
been several years in France, and I never was there. 
- - - I hope your brother will succeed in his undertak- 
ing ; for, he goes the right way to zvork, and 1 am certain 
that he will bring it about. - - - Your cousin, on the 
contrary, will always be poor; for, he goes the wrong 
way to work in every thing he undertakes. - - - She 
longs to see your father, and tell him how well you 
have behaved all the time of his absence. - - - I had 
like to have been killed in coming here. - - - If he 
lose, he will lay thu blame upon you. - - - Why do you 
lay the blame upon her? she was not even in the room 
when that happened. - - - Should not your sister suc- 
ceed, whom would she lay the fault upon? - - - You 



453 

say you long to speak French ; and I too, I assure you. 
- - - 1 long to tell you something, nevertheless I do 
not know how to communicate it to you for fear of 
disobliging you. - - When you have a mind to tell me 
something disagreeable, you should go quite a different 
•way to work, - - - 1 beg of you not to take amiss what I 
tell you. - - Do not begin a thing, unless you are sure 
to brim it about. 



ON DIFFERENT VERBS. 

Se passer de, to do without, or to be easy without. 

Savoir bon gre, to take kindly of. 

Trouver mauvais que, to take ill if.* 

Trouver a redire a, to find fault with. 

Tenir maison, to be a house-keeper. 

Tenir boutique, to be a shop-keeper. 

Tenir parole, to keep our word. 

y, r . .. i to be in a person's power. 

JVe tenir qua, < , ,. . r , * 

1 ' l to lie m a person s power: ex. 

77 ne tienl qu^a moi, a vous, It is in my, your, his, her, 
a lui, a elle, fyc, power, &e. 

Jl ne tient pas a moi,d vous, It is not my, your, fault, 
&c. que, &c. if.t 

S'en tenir a, to stand to. 

Vouloir da bien a, to wish one well. 

En -couloir a, to have a spite against. 

Je souhailerois pouvoir, I wish I could. 

77 y va, il y alloit, de votre vie, your life is, was, at stake. 

r, -j 77 ., j , S m y honour is, was, 

11 u va, it y alloit, de mon honneur, \ J , . ' . ' 

* ' ■* ' ( concerned in it. 

Je ne laisse pas de, 1 nevertheless, or for all that. 

* With the following verb in the subjunctive. 

t With the following verb in the subjunctive, and ne before it. 



454 

EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

When I have wine, I drink some ; but when I have 
none, I am easy without it. - - If you will be so kind as 
to write to my father, to let him know my situation, I 
shall take it kindly of you, and promise you never to 
find fault with what you may recommend to me. - - 
J wish I could do you that service, I would do it with all 
my heart. - - I hope you will not tahe it ill, if I write 
to your uncle at the same time. - - I shall stand to 
what yon say. - - He has been a house-keeper these five 
and twenty years. - - He might have succeeded much 
better than he has done, had he followed his uncle's ad- 
vice and mine ; but he never was satisfied, and was con- 
tinually^ finding fault with what we were telling him. - - 
However little you send him at present, he will take it 
kindly of you. - • It is in her power to live in the coun- 
try, and be very happy there. - - It will soon lie in your 
power to make us happy. - - I assure you it shall not be 
my fault, if you do not succeed ; for J wish you well, - - 
Since it lies in your power to recommend Mr. P. to your 
friend, why do you not do it ? - - When you see him, 
you may assure him, that, since it is in my power to do 
it, I will not forget him. - - You have a spite against 
my brother; because it was in his power two or three 

times to oblige you, and he never would. - - I wish I 
could persuade you how sorry he was for it ; but his 
honour was concerned in not doing it : and, though you be 
very angry with him, he would, nevertheless, (or, for all 
that,) do you service if it were in his power* - * Had I 



455 

thought he would have refused me that favour, I never 
would have asked it of him ; I might very well have, 
done without it. - - You ought to have thanked him for 
that attention, instead of being angry with him ; but 
when your sisters heard that you could not obtain his 
leave, they took it amiss, and have ever since had a spite 
against him. - - When they told me of it, I would most 
willingly have represented to them how much they zvere 
in tne wrong : but I would by no means do it ; for I know 
it is in their power to do me a great deal of harm, and I 
do not wish to get enemies. - - Every body admires her 
humanity ; for, though he has behaved in so ungrateful 
a manner towards her, she would, nevertheless, have done 
him service, if he had lived. 



GENERAL AND PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 

OF THE UNDERSTANDING OF LANGUAGES. 

The understanding of languages serves (for an) in- 
intelligence^, de 

troduction to all the sciences. By it we come 

parvenir, v. 
with very little trouble at the knowledge of a great 

many fine things, which have cost those who in- 
vented them a great deal of pains. By it all 

times and countries lie open to us. By it 

siecle,m. itre,v. 

we become, in some measure, contemporary to all 



45S 

ages, and inhabitants of all kingdoms. It (enables) 

metlre en 6 tat, 
us to converse with the most learned men of all 

antiquity, who seem to have lived and laboured for 

us. We find in them many masters, whom (we are 

il nous 
allowed) to consult at leisure ; many friends who 
est perniis 
are always at hand, and whose useful and agreeable 

conversation improves the mind. It informs us of 

enrichir, v. 
a thousand curious subjects, and teaches us equally 

(how to make an advantage) of the virtues and vices 

a prqfiter,v. 
of mankind. Without the assistance of languages, 

all these oracles are dumb to us, and all these 

pcrxr, p. 
treasures (locked up;) and, for want of having the 

jfermer, v. 
key, which alone can open us the door (to them.) we 

en, v. 
remain poor in the midst of so many riches, and 

ignorant in the midst of all the sciences. 



OF STUDY. 

We (come into the world) surrounded with a cloud 
naitre, v. * 

of ignorance, which is increased by the false pre- 
judices of a bad education. By study, the former 
is dispersed, and the latter corrected. It gives 

* See the observation on the preposition with, page 405. 



457 

proportion and exactness to our thoughts and rea« 
jusiesse, f. 

sonings ; instructs how to range in due order what- 
ever we have to speak or write ; and presents us with 

dire, v. . * 

the brightest sages of antiquity as patterns for our 

modele^m. 
conduct, whom, in this sense, we may call, with 

Seneca, the masters, and teachers of mankind. But 

Seneque, precepteur, m. 

the usefulness of study is not confined to what we 

call science ; it renders us also more fit for business 

and employment ; besides, though this study 

de plus, adv. quand, c. 
were of no other use but (the acquiring) a habit of 

t 
labour, (the softening) the pains of it, (the pro- 

t 
curing a steadiness of mind and (conquering) 

t fermete, f. t 

our aversion to application or a sedentary life, or 

whatever else seems (to lay a restraint upon) us, it 

assujettir,r. 
would still be of very great advantage. In reality, 

it draws us off from idleness, play, and debauchery. 

retirer, v. «o> 
It usefully fills up the vacant hours of the day, and ren- 
ders very agreeable that leisure, which, without the 
assistance of literature, is a kind of death, and, in a 

manner, the grave of a man while he is alive. It ena- 

t These participles active are to be rendered in French by the 
infinitive. 

39 



458 
bles us to pass a right judgment upon other men's 
labours, to enter into society with men of understanding, 

to keep the best company, (to have a share in) 

frequenter ', v. prendre part a 

the discourses of the most learned, to furnish out matter 
for conversation, without which we must be silent, to 

quoi, 
render it more agreeable and more useful, by intermix- 
ing facts with reflections, and setting the one by the 

relever,v. 
ether. 



SECT. XI. 
SCHEME FOR PARSING A SENTENCE. 

As it is very essential to the thorough learning of a 
language, not to mistake one part of speech for another, 
we finish this grammar by giving a classical and methodi- 
cal scheme for parsing a sentence. The examples, with 
very little change, may suit any language. 

Article. Questions : Is it definite, partitive or indefi- 
nite ? What gender? What number? 

Examples, he pouvoir du roi, the power of the king ; 
la liberte des hommes, the liberty of men ; J'ai du pain, 
de la viande. des pommes ; / have bread, meat, apples ; La 
sceur de Pierre, Peters sister. 

Application. he, definite art. m. — du, contraction of 
d& le, genitive defi. art. m. — La definite art. f. — des, con- 
traction of de les, genitive defi. art. both genders, pi. — du, 
in the sense of .some, part. art. m. — de la, in the sense of 
some, part. art. f. — des, in the sense of some, part. art. 
both genders, pi. — de indefinite art. both genders and 
numbers, jreni. and abl. 

Substantive. Questions ; What gender ? What num- 
ber? If the noun is singular, name its plural: if plural, 
name its singular. 



459 

Examples. Le pouvoir du roi ; la liberie des hommes 5 
le prix des denrees, the price of provisions. 

Application. Pouvoir, substantive, m. pouvoirs for its 
pi. — Liberte, subst. f. liberies, for its pi. — Prix, subst. 
m. prix for its pi. — Denrees, subst. f. pi, denrie for its 
singular. 

Adjective. Questions: What gender ? What number? 
What does it agree with in the sentence ? If it be mas- 
culine, name its fern. If it be feminine, name its masc. 

Examples. Un beau chapeau, a fine hat ; ces femmes 
sont jolics, those ladies are 'pretty ; cette fille est orgueil- 
leuse, that girl is proud. 

Application. Beau, noun adj. m. agrees with chapeau; 
it has belle for its feminine. — Jolies, noun adj. f. pi. 
agrees with femmes ; it has joli for its masculine. — 
Orgueilhuse, noun adj. f. agrees with fille ; it has or- 
gueilleux for its masculine. 

Pronoun. Questions : Is it personal, conjunctive, pos- 
sessive, relative, demonstrative, interrogative or indefi- 
nite ? What gender? What number? With what does it 
agree in the sentence ? 

Examples, Elle a mon livre, she has my book. Cette 
plume ne vaut rien, this pen is good for nothing. L'hom- 
me qui vous parloit, the man who was speaking to you. 
11 y a plusieurs annees, some years ago. Quel homme ? 
JVhat man ? 

Application. Elle, pronoun pers. f. agrees with a. 
Mon, pronoun poss. m. agrees with livre. Cette, pronoun 
demonstr. f. agrees with plume. Qui, pronoun rel. 
both genders and numbers, agrees with homme. Pin- 
sieurs, pronoun indef. pi. both genders, agrees with 
annees. Quel ? pron. int. m. agrees with homme. 

Verb. Questions : Name its infinitive — its person — 
its number — its tense—its mode. 

Examples. Pendant qu'ils etoient ensemble, yentendis 
sonner midi ; xchilt they were together, I heard twelve 
o'clock strike. Quoiqu'il paroisse heureux, rCenviez pas 
son sort ; though he may appear happy, do not envy his 
situation* 



4 GO 

application* Etoient, from tire ; 3d pers. pi. imperf. 
tense, indie, mood. Entendis, from entendre ; 1st pers. 
sing, preterite, indicative mood. Paroisse, from paroitre, 
3d pers. sing. pres. tense, subjunc. mood. Enviez, from 
envier ; 2d pers. pi, imperat. mood. 

Preposition. What does it govern in the sentence ? 

Examples, Avant midi ; sans argent ; before noon ; 
without money. 

Application. Avant, a preposition, governs midi. Sans, 
a preposition, governs argent. 

Conjunction. What mood does it require? Name 
the verb it acts upon in the sentence. 

Examples. Lorsque le roi entra, zohen the king came 
in. Quoique vous soyez riche, though you be rich. Je 
lis pour m'amuser, / read to amuse myself. 

Application. Lorsque, a conjunction, requires the 
indie. Here it governs entra. Quoique, a conjunction, 
requires the subjunc. Here it governs soyez. Pour, a 
conjunction, requires the infinitive. Here it governs 
amuser. 

Adverbs and interjections. Only name them. 

Examples. Ah ! mon ami, agissez prudemment ; ah, 
my friend, act prudently. 

Application. Ah is an interjection — Prudemment is an 
adverb. 



A B 11 E G E 

DE LA VERSIFICATION FRANCOISE. 

LES vers, a ne les considerer que sous le rapport de 
leur -(.ecanisme, sont des paroles arrangees selon cer- 
taiues regies tixes et determinees. 

Ces regies reeardent sur-tout le Dombre des syllabes, 
la cesure, la rime, les mot:? que le vers exclut, les li- 
cences qu'il permet, et enrin les differentes mameres 
dont il uoit ctre arrange dan* chaqae ?orte de I'oeme. 

Des differentes especes de Vers franqois. 
On compie ordinairenient cinq sortes de vers francois. 
C'esf par le nomfrre des svllabes qu'on les distingue. 
1°. Ceux de douze syllabes, com me : 

Dans le re-durt ob-scnr d'u-ne al-co-ve en-fon-cee 
S'e-le-ve an lit de plu-oae a grands dais a-mas-see : 
Qua-ire ri-deaux pom-peox, par ur. dou-ble con-tour, 
En de-feu-dent Pen-tree a la ciar-te du jour. 

Ces vers s'appellent ahxandrins, heroiques on grands 
vers. 

2°, Ceux de dix syllabes, comme : 

Du peu qu'il a le sage" est sa-tis-fait. 

3°. Ceux de huit syllabes, comme : 

L'hi-po-cri-te en frau-des fer-ti-le, 
Des l'en-fan-ce est pe-iri de lard ; 
11 seat co-lo-rer a-vec art 
Le fiel que sa bou-che dis-tille. 

4°. Ceux de sept syllabes, comme : 

Grand Dieu ! vo-tre main reclame 
Les dons que j^n ai re-^us. 
El-le vient cou-per la trame 
Des jour? qu 1 el-le ra'a tis-sus. 
Mon der-nier so-leil se leve, 
Et vo-t>"fc souf-fle m^en-leve 
De la ter-re des vi-vans ; 
Com-rne la feuil-le se-ehee 
Qui, de sa ti-ge ar-ra-chee, 
De-vient le jou-et des vents. 

6°. Ceux de six svllabes, comme : 

A soi-meme o-di-eux 
Le sot de tout s^r-ri-te : 
En tous Heux il s'e-vite, 
Et se trouve en tous lieux. 
39* 



462 

Les vers qui ont moins de six syllabes ne sont guere 
d'usage que pour la poesie lynque, et quelques petites 
pieces badines. 

DE LA CESURE. 

La Cesure est un repos qui coupe le vers en deux 
parties on hemistiches. 

Ce repos doit etre a la sixieme syllabe dans les grands 
vers, et a la quatrieme dans ceux de dix syllabes. 
L'esprft et l'usage de la cesure sont tres bien exprimes 
dans ces vers de Boileau. 

Que toujours en vos vers, -le sens coupant les mots, 
Suspende Phemistiche, -en marque le repos. 
Sur les ailes du temps -la tristesse s^nvole. 

Que le mensonge - un instant vous outrage, 

Tout est en feu -soudain pour Pappuyer ; 

La verite-perce enfin le nuage, 

Tout est de g)ace - a vous justifier. 

II n'y a que les vers de douze et de dix syllabes qui 
aient une cesure. 

Pour que la cesure soit bonne, il faut que le sens au- 
torise le repos ; ainsi dans les vers suivans, la cesure 
est detectueuse. 

N'oublions pas les grands -bienfaits de la patrie. 
Faites voir un regret -sincere de vos fautes. 
Mod pere, quoiqu'il eut la tete des meilleures, 
Ne m'a jamais rien fait-apprendre que mes heures. 

La cesure ne vaut rien dans ces exemples, parce que 
le sens exige que le mot ou est la cesure, et celui qui le 
suit, soient prononces tout de suite et sans pause. 

Mais la cesure est bonne dans les vers suivans : 

Ses chanoines vermeils -et brillans de sant^ 
S'engraissoient d'une longue - et sainte oisivete. 

lei la cesure est bonne, parce qu'on peut faire une 
petite pause apres un substantif suivi de plusieurs ad- 
jectifs, ou entre plusieurs adjectifs qui suivent ou qui 
precedent un substantif. 

I. Remarque. Le dernier mot du premier hemistiche, 
peut se terminer par Ve muet, pourvu que le mot suivant 
commence par une voyelle. 

Ami lui dit le chantre encor pale d'horreur, 
N'insulte pas de grace a ma juste terreur. 
II trepigne de joie, il pleure de tendresse. 



463 

If. Rem. Les pronoms ce/a, celui, celui-la, etc, et de 
qui, mis pour dont, peuvent aussi terminer le premier 
hemistiche, ou recevoir la cesure ; on soufire cette ne- 
gligence, mais il faut se la permettre rarement ; elle 
donne toujours aux vers un air prosaique. 

II n'est fort entre ceux que tu prends par centaines, 
Qui ne puisse arreter un rimeur six semaines : 
Benissons Dieu de qui la puissance est sans bornes. 

Les vers de dix et de douze syllabes sont, comme tous 
les autres, assujetis aux regies dont il nous reste a parler. 
DE LA RIME. 

La Rime est la convenance de deux sons qui termi- 
nent deux vers. Quelquefois on exige aussi qu'il y ait 
convenance d'orthographe, que deux sons semblables 
soient represented par les memes lettrcs. 

Ou rue cacher ? fuyons dans la nuit infernale. 
Mais que dis-je ? mon pere y tient Purne fatale. 
Le sort, dit-on, Pa mise en ses severes mains. 
Minos juge aux enfers tous les paies humains. 

On distingue deux sortes de rimes, la feminine et la 
masculine. La premiere est celle des vers qui se termi- 
nent par un e outlet, soit seul, soit suivi d'uue s ou d'rif. 

Travaillez a loisir, quelque ordre qui vous presse, 

Et ne vous piquez point d'une folle vitesse. 

11 veut les rappeler, et sa voix les effraie ; 

lis eourent ; tout sou corps n'est bientot qu'une plaie. 

Dans quels ravissemens, a votre sort liee, 

Du reste des mortels je vivrois oubliee. 

Un jeune homme, toujours bouillant dans ses caprices, 

Est pret a recevoir Pimpression des vices. 

C'est peu qu'en un ouvrage ou les fautes fourmillent, 

Des traits d'esprit semes de temps en temps peiillent. 

Ces vers (eminins ont une syllabe de plus que les 
masculins: mais comme Ve muet sonne foiblement dans 
la syllabe qui termine le vers, cette syllabe est comptee 
pour rien. 

La rime masculine est celle qui finit par une autre 
lettre que l'e muet, ou seul, ou suivi d'une s, ou enfin dVtY. 

Chaque vertu devient une divinite ; 

Minerve est la prudence, et Venus la beaute. 

Le travail est souvent le pere du plaisir ; 

Je plains Phomme accable du poi u* de son loisir. 

Remarque. La syllabe oient ou arent^ qui se trouvc 
dans les irnparfaits et les conditionnels des veibes, forme 



464 

une rime masculine, parce que eette syllabe a le son de 

l'e onvert. Ainsi les vers suivans sont masculins. 

Aux accords cPAmphion les pierres se mouvoient, 
Et sur les murs Thebains en ordre s^levoient. 

RIMES RICHES ET SUFF1S ANTES. 

Les rimes masculines et feminines se divisent en 

riches et en suffisantes. 

I. La rime riche est formee de deux sons parfai- 
tement semblables, et souvent represented par les 
memes lettres. 

Indomptable Taureau, Dragon impetueux, 
Sa croupe se recourbe en replis tortueux. 
De rage et de douleur le monstre bondissant 
Vient aux pieds des chevaux touiber en mugissant. 
Au moment que je parle, ab, mortelle pen?6e ! 
lis bravent la fureur d'une amante insensee. 

II. La rime suffisante est celle qui n'a pas une con- 
venance aussi exacte de sons et d'orthographe. 

Helas ! Dieux tout-puissans, que nos pleurs vou? appaisent. 
Que ces vains ornemens, que ces voiles me pesent ! 
Quelle importune main, en forraant tous ces noeuds, 
A pris soin sur mon front d'assembler mes cheveux ? 

III. Dans la rime masculine, on n'a guere egard en 
general, qu'au dernier son des mots: ainsi maison rime 
avec poison ; piete avec purete ; proces avec succes, 

IV. Mais dans la rime feminine, on fait une attention 
particuliere au son de 1'avant derniere sjllabe, parce 
que celui de la derniere n'est ni assez plein, ni assez 
marque, pour produire une conformite de son sensible et 
agreable a I'oreille. Ainsi mere et mdre,audace et justice^ 
esti/ne et diudeme ne rimeroient pas ensemble, quoique 
ces mots se terminent par la meme syllabe re, ce, me, 

Mais visible et sensible, monde et profonde. justice et 
precipice, usage et portage, pen vent rimer ensemble, 
parre que ces mots out une convenance de sons dans 
les avint-dernieres syllabes. 

V. Comme la convenance de sons est essentielle a 
la rime, on ne saproit bien faire rimer les syllabes 
breves avec les longues, les / mouillees avec les / non 
mouitlees, etc. romme mail re et metre ; joute et route ; 
gemie (qui n'est pa^ vieux) et jeune (abstinence) ; la 
Jille et tejih ; piril et putril, etc. Ainsi J. B. Rousseau 



465 

a manque a son exactitude ordinaire, quand il disoit a 
son ami; 

Et sur ce bord bmaillt 
Ou Neuilli borde la Seine, 
Beviens an vin tfJLuvile 
Meier les eaux d'Hj'pocrene. 

VI. L'e ferme, l't et IV soit seuls, soit suivis des 
consonnes /, s, / ou z, ne forment pas de bonnes rimes, 
si dans les deux s) llabes rimantes ils ne sont precedes de 
la meme consonne. Ainsi bonti et donne, vertus et re.gus 1 
amis et avis, cultivez et portez, ne rimeroient pas bien. 

Choisissez des amis de qui la piete 
Vous soit un sur garant de leur fidelite. 
Ami droit et sincere on doit a ses amis 
Garder fldelement ce qu 1 on leur a promis. 

VII. L'observation precedente a lieu pour Pa dans 
les verbes : \\ donna et il aima, il porta* et il reva, il 
immola et il saura, ne rimeroient pas ensemble. Et en 
general el!e est d'usage pour tous les sons communs a 
un grand nombre de mots. Ainsi les sons ant ou ent, eu 
et on ne riment bien qu'autant qu'ils sont precedes des 
memes lettres, comme puissant, chassant ; agremenU regi- 
ment ; passion, mission ; ambitieux, religitux ; vieux, mieux. 

Mais les mots suivans ne rimeroient pas bien ensem- 
ble : puissant, chancelant ; raison, passion ; heureux, r&- 
ligieux, etc. 

VIII. Quand la rime est formee par des sons pleins, 
eomme ar, as, at, or, os, ot, er, es, et, ai, ei, oi, au, eau, 
eu, ou ; par an, am, en, em, ion, oin ; en un mot par des 
voyelles precedees d'une ou de plusieurs consonr.es, 
alors on n'exige pas que la lettre qui precede soit la 
meme dans les mots qu'on veut faire rimer. Par ex- 
em pie, embarras et combats, gros et sots, progres et suc- 
cess, mer et enfer, ouvert et souffert, soupir et desir, espoir 
et devoir, jamais et par/ aits, pain et main, nuit et conduit, 
temoins et besoins, soutiens et conviens, et autres sembla- 
bles peuvent rimer ensemble. 

IX. Un mot en e, x, ou z, ne peut rimer qu'avec un 
mot termine par l'une de ces trois consonnes. Ainsi 
admirable et tables, risible et plausibles, le secours et le 
jour, la vanite et vous miritez, la foi et les his, le cour- 
roux et le genou, etc. ne rimeront pas bien ensemble. 



4G6 

Mais lois et Rois, courroux et tous, celestes et tu de- 
tesles, vanites et vous meditez, clefs et vous raclez, le dis- 
cours et le cours, formeront de bonnes rimes. 

X. Dans les verbes ois et oit, ajant le son de Pe 
ouvert, ne riment guere qu'avec un autre verbe. Quoi- 
que yaimois et jamais, donnois et harnois, placoit et lacet, 
manquoii et banquet, je deplacois et les succes, se termi- 
Rent par le mesne son, l'usage ordinaire est de ne les 
pas faire rimer ensemble. 

XI. Les terminaisons ent, oient ou aient, ne doivent 
rimer qu'avec des verbes qui aient les memes termi- 
naisons: ils privent, ils ecrivent ; ils lurcnt, ils burent ; 
qu'ils surfasscnt, qu'ils effacent ; etc. mais ils mepristnt 
ne rimeroient pas bien avec entreprise ; la surface, avec 
ils surpassent. 

XII. La convenance des sons et d'orthographe ne 
peut autoriser la rime du mot avec lui-meme, d'un sim- 
ple avec son compose, ni meme de deux mots derives 
de la meme racine, quand ils se ressemblent trop pour la 
signification. Ainsi la rime est defectueuse dans ces vers : 

Je cojinois trop les Grands, dans le malheur amis, 
Ingrats dans la fortune, et bientot ennemis. 

Elle est tout-a-fait vicieuse dans ceux-ci : 

Les chefs et les soldats ne se connoissent plus / 
IAm ne peut commander, l'autre n'obeit plus. 

XIII. Mais deux mots entitlement semblables par le 
son et Porthographe riment bien ensemble, lorsqu'ils ont 
des significations diflferentes. Les derives sont dans le 
meme cas, s'ils n'ont plus un rapport sensible pour le sens. 

Prends-nioi le bon parti, laisse-la tous les hires: 

Cent francs au denier cinq, combien font-ils? vingt Hires. 

Nobles, sou renez- vous qu'une naissance illustre 

Des sentiraens du coeur recoit son plus beau lustre. 

Dieu punit les forfaits que les rois ont commis, 

Ceux qu'ils n'ont point veng6s, et ceux qu'ils ont permis. 

XIV. Les deux hemistiches d'un vers ne doivent 
pas rimer ensemble, ni meme avoir une convenance de 
sons, comme : 

II ne tiendra qu'a toi de partir avec moi. 
Aux Saumaises/uhtrs preparer des tortures. 



467 

XV. Le dernier hemistiche d'un vers ne doit pas 
non plus rimer avec le premier du vers precedent ou du 
yers suivant. 

II faut, pour lee avoir, employer tous vos soins ; 
lis sont a moi, du moins tout autant qu'a mon frere. 
Un fiacre, me couvrant d'un deluge de boue 
Contre le mur voisin m'ecrase de sa roue ; 
Et, voulant me sauver, des porteurs inhumains 
De leur maudit baton me donnent dans les reins. 

XVI. 11 faut encore eviter la rime dans les premiers 
hemistiches de deux vers qui se suivent. 

Sinon demain matin, si vous le trouvez bon, 
Je mettrai de ma main le feu dans la maison. 

Quelquefois cependant la rime des premiers hemis- 
tiches n'a rien de choquant ; c'est lorsqu'elle se fait par 
la repetition d'une pensee, d'une expression qu'on re- 
produit a dessein, pour fixer davantage l'attention du 
lecteur ; comme : 

Qui cherche vraiment Dieu, dans lui seul se repose ; 
Et qui craint vraiment Dieu, ne craint rien autre chose. 

Des termes que le vers exclut. 

I. Les bons Poetes rejettent avec soin tous les 
termes durs, ou difficiles a prononcer, ou has et pro- 
saiques. Rarement ils se servent des conjonctions que 
les orafeurs emploient souvent pour lier et arrondir 
leurs periodes ; telles que c'est pourquoi, parce que, 
pourvu que, puisque, de maniere, defagon que, de sorte que 
ou en sorte que, outre, d^ailleurs, en efftt, etc. 

II est un heureux choix de mots harmonieux ; 
Fuyez des mauvais sons le concours odieux. 
Le versle raieux rempli, la plus noble pensee, 
Ne pent plaire a l'esprit, quand Poreille est blessee. 

II. Un mot termine par une autre voyelle que Ye 
muet, ne pent etre suivi d'un mot qui commence aussi 
par une voyelle ou une h muette : ce seroit un hiatus. 

Gardez qu'une voyelle a courir trop hatee, 
Ne soit d'une voyelle en son chemin heurtee. 

Ainsi les phrases suivantes ne formeroient pas de 
vers : 

Que l'aimable vertu a peu d'adorateurs ! 
Evitez le souci, et fnyez la coiere. 



468 

III. Comme la conjonction et a toujours le son de l'e 
ferme, elle ne sauroit nou plus dans le vers etre suivie 
d'une voyelle. On ne pourroit pas dire en vers : 

Qui sert et aime Dieu, possede toutes choses. 
Mais on dira bien : 

Qui connoit et sert Dieu, possede toutes choses, 

IV. Les voyelles nasales qui, dans la prononciation, 
ne doivent pas etre liees avec le mot suivant, ne peu- 
vent avec grace etre suivies d'un mot qui commence par 
une voyelle. Ainsi la rencontre des voyelles nasales 
et des voyelles simples est desagreable dans ce vers : 

Un grand nom est un poids difficile a porter. 

Ah ! j'attendrai long-temps, la nuit est loin encore. 

Cependant cette rencontre peut se sourTrir, quand la 
prononciation permet de pratiquer un petit repos entre 
le moi qui finit par un son nasal, et le mot qui com- 
mence par une voyelle; comme dans ce vers de 
1'Athalie de Racine: 

Celui qui met unfrein a la fureur des flots, 
Saitaussi des medians arreter les complots. 

V. L'e muet final et precede d'une voyelle, comme 
dans donnee, aimee, Jlsie, envie, la paie, la joie, la proie, 
la rite, entrevue, etc. ne peut entrer dans le corps du 
vers qu'au moyen de l'elision ; ainsi les vers suivans 
sont mal construits : 

Au travers du Soleil, ma vue s'eblouit. 

lis vous lonent tout haut et vous jonent tout has. 

II avoue sa faute et demande pardon. 

Mais ceux-ci sont reguliers a. cause de l'elision , 

Lajoie est naturelle aux ames innocenfes. 
A quels mortels regrets ma vie est reservee ! 

VI. L'e muet, dans le corps du mot et precede d'une 
vovelle, est compte pour rien dans la prononciation ; 
souvent meme on ne l'ecrit pas. II agreera, crura, louera, 
ireniemmt, denouement, etc. ne font pas plus de svllabes 
que agrera, crira, loura, reniment, devoument, 

ENJAMBEMENT DES VERS. 
Les vers n'ont ni grace ni harmonie, quand on rejetteau 
commencement du second vers des mots qui dependent 
necessairement de ce qui se trouve a la fin du premier. 



469 

Quel que soit voire ami, sachez que mutuelle 
Doit etre Pamitie" ; m6me ardeur, merue zele. 
II n'est done point d'amis, pour la derniere fois 
Je le r6pete encor : peu connoissent les lois 
D'une vraie amitie. 

Dans le premier vers, mutuelle depend necessairement 
de ces mots doit etre Pamitie, 

Dans les derniers, ces mots 8?une vraie amitie sont de- 
pendans de ceux-ci, les lois, et 1'on ne peut les separer 
dans la prononciation. 

Ces enjambemens sont proscrits dans la haute poesie, 
mais ils se tolerent dans les fables et dans les autres 
pieces de style familier. 

Si neanmoins la dependance d'un vers s'etendoit jus- 
qu'a la fin du suivant, en sorte qu'a la fin du premier il 
y eut un petit repos, l'harmonie loin d'etre blessee n'en 
seroit que plus sensible. 

La git la sombre envie, a Pceil timide et louche, 
Versant sur des lauriers les poisons de sa bouche. 
Ce malheureux combat ne fit qiPapprofondir 
L'abime dont Valois vouloit en vain sortir. — Volt. 

Des licences qu>on se permei dans les Vers, 

Ces licences consistent dans certaines dispositions de 
mots, dans l'emploi de plusieurs termes dont la prose 
n'oseroit se servir, dans le retranchement d'une lettre. 

DES TRANSPOSITIONS. 

I. On place avec grace les regimes composes avant 
les mots et les verbes dont ils dependent. 

A la Religion soyez toujours fidele, 
Les moeurs et la vertu ne sauvent point sans elle. 
C'est Dieu qui du neant a tire Punivers ; 
C'est lui qui sur la terre a repandu les mers. 

Sans Dieu rien n^ut ete, 
Et lui seul des mortels fait la felicite. 
JL vous former le coeur appliquez-vous sans cesse. 

II. On place entre l'auxiliaire et le participe, entre 
le verbe et son regime, des mots qui n'y seroient pas 
soufferts en prose. 

Un vieillard venerable avoit, loin de la Cowr, 
Cherche" la douce paK dans un obscur sejourr 
Dieu fit dans ce disert descendre Ja sagesse. 

40 



470 

Les transpositions, quand elles sont naturelles, et 
qu'elles n'embarrassent pas le sens de la phrase, donnent 
de la grace et de la noblesse a la poesie ; mais elles ne 
valent rien, lorsqu'elles rendent le vers dur, ou qu'elles 
obscurcissent la pensee, comme dans les vers suivans : 

Quoi ! voit-on revetu de Petole sacree 
Le pretre de Vautel s'arreter a Tentree ? 
Craignez de voire orgueil de vous rendre la dupe. 
Que toujours la fiert£, l'honneur, la bienseance 
De cette folle ardeur s'oppose a la naissance. 

Des mots propres a la Poesie. 

La poesie se sert en general des mernes mots que la 
prose; cependant ily a quelques expressionsque les Poetes 
emploient heureusement, et qui seroient deplacees dans 
la prose. Telles sont antique pour ancien : coursier pour 
cheval : PEternel, le Tres-Haut, le Tout-Puissant pour 
Dieu : le flanc pour le sein, le venire : le glaive pour Vipte : 
les humainsi les mortels, la race de Japet pour les hommes : 
hymen ou hymenee pour mariage : espoir pour esperance : 
le penser pour la pensee : jadis pour autrefois : naguire 
ou nagueres pour il ii*y a pas long-temps: labtur pour 
travail: repentance pour repentir: soudain pour aussitot : 
ombre eternelle, sombres bords pour Venfer, etc. 

*"■ Ou sont, Dieu de Jacob, tes antiques bontes ? 

On faitcas cPun coursier, qui, fier et plein de coeur, 

Fait paroitre en courant sa bouillante vigueur. 

L'Eternel en ses mains tient seul nos destinees. 

Celtbrons dans nos chants la gloiie du Tres-haut. 

Si quelque audacieux embrasse sa querelle, 

QiPa la fureur du glaive on le livre avec elle. 

Souvent d'un faux espoir un amant est nourri. 

Les Dieux m'en sont iemoins, ces Dieux qui dans mon flanc 

Ont allume le feu fatal a toul mon sang, 

Ces Dieux qui se sont fait une gloire cruelle 

De seduire le coeur d'une foible mortelle. 

Soumise a mon epoux, et cachant mes ennuis, 

De son fatal hymen je cultivois les fruits. 

On n?aime plus comme on aimoit jadis. 
Va dans l'ombre eternelle, ombre pleine cPenvie ; 
Et ne te mele plus de censurer ma vie. 

La lecture des bons Poetes fournira une foule d'autres 
expressions propres a la poesie. 



471 

Nous ecrivons en prose je crois, je vois,je dis, je sais, 
je vis, yavertis, etc. Les Poetes, selon le besoin, em- 
ploient ou retranchent l's dans ces mots, lis ecriventde 
meme jusque ou jusques, encore ou encor, grace an del oil 
graces au CieL Us emploient aussi alors que, pour lorsque, 
cependant que pour pendant que, avecque pour tfuee, etc. 

Les bons Poetes se servent rarement de la plupartde 
ces dernieres licences; et ceux qui se livrent a la poesie 
ne doivent pas oublier le precepte de Boileau. 

Sur tout qu'en vos ecrits la langue reveree, 

Dans vos plus grands exces vous soit loujours sacree ; 

Envain vous rae frappez d'un son melodieux, 

Si le terme est impropre ou le tour vicieux ; 

Mon esprit n'admet point on pompeux barbarisme, 

Ni d'un vers ampoule Porgneilleux solecisme. 

Sans la langue, en un mot, l'auteur le plus divin, 

Est toujours, quoiqu'il fasse, un mechant ecrivain. 

DE L' ARRANGEMENT DES VERS ENTR'EUX. 

Dans les differentes manieres dont les vers doivent 
etre arrauges, il faut considerer la rime et le nombre 
des syllabes. 

Le nombre des syllabes est arbitraire dans les pieces 
libres et dans la poesie lyrique; mais il est determine 
dans les autres pieces serieuses, qui sont la plupart ecri- 
tes en vers de douze syllabes. Ainsi dans le Poeme 
epique, PEglogue, PElegie, la Satyre, PEpitre, et dans 
la Tragedie et la haute Comedie, il est d'usage de n'em- 
ployerque le vers Alexandrin. 

Quant h la rime, deux vers masculins peuvent etre 
suivis de deux vers feminins, et vice versa; ou bien un 
vers masculin est suivi d'un ou de deux feminins, et un 
vers feminin d'un ou de deux masculins. 

On appelle vers a rimes plates ceux qui sont disposes 
de la premiere facon, comme les suivans. 

De figures san9 nombre, egayez votre ouvrage ; 
Que tout y fasse aux yeux une riante image : 
On peut etre a la fois et pompeux et plaisant, 
Et je hais un sublime ennuyeux, languissant. 
Un poeme excellent ou tout marche et se suit, 
N'est pas de ces travaux qu'un caprice produit : 
II veut du temps, des soins ; et ce penible ouvrage 
Jamais d'un ecolier ne fut Paprentissage. 



472 

On appelle vers a rimes croisees ceux qui sont ordon 
nes de la seconde maniere, comme ceux-ci dans lesquels 
Rousseau dit en parlant de Circe furieuse : 

Sa voix redoutable 
Trouble les enfers, 
Un bruit formidable 
Gronde dans les airs, 
Un voile effroyable 
Couvre PUnivers. 

Mais quand en n'observe d'autre regie que de ne pas 
mettre de suite plus de deux vers masculins ou feminins, 
et qu'on fait suivre un vers masculin ou feminin d'un ou 
de deux vers d'une rime differente, alors ils s'appellent 
vers a rimes meUes, comme ceux-ci : 

Ah ! si d'une pauvrete dure 
Nous cherchons a nous affranchir, 
Rapprochons-nous de la nature. 
Qui seule peut nous enrichir. 
Forcons de funestes obstacles ; 
Reservons pour nos tabernacles 
Cet or, ces rubis, ces metaux ; 
Ou dans le sein des mers avides 
Jetons ces richesses perfides, 
L'unique aliment de nos maux. 

Lorsque les vers sont en rimes plates, ils ont ordi- 
nairement le raeme nombre desyllabes. Mais lorsqu'ils 
sont a rimes croisees ou a rimes melees, souvent ils ont 
une mesure inegale. 

Dans les vers a rimes plates, c'est un defaut de faire 
revenir deux rimes masculines ou feminines deja em- 
ployees, de maniere qu'elles ne soient separees de deux 
autres semblables que par deux rimes d'une espece dif- 
ferente, comme dans cet exemple : 

Soudain Potier se leve et demande audience : 
Chacun, a son aspect, garde un profond silence. 
Dans ce temps malheureux par le crime infect 6, 
Potier fut toujours juste, et pourtant respecte". 
Souvent on Pavoit vu, par sa male eloquence* 
De leurs emportemens reprimer la licence, 
Et, conservant sur eux sa vieille autoriti. 
Leur montrer la justice avec impuniti. 



473 

L'oreille est aussi choquee par la convenance de sons 
dans les rimes masculines et feminines qui se suivent, 
comme dans ces vers, d'ailleurs pleins de belles images. 

Tel des antres du Nord echappes sur la terre. 
Precedes par les vents, et suivis du tonnerre, 
D'un tourbillon de poudre obscurcissant les airs, 
Les orages fougueux parcourent VUnivers. 

On compose a rimes plates les grands poemes, tels que 
TEpopee, la Tragedie, la Comedie, l'Eglogue, PElegie, 
la Satyre, PEpitre ; a rimes croisees, POde, le Sonnet, 
le Rondeau ; et a rimes melees, les Stances, PEpigram- 
me, les Fables, les Madrigaux, les Chansons. 

11 n'y a d'autres regies a observer dans les grands po- 
emes pour la distribution des rimes, que d'eviter la con* 
souance, et de ranger les vers masculins et feminins 
deux a deux les uns apres les autres. Nous ne nous eten- 
drons done pas davantage sur cet article par rapport a PE- 
popee, a la Tragedie, etc. Nous ne dirons rien non plus 
des autres regies de ces poemes. Ces dissertations nous 
meneroient trop loin. Consultez PArt poetique de Boi- 
leau, et les meiileures poet.iques anciennes et modernes. 

Mais Pordonnance des vers dans plusieurs petits 
poemes a des regies fixes et particulieres. Ce sera le 
sujet des articles suivans. 

DES STANCES. 

Une Stance est un certain nombre de vers, apres les* 
qurls le sens est fini. Dans une Ode elle s'appeNe Strophe. 

Une stance n'a pas ordinairement moins de quatre 
vers, ni plus de dix. La mesure des vers y est arbi- 
trage; ils peuvent etre ou tous grands ou tous petits, 
ou bien meles les uns aver les autres. 

Les stances sont appelees regulicres, lorsqu'ellps ont 
un meme nomhre de vers, un meme melange de rimes, 
et que les grands et les petits vers y sont egalement 
distribues. Elles sont appelees irregulieres lorsqu'elles 
n'ont pas toutes ces convenances. 

Poar la perfection des stances, il est necessaire, 
1°. Que le sens tinisse avec le dernier vers de chacune. 
40* 



474 

2°. Que ie dernier vers d'une stance ne rime pas 
avec le premier de la suivante. 

3°. Que les stances d'une meme piece commencent 
et finissent par des rimes de meme nature ; c'est-a-dire, 
que si le premier vers d'une stance finit par une rime 
masculine, les premiers vers des strophes suivantes doi- 
vent egalement etre masculins. II est cependant bon 
de remarquer que quoiqu'en general il ne soil pas per- 
mis de mettre de suite quatre rimes de meme espece, 
cependant plusieurs auteurs Pont fait d'une stance a 
l'autre, parce qu'ils ont regarde chaque stance d'une 
piece comme isolee, et comme independante de celle 
qui suit. Mais nous croyons que cette licence ne peut 
etre toleree que dans les chansons. 

Si une stance est seule, elle prend un nom particulier, 
du nombre de vers dont elle est composee. Elle s'ap- 
pelle Quatrain, si elle en a quatre ; Sixain, si elle en a 
six; Dixain, si elle en a dix. Et quelquefois a raison 
du sujet, c'est une Epigramme, un Madrigal. On ap- 
peloit autrefois Octave une stance de huit vers. 

On voit que toutes ces stances sont du nombre pair. 
II y en a aussi du nombre impair, de cinq, de sept et de 
neuf vers. 

REGLES POUR LES STANCES DE NOMBRE PAIR. 

I. Stances (le quatre vers. 

Ces stances sont plusieurs quatrains joints ensemble, 
et lies par un sens qui dure jusqu'a la fin de la piece. 
Entre le premier vers nnsculin ou feminin, et celui qui 
lui repond, on met un ou deux vers d'une rime differente, 
comme dans ces vers ou l'Amitie fait elle-meme son por- 
trait. 

J'ai le visage long, et la mine naive, 

Je suis sans finesse et sans art. 
Mon teint est fort uni, raa couleur assez vive, 

Et je ne mets jamais de fard. 
Mon abord est civil ; j'ai la bouche riante, 

FA mes yeux ont mille douceurs : 
Mais quoique je soi? belle, agreable et charmante, 

Je regne sur bien peu de ccenr?. 



475 

On me proteste assez, et presque tous les hommes 

Se vantent de suivre mes lois : 
Mais que j'en connois peu dans le siecle ou nous sommes, 

Dont le coeur reponde a ma voix ! 
Ceux que je fais aimer d'une flamrae fidele, 

Me font Pobjet de tous leurs soins ; 
Et quoique je vieillisse, ils me trouvent fort belle, 

Et ne nPen estiment pas moins. 
On nPaccuse pourtant d'aimer trop a paroitre 

Ou Pon voit la prosperite ; 
Cependant il est vrai qu'on ne me peut connoitre 

QiPau milieu de Padversite. 

Autre exemple : 

Dans ce sallon pacifique 
Ou president les neufsoeurs, 
Un loisir philosophique 
T'offre encor d'autres douceurs. 

La, nous trouverons sans peine 
Avec toi, le verre en main, 
L'homme apres qui Diogene 
Courut si long-temps en vain. 

Et dans la douce altegresse 

Dont tu sais nous abreuver, 

Nous puiserons la sagesse 

Qu'il chercha sans la trouver. — J. B. Rousseau. 

Remarque. Les veritables quatrains n'ont aucune 
liaison pour le sens, et la morale en est ordinairement 
la matiere. Exemple : 

Ne demandez a Dieu ni gloire, ni richesse, 

Ni ces biens dont Peclat rend le peuple etonne" : 

Mais pour bien commander, demandez la sagesse ; 

Avec un don si saint tout vous sera donne. 

Ecoutez et lisez la celeste parole, 

Que, dans le? livres saints, Dieu nous donne pour loi. 

La politique humaine au prix d^lle est frivole, 

Et forme plus souvent un tyran qu'un bon Roi. 

II. Stances de six vers, 

Elles sont composees d'un quatrain et de deux vers 
d'une meme rime, qui se metlent au commencement ou 
u la fin. D'ailleurs les vers d'un quatrain se melent de 
la meme maniere que ci-dessus. 

Si les deux vers d'une meme rime sont au commence- 
ment, alors a la tin du troUieme, on met ordinairement 
un repos. et le sens nc doit pas s'ctcndie ju?qu'au qua- 



476 

trieme. Ce repos donne beaucoup de grace et d'har- 
monie a cette sorte de stances. 

On peut voir, par les exemples suivans, que ce repos 
peut etre plus ou moins marque, et qu'il n'est pas ri- 
goureusement exige dans les sixains. 

Ce n'est done point assez que ce peuple perfide, 
De la sainte cite profanateur stupide, 
Ait dans tout POrient porte ses etendards ; 
Et paisible tyran de la Grece abattue, 

Partage a notre vue 
La plus belle moitie du trone des Cesars. 

Des veilles, des travaux un foible coeur s'etonne. 
Apprenons toutefois, que le fils de Latone, 

Dont nous suivons la cour, 
Ne nous vend qu^a ce prix ces traits de vive flamme 
Et ces ailes de feu qui ravissent une ame 

Au celeste sejour. 

La place de ce repos varie, et est tantot apres le 
second, tantot apres le quatrieme vers, dans les sixains 
ou les deux vers d'une meme rime sont a la fin de la 
strophe, comme dans les stances suivantes. 

Seigneur, dans ton temple adorable, 

Quel mortel est digne cPentrer? 

Qui pourra, grand Dieu penetrer 

Ce sanctuaire impenetrable, 
Ou tes saints inclines, d'un oeil respectueux, 
Contemplent de ton front Peclat majestueux? 

Ce sera celui qui du vice 

Evite le sentier Jaipur, 

Qui marche d">un pas ferme et sur, 

Dans le chemin de la justice ; 
Attentif et fidele a distinguer sa voix, 
Intrepide et severe a pratiquer ses loix ; 

Celui devant qui le superbe, 

Enfie d'une vaine splendeur, 

Paroit plus bas dans sa grandeur 

Que Pinsecte cache sous Pherbe ; 
Qui bravant du mediant le faste couronne, 
Uonore la vertu du juste infortune. 

111. Stances de huit vers, 

Ces stances ne sont ordinairempnt que deux quatrains 
joints ensemble. Le sens doit finir apres le premier: 



477 

et les vers de tous les deux s'entrelacent, comme nous 
l'avons deja dit. Exemple: 

Tel en un sacre vallon, 

Sur le bord dHme onde pure, 

Croit a Pabri de PAquilon 
Un jeune lys, Pamour de la nature. 
Loin du monde eleve, de tous les dons des Cieux 

II est orne" des sa naissance ; 
Et du mechant Pabord contagieux 

N'allere point son innocence. 

Racine, chczurs cPAthalie. 

Si quelque jour etant ivre 

La raort arretoit mes pas, 

Je ne voudrois pas revivre 

Apres un si doux trepas : 

Je nPen irois dans PAverne 

Faire enivrer Alecton, 

Etbatir une taverne 

Dans le raanoir de Pluton. — Maitre Adam. 

Ces stances peuvent aussi commencer par deux vers 
sur une meme rime, et les six autres sont sur des rimes 
croisees. Quelquefois aussi ces stances n'ont qu'un six- 
ain sur deux ou trois rimes, apres quoi viennent deux 
vers de meme rime. 

Ces melanges de rime peuvent aisement se concevoir, 
sans qu'il soit necessaire d'en citer des exemples ; d'ail- 
leurs ils ne sont pas communs. 

IV. Stances de dix vers, 

Les stances de dix vers ne sont autre chose qu'un 
quatrain et un sixain, dont les vers s'entremelent selon 
les regies ordinaires. Elles tirent leur harmonie d'un 
premier repos place a la fin du quatrain, et d'un second 
apres le septieme vers. Ex. 

C'est un arret du Ciel, il faut que Phomme meure ; 

Tel est son partage et son sort : 

Rien n'est plus certain que la mort, 
Et rien plus incertain que cette derniere heure. 
Heureuse incertitude, utile obscurite, 

Par ou ta divine bonte 
A veiller, a prier, sans cesse nous convie ! 
Que ne pouvons-nous point avec un tel secours, 
Qui nous fait regarder tous les jours de la vie 

Comme le dernier de nos jours ! 



478 

Les Cieux instruisent la terre 
A rev6rer leur auteur ; 
Tout ce que leur globe enserre, 
Celebre uq Dieti Createur. 
Quel plus sublime cantique 
Que ce concert magnifique 
De tous les celestes corps ! 
Quelle grandeur infinie ! 
Quelle divine harmonie 
Resulte de leurs accords ! 

REGLES POUR LES STANCES DE NOMBRE IMPAIR. 

Les stances de nombre impair ont toutes trois vers 
sur une meme rime. L'ordonnance des vers y est 
d'aiileurs arbitraire, excepte qu'on ne pent mettre que 
deux rimes semblables de suite, et que le quatrain par 
lequel commencent les stances de sept ou de neuf vers, 
doit etre termine par un repos. 

Stances de cinq vers. 

O rives du Jourdain! 6 ehamps airads des Cieux! 
Sacr6s naonts, fertiles valines, 
Par cent miracles signalees, 
Du doux pays de nos ayeux 
Serons-nous toujours exilees ? 

Pardonne, Dieu puissant, pardonne a ma foiblesse, 
A Paspect des mechans, confus, epouvant£, 
Le trouble m'a saisi, mes pas ont hesite ; 
Mon zele m'a trahi, Seigneur, je le confesse, 
En voyant leur prosperity. 

Stances de sept vers. 

Si la loi du Seigneur vous touche, 
Si le mensonge vous fait peur, 
Si la justice en votre coeur 
Regne aussi bien qu'en votre bouche ; 
Parlez, fils des homrnes, pourquoi 
Faut-il qu'une haine farouche 
> reside aux jugemens que vous lancez sur moi ? 

Stance de neuf vers. 

Quel rempart, quelle autre barriere 
Pourra defendre Pinnocent 
Contre la fraude meurtriere 
De Pimpie adroit et puissant ? 
*a langue aux feintes preparee, 



479 

Ressemble a la fleche aceree 
Qui part et frappe en un moment. 
C'est un feu leger dans Tentree, 
Que suit un long embrasement. 

DU SONNET. 

Boileau feint qu'Apcllon, 

Voulant pousser a. bout tons les rinieurs fran^ois, 
Inventa du Sonnet les rigoureuses lois, 
Voulut qu'en deux quatrains de mesure pareille, 
La rime avec deux sons frappat huit (ois Poreille : 
Et qu'ensuite six vers artistement raDges, 
Fussent en deux tercets par le sens partages. 
Sur-tout de ce poeme il bannit la licence, 
Defendit qcfun vers foible y put jamais entrer, 
Et qu'un mot deja mis osat s v j remontrer. 
Du reste il Teiirichit d'une beaute supreme : 
Un Sonnet sans defaut vaut seul un long Poeme. 

Le Sonnet est compose de quatorze vers d'une me* 
sure egale, et pour Pordinaire de douze syllabes; ces 
vers sont partages en deux, quatrains et un sixain. 

Les rimes masculines et feminines des dtux quatrains 
sont semblables, et on les entremele dans Pun, de la 
meme maniere que dans Pautre. 

Le sixain se coupe en deux tercets, c'est-a-dire, en deux 
stances de trois vers. Ces tercets commencent Pun et 
Pautre par deux rimes semblables, en sorte que le 
troisieme vers du premier rime avec le troisieme du 
second. 

II faut eviter que le melange des rimes, dans les quatre 
derniers vers du sixain, soit le meme que dans les qua- 
trains. 

Le second vers de chaque quatrain doit avoir un 
repos. Les deux quatrains et les deux tercets doivent 
etre termines chacun par un repos encore plus grand. 

D'ailleurs tout doit etre noble dans ce Poeme, pen- 
sees, style, elocution. Point de repetitions, point de 
redondance. La force et Pelevation en sont les princi- 
paux caracteres. 

On voit cependant des Sonnets, dont les sujets ne 
sont pas sublimes ; le style alors en est mediocre, et 
doit Petre. Voici deux exemples du Sonnet. Le pre- 



480 

niier dans le genre simple, exprime la nature meme du 
Sonnet. 

Doris, qui sait qu'aux vers quelquefois je me plais, 
Me demande un Sonnet et je m'en desespere. 
Quatorze vers, grand Dieu, le moyen de les faire ! 
En voila cependant dej& quatre de faits. 
Je ne pouvais d'abord trouver de rime, mais 
En fesant, on apprend & se tirer d'affaire. 
Poursuivons ; les quatrains ne m'etonneront guere, 
Si du premier tercet je puis faire les frais. 
Je commence au hasard, et si je ne m'abuse, 
Je n'ai pas commence sans l'aven de ma Muse, 
Puisqu'en si peu de temps je m'en tire si net. 
J'entame le second, et ma joie est extreme ; 
Car des vers commanded j'acheve le treizi£me. 
Comptez s^ils sont quatorze, et voila le Sonnet. 

AUTRE SONNET. 

Grand Dieu tes jugeraens sont remplis d'equite* : 
Toujours tu prends plaisir & nous etre propice ; 
Mais j'ai tant fait de mal, que jamais ta bonte 
Ne me pardonnera qu'en blessant ta justice. 

Oui, Seigneur, la grandeur de mon impiete 

Ne laisse a ton pouvoir que le cboix du supplice. 

Ton inteVet s'oppose k ma felicity, 

Et ta clemence meme attend que je pe'risse. 

Contente ton desir, puisqu'il t'est glorieux ; 

Offense-toi des pleurs qui coulent de mes yeux 5 

Tonne, frappe, il est temps, rends-moi guerre pour guerre. 

J'adore, en pe>issant, la raison qui faigrit: 
Mais dessus quel endroit tombera ton tonnerre 
Qui ne soit tout couvert du sang de Jesus-Christ. 

DU RONDEAU. 
Le Rondeau ne* Gaulois a la naivete*. 

Tel est le caraclere de ce petit poeme. Toutes sortes 
de vers y sont propres, exeepte les Alexandrins qui ont 
trop de gravite. 11 y entre treize vers de meme mesure, 
sur deux rimes. 

On peut faire dans le Rondeau ce qu'on ne fait point 
dans les autres Poemes. Comme il ne doit y avoir dans 
les huit derniers vers que trois rimes feminities, on peut 
mettre de suite sur trois rimes masculines le cinquieme, 
le sixieme et le septieme. Mais on fait rarement ce 
melange dans les cinq derniers vers. 



481 

Le Rondeau a deux repos necessaires, Pun apres le 
cinquieme vers, Pautre apres le refrain. 

Le refrain qui se place apTes*le huitieme vers, et k la 
fin de la piece, n'est autre chose que la repetition d'un 
ou de plusieurs mots du premier vers. II doit avoir un 
sens lie avec ce qui precede, et etre amene delicate- 
ment. Le premier des deux Rondeaux qui suivent, ex- 
plique ies regies du poeme, 

Jtfafoi, c 1 est fait de moi, car Isabeau 
IVPa conjure de lui faire un Rondeau : 
Celame met en une peine extreme. 
Quoi treize vers, huit en eau, cinq en erne ! 
Je lui ferois aussi-tot un bateau. 
En voila cinq pourtant en un monceau : 
Fesons-en huit en invoquant Brodeau, 
Et puis mettons par quelque stratageme, 

Ma foi, c' est fait. 
Si je pouvois encor de mon cerveau 
Tirer cinq vers, l'ouvrage seroit beau : 
Mais cependant me voila dans l'onzieme, 
£t si je crois que je fais le douzieme : 
En voila treize ajustes an niveau. 

Mafoi) c' est fait. 

AUTRE RONDEAU. 

Le bel esprit, au siecle de Marot, 

Des dons du Ciel passoit pour le gros lot ; 

Des grands seigneurs il donnoit accointance, 

INIenoit par icis a noble jouissance, 

Et qui plus est fesoit bouillir le pot. 

Or est passe ce temps ou d'un bon mot, 

Stance ou dixain, on pavoit son ecot; 

Plus n'en voyons qui prennent pour finance 

Le bel esprit, 
A prix d'argent Tauteur, comme le sot, 
Boit sa chopine et mange son gigot ; 
Heureux encor d 1 en avoir suffisance ! 
Maints ont 1p chef plus rempli que la pause : 
Dame Ignoranc-e a fait enfin capot 

Le bel esprit. 

DE L'EPIGRAMME. 

L'Epigranime plus libre, en son tour plus borne, 
N'est souvent qu'un bon motde deux rimes orne. 

Cette piece ne doit contenir qu'autant de vers qu"il 
en faut pour exprimer vivement la pensee ou le bon mot 
41 



48*2 

qui en est Fame. C'est pourquoi le nombre n'en est 
pas determine, non plus que la mesure et le melange 
des rimes, Exemple : 

Ci-git ma femme : ah ! qu'elle est bien- 
Pour sou repos et pour le mien ! 

Un Magister s'empressant cPetouffer 
Quelque rumeur parmi la populace, 
D'un coup dans Poeil se fit apostropher, 
Dont il tomba, fesant laide grimace. 
Lors un frater s'ecria : place, place ; 
J'ai pour ce mal un baume souverain. 
Perdrai-je Poeil ? lui dit messer Pancrace. 
Non, mon ami, je le tiens dans ma main. 

AUTRE, EPIGRAMME. 

Entre Racine et Paine" des Corneilles 
Les Chrysogons se font mode>ateurs: 
L'un, a leur gre, passe les sept merveilles ; 
L'autre ne plait qu'aux versificateurs. 
Or maintenant, veillez, graves auteurs, 
Mordez vos doigts, ramez comrue corsaires, 
Pour me>iter de pareils protecteurs, 
Ou pour trouver de pareils adversaires. 

DU MADRIGAL. 
Le Madrigal plus simple, et plus noble en son tour, 
Respire la douceur, la tendresse et Pamour. — Boileait. 

Ce petit poeme ne differe que par-la de l'Epigramme, 
dont la pointe est souvent aiguisee par la satyre. 
Exemple : 

L'autre jour Penfant He Cythere, 
Sous une treille a demi gris, 
Disoit, en parlant a sa mere : 
Je bois a toi, ma chere Iris. 
Venus le regarde en colere : 
Maman, calmez votre courroux, 
Si je vous prends pour ma bergere, 
J'ai pris cent fois Iris pour vous. 

NotA. Le Sonnet et le Rondeau ont aujourd'hui perdu touteleur 
vogue, et il est tres-rare que Pon s'exerce dans ces deux genres de 
poesie» 



^W^^fsr^M^^ 



A/nA«A;A 



^,Aft/»,mf a 



ara^^Ai* 



-.., r :: 






'^3^/T^' • 



: : < : - : r ■ 






A'A^ 



^m^AAftM^ 



f^f^rf >■-.-. . 



iAAaAA 






1 a a- A An 



ii#ww 



■ -■ 

AA^AAAftS\A^-AAA^^A . a a m^rv nnnnr 



■ r w 









^W^^n^W^ 



g/^^AAAA^AAAAA^' 



wwws 






*M/v 



i r n 


















'A a AA^,a/>' 









p^rs^r^* 



•■ . ■ " ■• 






LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 117 511 2 



